diff --git a/Demos/AudioInput/AudioInput.aps b/Demos/AudioInput/AudioInput.aps new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..aed850ae393 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/AudioInput/AudioInput.aps @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +AudioInput30-Sep-2008 14:03:0030-Sep-2008 14:03:28241030-Sep-2008 14:03:0044, 14, 0, 589AVR GCCAudioInput.elfC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\AudioInput\falseR00R01R02R03R04R05R06R07R08R09R10R11R12R13R14R15R16R17R18R19R20R21R22R23R24R25R26R27R28R29R30R31000AudioInput.cDescriptors.cAudioInput.hDescriptors.hmakefiledefaultYESmakefileatmega128111AudioInput.elfdefault\1-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enumsdefault1C:\WinAVR-20080512\bin\avr-gcc.exeC:\WinAVR-20080512\utils\bin\make.exeC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\AudioInput\AudioInput.hC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\AudioInput\Descriptors.hC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\AudioInput\AudioInput.cC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\AudioInput\Descriptors.c diff --git a/Demos/AudioInput/AudioInput.c b/Demos/AudioInput/AudioInput.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..f5474b497f2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/AudioInput/AudioInput.c @@ -0,0 +1,231 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the Audio Input demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and + * is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + +/* --- Project Configuration --- */ +//#define MICROPHONE_BIASED_TO_HALF_RAIL +/* --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- */ + +#include "AudioInput.h" + +/* Project Tags, for reading out using the ButtLoad project */ +BUTTLOADTAG(ProjName, "LUFA AudioIn App"); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildTime, __TIME__); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildDate, __DATE__); +BUTTLOADTAG(LUFAVersion, "LUFA V" LUFA_VERSION_STRING); + +/* Scheduler Task List */ +TASK_LIST +{ + { Task: USB_USBTask , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, + { Task: USB_Audio_Task , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, +}; + + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then + * starts the scheduler to run the application tasks. + */ +int main(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable Clock Division */ + SetSystemClockPrescaler(0); + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + LEDs_Init(); + ADC_Init(ADC_FREE_RUNNING | ADC_PRESCALE_32); + ADC_SetupChannel(MIC_IN_ADC_CHANNEL); + + /* Start the ADC conversion in free running mode */ + ADC_StartReading(ADC_REFERENCE_AVCC | ADC_RIGHT_ADJUSTED | MIC_IN_ADC_CHANNEL); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); + + /* Initialize Scheduler so that it can be used */ + Scheduler_Init(); + + /* Initialize USB Subsystem */ + USB_Init(); + + /* Scheduling - routine never returns, so put this last in the main function */ + Scheduler_Start(); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs, and + * configures the sample update and PWM timers. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Connect) +{ + /* Start USB management task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_RUN); + + /* Indicate USB enumerating */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBEnumerating); + + /* Sample reload timer initialization */ + OCR0A = (F_CPU / AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQUENCY); + TCCR0A = (1 << WGM01); // CTC mode + TCCR0B = (1 << CS00); // Fcpu speed +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via + * the status LEDs, disables the sample update and PWM output timers and stops the USB and Audio management tasks. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Disconnect) +{ + /* Stop the sample reload timer */ + TCCR0B = 0; + + /* Stop running audio and USB management tasks */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_Audio_Task, TASK_STOP); + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_STOP); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host set the current configuration + * of the USB device after enumeration - the device endpoints are configured. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_ConfigurationChanged) +{ + /* Setup audio stream endpoint */ + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(AUDIO_STREAM_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_ISOCHRONOUS, + ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, AUDIO_STREAM_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_DOUBLE); + + /* Indicate USB connected and ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event. This is used to catch standard and class specific + * control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the Audio class-specific + * requests) so that they can be handled appropriately for the application. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_UnhandledControlPacket) +{ + /* Process General and Audio specific control requests */ + switch (bRequest) + { + case REQ_SetInterface: + /* Set Interface is not handled by the library, as its function is application-specific */ + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + uint16_t wValue = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(); + + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Check if the host is enabling the audio interface (setting AlternateSetting to 1) */ + if (wValue) + { + /* Start audio task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_Audio_Task, TASK_RUN); + } + else + { + /* Stop audio task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_Audio_Task, TASK_STOP); + } + + /* Handshake the request */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + } +} + +/** Function to manage status updates to the user. This is done via LEDs on the given board, if available, but may be changed to + * log to a serial port, or anything else that is suitable for status updates. + * + * \param CurrentStatus Current status of the system, from the AudioInput_StatusCodes_t enum + */ +void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus) +{ + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS; + + /* Set the LED mask to the appropriate LED mask based on the given status code */ + switch (CurrentStatus) + { + case Status_USBNotReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1); + break; + case Status_USBEnumerating: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2); + break; + case Status_USBReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4); + break; + } + + /* Set the board LEDs to the new LED mask */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); +} + +/** Task to manage the Audio interface, reading in ADC samples from the microphone, and them to the host. */ +TASK(USB_Audio_Task) +{ + /* Select the audio stream endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AUDIO_STREAM_EPNUM); + + /* Check if the current endpoint can be read from (contains a packet) and that the next sample should be stored */ + if (Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed() && (TIFR0 & (1 << OCF0A))) + { + /* Clear the sample reload timer */ + TIFR0 |= (1 << OCF0A); + + /* Audio sample is ADC value scaled to fit the entire range */ + int16_t AudioSample = ((SAMPLE_MAX_RANGE / ADC_MAX_RANGE) * ADC_GetResult()); + +#if defined(MICROPHONE_BIASED_TO_HALF_RAIL) + /* Microphone is biased to half rail voltage, subtract the bias from the sample value */ + AudioSample -= (SAMPLE_MAX_RANGE / 2)); +#endif + + /* Write the sample to the buffer */ + Endpoint_Write_Word_LE(AudioSample); + + /* Check to see if the bank is now full */ + if (!(Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed())) + { + /* Send the full packet to the host */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + } + } +} diff --git a/Demos/AudioInput/AudioInput.h b/Demos/AudioInput/AudioInput.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..97978fdea54 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/AudioInput/AudioInput.h @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for AudioOutput.c. + */ + +#ifndef _AUDIO_OUTPUT_H_ +#define _AUDIO_OUTPUT_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + + #include "Descriptors.h" + + #include // Library Version Information + #include // PROGMEM tags readable by the ButtLoad project + #include // USB Functionality + #include // LEDs driver + #include // ADC driver + #include // Simple scheduler for task management + + /* Macros: */ + /** ADC channel number for the microphone input. */ + #define MIC_IN_ADC_CHANNEL 2 + + /** Maximum ADC sample value for the microphone input. */ + #define SAMPLE_MAX_RANGE 0xFFFF + + /** Maximum ADC range for the microphone input. */ + #define ADC_MAX_RANGE 0x3FF + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible status codes for passing to the UpdateStatus() function. */ + enum AudioInput_StatusCodes_t + { + Status_USBNotReady = 0, /**< USB is not ready (disconnected from a USB host) */ + Status_USBEnumerating = 1, /**< USB interface is enumerating */ + Status_USBReady = 2, /**< USB interface is connected and ready */ + }; + + /* Task Definitions: */ + TASK(USB_Audio_Task); + + /* Event Handlers: */ + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Connect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Connect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Disconnect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Disconnect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_ConfigurationChanged event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_ConfigurationChanged); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_UnhandledControlPacket); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/AudioInput/AudioInput.txt b/Demos/AudioInput/AudioInput.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..09b77f7ec9b --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/AudioInput/AudioInput.txt @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage Audio Input Device Demo + * + * Audio demonstration application. This gives a simple reference + * application for implementing a USB Audio Input device using the + * basic USB Audio drivers in all modern OSes (i.e. no special drivers + * required). + * + * On startup the system will automatically enumerate and function + * as a USB microphone. Incomming audio from the ADC channel 1 will + * be sampled and sent to the host computer. + * + * To use, connect a microphone to the ADC channel 2. + * + * Under Windows, if a driver request dialogue pops up, select the option + * to automatically install the appropriate drivers. + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + *
USB Mode:Device
USB Class:Audio Class
USB Subclass:Standard Audio Device
Relevant Standards:USBIF Audio Class SpecificationUSBIF Audio Class Terminal Types SpecificationUSBIF Audio Data Formats Specification
Usable Speeds:Full Speed Mode
+ */ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Demos/AudioInput/Descriptors.c b/Demos/AudioInput/Descriptors.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..7a3e4288348 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/AudioInput/Descriptors.c @@ -0,0 +1,314 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special + * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine + * the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "Descriptors.h" + +/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall + * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the + * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration + * process begins. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor = +{ + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), Type: DTYPE_Device}, + + USBSpecification: VERSION_BCD(02.00), + Class: 0x00, + SubClass: 0x00, + Protocol: 0x00, + + Endpoint0Size: 8, + + VendorID: 0x03EB, + ProductID: 0x2047, + ReleaseNumber: 0x0000, + + ManufacturerStrIndex: 0x01, + ProductStrIndex: 0x02, + SerialNumStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + NumberOfConfigurations: 1 +}; + +/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage + * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces + * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting + * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor = +{ + Config: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), Type: DTYPE_Configuration}, + + TotalConfigurationSize: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t), + TotalInterfaces: 2, + + ConfigurationNumber: 1, + ConfigurationStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + ConfigAttributes: (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED), + + MaxPowerConsumption: USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100) + }, + + AudioControlInterface: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface}, + + InterfaceNumber: 0, + AlternateSetting: 0, + + TotalEndpoints: 0, + + Class: 0x01, + SubClass: 0x01, + Protocol: 0x00, + + InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + AudioControlInterface_SPC: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_AudioInterface_AC_t), Type: DTYPE_AudioInterface}, + Subtype: DSUBTYPE_Header, + + ACSpecification: VERSION_BCD(01.00), + TotalLength: (sizeof(USB_AudioInterface_AC_t) + + sizeof(USB_AudioInputTerminal_t) + + sizeof(USB_AudioOutputTerminal_t)), + + InCollection: 1, + InterfaceNumbers: {1}, + }, + + InputTerminal: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_AudioInputTerminal_t), Type: DTYPE_AudioInterface}, + Subtype: DSUBTYPE_InputTerminal, + + TerminalID: 0x01, + TerminalType: TERMINAL_IN_MIC, + AssociatedOutputTerminal: 0x00, + + TotalChannels: 1, + ChannelConfig: 0, + + ChannelStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + TerminalStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + OutputTerminal: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_AudioOutputTerminal_t), Type: DTYPE_AudioInterface}, + Subtype: DSUBTYPE_OutputTerminal, + + TerminalID: 0x02, + TerminalType: TERMINAL_STREAMING, + AssociatedInputTerminal: 0x00, + + SourceID: 0x01, + + TerminalStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + AudioStreamInterface_Alt0: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface}, + + InterfaceNumber: 1, + AlternateSetting: 0, + + TotalEndpoints: 0, + + Class: 0x01, + SubClass: 0x02, + Protocol: 0x00, + + InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + AudioStreamInterface_Alt1: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface}, + + InterfaceNumber: 1, + AlternateSetting: 1, + + TotalEndpoints: 1, + + Class: 0x01, + SubClass: 0x02, + Protocol: 0x00, + + InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + AudioStreamInterface_SPC: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_AudioInterface_AS_t), Type: DTYPE_AudioInterface}, + Subtype: DSUBTYPE_General, + + TerminalLink: 0x02, + + FrameDelay: 1, + AudioFormat: 0x0001 + }, + + AudioFormat: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_AudioFormat_t), Type: DTYPE_AudioInterface}, + Subtype: DSUBTYPE_Format, + + FormatType: 0x01, + Channels: 0x01, + + SubFrameSize: 0x02, + BitResolution: 16, + SampleFrequencyType: (sizeof(ConfigurationDescriptor.AudioFormat.SampleFrequencies) / sizeof(AudioSampleFreq_t)), + + SampleFrequencies: {SAMPLE_FREQ(AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQUENCY)} + }, + + AudioEndpoint: + { + Endpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_AudioStreamEndpoint_Std_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | AUDIO_STREAM_EPNUM), + Attributes: (EP_TYPE_ISOCHRONOUS | ENDPOINT_ATTR_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA), + EndpointSize: AUDIO_STREAM_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 1 + }, + + Refresh: 0, + SyncEndpointNumber: 0 + }, + + AudioEndpoint_SPC: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_AudioStreamEndpoint_Spc_t), Type: DTYPE_AudioEndpoint}, + Subtype: DSUBTYPE_General, + + Attributes: 0x00, + + LockDelayUnits: 0x00, + LockDelay: 0x0000 + } +}; + +/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests + * the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate + * via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(1), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG} +}; + +/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable + * form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(11), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"Dean Camera" +}; + +/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form, + * and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(18), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"LUFA Audio In Demo" +}; + +/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see StdDescriptors.h + * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given + * to the USB library. When the device recieves a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function + * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the + * USB host. + */ +uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) +{ + const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8); + const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF); + + void* Address = NULL; + uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR; + + switch (DescriptorType) + { + case DTYPE_Device: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(DeviceDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Configuration: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t); + break; + case DTYPE_String: + switch (DescriptorNumber) + { + case 0x00: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(LanguageString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x01: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ManufacturerString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x02: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ProductString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size); + break; + } + + break; + } + + *DescriptorAddress = Address; + return Size; +} diff --git a/Demos/AudioInput/Descriptors.h b/Demos/AudioInput/Descriptors.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..cc00749808f --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/AudioInput/Descriptors.h @@ -0,0 +1,322 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Descriptors.c. + */ + +#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_ +#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + + #include + + /* Macros: */ + /** Descriptor header constant to indicate a Audio class interface descriptor. */ + #define DTYPE_AudioInterface 0x24 + + /** Descriptor header constant to indicate a Audio class endpoint descriptor. */ + #define DTYPE_AudioEndpoint 0x25 + + /** Audio class descriptor subtype value for a Audio class specific header descriptor. */ + #define DSUBTYPE_Header 0x01 + + /** Audio class descriptor subtype value for an Output Terminal Audio class specific descriptor. */ + #define DSUBTYPE_InputTerminal 0x02 + + /** Audio class descriptor subtype value for an Input Terminal Audio class specific descriptor. */ + #define DSUBTYPE_OutputTerminal 0x03 + + /** Audio class descriptor subtype value for a Feature Unit Audio class specific descriptor. */ + #define DSUBTYPE_FeatureUnit 0x06 + + /** Audio class descriptor subtype value for a general Audio class specific descriptor. */ + #define DSUBTYPE_General 0x01 + + /** Audio class descriptor subtype value for an Audio class specific descriptor indicating the format of an audio stream. */ + #define DSUBTYPE_Format 0x02 + + //@{ + /** Supported channel mask for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */ + + #define CHANNEL_LEFT_FRONT (1 << 0) + #define CHANNEL_RIGHT_FRONT (1 << 1) + #define CHANNEL_CENTER_FRONT (1 << 2) + #define CHANNEL_LOW_FREQ_ENHANCE (1 << 3) + #define CHANNEL_LEFT_SURROUND (1 << 4) + #define CHANNEL_RIGHT_SURROUND (1 << 5) + #define CHANNEL_LEFT_OF_CENTER (1 << 6) + #define CHANNEL_RIGHT_OF_CENTER (1 << 7) + #define CHANNEL_SURROUND (1 << 8) + #define CHANNEL_SIDE_LEFT (1 << 9) + #define CHANNEL_SIDE_RIGHT (1 << 10) + #define CHANNEL_TOP (1 << 11) + //@} + + //@{ + /** Supported feature mask for an Audio class feature unit descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */ + + #define FEATURE_MUTE (1 << 0) + #define FEATURE_VOLUME (1 << 1) + #define FEATURE_BASS (1 << 2) + #define FEATURE_MID (1 << 3) + #define FEATURE_TREBLE (1 << 4) + #define FEATURE_GRAPHIC_EQUALIZER (1 << 5) + #define FEATURE_AUTOMATIC_GAIN (1 << 6) + #define FEATURE_DELAY (1 << 7) + #define FEATURE_BASS_BOOST (1 << 8) + #define FEATURE_BASS_LOUDNESS (1 << 9) + //@} + + //@{ + /** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */ + + #define TERMINAL_UNDEFINED 0x0100 + #define TERMINAL_STREAMING 0x0101 + #define TERMINAL_VENDOR 0x01FF + #define TERMINAL_IN_UNDEFINED 0x0200 + #define TERMINAL_IN_MIC 0x0201 + #define TERMINAL_IN_DESKTOP_MIC 0x0202 + #define TERMINAL_IN_PERSONAL_MIC 0x0203 + #define TERMINAL_IN_OMNIDIR_MIC 0x0204 + #define TERMINAL_IN_MIC_ARRAY 0x0205 + #define TERMINAL_IN_PROCESSING_MIC 0x0206 + #define TERMINAL_IN_OUT_UNDEFINED 0x0300 + #define TERMINAL_OUT_SPEAKER 0x0301 + #define TERMINAL_OUT_HEADPHONES 0x0302 + #define TERMINAL_OUT_HEAD_MOUNTED 0x0303 + #define TERMINAL_OUT_DESKTOP 0x0304 + #define TERMINAL_OUT_ROOM 0x0305 + #define TERMINAL_OUT_COMMUNICATION 0x0306 + #define TERMINAL_OUT_LOWFREQ 0x0307 + //@} + + /** Convenience macro, to fill a 24-bit AudioSampleFreq_t structure with the given sample rate as a 24-bit number. + * + * \param freq Required audio sampling frequency in HZ + */ + #define SAMPLE_FREQ(freq) {LowWord: ((uint32_t)freq & 0x00FFFF), HighByte: (((uint32_t)freq >> 16) & 0x0000FF)} + + /** Mask for the attributes parameter of an Audio class specific Endpoint descriptor, indicating that the endpoint + * accepts only filled endpoint packets of audio samples. + */ + #define EP_ACCEPTS_ONLY_FULL_PACKETS (1 << 7) + + /** Mask for the attributes parameter of an Audio class specific Endpoint descriptor, indicating that the endpoint + * will accept partially filled endpoint packets of audio samples. + */ + #define EP_ACCEPTS_SMALL_PACKETS (0 << 7) + + #if defined(USB_FULL_CONTROLLER) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /** Endpoint number of the Audio isochronous streaming data endpoint. */ + #define AUDIO_STREAM_EPNUM 1 + #else + #define AUDIO_STREAM_EPNUM 3 + #endif + + /** Endpoint size in bytes of the Audio isochronous streaming data endpoint. The Windows audio stack requires + * at least 192 bytes for correct output, thus the smaller 128 byte maximum endpoint size on some of the smaller + * USB AVR models will result in unavoidable distorted output. + */ + #define AUDIO_STREAM_EPSIZE ENDPOINT_MAX_SIZE(AUDIO_STREAM_EPNUM) + + /** Sample frequency of the data being transmitted through the streaming endpoint. */ + #define AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQUENCY 48000 + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for an Audio class specific interface descriptor. This follows a regular interface descriptor to + * supply extra information about the audio device's layout to the host. See the USB Audio specification for more + * details. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */ + uint8_t Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */ + + uint16_t ACSpecification; /**< Binary coded decimal value, indicating the supported Audio Class specification version */ + uint16_t TotalLength; /**< Total length of the Audio class specific descriptors, including this descriptor */ + + uint8_t InCollection; /**< Total number of audio class interfaces within this device */ + uint8_t InterfaceNumbers[1]; /**< Interface numbers of each audio interface */ + } USB_AudioInterface_AC_t; + + /** Type define for an Audio class specific Feature Unit descriptor. This indicates to the host what features + * are present in the device's audio stream for basic control, such as per-channel volume. See the USB Audio + * specification for more details. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */ + uint8_t Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */ + + uint8_t UnitID; /**< ID value of this feature unit - must be a unique value within the device */ + uint8_t SourceID; /**< Source ID value of the audio source input into this feature unit */ + + uint8_t ControlSize; /**< Size of each element in the ChanelControlls array */ + uint8_t ChannelControls[3]; /**< Feature masks for the control channel, and each seperate audio channel */ + + uint8_t FeatureUnitStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this descriptor within the device */ + } USB_AudioFeatureUnit_t; + + /** Type define for an Audio class specific input terminal descriptor. This indicates to the host that the device + * contains an input audio source, either from a physical terminal on the device, or a logical terminal (for example, + * a USB endpoint). See the USB Audio specification for more details. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */ + uint8_t Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */ + + uint8_t TerminalID; /**< ID value of this terminal unit - must be a unique value within the device */ + uint16_t TerminalType; /**< Type of terminal, a TERMINAL_* mask */ + uint8_t AssociatedOutputTerminal; /**< ID of associated output terminal, for physically grouped terminals + * such as the speaker and microphone of a phone handset + */ + uint8_t TotalChannels; /**< Total number of seperate audio channels within this interface (right, left, etc.) */ + uint16_t ChannelConfig; /**< CHANNEL_* masks indicating what channel layout is supported by this terminal */ + + uint8_t ChannelStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this channel within the device */ + uint8_t TerminalStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this descriptor within the device */ + } USB_AudioInputTerminal_t; + + /** Type define for an Audio class specific output terminal descriptor. This indicates to the host that the device + * contains an output audio sink, either to a physical terminal on the device, or a logical terminal (for example, + * a USB endpoint). See the USB Audio specification for more details. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */ + uint8_t Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */ + + uint8_t TerminalID; /**< ID value of this terminal unit - must be a unique value within the device */ + uint16_t TerminalType; /**< Type of terminal, a TERMINAL_* mask */ + uint8_t AssociatedInputTerminal; /**< ID of associated input terminal, for physically grouped terminals + * such as the speaker and microphone of a phone handset + */ + uint8_t SourceID; /**< ID value of the unit this terminal's audio is sourced from */ + + uint8_t TerminalStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this descriptor within the device */ + } USB_AudioOutputTerminal_t; + + /** Type define for an Audio class specific streaming interface descriptor. This indicates to the host + * how audio streams within the device are formatted. See the USB Audio specification for more details. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */ + uint8_t Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */ + + uint8_t TerminalLink; /**< ID value of the output terminal this descriptor is describing */ + + uint8_t FrameDelay; /**< Delay in frames resulting from the complete sample processing from input to output */ + uint16_t AudioFormat; /**< Format of the audio stream, see Audio Device Formats specification */ + } USB_AudioInterface_AS_t; + + /** Type define for a 24bit audio sample frequency structure. GCC does not contain a built in 24bit datatype, + * this this structure is used to build up the value instead. Fill this structure with the SAMPLE_FREQ() macro. + */ + typedef struct + { + uint16_t LowWord; /**< Low 16 bits of the 24-bit value */ + uint8_t HighByte; /**< Upper 8 bits of the 24-bit value */ + } AudioSampleFreq_t; + + /** Type define for an Audio class specific audio format descriptor. This is used to give the host full details + * about the number of channels, the sample resolution, acceptable sample frequencies and encoding method used + * in the device's audio streams. See the USB Audio specification for more details. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */ + uint8_t Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */ + + uint8_t FormatType; /**< Format of the audio stream, see Audio Device Formats specification */ + uint8_t Channels; /**< Total number of discrete channels in the stream */ + + uint8_t SubFrameSize; /**< Size in bytes of each channel's sample data in the stream */ + uint8_t BitResolution; /**< Bits of resolution of each channel's samples in the stream */ + + uint8_t SampleFrequencyType; /**< Total number of sample frequencies supported by the device */ + AudioSampleFreq_t SampleFrequencies[1]; /**< Sample frequencies supported by the device */ + } USB_AudioFormat_t; + + /** Type define for an Audio class specific endpoint descriptor. This contains a regular endpoint + * descriptor with a few Audio-class specific extensions. See the USB Audio specification for more details. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t Endpoint; /**< Standard endpoint descriptor describing the audio endpoint */ + + uint8_t Refresh; /**< Always set to zero */ + uint8_t SyncEndpointNumber; /**< Endpoint address to send synchronisation information to, if needed (zero otherwise) */ + } USB_AudioStreamEndpoint_Std_t; + + /** Type define for an Audio class specific extended endpoint descriptor. This contains extra information + * on the usage of endpoints used to stream audio in and out of the USB Audio device, and follows an Audio + * class specific extended endpoint descriptor. See the USB Audio specification for more details. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */ + uint8_t Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */ + + uint8_t Attributes; /**< Audio class specific endpoint attributes, such as ACCEPTS_SMALL_PACKETS */ + + uint8_t LockDelayUnits; /**< Units used for the LockDelay field, see Audio class specification */ + uint16_t LockDelay; /**< Time required to internally lock endpoint's internal clock recovery circuitry */ + } USB_AudioStreamEndpoint_Spc_t; + + /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the + * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which + * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config; + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t AudioControlInterface; + USB_AudioInterface_AC_t AudioControlInterface_SPC; + USB_AudioInputTerminal_t InputTerminal; + USB_AudioOutputTerminal_t OutputTerminal; + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t AudioStreamInterface_Alt0; + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t AudioStreamInterface_Alt1; + USB_AudioInterface_AS_t AudioStreamInterface_SPC; + USB_AudioFormat_t AudioFormat; + USB_AudioStreamEndpoint_Std_t AudioEndpoint; + USB_AudioStreamEndpoint_Spc_t AudioEndpoint_SPC; + } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) + ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/AudioInput/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/AudioInput/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..f84efb7ba3c --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/AudioInput/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Audio Input Device Demo" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek, +# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish, +# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene, +# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command , where is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command , where +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Namespace. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file . + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are +# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values +# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list; +# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which +# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous +# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE +# respectively. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin" + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to the search engine +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be +# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO diff --git a/Demos/AudioInput/makefile b/Demos/AudioInput/makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..5906650f5f1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/AudioInput/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,702 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# Denver Gingerich +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb1287 + + +# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# Typical values are: +# F_CPU = 1000000 +# F_CPU = 1843200 +# F_CPU = 2000000 +# F_CPU = 3686400 +# F_CPU = 4000000 +# F_CPU = 7372800 +# F_CPU = 8000000 +# F_CPU = 11059200 +# F_CPU = 14745600 +# F_CPU = 16000000 +# F_CPU = 18432000 +# F_CPU = 20000000 +F_CPU = 8000000 + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = AudioInput + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + Descriptors.c \ + ../../LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.c \ + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = ../../ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS +CDEFS += -DUSB_DEVICE_ONLY -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)" + + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20 +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd +# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500 +# +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf +MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) ) +FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr ) + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +checkhooks: build + @echo + @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events ------- + @$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \ + cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \ + echo "(None)" + @echo ----- End Unhooked LUFA Events ----- + +checklibmode: + @echo + @echo ----------- Library Mode ----------- + @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \ + | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \ + || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)." + @echo ------------------------------------ + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + copy $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom --debug 1 $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end + +clean_binary: + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + +clean_list: + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode begin \ +finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \ +clean clean_list clean_binary program debug \ +gdb-config doxygen dfu flip diff --git a/Demos/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.aps b/Demos/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.aps new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..a01ba8f1ab1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.aps @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +AudioOutput30-Sep-2008 14:03:5130-Sep-2008 14:04:06241030-Sep-2008 14:03:5144, 14, 0, 589AVR GCCC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\AudioOutput\falseR00R01R02R03R04R05R06R07R08R09R10R11R12R13R14R15R16R17R18R19R20R21R22R23R24R25R26R27R28R29R30R31000AudioOutput.cDescriptors.cAudioOutput.hDescriptors.hmakefiledefaultYESmakefileatmega128111AudioOutput.elfdefault\1-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enumsdefault1C:\WinAVR-20080512\bin\avr-gcc.exeC:\WinAVR-20080512\utils\bin\make.exe diff --git a/Demos/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.c b/Demos/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..184910e81a3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.c @@ -0,0 +1,305 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the Audio Output demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and + * is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + +/* --- Project Configuration (Choose ONE) --- */ +//#define AUDIO_OUT_MONO +#define AUDIO_OUT_STEREO +//#define AUDIO_OUT_LEDS +//#define AUDIO_OUT_PORTC +/* --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- */ + +#include "AudioOutput.h" + +/* Project Tags, for reading out using the ButtLoad project */ +BUTTLOADTAG(ProjName, "LUFA AudioOut App"); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildTime, __TIME__); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildDate, __DATE__); +BUTTLOADTAG(LUFAVersion, "LUFA V" LUFA_VERSION_STRING); + +/* Scheduler Task List */ +TASK_LIST +{ + { Task: USB_USBTask , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, + { Task: USB_Audio_Task , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, +}; + + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then + * starts the scheduler to run the application tasks. + */ +int main(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable Clock Division */ + SetSystemClockPrescaler(0); + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + LEDs_Init(); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); + + /* Initialize Scheduler so that it can be used */ + Scheduler_Init(); + + /* Initialize USB Subsystem */ + USB_Init(); + + /* Scheduling - routine never returns, so put this last in the main function */ + Scheduler_Start(); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs, and + * configures the sample update and PWM timers. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Connect) +{ + /* Start USB management task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_RUN); + + /* Indicate USB enumerating */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBEnumerating); + + /* Sample reload timer initialization */ + OCR0A = (F_CPU / AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQUENCY); + TCCR0A = (1 << WGM01); // CTC mode + TCCR0B = (1 << CS00); // Fcpu speed + +#if defined(AUDIO_OUT_MONO) + /* Set speaker as output */ + DDRC |= (1 << 6); +#elif defined(AUDIO_OUT_STEREO) + /* Set speakers as outputs */ + DDRC |= ((1 << 6) | (1 << 5)); +#elif defined(AUDIO_OUT_PORTC) + /* Set PORTC as outputs */ + DDRC |= 0xFF; +#endif + +#if (defined(AUDIO_OUT_MONO) || defined(AUDIO_OUT_STEREO)) + /* PWM speaker timer initialization */ + TCCRxA = ((1 << WGMx0) | (1 << COMxA1) | (1 << COMxA0) + | (1 << COMxB1) | (1 << COMxB0)); // Set on match, clear on TOP + TCCRxB = ((1 << WGMx2) | (1 << CSx0)); // Fast 8-Bit PWM, Fcpu speed +#endif +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via + * the status LEDs, disables the sample update and PWM output timers and stops the USB and Audio management tasks. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Disconnect) +{ + /* Stop the timers */ + TCCR0B = 0; +#if (defined(AUDIO_OUT_MONO) || defined(AUDIO_OUT_STEREO)) + TCCRxB = 0; +#endif + +#if defined(AUDIO_OUT_MONO) + /* Set speaker as input to reduce current draw */ + DDRC &= ~(1 << 6); +#elif defined(AUDIO_OUT_STEREO) + /* Set speakers as inputs to reduce current draw */ + DDRC &= ~((1 << 6) | (1 << 5)); +#elif defined(AUDIO_OUT_PORTC) + /* Set PORTC low */ + PORTC = 0x00; +#endif + + /* Stop running audio and USB management tasks */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_Audio_Task, TASK_STOP); + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_STOP); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host set the current configuration + * of the USB device after enumeration - the device endpoints are configured. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_ConfigurationChanged) +{ + /* Setup audio stream endpoint */ + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(AUDIO_STREAM_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_ISOCHRONOUS, + ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, AUDIO_STREAM_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_DOUBLE); + + /* Indicate USB connected and ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event. This is used to catch standard and class specific + * control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the Audio class-specific + * requests) so that they can be handled appropriately for the application. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_UnhandledControlPacket) +{ + /* Process General and Audio specific control requests */ + switch (bRequest) + { + case REQ_SetInterface: + /* Set Interface is not handled by the library, as its function is application-specific */ + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + uint16_t wValue = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(); + + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Check if the host is enabling the audio interface (setting AlternateSetting to 1) */ + if (wValue) + { + /* Start audio task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_Audio_Task, TASK_RUN); + } + else + { + /* Stop audio task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_Audio_Task, TASK_STOP); + } + + /* Handshake the request */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + } +} + +/** Function to manage status updates to the user. This is done via LEDs on the given board, if available, but may be changed to + * log to a serial port, or anything else that is suitable for status updates. + * + * \param CurrentStatus Current status of the system, from the AudioOutput_StatusCodes_t enum + */ +void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus) +{ + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS; + + /* Set the LED mask to the appropriate LED mask based on the given status code */ + switch (CurrentStatus) + { + case Status_USBNotReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1); + break; + case Status_USBEnumerating: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2); + break; + case Status_USBReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4); + break; + } + + /* Set the board LEDs to the new LED mask */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); +} + +/** Task to manage the Audio interface, reading in audio samples from the host, and outputting them to the speakers/LEDs as + * desired. + */ +TASK(USB_Audio_Task) +{ + /* Select the audio stream endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AUDIO_STREAM_EPNUM); + + /* Check if the current endpoint can be read from (contains a packet) and that the next sample should be read */ + if (Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed() && (TIFR0 & (1 << OCF0A))) + { + /* Clear the sample reload timer */ + TIFR0 |= (1 << OCF0A); + + /* Retreive the signed 16-bit left and right audio samples */ + int16_t LeftSample_16Bit = (int16_t)Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(); + int16_t RightSample_16Bit = (int16_t)Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(); + + /* Check to see if the bank is now empty */ + if (!(Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed())) + { + /* Acknowedge the packet, clear the bank ready for the next packet */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + } + + /* Massage signed 16-bit left and right audio samples into signed 8-bit */ + int8_t LeftSample_8Bit = (LeftSample_16Bit >> 8); + int8_t RightSample_8Bit = (RightSample_16Bit >> 8); + +#if defined(AUDIO_OUT_MONO) + /* Mix the two channels together to produce a mono, 8-bit sample */ + int8_t MixedSample_8Bit = (((int16_t)LeftSample_8Bit + (int16_t)RightSample_8Bit) >> 1); + + /* Load the sample into the PWM timer channel */ + OCRxA = ((uint8_t)MixedSample_8Bit ^ (1 << 7)); +#elif defined(AUDIO_OUT_STEREO) + /* Load the dual 8-bit samples into the PWM timer channels */ + OCRxA = ((uint8_t)LeftSample_8Bit ^ (1 << 7)); + OCRxB = ((uint8_t)RightSample_8Bit ^ (1 << 7)); +#elif defined(AUDIO_OUT_PORTC) + /* Mix the two channels together to produce a mono, 8-bit sample */ + int8_t MixedSample_8Bit = (((int16_t)LeftSample_8Bit + (int16_t)RightSample_8Bit) >> 1); + + PORTC = MixedSample_8Bit; +#else + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS; + + /* Make left channel positive (absolute) */ + if (LeftSample_8Bit < 0) + LeftSample_8Bit = -LeftSample_8Bit; + + /* Make right channel positive (absolute) */ + if (RightSample_8Bit < 0) + RightSample_8Bit = -RightSample_8Bit; + + /* Set first LED based on sample value */ + if (LeftSample_8Bit < ((128 / 8) * 1)) + LEDMask |= LEDS_LED2; + else if (LeftSample_8Bit < ((128 / 8) * 3)) + LEDMask |= (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2); + else + LEDMask |= LEDS_LED1; + + /* Set second LED based on sample value */ + if (RightSample_8Bit < ((128 / 8) * 1)) + LEDMask |= LEDS_LED4; + else if (RightSample_8Bit < ((128 / 8) * 3)) + LEDMask |= (LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4); + else + LEDMask |= LEDS_LED3; + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); +#endif + } +} diff --git a/Demos/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.h b/Demos/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..3b9923179b2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.h @@ -0,0 +1,127 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for AudioOutput.c. + */ + +#ifndef _AUDIO_OUTPUT_H_ +#define _AUDIO_OUTPUT_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + + #include "Descriptors.h" + + #include // Library Version Information + #include // PROGMEM tags readable by the ButtLoad project + #include // USB Functionality + #include // LEDs driver + #include // Simple scheduler for task management + + /* Macros: */ + #if defined(USB_FULL_CONTROLLER) || defined(USB_MODIFIED_FULL_CONTROLLER) + #define TCCRxA TCCR3A + #define TCCRxB TCCR3B + #define OCRxA OCR3A + #define OCRxB OCR3B + #define WGMx0 WGM30 + #define WGMx2 WGM32 + #define COMxA1 COM3A1 + #define COMxA0 COM3A0 + #define COMxB1 COM3B1 + #define COMxB0 COM3B0 + #define CSx0 CS30 + #else + /** Timer count register used for left channel PWM audio output (or mixed output in mono output mode) */ + #define TCCRxA TCCR1A + + /** Timer count register used for right channel PWM audio output */ + #define TCCRxB TCCR1B + + /** Timer compare register used for left channel PWM audio output (or mixed output in mono output mode) */ + #define OCRxA OCR1A + + /** Timer compare register used for right channel PWM audio output */ + #define OCRxB OCR1B + + /** Timer control register mask used to select PWM mode */ + #define WGMx0 WGM10 + + /** Timer control register mask used to select PWM mode */ + #define WGMx2 WGM12 + + /** Timer control register mask used to set, clear or toggle channel output pin on match */ + #define COMxA1 COM1A1 + + /** Timer control register mask used to set, clear or toggle channel output pin on match */ + #define COMxA0 COM1A0 + + /** Timer control register mask used to set, clear or toggle channel output pin on match */ + #define COMxB1 COM1B1 + + /** Timer control register mask used to set, clear or toggle channel output pin on match */ + #define COMxB0 COM1B0 + + /** Timer control register mask used to start the timer at Fcpu clock rate */ + #define CSx0 CS10 + #endif + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible status codes for passing to the UpdateStatus() function. */ + enum AudioOutput_StatusCodes_t + { + Status_USBNotReady = 0, /**< USB is not ready (disconnected from a USB host) */ + Status_USBEnumerating = 1, /**< USB interface is enumerating */ + Status_USBReady = 2, /**< USB interface is connected and ready */ + }; + + /* Task Definitions: */ + TASK(USB_Audio_Task); + + /* Event Handlers: */ + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Connect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Connect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Disconnect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Disconnect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_ConfigurationChanged event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_ConfigurationChanged); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_UnhandledControlPacket); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.txt b/Demos/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..ce7d4ed9432 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.txt @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage Audio Output Device Demo + * + * Audio demonstration application. This gives a simple reference + * application for implementing a USB Audio Output device using the + * basic USB Audio drivers in all modern OSes (i.e. no special drivers + * required). + * + * On startup the system will automatically enumerate and function + * as a USB speaker. Incomming audio will output in 8-bit PWM onto + * the timer output (timer 3 for the AT90USBXXX6/7 USB AVRs, timer 1 for + * the AT90USBXXX2 controller AVRs) compare channel A for AUDIO_OUT_MONO + * mode, on channels A and B for AUDIO_OUT_STEREO and on the board LEDs + * for AUDIO_OUT_LEDS mode. Decouple audio outputs with a capacitor and + * attach to a speaker to hear the audio. + * + * Under Windows, if a driver request dialogue pops up, select the option + * to automatically install the appropriate drivers. + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + *
USB Mode:Device
USB Class:Audio Class
USB Subclass:Standard Audio Device
Relevant Standards:USBIF Audio Class SpecificationUSBIF Audio Class Terminal Types SpecificationUSBIF Audio Data Formats Specification
Usable Speeds:Full Speed Mode
+ */ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Demos/AudioOutput/Descriptors.c b/Demos/AudioOutput/Descriptors.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..169e534ba6d --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/AudioOutput/Descriptors.c @@ -0,0 +1,314 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special + * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine + * the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "Descriptors.h" + +/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall + * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the + * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration + * process begins. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor = +{ + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), Type: DTYPE_Device}, + + USBSpecification: VERSION_BCD(02.00), + Class: 0x00, + SubClass: 0x00, + Protocol: 0x00, + + Endpoint0Size: 8, + + VendorID: 0x03EB, + ProductID: 0x2046, + ReleaseNumber: 0x0000, + + ManufacturerStrIndex: 0x01, + ProductStrIndex: 0x02, + SerialNumStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + NumberOfConfigurations: 1 +}; + +/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage + * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces + * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting + * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor = +{ + Config: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), Type: DTYPE_Configuration}, + + TotalConfigurationSize: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t), + TotalInterfaces: 2, + + ConfigurationNumber: 1, + ConfigurationStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + ConfigAttributes: (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED), + + MaxPowerConsumption: USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100) + }, + + AudioControlInterface: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface}, + + InterfaceNumber: 0, + AlternateSetting: 0, + + TotalEndpoints: 0, + + Class: 0x01, + SubClass: 0x01, + Protocol: 0x00, + + InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + AudioControlInterface_SPC: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_AudioInterface_AC_t), Type: DTYPE_AudioInterface}, + Subtype: DSUBTYPE_Header, + + ACSpecification: VERSION_BCD(01.00), + TotalLength: (sizeof(USB_AudioInterface_AC_t) + + sizeof(USB_AudioInputTerminal_t) + + sizeof(USB_AudioOutputTerminal_t)), + + InCollection: 1, + InterfaceNumbers: {1}, + }, + + InputTerminal: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_AudioInputTerminal_t), Type: DTYPE_AudioInterface}, + Subtype: DSUBTYPE_InputTerminal, + + TerminalID: 0x01, + TerminalType: TERMINAL_STREAMING, + AssociatedOutputTerminal: 0x00, + + TotalChannels: 2, + ChannelConfig: (CHANNEL_LEFT_FRONT | CHANNEL_RIGHT_FRONT), + + ChannelStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + TerminalStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + OutputTerminal: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_AudioOutputTerminal_t), Type: DTYPE_AudioInterface}, + Subtype: DSUBTYPE_OutputTerminal, + + TerminalID: 0x02, + TerminalType: TERMINAL_OUT_SPEAKER, + AssociatedInputTerminal: 0x00, + + SourceID: 0x01, + + TerminalStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + AudioStreamInterface_Alt0: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface}, + + InterfaceNumber: 1, + AlternateSetting: 0, + + TotalEndpoints: 0, + + Class: 0x01, + SubClass: 0x02, + Protocol: 0x00, + + InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + AudioStreamInterface_Alt1: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface}, + + InterfaceNumber: 1, + AlternateSetting: 1, + + TotalEndpoints: 1, + + Class: 0x01, + SubClass: 0x02, + Protocol: 0x00, + + InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + AudioStreamInterface_SPC: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_AudioInterface_AS_t), Type: DTYPE_AudioInterface}, + Subtype: DSUBTYPE_General, + + TerminalLink: 0x01, + + FrameDelay: 1, + AudioFormat: 0x0001 + }, + + AudioFormat: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_AudioFormat_t), Type: DTYPE_AudioInterface}, + Subtype: DSUBTYPE_Format, + + FormatType: 0x01, + Channels: 0x02, + + SubFrameSize: 0x02, + BitResolution: 16, + + SampleFrequencyType: (sizeof(ConfigurationDescriptor.AudioFormat.SampleFrequencies) / sizeof(AudioSampleFreq_t)), + SampleFrequencies: {SAMPLE_FREQ(AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQUENCY)} + }, + + AudioEndpoint: + { + Endpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_AudioStreamEndpoint_Std_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | AUDIO_STREAM_EPNUM), + Attributes: (EP_TYPE_ISOCHRONOUS | ENDPOINT_ATTR_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA), + EndpointSize: AUDIO_STREAM_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 1 + }, + + Refresh: 0, + SyncEndpointNumber: 0 + }, + + AudioEndpoint_SPC: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_AudioStreamEndpoint_Spc_t), Type: DTYPE_AudioEndpoint}, + Subtype: DSUBTYPE_General, + + Attributes: EP_ACCEPTS_SMALL_PACKETS, + + LockDelayUnits: 0x00, + LockDelay: 0x0000 + } +}; + +/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests + * the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate + * via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(1), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG} +}; + +/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable + * form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(11), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"Dean Camera" +}; + +/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form, + * and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(19), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"LUFA Audio Out Demo" +}; + +/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see StdDescriptors.h + * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given + * to the USB library. When the device recieves a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function + * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the + * USB host. + */ +uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) +{ + const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8); + const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF); + + void* Address = NULL; + uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR; + + switch (DescriptorType) + { + case DTYPE_Device: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(DeviceDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Configuration: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t); + break; + case DTYPE_String: + switch (DescriptorNumber) + { + case 0x00: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(LanguageString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x01: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ManufacturerString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x02: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ProductString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size); + break; + } + + break; + } + + *DescriptorAddress = Address; + return Size; +} diff --git a/Demos/AudioOutput/Descriptors.h b/Demos/AudioOutput/Descriptors.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..99f10d64880 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/AudioOutput/Descriptors.h @@ -0,0 +1,322 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Descriptors.c. + */ + +#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_ +#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + + #include + + /* Macros: */ + /** Descriptor header constant to indicate a Audio class interface descriptor. */ + #define DTYPE_AudioInterface 0x24 + + /** Descriptor header constant to indicate a Audio class endpoint descriptor. */ + #define DTYPE_AudioEndpoint 0x25 + + /** Audio class descriptor subtype value for a Audio class specific header descriptor. */ + #define DSUBTYPE_Header 0x01 + + /** Audio class descriptor subtype value for an Output Terminal Audio class specific descriptor. */ + #define DSUBTYPE_InputTerminal 0x02 + + /** Audio class descriptor subtype value for an Input Terminal Audio class specific descriptor. */ + #define DSUBTYPE_OutputTerminal 0x03 + + /** Audio class descriptor subtype value for a Feature Unit Audio class specific descriptor. */ + #define DSUBTYPE_FeatureUnit 0x06 + + /** Audio class descriptor subtype value for a general Audio class specific descriptor. */ + #define DSUBTYPE_General 0x01 + + /** Audio class descriptor subtype value for an Audio class specific descriptor indicating the format of an audio stream. */ + #define DSUBTYPE_Format 0x02 + + //@{ + /** Supported channel mask for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */ + + #define CHANNEL_LEFT_FRONT (1 << 0) + #define CHANNEL_RIGHT_FRONT (1 << 1) + #define CHANNEL_CENTER_FRONT (1 << 2) + #define CHANNEL_LOW_FREQ_ENHANCE (1 << 3) + #define CHANNEL_LEFT_SURROUND (1 << 4) + #define CHANNEL_RIGHT_SURROUND (1 << 5) + #define CHANNEL_LEFT_OF_CENTER (1 << 6) + #define CHANNEL_RIGHT_OF_CENTER (1 << 7) + #define CHANNEL_SURROUND (1 << 8) + #define CHANNEL_SIDE_LEFT (1 << 9) + #define CHANNEL_SIDE_RIGHT (1 << 10) + #define CHANNEL_TOP (1 << 11) + //@} + + //@{ + /** Supported feature mask for an Audio class feature unit descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */ + + #define FEATURE_MUTE (1 << 0) + #define FEATURE_VOLUME (1 << 1) + #define FEATURE_BASS (1 << 2) + #define FEATURE_MID (1 << 3) + #define FEATURE_TREBLE (1 << 4) + #define FEATURE_GRAPHIC_EQUALIZER (1 << 5) + #define FEATURE_AUTOMATIC_GAIN (1 << 6) + #define FEATURE_DELAY (1 << 7) + #define FEATURE_BASS_BOOST (1 << 8) + #define FEATURE_BASS_LOUDNESS (1 << 9) + //@} + + //@{ + /** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */ + + #define TERMINAL_UNDEFINED 0x0100 + #define TERMINAL_STREAMING 0x0101 + #define TERMINAL_VENDOR 0x01FF + #define TERMINAL_IN_UNDEFINED 0x0200 + #define TERMINAL_IN_MIC 0x0201 + #define TERMINAL_IN_DESKTOP_MIC 0x0202 + #define TERMINAL_IN_PERSONAL_MIC 0x0203 + #define TERMINAL_IN_OMNIDIR_MIC 0x0204 + #define TERMINAL_IN_MIC_ARRAY 0x0205 + #define TERMINAL_IN_PROCESSING_MIC 0x0206 + #define TERMINAL_IN_OUT_UNDEFINED 0x0300 + #define TERMINAL_OUT_SPEAKER 0x0301 + #define TERMINAL_OUT_HEADPHONES 0x0302 + #define TERMINAL_OUT_HEAD_MOUNTED 0x0303 + #define TERMINAL_OUT_DESKTOP 0x0304 + #define TERMINAL_OUT_ROOM 0x0305 + #define TERMINAL_OUT_COMMUNICATION 0x0306 + #define TERMINAL_OUT_LOWFREQ 0x0307 + //@} + + /** Convenience macro, to fill a 24-bit AudioSampleFreq_t structure with the given sample rate as a 24-bit number. + * + * \param freq Required audio sampling frequency in HZ + */ + #define SAMPLE_FREQ(freq) {LowWord: ((uint32_t)freq & 0x00FFFF), HighByte: (((uint32_t)freq >> 16) & 0x0000FF)} + + /** Mask for the attributes parameter of an Audio class specific Endpoint descriptor, indicating that the endpoint + * accepts only filled endpoint packets of audio samples. + */ + #define EP_ACCEPTS_ONLY_FULL_PACKETS (1 << 7) + + /** Mask for the attributes parameter of an Audio class specific Endpoint descriptor, indicating that the endpoint + * will accept partially filled endpoint packets of audio samples. + */ + #define EP_ACCEPTS_SMALL_PACKETS (0 << 7) + + #if defined(USB_FULL_CONTROLLER) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /** Endpoint number of the Audio isochronous streaming data endpoint. */ + #define AUDIO_STREAM_EPNUM 1 + #else + #define AUDIO_STREAM_EPNUM 3 + #endif + + /** Endpoint size in bytes of the Audio isochronous streaming data endpoint. The Windows audio stack requires + * at least 192 bytes for correct output, thus the smaller 128 byte maximum endpoint size on some of the smaller + * USB AVR models will result in unavoidable distorted output. + */ + #define AUDIO_STREAM_EPSIZE ENDPOINT_MAX_SIZE(AUDIO_STREAM_EPNUM) + + /** Sample frequency of the data being transmitted through the streaming endpoint. */ + #define AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQUENCY 48000 + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for an Audio class specific interface descriptor. This follows a regular interface descriptor to + * supply extra information about the audio device's layout to the host. See the USB Audio specification for more + * details. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */ + uint8_t Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */ + + uint16_t ACSpecification; /**< Binary coded decimal value, indicating the supported Audio Class specification version */ + uint16_t TotalLength; /**< Total length of the Audio class specific descriptors, including this descriptor */ + + uint8_t InCollection; /**< Total number of audio class interfaces within this device */ + uint8_t InterfaceNumbers[1]; /**< Interface numbers of each audio interface */ + } USB_AudioInterface_AC_t; + + /** Type define for an Audio class specific Feature Unit descriptor. This indicates to the host what features + * are present in the device's audio stream for basic control, such as per-channel volume. See the USB Audio + * specification for more details. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */ + uint8_t Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */ + + uint8_t UnitID; /**< ID value of this feature unit - must be a unique value within the device */ + uint8_t SourceID; /**< Source ID value of the audio source input into this feature unit */ + + uint8_t ControlSize; /**< Size of each element in the ChanelControlls array */ + uint8_t ChannelControls[3]; /**< Feature masks for the control channel, and each seperate audio channel */ + + uint8_t FeatureUnitStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this descriptor within the device */ + } USB_AudioFeatureUnit_t; + + /** Type define for an Audio class specific input terminal descriptor. This indicates to the host that the device + * contains an input audio source, either from a physical terminal on the device, or a logical terminal (for example, + * a USB endpoint). See the USB Audio specification for more details. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */ + uint8_t Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */ + + uint8_t TerminalID; /**< ID value of this terminal unit - must be a unique value within the device */ + uint16_t TerminalType; /**< Type of terminal, a TERMINAL_* mask */ + uint8_t AssociatedOutputTerminal; /**< ID of associated output terminal, for physically grouped terminals + * such as the speaker and microphone of a phone handset + */ + uint8_t TotalChannels; /**< Total number of seperate audio channels within this interface (right, left, etc.) */ + uint16_t ChannelConfig; /**< CHANNEL_* masks indicating what channel layout is supported by this terminal */ + + uint8_t ChannelStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this channel within the device */ + uint8_t TerminalStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this descriptor within the device */ + } USB_AudioInputTerminal_t; + + /** Type define for an Audio class specific output terminal descriptor. This indicates to the host that the device + * contains an output audio sink, either to a physical terminal on the device, or a logical terminal (for example, + * a USB endpoint). See the USB Audio specification for more details. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */ + uint8_t Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */ + + uint8_t TerminalID; /**< ID value of this terminal unit - must be a unique value within the device */ + uint16_t TerminalType; /**< Type of terminal, a TERMINAL_* mask */ + uint8_t AssociatedInputTerminal; /**< ID of associated input terminal, for physically grouped terminals + * such as the speaker and microphone of a phone handset + */ + uint8_t SourceID; /**< ID value of the unit this terminal's audio is sourced from */ + + uint8_t TerminalStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this descriptor within the device */ + } USB_AudioOutputTerminal_t; + + /** Type define for an Audio class specific streaming interface descriptor. This indicates to the host + * how audio streams within the device are formatted. See the USB Audio specification for more details. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */ + uint8_t Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */ + + uint8_t TerminalLink; /**< ID value of the output terminal this descriptor is describing */ + + uint8_t FrameDelay; /**< Delay in frames resulting from the complete sample processing from input to output */ + uint16_t AudioFormat; /**< Format of the audio stream, see Audio Device Formats specification */ + } USB_AudioInterface_AS_t; + + /** Type define for a 24bit audio sample frequency structure. GCC does not contain a built in 24bit datatype, + * this this structure is used to build up the value instead. Fill this structure with the SAMPLE_FREQ() macro. + */ + typedef struct + { + uint16_t LowWord; /**< Low 16 bits of the 24-bit value */ + uint8_t HighByte; /**< Upper 8 bits of the 24-bit value */ + } AudioSampleFreq_t; + + /** Type define for an Audio class specific audio format descriptor. This is used to give the host full details + * about the number of channels, the sample resolution, acceptable sample frequencies and encoding method used + * in the device's audio streams. See the USB Audio specification for more details. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */ + uint8_t Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */ + + uint8_t FormatType; /**< Format of the audio stream, see Audio Device Formats specification */ + uint8_t Channels; /**< Total number of discrete channels in the stream */ + + uint8_t SubFrameSize; /**< Size in bytes of each channel's sample data in the stream */ + uint8_t BitResolution; /**< Bits of resolution of each channel's samples in the stream */ + + uint8_t SampleFrequencyType; /**< Total number of sample frequencies supported by the device */ + AudioSampleFreq_t SampleFrequencies[1]; /**< Sample frequencies supported by the device */ + } USB_AudioFormat_t; + + /** Type define for an Audio class specific endpoint descriptor. This contains a regular endpoint + * descriptor with a few Audio-class specific extensions. See the USB Audio specification for more details. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t Endpoint; /**< Standard endpoint descriptor describing the audio endpoint */ + + uint8_t Refresh; /**< Always set to zero */ + uint8_t SyncEndpointNumber; /**< Endpoint address to send synchronisation information to, if needed (zero otherwise) */ + } USB_AudioStreamEndpoint_Std_t; + + /** Type define for an Audio class specific extended endpoint descriptor. This contains extra information + * on the usage of endpoints used to stream audio in and out of the USB Audio device, and follows an Audio + * class specific extended endpoint descriptor. See the USB Audio specification for more details. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */ + uint8_t Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */ + + uint8_t Attributes; /**< Audio class specific endpoint attributes, such as ACCEPTS_SMALL_PACKETS */ + + uint8_t LockDelayUnits; /**< Units used for the LockDelay field, see Audio class specification */ + uint16_t LockDelay; /**< Time required to internally lock endpoint's internal clock recovery circuitry */ + } USB_AudioStreamEndpoint_Spc_t; + + /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the + * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which + * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config; + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t AudioControlInterface; + USB_AudioInterface_AC_t AudioControlInterface_SPC; + USB_AudioInputTerminal_t InputTerminal; + USB_AudioOutputTerminal_t OutputTerminal; + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t AudioStreamInterface_Alt0; + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t AudioStreamInterface_Alt1; + USB_AudioInterface_AS_t AudioStreamInterface_SPC; + USB_AudioFormat_t AudioFormat; + USB_AudioStreamEndpoint_Std_t AudioEndpoint; + USB_AudioStreamEndpoint_Spc_t AudioEndpoint_SPC; + } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) + ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/AudioOutput/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/AudioOutput/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..114137e1993 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/AudioOutput/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Audio Output Device Demo" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek, +# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish, +# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene, +# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = YES + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command , where is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command , where +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Namespace. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file . + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are +# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values +# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list; +# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which +# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous +# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE +# respectively. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin" + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to the search engine +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be +# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO diff --git a/Demos/AudioOutput/makefile b/Demos/AudioOutput/makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..46d7100ef32 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/AudioOutput/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,702 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# Denver Gingerich +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb1287 + + +# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# Typical values are: +# F_CPU = 1000000 +# F_CPU = 1843200 +# F_CPU = 2000000 +# F_CPU = 3686400 +# F_CPU = 4000000 +# F_CPU = 7372800 +# F_CPU = 8000000 +# F_CPU = 11059200 +# F_CPU = 14745600 +# F_CPU = 16000000 +# F_CPU = 18432000 +# F_CPU = 20000000 +F_CPU = 8000000 + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = AudioOutput + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + Descriptors.c \ + ../../LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.c \ + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = ../../ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS +CDEFS += -DUSB_DEVICE_ONLY -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)" + + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20 +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd +# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500 +# +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf +MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) ) +FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr ) + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +checkhooks: build + @echo + @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events ------- + @$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \ + cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \ + echo "(None)" + @echo ----- End Unhooked LUFA Events ----- + +checklibmode: + @echo + @echo ----------- Library Mode ----------- + @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \ + | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \ + || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)." + @echo ------------------------------------ + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + copy $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom --debug 1 $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end + +clean_binary: + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + +clean_list: + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode begin \ +finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \ +clean clean_list clean_binary program debug \ +gdb-config doxygen dfu flip diff --git a/Demos/BluetoothHost/BluetoothACLPackets.c b/Demos/BluetoothHost/BluetoothACLPackets.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..c79e56050bc --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/BluetoothHost/BluetoothACLPackets.c @@ -0,0 +1,200 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#define INCLUDE_FROM_BLUETOOTH_ACLPACKETS_C +#include "BluetoothACLPackets.h" + +void Bluetooth_ProcessACLPackets(void) +{ + Bluetooth_ACL_Header_t ACLPacketHeader; + + Pipe_SelectPipe(BLUETOOTH_DATA_IN_PIPE); + Pipe_SetToken(PIPE_TOKEN_IN); + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + if (!(Pipe_ReadWriteAllowed())) + { + Pipe_Freeze(); + return; + } + + Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&ACLPacketHeader, sizeof(ACLPacketHeader)); + + Bluetooth_DataPacket_Header_t DataHeader; + Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&DataHeader, sizeof(DataHeader)); + + BT_DEBUG("(ACL) Packet Received", NULL); + BT_DEBUG("(ACL) -- Connection Handle: 0x%04X", ACLPacketHeader.ConnectionHandle); + BT_DEBUG("(ACL) -- Data Length: 0x%04X", ACLPacketHeader.DataLength); + BT_DEBUG("(ACL) -- Destination Channel: 0x%04X", DataHeader.DestinationChannel); + BT_DEBUG("(ACL) -- Payload Length: 0x%04X", DataHeader.PayloadLength); + + if (DataHeader.DestinationChannel == BLUETOOTH_CHANNEL_SIGNALING) + { + Bluetooth_SignalCommand_Header_t SignalCommandHeader; + Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&SignalCommandHeader, sizeof(SignalCommandHeader)); + + switch (SignalCommandHeader.Code) + { + case BLUETOOTH_SIGNAL_CONNECTION_REQUEST: + Bluetooth_ProcessSignalPacket_ConnectionRequest(&ACLPacketHeader, &DataHeader, &SignalCommandHeader); + break; + case BLUETOOTH_SIGNAL_CONFIGURATION_REQUEST: + Bluetooth_ProcessSignalPacket_ConfigurationRequest(&ACLPacketHeader, &DataHeader, &SignalCommandHeader); + break; + default: + BT_DEBUG("(ACL) >> Unknown Signalling Command 0x%02X", SignalCommandHeader.Code); + + Pipe_Discard_Stream(ACLPacketHeader.DataLength); + Pipe_ClearCurrentBank(); + Pipe_Freeze(); + break; + } + } + else + { + uint8_t DataPayload[DataHeader.PayloadLength]; + Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&DataPayload, sizeof(DataPayload)); + DataHeader.PayloadLength = 0; + + BT_DEBUG("(ACL) -- Data Payload: ", NULL); + for (uint16_t B = 0; B < sizeof(DataPayload); B++) + printf("0x%02X ", DataPayload[B]); + BT_DEBUG("", NULL); + + Pipe_Discard_Stream(ACLPacketHeader.DataLength); + Pipe_ClearCurrentBank(); + Pipe_Freeze(); + } +} + +static inline void Bluetooth_ProcessSignalPacket_ConnectionRequest(Bluetooth_ACL_Header_t* ACLPacketHeader, + Bluetooth_DataPacket_Header_t* DataHeader, + Bluetooth_SignalCommand_Header_t* SignalCommandHeader) +{ + Bluetooth_SignalCommand_ConnectionRequest_t ConnectionRequest; + + Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&ConnectionRequest, sizeof(ConnectionRequest)); + + BT_DEBUG("(ACL) >> L2CAP Connection Request", NULL); + BT_DEBUG("(ACL) -- PSM: 0x%04X", ConnectionRequest.PSM); + BT_DEBUG("(ACL) -- Source Channel: 0x%04X", ConnectionRequest.SourceChannel); + + Pipe_ClearCurrentBank(); + Pipe_Freeze(); + Pipe_SelectPipe(BLUETOOTH_DATA_OUT_PIPE); + Pipe_SetToken(PIPE_TOKEN_OUT); + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + Bluetooth_SignalCommand_ConnectionResponse_t ConnectionResponse; + + ACLPacketHeader->DataLength = sizeof(*DataHeader) + sizeof(*SignalCommandHeader) + sizeof(ConnectionResponse); + DataHeader->PayloadLength = sizeof(*SignalCommandHeader) + sizeof(ConnectionResponse); + DataHeader->DestinationChannel = BLUETOOTH_CHANNEL_SIGNALING; + SignalCommandHeader->Code = BLUETOOTH_SIGNAL_CONNECTION_RESPONSE; + SignalCommandHeader->Length = sizeof(ConnectionResponse); + + Bluetooth_Channel_t* ChannelData = Bluetooth_InitChannelData(ConnectionRequest.SourceChannel, ConnectionRequest.PSM); + + ConnectionResponse.Result = (ChannelData == NULL) ? BLUETOOTH_CONNECTION_REFUSED_RESOURCES : + BLUETOOTH_CONNECTION_SUCCESSFUL; + ConnectionResponse.DestinationChannel = ChannelData->LocalNumber; + ConnectionResponse.SourceChannel = ChannelData->RemoteNumber; + ConnectionResponse.Status = 0x00; + + Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(ACLPacketHeader, sizeof(*ACLPacketHeader)); + Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(DataHeader, sizeof(*DataHeader)); + Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(SignalCommandHeader, sizeof(*SignalCommandHeader)); + Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(&ConnectionResponse, sizeof(ConnectionResponse)); + + Pipe_ClearCurrentBank(); + Pipe_Freeze(); + + BT_DEBUG("(ACL) Packet Sent", NULL); + BT_DEBUG("(ACL) -- Connection Handle: 0x%04X", ACLPacketHeader->ConnectionHandle); + BT_DEBUG("(ACL) -- Data Length: 0x%04X", ACLPacketHeader->DataLength); + BT_DEBUG("(ACL) -- Destination Channel: 0x%04X", DataHeader->DestinationChannel); + BT_DEBUG("(ACL) -- Payload Length: 0x%04X", DataHeader->PayloadLength); + BT_DEBUG("(ACL) >> L2CAP Connection Response", NULL); + BT_DEBUG("(ACL) -- Source Channel: 0x%04X", ConnectionResponse.SourceChannel); + BT_DEBUG("(ACL) -- Destination Channel: 0x%04X", ConnectionResponse.DestinationChannel); +} + +static inline void Bluetooth_ProcessSignalPacket_ConfigurationRequest(Bluetooth_ACL_Header_t* ACLPacketHeader, + Bluetooth_DataPacket_Header_t* DataHeader, + Bluetooth_SignalCommand_Header_t* SignalCommandHeader) +{ + Bluetooth_SignalCommand_ConfigurationRequest_t ConfigurationRequest; + + Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&ConfigurationRequest, sizeof(ConfigurationRequest)); + + BT_DEBUG("(ACL) >> L2CAP Configuration Request", NULL); + BT_DEBUG("(ACL) -- Destination Channel: 0x%04X", ConfigurationRequest.DestinationChannel); + + Pipe_ClearCurrentBank(); + Pipe_Freeze(); + Pipe_SelectPipe(BLUETOOTH_DATA_OUT_PIPE); + Pipe_SetToken(PIPE_TOKEN_OUT); + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + Bluetooth_SignalCommand_ConfigurationResponse_t ConfigurationResponse; + + ACLPacketHeader->DataLength = sizeof(*DataHeader) + sizeof(*SignalCommandHeader) + sizeof(ConfigurationResponse); + DataHeader->PayloadLength = sizeof(*SignalCommandHeader) + sizeof(ConfigurationResponse); + DataHeader->DestinationChannel = BLUETOOTH_CHANNEL_SIGNALING; + SignalCommandHeader->Code = BLUETOOTH_SIGNAL_CONFIGURATION_RESPONSE; + SignalCommandHeader->Length = sizeof(ConfigurationResponse); + + Bluetooth_Channel_t* ChannelData = Bluetooth_GetChannelData(ConfigurationRequest.DestinationChannel, CHANNEL_LOOKUP_BY_DESTINATION); + + if (ChannelData != NULL) + ChannelData->State = Channel_Open; + + // TODO: Add channel config data to the tail of ConfigurationResponse + + ConfigurationResponse.SourceChannel = ChannelData->RemoteNumber; + ConfigurationResponse.Flags = 0x00; + ConfigurationResponse.Result = (ChannelData != NULL) ? BLUETOOTH_CONFIGURATION_SUCCESSFUL : BLUETOOTH_CONFIGURATION_REJECTED; + + Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(ACLPacketHeader, sizeof(*ACLPacketHeader)); + Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(DataHeader, sizeof(*DataHeader)); + Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(SignalCommandHeader, sizeof(*SignalCommandHeader)); + Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(&ConfigurationResponse, sizeof(ConfigurationResponse)); + + Pipe_ClearCurrentBank(); + Pipe_Freeze(); + + BT_DEBUG("(ACL) Packet Sent", NULL); + BT_DEBUG("(ACL) -- Connection Handle: 0x%04X", ACLPacketHeader->ConnectionHandle); + BT_DEBUG("(ACL) -- Data Length: 0x%04X", ACLPacketHeader->DataLength); + BT_DEBUG("(ACL) -- Destination Channel: 0x%04X", DataHeader->DestinationChannel); + BT_DEBUG("(ACL) -- Payload Length: 0x%04X", DataHeader->PayloadLength); + BT_DEBUG("(ACL) >> L2CAP Configuration Response", NULL); +} diff --git a/Demos/BluetoothHost/BluetoothACLPackets.h b/Demos/BluetoothHost/BluetoothACLPackets.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..20c6cca5bbe --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/BluetoothHost/BluetoothACLPackets.h @@ -0,0 +1,121 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#ifndef _BLUETOOTH_ACLPACKETS_ +#define _BLUETOOTH_ACLPACKETS_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + + #include + + #include "BluetoothStack.h" + + /* Macros: */ + #define BLUETOOTH_CHANNEL_SIGNALING 0x0001 + #define BLUETOOTH_CHANNEL_CONNECTIONLESS 0x0002 + + #define BLUETOOTH_SIGNAL_CONNECTION_REQUEST 0x02 + #define BLUETOOTH_SIGNAL_CONNECTION_RESPONSE 0x03 + #define BLUETOOTH_SIGNAL_CONFIGURATION_REQUEST 0x04 + #define BLUETOOTH_SIGNAL_CONFIGURATION_RESPONSE 0x05 + + #define BLUETOOTH_CONNECTION_SUCCESSFUL 0x0000 + #define BLUETOOTH_CONNECTION_REFUSED_RESOURCES 0x0004 + + #define BLUETOOTH_CONFIGURATION_SUCCESSFUL 0x0000 + #define BLUETOOTH_CONFIGURATION_REJECTED 0x0002 + #define BLUETOOTH_CONFIGURATION_UNKNOWNOPTIONS 0x0003 + + + /* Type Defines: */ + typedef struct + { + uint16_t ConnectionHandle; + uint16_t DataLength; + } Bluetooth_ACL_Header_t; + + typedef struct + { + uint16_t PayloadLength; + uint16_t DestinationChannel; + } Bluetooth_DataPacket_Header_t; + + typedef struct + { + uint8_t Code; + uint8_t Identifier; + uint16_t Length; + } Bluetooth_SignalCommand_Header_t; + + typedef struct + { + uint16_t PSM; + uint16_t SourceChannel; + } Bluetooth_SignalCommand_ConnectionRequest_t; + + typedef struct + { + uint16_t DestinationChannel; + uint16_t SourceChannel; + uint16_t Result; + uint16_t Status; + } Bluetooth_SignalCommand_ConnectionResponse_t; + + typedef struct + { + uint16_t DestinationChannel; + uint16_t Flags; + uint8_t Options[]; + } Bluetooth_SignalCommand_ConfigurationRequest_t; + + typedef struct + { + uint16_t SourceChannel; + uint16_t Flags; + uint16_t Result; + uint8_t Config; + } Bluetooth_SignalCommand_ConfigurationResponse_t; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void Bluetooth_ProcessACLPackets(void); + + #if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_BLUETOOTH_ACLPACKETS_C) + static inline void Bluetooth_ProcessSignalPacket_ConnectionRequest(Bluetooth_ACL_Header_t* ACLPacketHeader, + Bluetooth_DataPacket_Header_t* DataHeader, + Bluetooth_SignalCommand_Header_t* SignalCommandHeader); + static inline void Bluetooth_ProcessSignalPacket_ConfigurationRequest(Bluetooth_ACL_Header_t* ACLPacketHeader, + Bluetooth_DataPacket_Header_t* DataHeader, + Bluetooth_SignalCommand_Header_t* SignalCommandHeader); + #endif + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/BluetoothHost/BluetoothClassCodes.h b/Demos/BluetoothHost/BluetoothClassCodes.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..5bbd4ef9552 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/BluetoothHost/BluetoothClassCodes.h @@ -0,0 +1,110 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#ifndef _BLUETOOTH_CLASS_CODES_H_ +#define _BLUETOOTH_CLASS_CODES_H_ + + /* Macros: */ + #define DEVICE_CLASS_SERVICE_POSITIONING (1UL << 16) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_SERVICE_NETWORKING (1UL << 17) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_SERVICE_RENDERING (1UL << 18) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_SERVICE_CAPTURING (1UL << 19) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_SERVICE_OBJECTTRANSFER (1UL << 20) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_SERVICE_AUDIO (1UL << 21) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_SERVICE_TELEPHONY (1UL << 22) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_SERVICE_INFORMATION (1UL << 23) + + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MAJOR_MISC (0x00 << 8) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MAJOR_COMPUTER (0x01 << 8) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MAJOR_PHONE (0x02 << 8) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MAJOR_LAN (0x03 << 8) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MAJOR_AUDIOVIDEO (0x04 << 8) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MAJOR_PERIPHERAL (0x05 << 8) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MAJOR_IMAGING (0x06 << 8) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MAJOR_UNCLASSIFIED (0x1F << 8) + + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_COMPUTER_UNCATEGORIZED (0x00 << 2) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_COMPUTER_DESKTOP (0x01 << 2) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_COMPUTER_SERVER (0x02 << 2) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_COMPUTER_LAPTOP (0x03 << 2) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_COMPUTER_HANDHELD (0x04 << 2) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_COMPUTER_PALM (0x05 << 2) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_COMPUTER_WEARABLE (0x06 << 2) + + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PHONE_UNCATEGORIZED (0x00 << 2) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PHONE_CELLULAR (0x01 << 2) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PHONE_CORDLESS (0x02 << 2) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PHONE_SMARTPHONE (0x03 << 2) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PHONE_WIREDMODEM (0x04 << 2) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PHONE_ISDN (0x05 << 2) + + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_LAN_FULLY_AVAILABLE (0x00 << 5) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_LAN_1_TO_17_PC_UTILIZED (0x01 << 5) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_LAN_17_TO_33_PC_UTILIZED (0x02 << 5) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_LAN_33_TO_50_PC_UTILIZED (0x03 << 5) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_LAN_50_TO_67_PC_UTILIZED (0x04 << 5) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_LAN_67_TO_83_PC_UTILIZED (0x05 << 5) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_LAN_83_TO_99_PC_UTILIZED (0x06 << 5) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_NO_SERVICE_AVAILABLE (0x07 << 5) + + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_UNCATEGORIZED (0x00 << 2) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_HEADSET (0x01 << 2) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_HANDSFREE (0x02 << 2) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_MICROPHONE (0x04 << 2) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_LOUDSPEAKER (0x05 << 2) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_HEADPHONES (0x06 << 2) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_PORTABLE_AUDIO (0x07 << 2) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_CARAUDIO (0x08 << 2) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_SETTOP_BOX (0x09 << 2) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_HIFI (0x0A << 2) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_VCR (0x0B << 2) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_VIDEO_CAMERA (0x0C << 2) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_CAMCORDER (0x0D << 2) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_VIDEO_MONITOR (0x0E << 2) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_DISPLAY_AND_LOUDSPEAKER (0x0F << 2) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_VIDEO_CONFERENCING (0x10 << 2) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_GAMING_TOY (0x12 << 2) + + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PERIPHERAL_KEYBOARD (0x01 << 6) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PERIPHERAL_POINTING (0x02 << 6) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PERIPHERAL_COMBO (0x03 << 6) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PERIPHERAL_UNCATEGORIZED (0x00 << 2) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PERIPHERAL_JOYSTICK (0x01 << 2) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PERIPHERAL_GAMEPAD (0x02 << 2) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PERIPHERAL_REMOTE_CONTROL (0x03 << 2) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PERIPHERAL_SENSING_DEVICE (0x04 << 2) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PERIPHERAL_DIGITIZER (0x05 << 2) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PERIPHERAL_CARD_READER (0x06 << 2) + + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_IMAGING_DISPLAY (1 << 4) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_IMAGING_CAMERA (1 << 5) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_IMAGING_SCANNER (1 << 6) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_IMAGING_PRINTER (1 << 7) + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/BluetoothHost/BluetoothHCICommands.c b/Demos/BluetoothHost/BluetoothHCICommands.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..d529a349843 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/BluetoothHost/BluetoothHCICommands.c @@ -0,0 +1,367 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#include "BluetoothHCICommands.h" + +static Bluetooth_HCICommand_Header_t HCICommandHeader; +static Bluetooth_HCIEvent_Header_t HCIEventHeader; + + uint8_t Bluetooth_HCIProcessingState; +static uint8_t Bluetooth_TempDeviceAddress[6]; + +static uint8_t Bluetooth_SendHCICommand(void* Parameters, uint8_t ParamLength) +{ + uint8_t CommandBuffer[sizeof(HCICommandHeader) + HCICommandHeader.ParameterLength]; + + USB_HostRequest = (USB_Host_Request_Header_t) + { + bmRequestType: (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_DEVICE), + bRequest: 0, + wValue: 0, + wIndex: 0, + wLength: sizeof(CommandBuffer) + }; + + memset(CommandBuffer, 0x00, sizeof(CommandBuffer)); + memcpy(CommandBuffer, &HCICommandHeader, sizeof(HCICommandHeader)); + + if (ParamLength) + memcpy(&CommandBuffer[sizeof(HCICommandHeader)], Parameters, ParamLength); + + return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(CommandBuffer); +} + +static bool Bluetooth_GetNextHCIEventHeader(void) +{ + Pipe_SelectPipe(BLUETOOTH_EVENTS_PIPE); + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + if (!(Pipe_ReadWriteAllowed())) + return false; + + Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&HCIEventHeader, sizeof(HCIEventHeader)); + + return true; +} + +static void Bluetooth_DiscardRemainingHCIEventParameters(void) +{ + Pipe_SelectPipe(BLUETOOTH_EVENTS_PIPE); + Pipe_Discard_Stream(HCIEventHeader.ParameterLength); + Pipe_ClearCurrentBank(); +} + +void Bluetooth_ProcessHCICommands(void) +{ + uint8_t ErrorCode; + + switch (Bluetooth_HCIProcessingState) + { + case Bluetooth_Init: + Pipe_SelectPipe(BLUETOOTH_EVENTS_PIPE); + Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests(); + + memset(&Bluetooth_Connection, 0x00, sizeof(Bluetooth_Connection)); + + Bluetooth_HCIProcessingState = Bluetooth_Init_Reset; + break; + case Bluetooth_Init_Reset: + HCICommandHeader = (Bluetooth_HCICommand_Header_t) + { + OpCode: {OGF: OGF_CTRLR_BASEBAND, OCF: OCF_CTRLR_BASEBAND_RESET}, + ParameterLength: 0, + }; + + BT_DEBUG("(HCI) Enter State: Bluetooth_Init_Reset", NULL); + + ErrorCode = Bluetooth_SendHCICommand(NULL, 0); + + do + { + while (!(Bluetooth_GetNextHCIEventHeader())); + Bluetooth_DiscardRemainingHCIEventParameters(); + } while (HCIEventHeader.EventCode != EVENT_COMMAND_COMPLETE); + + Bluetooth_HCIProcessingState = Bluetooth_Init_ReadBufferSize; + break; + case Bluetooth_Init_ReadBufferSize: + HCICommandHeader = (Bluetooth_HCICommand_Header_t) + { + OpCode: {OGF: OGF_CTRLR_INFORMATIONAL, OCF: OGF_CTRLR_INFORMATIONAL_READBUFFERSIZE}, + ParameterLength: 0, + }; + + BT_DEBUG("(HCI) Enter State: Bluetooth_Init_ReadBufferSize", NULL); + + ErrorCode = Bluetooth_SendHCICommand(NULL, 0); + + do + { + while (!(Bluetooth_GetNextHCIEventHeader())); + Bluetooth_DiscardRemainingHCIEventParameters(); + } while (HCIEventHeader.EventCode != EVENT_COMMAND_COMPLETE); + + Bluetooth_HCIProcessingState = Bluetooth_Init_SetEventMask; + break; + case Bluetooth_Init_SetEventMask: + HCICommandHeader = (Bluetooth_HCICommand_Header_t) + { + OpCode: {OGF: OGF_CTRLR_BASEBAND, OCF: OCF_CTRLR_BASEBAND_SET_EVENT_MASK}, + ParameterLength: 8, + }; + + BT_DEBUG("(HCI) Enter State: Bluetooth_Init_SetEventMask", NULL); + + uint8_t EventMask[8] = {0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF}; + ErrorCode = Bluetooth_SendHCICommand(&EventMask, 8); + + BT_DEBUG("(HCI) -- Event mask: 0x%02X%02X%02X%02X%02X%02X%02X%02X", EventMask[7], EventMask[6], EventMask[5], EventMask[4], + EventMask[3], EventMask[2], EventMask[1], EventMask[0]); + do + { + while (!(Bluetooth_GetNextHCIEventHeader())); + Bluetooth_DiscardRemainingHCIEventParameters(); + } while (HCIEventHeader.EventCode != EVENT_COMMAND_COMPLETE); + + + Bluetooth_HCIProcessingState = Bluetooth_Init_SetLocalName; + break; + case Bluetooth_Init_SetLocalName: + HCICommandHeader = (Bluetooth_HCICommand_Header_t) + { + OpCode: {OGF: OGF_CTRLR_BASEBAND, OCF: OCF_CTRLR_BASEBAND_WRITE_LOCAL_NAME}, + ParameterLength: 248, + }; + + BT_DEBUG("(HCI) Enter State: Bluetooth_Init_SetLocalName", NULL); + BT_DEBUG("(HCI) -- Name: %s", Bluetooth_DeviceConfiguration.Name); + + ErrorCode = Bluetooth_SendHCICommand(Bluetooth_DeviceConfiguration.Name, strlen(Bluetooth_DeviceConfiguration.Name)); + + do + { + while (!(Bluetooth_GetNextHCIEventHeader())); + Bluetooth_DiscardRemainingHCIEventParameters(); + } while (HCIEventHeader.EventCode != EVENT_COMMAND_COMPLETE); + + Bluetooth_HCIProcessingState = Bluetooth_Init_SetDeviceClass; + break; + case Bluetooth_Init_SetDeviceClass: + HCICommandHeader = (Bluetooth_HCICommand_Header_t) + { + OpCode: {OGF: OGF_CTRLR_BASEBAND, OCF: OCF_CTRLR_BASEBAND_WRITE_CLASS_OF_DEVICE}, + ParameterLength: 3, + }; + + BT_DEBUG("(HCI) Enter State: Bluetooth_Init_SetDeviceClass", NULL); + + ErrorCode = Bluetooth_SendHCICommand(&Bluetooth_DeviceConfiguration.Class, 3); + + do + { + while (!(Bluetooth_GetNextHCIEventHeader())); + Bluetooth_DiscardRemainingHCIEventParameters(); + } while (HCIEventHeader.EventCode != EVENT_COMMAND_COMPLETE); + + Bluetooth_HCIProcessingState = Bluetooth_Init_WriteScanEnable; + break; + case Bluetooth_Init_WriteScanEnable: + HCICommandHeader = (Bluetooth_HCICommand_Header_t) + { + OpCode: {OGF: OGF_CTRLR_BASEBAND, OCF: OCF_CTRLR_BASEBAND_WRITE_SCAN_ENABLE}, + ParameterLength: 1, + }; + + BT_DEBUG("(HCI) Enter State: Bluetooth_Init_WriteScanEnable", NULL); + + uint8_t Interval = InquiryAndPageScans; + ErrorCode = Bluetooth_SendHCICommand(&Interval, 1); + + do + { + while (!(Bluetooth_GetNextHCIEventHeader())); + Bluetooth_DiscardRemainingHCIEventParameters(); + } while (HCIEventHeader.EventCode != EVENT_COMMAND_COMPLETE); + + Bluetooth_HCIProcessingState = Bluetooth_PrepareToProcessEvents; + break; + case Bluetooth_PrepareToProcessEvents: + BT_DEBUG("(HCI) Enter State: Bluetooth_ProcessEvents", NULL); + + Bluetooth_HCIProcessingState = Bluetooth_ProcessEvents; + break; + case Bluetooth_ProcessEvents: + if (Bluetooth_GetNextHCIEventHeader()) + { + BT_DEBUG("(HCI) Event Code: 0x%02X", HCIEventHeader.EventCode); + + if (HCIEventHeader.EventCode == EVENT_COMMAND_STATUS) + { + Bluetooth_HCIEvent_CommandStatus_Header_t CommandStatusHeader; + + Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&CommandStatusHeader, sizeof(CommandStatusHeader)); + HCIEventHeader.ParameterLength -= sizeof(CommandStatusHeader); + + BT_DEBUG("(HCI) >> Command status: 0x%02X", CommandStatusHeader.CommandStatus); + + if (CommandStatusHeader.CommandStatus) + Bluetooth_HCIProcessingState = Bluetooth_Init; + } + else if (HCIEventHeader.EventCode == EVENT_CONNECTION_REQUEST) + { + Bluetooth_HCIEvent_ConnectionRequest_Header_t ConnectionRequestParams; + + Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&ConnectionRequestParams, sizeof(ConnectionRequestParams)); + HCIEventHeader.ParameterLength -= sizeof(ConnectionRequestParams); + + BT_DEBUG("(HCI) >> Connection Request from device %02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X", + ConnectionRequestParams.RemoteAddress[5], ConnectionRequestParams.RemoteAddress[4], + ConnectionRequestParams.RemoteAddress[3], ConnectionRequestParams.RemoteAddress[2], + ConnectionRequestParams.RemoteAddress[1], ConnectionRequestParams.RemoteAddress[0]); + BT_DEBUG("(HCI) -- Device Class: 0x%02X%04X", ConnectionRequestParams.ClassOfDevice_Service, + ConnectionRequestParams.ClassOfDevice_MajorMinor); + BT_DEBUG("(HCI) -- Link Type: 0x%02x", ConnectionRequestParams.LinkType); + + memcpy(Bluetooth_TempDeviceAddress, ConnectionRequestParams.RemoteAddress, + sizeof(Bluetooth_TempDeviceAddress)); + + Bluetooth_HCIProcessingState = (Bluetooth_Connection.IsConnected) ? Bluetooth_Conn_RejectConnection : + Bluetooth_Conn_AcceptConnection; + } + else if (HCIEventHeader.EventCode == EVENT_DISCONNECTION_COMPLETE) + { + BT_DEBUG("(HCI) >> Disconnection from device complete.", NULL); + Bluetooth_HCIProcessingState = Bluetooth_Init; + } + else if (HCIEventHeader.EventCode == EVENT_CONNECTION_COMPLETE) + { + Bluetooth_HCIEvent_ConnectionComplete_Header_t ConnectionCompleteParams; + + Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&ConnectionCompleteParams, sizeof(ConnectionCompleteParams)); + HCIEventHeader.ParameterLength -= sizeof(ConnectionCompleteParams); + + BT_DEBUG("(HCI) >> Connection to device complete.", NULL); + BT_DEBUG("(HCI) -- Status: %d", ConnectionCompleteParams.Status); + BT_DEBUG("(HCI) -- Handle: %d", ConnectionCompleteParams.ConnectionHandle); + + if (ConnectionCompleteParams.Status == 0x00) + { + memcpy(Bluetooth_Connection.DeviceAddress, ConnectionCompleteParams.RemoteAddress, + sizeof(Bluetooth_Connection.DeviceAddress)); + Bluetooth_Connection.ConnectionHandle = ConnectionCompleteParams.ConnectionHandle; + Bluetooth_Connection.IsConnected = true; + } + } + else if (HCIEventHeader.EventCode == EVENT_PIN_CODE_REQUEST) + { + Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&Bluetooth_TempDeviceAddress, sizeof(Bluetooth_TempDeviceAddress)); + HCIEventHeader.ParameterLength -= sizeof(Bluetooth_TempDeviceAddress); + + BT_DEBUG("(HCI) >> PIN code Request from device %02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X", + Bluetooth_TempDeviceAddress[5], Bluetooth_TempDeviceAddress[4], Bluetooth_TempDeviceAddress[3], + Bluetooth_TempDeviceAddress[2], Bluetooth_TempDeviceAddress[1], Bluetooth_TempDeviceAddress[0]); + + Bluetooth_HCIProcessingState = Bluetooth_Conn_SendPINCode; + } + + BT_DEBUG("(HCI) -- Unread Event Param Length: %d", HCIEventHeader.ParameterLength); + + Bluetooth_DiscardRemainingHCIEventParameters(); + } + + break; + case Bluetooth_Conn_AcceptConnection: + HCICommandHeader = (Bluetooth_HCICommand_Header_t) + { + OpCode: {OGF: OGF_LINK_CONTROL, OCF: OCF_LINK_CONTROL_ACCEPT_CONNECTION_REQUEST}, + ParameterLength: sizeof(Bluetooth_HCICommand_AcceptConnectionRequest_Params_t), + }; + + BT_DEBUG("(HCI) Enter State: Bluetooth_Conn_AcceptConnection", NULL); + + Bluetooth_HCICommand_AcceptConnectionRequest_Params_t AcceptConnectionParams; + + memcpy(AcceptConnectionParams.RemoteAddress, Bluetooth_TempDeviceAddress, + sizeof(Bluetooth_TempDeviceAddress)); + AcceptConnectionParams.SlaveRole = true; + + Bluetooth_SendHCICommand(&AcceptConnectionParams, sizeof(AcceptConnectionParams)); + + Bluetooth_HCIProcessingState = Bluetooth_PrepareToProcessEvents; + break; + case Bluetooth_Conn_RejectConnection: + HCICommandHeader = (Bluetooth_HCICommand_Header_t) + { + OpCode: {OGF: OGF_LINK_CONTROL, OCF: OCF_LINK_CONTROL_ACCEPT_CONNECTION_REQUEST}, + ParameterLength: sizeof(Bluetooth_HCICommand_RejectConnectionRequest_Params_t), + }; + + BT_DEBUG("(HCI) Enter State: Bluetooth_Conn_RejectConnection", NULL); + + Bluetooth_HCICommand_RejectConnectionRequest_Params_t RejectConnectionParams; + + memcpy(RejectConnectionParams.RemoteAddress, Bluetooth_TempDeviceAddress, + sizeof(Bluetooth_TempDeviceAddress)); + RejectConnectionParams.Reason = ERROR_LIMITED_RESOURCES; + + Bluetooth_SendHCICommand(&AcceptConnectionParams, sizeof(AcceptConnectionParams)); + + Bluetooth_HCIProcessingState = Bluetooth_PrepareToProcessEvents; + break; + case Bluetooth_Conn_SendPINCode: + HCICommandHeader = (Bluetooth_HCICommand_Header_t) + { + OpCode: {OGF: OGF_LINK_CONTROL, OCF: OCF_LINK_CONTROL_PIN_CODE_REQUEST_REPLY}, + ParameterLength: sizeof(Bluetooth_HCICommand_PinCodeResponse_Params_t), + }; + + BT_DEBUG("(HCI) Enter State: Bluetooth_Conn_SendPINCode", NULL); + BT_DEBUG("(HCI) -- PIN: %s", Bluetooth_DeviceConfiguration.PINCode); + + Bluetooth_HCICommand_PinCodeResponse_Params_t PINCodeRequestParams; + + memcpy(PINCodeRequestParams.RemoteAddress, Bluetooth_TempDeviceAddress, + sizeof(Bluetooth_TempDeviceAddress)); + PINCodeRequestParams.PINCodeLength = strlen(Bluetooth_DeviceConfiguration.PINCode); + memcpy(PINCodeRequestParams.PINCode, Bluetooth_DeviceConfiguration.PINCode, + sizeof(Bluetooth_DeviceConfiguration.PINCode)); + + Bluetooth_SendHCICommand(&PINCodeRequestParams, sizeof(PINCodeRequestParams)); + + do + { + while (!(Bluetooth_GetNextHCIEventHeader())); + Bluetooth_DiscardRemainingHCIEventParameters(); + } while (HCIEventHeader.EventCode != EVENT_COMMAND_COMPLETE); + + Bluetooth_HCIProcessingState = Bluetooth_PrepareToProcessEvents; + break; + } +} diff --git a/Demos/BluetoothHost/BluetoothHCICommands.h b/Demos/BluetoothHost/BluetoothHCICommands.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..673c6457ab7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/BluetoothHost/BluetoothHCICommands.h @@ -0,0 +1,190 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#ifndef _BLUETOOTH_HCICOMMANDS_H_ +#define _BLUETOOTH_HCICOMMANDS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + + #include + + #include "BluetoothStack.h" + #include "BluetoothClassCodes.h" + + /* Macros: */ + #define OGF_LINK_CONTROL 0x01 + #define OGF_CTRLR_BASEBAND 0x03 + #define OGF_CTRLR_INFORMATIONAL 0x04 + + #define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_INQUIRY 0x0001 + #define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_INQUIRY_CANCEL 0x0002 + #define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_PERIODIC_INQUIRY 0x0003 + #define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_EXIT_PERIODIC_INQUIRY 0x0004 + #define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_CREATE_CONNECTION 0x0005 + #define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_DISCONNECT 0x0006 + #define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_CREATE_CONNECTION_CANCEL 0x0008 + #define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_ACCEPT_CONNECTION_REQUEST 0x0009 + #define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_REJECT_CONNECTION_REQUEST 0x000A + #define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_LINK_KEY_REQUEST_REPLY 0x000B + #define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_LINK_KEY_REQUEST_NEG_REPLY 0x000C + #define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_PIN_CODE_REQUEST_REPLY 0x000D + #define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_PIN_CODE_REQUEST_NEG_REPLY 0x000E + #define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_CHANGE_CONNECTION_PACKET_TYPE 0x000F + #define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_REMOTE_NAME_REQUEST 0x0019 + #define OCF_CTRLR_BASEBAND_SET_EVENT_MASK 0x0001 + #define OCF_CTRLR_BASEBAND_RESET 0x0003 + #define OCF_CTRLR_BASEBAND_WRITE_PIN_TYPE 0x000A + #define OCF_CTRLR_BASEBAND_WRITE_LOCAL_NAME 0x0013 + #define OCF_CTRLR_BASEBAND_READ_LOCAL_NAME 0x0014 + #define OCF_CTRLR_BASEBAND_WRITE_SCAN_ENABLE 0x001A + #define OCF_CTRLR_BASEBAND_WRITE_CLASS_OF_DEVICE 0x0024 + #define OCF_CTRLR_BASEBAND_WRITE_SIMPLE_PAIRING_MODE 0x0056 + #define OCF_CTRLR_BASEBAND_WRITE_AUTHENTICATION_ENABLE 0x0020 + #define OGF_CTRLR_INFORMATIONAL_READBUFFERSIZE 0x0005 + + #define EVENT_COMMAND_STATUS 0x0F + #define EVENT_COMMAND_COMPLETE 0x0E + #define EVENT_CONNECTION_COMPLETE 0x03 + #define EVENT_CONNECTION_REQUEST 0x04 + #define EVENT_DISCONNECTION_COMPLETE 0x05 + #define EVENT_REMOTE_NAME_REQUEST_COMPLETE 0x07 + #define EVENT_PIN_CODE_REQUEST 0x16 + + #define ERROR_LIMITED_RESOURCES 0x0D + + /* Type Defines: */ + typedef struct + { + struct + { + int OCF : 10; + int OGF : 6; + } OpCode; + + uint8_t ParameterLength; + uint8_t Parameters[]; + } Bluetooth_HCICommand_Header_t; + + typedef struct + { + uint8_t EventCode; + uint8_t ParameterLength; + } Bluetooth_HCIEvent_Header_t; + + typedef struct + { + uint8_t CommandStatus; + uint8_t CommandPackets; + + struct + { + int OCF : 10; + int OGF : 6; + } OpCode; + } Bluetooth_HCIEvent_CommandStatus_Header_t; + + typedef struct + { + uint8_t RemoteAddress[6]; + uint8_t ClassOfDevice_Service; + uint16_t ClassOfDevice_MajorMinor; + uint8_t LinkType; + } Bluetooth_HCIEvent_ConnectionRequest_Header_t; + + typedef struct + { + uint8_t Status; + uint16_t ConnectionHandle; + uint8_t RemoteAddress[6]; + uint8_t LinkType; + uint8_t EncryptionEnabled; + } Bluetooth_HCIEvent_ConnectionComplete_Header_t; + + typedef struct + { + uint8_t RemoteAddress[6]; + uint8_t SlaveRole; + } Bluetooth_HCICommand_AcceptConnectionRequest_Params_t; + + typedef struct + { + uint8_t RemoteAddress[6]; + uint8_t Reason; + } Bluetooth_HCICommand_RejectConnectionRequest_Params_t; + + typedef struct + { + uint8_t RemoteAddress[6]; + uint8_t PINCodeLength; + char PINCode[16]; + } Bluetooth_HCICommand_PinCodeResponse_Params_t; + + /* Enums: */ + enum Bluetooth_ScanEnable_Modes_t + { + NoScansEnabled = 0, + InquiryScanOnly = 1, + PageScanOnly = 2, + InquiryAndPageScans = 3, + }; + + enum BluetoothStack_States_t + { + Bluetooth_Init = 0, + Bluetooth_Init_Reset = 1, + Bluetooth_Init_ReadBufferSize = 2, + Bluetooth_Init_SetEventMask = 3, + Bluetooth_Init_SetLocalName = 4, + Bluetooth_Init_SetDeviceClass = 5, + Bluetooth_Init_WriteScanEnable = 6, + Bluetooth_PrepareToProcessEvents = 7, + Bluetooth_ProcessEvents = 8, + Bluetooth_Conn_AcceptConnection = 9, + Bluetooth_Conn_RejectConnection = 10, + Bluetooth_Conn_SendPINCode = 11, + }; + + /* External Variables: */ + extern uint8_t Bluetooth_HCIProcessingState; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void Bluetooth_ProcessHCICommands(void); + + #if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_BLUETOOTHHCICOMMANDS_C) + static uint8_t Bluetooth_SendHCICommand(void* Parameters, uint8_t ParamLength); + static bool Bluetooth_GetNextHCIEventHeader(void); + static void Bluetooth_DiscardRemainingHCIEventParameters(void); + static void Bluetooth_ProcessHCICommands(void); + #endif + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/BluetoothHost/BluetoothHost.c b/Demos/BluetoothHost/BluetoothHost.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..0f9eb4a9e60 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/BluetoothHost/BluetoothHost.c @@ -0,0 +1,282 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/* + Bluetooth Dongle host demo application. + + ** NOT CURRENTLY FUNCTIONAL - DO NOT USE ** +*/ + +/* + USB Mode: Host + USB Class: Bluetooth USB Transport Class + USB Subclass: Bluetooth HCI USB Transport + Relevant Standards: Bluetooth 2.0 Standard + Bluetooth 2.0 HCI USB Transport Layer Addendum + Bluetooth Assigned Numbers (Baseband) + Usable Speeds: Full Speed Mode +*/ + +#include "BluetoothHost.h" + +/* Project Tags, for reading out using the ButtLoad project */ +BUTTLOADTAG(ProjName, "LUFA BT Host App"); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildTime, __TIME__); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildDate, __DATE__); +BUTTLOADTAG(LUFAVersion, "LUFA V" LUFA_VERSION_STRING); + +/* Scheduler Task List */ +TASK_LIST +{ + { Task: USB_USBTask , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, + { Task: USB_Bluetooth_Host , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, + { Task: Bluetooth_Task , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, +}; + +Bluetooth_Device_t Bluetooth_DeviceConfiguration = + { + Class: (DEVICE_CLASS_SERVICE_CAPTURING | DEVICE_CLASS_MAJOR_COMPUTER | DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_COMPUTER_PALM), + PINCode: "0000", + Name: "LUFA Bluetooth Demo" + }; + + +int main(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable Clock Division */ + SetSystemClockPrescaler(0); + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + SerialStream_Init(9600, false); + LEDs_Init(); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); + + /* Startup message */ + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_RESET ESC_BG_WHITE ESC_INVERSE_ON ESC_ERASE_DISPLAY + "Bluetooth Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_INVERSE_OFF)); + + /* Initialize Scheduler so that it can be used */ + Scheduler_Init(); + + /* Initialize USB Subsystem */ + USB_Init(); + + /* Scheduling routine never returns, so put this last in the main function */ + Scheduler_Start(); +} + +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceAttached) +{ + puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n")); + UpdateStatus(Status_USBEnumerating); + + /* Start USB management task to enumerate the device */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_RUN); +} + +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceUnattached) +{ + /* Stop USB management and Bluetooth tasks */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_STOP); + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_Bluetooth_Host, TASK_STOP); + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(Bluetooth_Task, TASK_STOP); + + puts_P(PSTR("\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n")); + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); +} + +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete) +{ + /* Once device is fully enumerated, start the Bluetooth Host task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_Bluetooth_Host, TASK_RUN); + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(Bluetooth_Task, TASK_RUN); + + UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady); +} + +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_HostError) +{ + USB_ShutDown(); + + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + UpdateStatus(Status_HardwareError); + for(;;); +} + +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed) +{ + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- In State %d\r\n"), USB_HostState); + + UpdateStatus(Status_EnumerationError); +} + +TASK(USB_Bluetooth_Host) +{ + uint8_t ErrorCode; + + switch (USB_HostState) + { + case HOST_STATE_Addressed: + puts_P(PSTR("Getting Device Data.\r\n")); + + /* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */ + if ((ErrorCode = ProcessDeviceDescriptor()) != SuccessfulDeviceRead) + { + if (ErrorCode == ControlErrorDuringDeviceRead) + puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Get Device).\r\n")); + else + puts_P(PSTR("Invalid Device.\r\n")); + + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error via status LEDs */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_LED1); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + break; + } + + puts_P(PSTR("Bluetooth Dongle Detected.\r\n")); + + /* Standard request to set the device configuration to configuration 1 */ + USB_HostRequest = (USB_Host_Request_Header_t) + { + bmRequestType: (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE), + bRequest: REQ_SetConfiguration, + wValue: 1, + wIndex: 0, + wLength: 0, + }; + + /* Send the request, display error and wait for device detatch if request fails */ + if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + { + puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error via status LEDs */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_LED1); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + break; + } + + USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured; + break; + case HOST_STATE_Configured: + puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n")); + + /* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */ + if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead) + { + if (ErrorCode == ControlErrorDuringConfigRead) + puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n")); + else + puts_P(PSTR("Invalid Device.\r\n")); + + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error via status LEDs */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_LED1); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + break; + } + + puts_P(PSTR("Bluetooth Dongle Enumerated.\r\n")); + + USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Ready; + break; + case HOST_STATE_Ready: + if (Bluetooth_HCIProcessingState != Bluetooth_ProcessEvents) + { + UpdateStatus(Status_BluetoothBusy); + } + else + { + if (Bluetooth_Connection.IsConnected) + UpdateStatus(Status_BluetoothConnected); + else + UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady); + } + + break; + } +} + +/** Function to manage status updates to the user. This is done via LEDs on the given board, if available, but may be changed to + * log to a serial port, or anything else that is suitable for status updates. + * + * \param CurrentStatus Current status of the system, from the MouseHostViaInt_StatusCodes_t enum + */ +void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus) +{ + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS; + + /* Set the LED mask to the appropriate LED mask based on the given status code */ + switch (CurrentStatus) + { + case Status_USBNotReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1); + break; + case Status_USBEnumerating: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2); + break; + case Status_USBReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED2); + break; + case Status_EnumerationError: + case Status_HardwareError: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3); + break; + case Status_BluetoothConnected: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4); + break; + case Status_BluetoothBusy: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4); + break; + } + + /* Set the board LEDs to the new LED mask */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); +} diff --git a/Demos/BluetoothHost/BluetoothHost.h b/Demos/BluetoothHost/BluetoothHost.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..5fe9dbd1e99 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/BluetoothHost/BluetoothHost.h @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#ifndef _BLUETOOTH_HOST_H_ +#define _BLUETOOTH_HOST_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + #include + + #include "BluetoothStack.h" + + #include "DeviceDescriptor.h" + #include "ConfigDescriptor.h" + + #include // Library Version Information + #include // PROGMEM tags readable by the ButtLoad project + #include // ANSI Terminal Escape Codes + #include // USB Functionality + #include // Serial stream driver + #include // LEDs driver + #include // Simple scheduler for task management + + /* Macros: */ + #define BLUETOOTH_DATA_IN_PIPE 1 + #define BLUETOOTH_DATA_OUT_PIPE 2 + #define BLUETOOTH_EVENTS_PIPE 3 + + /* Task Definitions: */ + TASK(USB_Bluetooth_Host); + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible status codes for passing to the UpdateStatus() function. */ + enum MouseHostViaInt_StatusCodes_t + { + Status_USBNotReady = 0, /**< USB is not ready (disconnected from a USB device) */ + Status_USBEnumerating = 1, /**< USB interface is enumerating */ + Status_USBReady = 2, /**< USB interface is connected and ready */ + Status_EnumerationError = 3, /**< Software error while enumerating the attached USB device */ + Status_HardwareError = 4, /**< Hardware error while enumerating the attached USB device */ + Status_BluetoothConnected = 5, /**< Bluetooth stack connected to device and idle */ + Status_BluetoothBusy = 6, /**< Bluetooth stack busy */ + }; + + /* Event Handlers: */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceAttached); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceUnattached); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_HostError); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/BluetoothHost/BluetoothStack.c b/Demos/BluetoothHost/BluetoothStack.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..a55c5b90cc7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/BluetoothHost/BluetoothStack.c @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#include "BluetoothStack.h" + +Bluetooth_Connection_t Bluetooth_Connection = {IsConnected: false}; + +Bluetooth_Device_t Bluetooth_DeviceConfiguration ATTR_WEAK = + { + Class: DEVICE_CLASS_MAJOR_MISC, + PINCode: "0000", + Name: "LUFA BT Device" + }; + +TASK(Bluetooth_Task) +{ + if (!(USB_IsConnected) || (USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Ready)) + Bluetooth_HCIProcessingState = Bluetooth_Init; + + Bluetooth_ProcessHCICommands(); + Bluetooth_ProcessACLPackets(); +} + +Bluetooth_Channel_t* Bluetooth_GetChannelData(uint16_t ChannelNumber, bool SearchBySource) +{ + Bluetooth_Channel_t* CurrentChannelStructure; + + for (uint8_t i = 0; i < BLUETOOTH_MAX_OPEN_CHANNELS; i++) + { + CurrentChannelStructure = &Bluetooth_Connection.Channels[i]; + + uint16_t CurrentChannelNumber = ((SearchBySource) ? CurrentChannelStructure->RemoteNumber : CurrentChannelStructure->LocalNumber); + + if (CurrentChannelNumber == ChannelNumber) + return CurrentChannelStructure; + } + + return NULL; +} + +Bluetooth_Channel_t* Bluetooth_InitChannelData(uint16_t RemoteChannelNumber, uint16_t PSM) +{ + Bluetooth_Channel_t* CurrentChannelStructure; + + for (uint8_t i = 0; i < BLUETOOTH_MAX_OPEN_CHANNELS; i++) + { + CurrentChannelStructure = &Bluetooth_Connection.Channels[i]; + + if (CurrentChannelStructure->State == Channel_Closed) + { + CurrentChannelStructure->RemoteNumber = RemoteChannelNumber; + CurrentChannelStructure->LocalNumber = (BLUETOOTH_CHANNELNUMBER_BASEOFFSET + i); + CurrentChannelStructure->PSM = PSM; + CurrentChannelStructure->State = Channel_Config; + + return CurrentChannelStructure; + } + } + + return NULL; +} diff --git a/Demos/BluetoothHost/BluetoothStack.h b/Demos/BluetoothHost/BluetoothStack.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..657c829f7b9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/BluetoothHost/BluetoothStack.h @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#ifndef _BLUETOOTH_STACK_ +#define _BLUETOOTH_STACK_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + + #include "BluetoothHost.h" + #include "BluetoothHCICommands.h" + #include "BluetoothACLPackets.h" + + /* Macros: */ + #define BLUETOOTH_MAX_OPEN_CHANNELS 2 + #define BLUETOOTH_CHANNELNUMBER_BASEOFFSET 0x0040 + + #define CHANNEL_LOOKUP_BY_SOURCE true + #define CHANNEL_LOOKUP_BY_DESTINATION false + + #define BT_DEBUG(s, ...) printf_P(PSTR(s "\r\n"), __VA_ARGS__) + + /* Enums: */ + enum Bluetooth_Channel_State_t + { + Channel_Closed = 0, + Channel_WaitConnect = 1, + Channel_WaitConnectRsp = 2, + Channel_Config = 3, + Channel_Open = 4, + Channel_WaitDisconnect = 5, + }; + + /* Type Defines: */ + typedef struct + { + uint8_t State; + uint16_t LocalNumber; + uint16_t RemoteNumber; + uint16_t PSM; + uint16_t MTU; + } Bluetooth_Channel_t; + + typedef struct + { + bool IsConnected; + uint16_t ConnectionHandle; + uint8_t DeviceAddress[6]; + Bluetooth_Channel_t Channels[BLUETOOTH_MAX_OPEN_CHANNELS]; + } Bluetooth_Connection_t; + + typedef struct + { + uint32_t Class; + char PINCode[16]; + char Name[]; + } Bluetooth_Device_t; + + /* Tasks: */ + TASK(Bluetooth_Task); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + Bluetooth_Channel_t* Bluetooth_GetChannelData(uint16_t ChannelNumber, bool SearchBySource); + Bluetooth_Channel_t* Bluetooth_InitChannelData(uint16_t RemoteChannelNumber, uint16_t PSM); + + /* External Variables: */ + extern Bluetooth_Device_t Bluetooth_DeviceConfiguration; + extern Bluetooth_Connection_t Bluetooth_Connection; + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/BluetoothHost/ConfigDescriptor.c b/Demos/BluetoothHost/ConfigDescriptor.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..16ba1b06030 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/BluetoothHost/ConfigDescriptor.c @@ -0,0 +1,139 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#include "ConfigDescriptor.h" + +uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void) +{ + uint8_t* ConfigDescriptorData; + uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize; + uint8_t FoundEndpoints = 0; + + /* Get Configuration Descriptor size from the device */ + if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(&ConfigDescriptorSize, NULL) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + return ControlErrorDuringConfigRead; + + /* Ensure that the Configuration Descriptor isn't too large */ + if (ConfigDescriptorSize > MAX_CONFIG_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE) + return DescriptorTooLarge; + + /* Allocate enough memory for the entire config descriptor */ + ConfigDescriptorData = alloca(ConfigDescriptorSize); + + /* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */ + USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(&ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData); + + /* Validate returned data - ensure first entry is a configuration header descriptor */ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(ConfigDescriptorData) != DTYPE_Configuration) + return InvalidConfigDataReturned; + + /* The bluetooth USB transport addendium mandates that the data (not streaming voice) endpoints + be in the first interface descriptor (interface 0) */ + USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorOfType(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData, DTYPE_Interface); + + /* Ensure that an interface was found, and the end of the descriptor was not reached */ + if (!(ConfigDescriptorSize)) + return NoInterfaceFound; + + /* Get the data IN, data OUT and event notification endpoints for the bluetooth interface */ + while (FoundEndpoints != ((1 << BLUETOOTH_DATA_IN_PIPE) | (1 << BLUETOOTH_DATA_OUT_PIPE) | + (1 << BLUETOOTH_EVENTS_PIPE))) + { + /* Fetch the next endpoint from the current bluetooth interface */ + if (USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData, + NextInterfaceBluetoothDataEndpoint)) + { + /* Descriptor not found, error out */ + return NoEndpointFound; + } + + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t); + + /* Check if the endpoint is a bulk or interrupt type endpoint */ + if ((EndpointData->Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK) == EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT) + { + if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN) + { + /* Configure the events IN pipe */ + Pipe_ConfigurePipe(BLUETOOTH_EVENTS_PIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, PIPE_TOKEN_IN, + EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, + PIPE_BANK_SINGLE); + + Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests(); + Pipe_SetInterruptPeriod(EndpointData->PollingIntervalMS); + + /* Set the flag indicating that the events notification pipe has been found */ + FoundEndpoints |= (1 << BLUETOOTH_EVENTS_PIPE); + } + } + else + { + if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN) + { + /* Configure the data IN pipe */ + Pipe_ConfigurePipe(BLUETOOTH_DATA_IN_PIPE, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_IN, + EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, + PIPE_BANK_SINGLE); + + Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests(); + + /* Set the flag indicating that the data IN pipe has been found */ + FoundEndpoints |= (1 << BLUETOOTH_DATA_IN_PIPE); + } + else + { + /* Configure the data OUT pipe */ + Pipe_ConfigurePipe(BLUETOOTH_DATA_OUT_PIPE, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_OUT, + EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, + PIPE_BANK_SINGLE); + + /* Set the flag indicating that the data OUT pipe has been found */ + FoundEndpoints |= (1 << BLUETOOTH_DATA_OUT_PIPE); + } + } + + } + + /* Valid data found, return success */ + return SuccessfulConfigRead; +} + +DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextInterfaceBluetoothDataEndpoint) +{ + /* PURPOSE: Find next interface endpoint descriptor before next interface descriptor */ + + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint) + return Descriptor_Search_Found; + else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface) + return Descriptor_Search_Fail; + + return Descriptor_Search_NotFound; +} + diff --git a/Demos/BluetoothHost/ConfigDescriptor.h b/Demos/BluetoothHost/ConfigDescriptor.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..35531bf4601 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/BluetoothHost/ConfigDescriptor.h @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_ +#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include // USB Functionality + #include // Configuration Descriptor Parser + + #include "BluetoothHost.h" + + /* Macros: */ + #define MAX_CONFIG_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE 512 + + /* Enums: */ + enum BluetoothHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t + { + SuccessfulConfigRead = 0, + ControlErrorDuringConfigRead = 1, + InvalidConfigDataReturned = 2, + DescriptorTooLarge = 3, + NoInterfaceFound = 4, + NoEndpointFound = 5, + }; + + /* Configuration Descriptor Comparison Functions: */ + DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextInterfaceBluetoothDataEndpoint); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/BluetoothHost/DeviceDescriptor.c b/Demos/BluetoothHost/DeviceDescriptor.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..67e212cba67 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/BluetoothHost/DeviceDescriptor.c @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#include "DeviceDescriptor.h" + +uint8_t ProcessDeviceDescriptor(void) +{ + USB_Descriptor_Device_t DeviceDescriptor; + + /* Standard request to get the device descriptor */ + USB_HostRequest = (USB_Host_Request_Header_t) + { + bmRequestType: (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE), + bRequest: REQ_GetDescriptor, + wValue: (DTYPE_Device << 8), + wIndex: 0, + wLength: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), + }; + + /* Send the request to retrieve the device descriptor */ + if (USB_Host_SendControlRequest((void*)&DeviceDescriptor) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + return ControlErrorDuringDeviceRead; + + /* Validate returned data - ensure the returned data is a device descriptor */ + if (DeviceDescriptor.Header.Type != DTYPE_Device) + return InvalidDeviceDataReturned; + + if ((DeviceDescriptor.Class != BLUETOOTH_DEVICE_CLASS) || + (DeviceDescriptor.SubClass != BLUETOOTH_DEVICE_SUBCLASS) || + (DeviceDescriptor.Protocol != BLUETOOTH_DEVICE_PROTOCOL)) + { + return IncorrectDevice; + } + + return SuccessfulDeviceRead; +} diff --git a/Demos/BluetoothHost/DeviceDescriptor.h b/Demos/BluetoothHost/DeviceDescriptor.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..46edbdb270c --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/BluetoothHost/DeviceDescriptor.h @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#ifndef _DEVICEDESCRIPTOR_H_ +#define _DEVICEDESCRIPTOR_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include // USB Functionality + + #include "BluetoothHost.h" + + /* Macros: */ + #define BLUETOOTH_DEVICE_CLASS 0xE0 + #define BLUETOOTH_DEVICE_SUBCLASS 0x01 + #define BLUETOOTH_DEVICE_PROTOCOL 0x01 + + /* Enums: */ + enum BluetoothHost_GetDeviceDescriptorDataCodes_t + { + SuccessfulDeviceRead = 0, + ControlErrorDuringDeviceRead = 1, + InvalidDeviceDataReturned = 2, + IncorrectDevice = 3, + }; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint8_t ProcessDeviceDescriptor(void); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/BluetoothHost/makefile b/Demos/BluetoothHost/makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..b82a8ace49b --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/BluetoothHost/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,705 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# Denver Gingerich +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb1287 + + +# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# Typical values are: +# F_CPU = 1000000 +# F_CPU = 1843200 +# F_CPU = 2000000 +# F_CPU = 3686400 +# F_CPU = 4000000 +# F_CPU = 7372800 +# F_CPU = 8000000 +# F_CPU = 11059200 +# F_CPU = 14745600 +# F_CPU = 16000000 +# F_CPU = 18432000 +# F_CPU = 20000000 +F_CPU = 8000000 + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = BluetoothHost + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + DeviceDescriptor.c \ + ConfigDescriptor.c \ + BluetoothStack.c \ + BluetoothHCICommands.c \ + BluetoothACLPackets.c \ + ../../LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial_Stream.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/ConfigDescriptor.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \ + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = ../../ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES +CDEFS += -DUSB_HOST_ONLY -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)" +CDEFS += -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20 +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd +# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500 +# +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf +MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) ) +FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr ) + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +checkhooks: build + @echo + @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events ------- + @$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \ + cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \ + echo "(None)" + @echo ----- End Unhooked LUFA Events ----- + +checklibmode: + @echo + @echo ----------- Library Mode ----------- + @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \ + | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \ + || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)." + @echo ------------------------------------ + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + copy $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom --debug 1 $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +## Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end + +clean_binary: + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + +clean_list: + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode begin \ +finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \ +clean clean_list clean_binary program debug \ +gdb-config doxygen diff --git a/Demos/CDC/CDC.aps b/Demos/CDC/CDC.aps new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..83dde595de6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/CDC/CDC.aps @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +CDC30-Sep-2008 14:04:3430-Sep-2008 14:04:56241030-Sep-2008 14:04:3444, 14, 0, 589AVR GCCC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\CDC\falseR00R01R02R03R04R05R06R07R08R09R10R11R12R13R14R15R16R17R18R19R20R21R22R23R24R25R26R27R28R29R30R31Auto000CDC.cDescriptors.cCDC.hDescriptors.hmakefiledefaultYESmakefileatmega128111CDC.elfdefault\1-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enumsdefault1C:\WinAVR-20080512\bin\avr-gcc.exeC:\WinAVR-20080512\utils\bin\make.exe diff --git a/Demos/CDC/CDC.c b/Demos/CDC/CDC.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..6e232a48b7b --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/CDC/CDC.c @@ -0,0 +1,318 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the CDC demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and + * is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + +#include "CDC.h" + +/* Project Tags, for reading out using the ButtLoad project */ +BUTTLOADTAG(ProjName, "LUFA CDC App"); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildTime, __TIME__); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildDate, __DATE__); +BUTTLOADTAG(LUFAVersion, "LUFA V" LUFA_VERSION_STRING); + +/* Scheduler Task List */ +TASK_LIST +{ + { Task: USB_USBTask , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, + { Task: CDC_Task , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, +}; + +/* Globals: */ +/** Contains the current baud rate and other settings of the virtual serial port. While this demo does not use + * the physical USART and thus does not use these settings, they must still be retained and returned to the host + * upon request or the host will assume the device is non-functional. + * + * These values are set by the host via a class-specific request, however they are not required to be used accurately. + * It is possible to completely ignore these value or use other settings as the host is completely unaware of the physical + * serial link characteristics and instead sends and recieves data in endpoint streams. + */ +CDC_Line_Coding_t LineCoding = { BaudRateBPS: 9600, + CharFormat: OneStopBit, + ParityType: Parity_None, + DataBits: 8 }; + +/** String to print through the virtual serial port when the joystick is pressed upwards. */ +char JoystickUpString[] = "Joystick Up\r\n"; + +/** String to print through the virtual serial port when the joystick is pressed downwards. */ +char JoystickDownString[] = "Joystick Down\r\n"; + +/** String to print through the virtual serial port when the joystick is pressed left. */ +char JoystickLeftString[] = "Joystick Left\r\n"; + +/** String to print through the virtual serial port when the joystick is pressed right. */ +char JoystickRightString[] = "Joystick Right\r\n"; + +/** String to print through the virtual serial port when the joystick is pressed inwards. */ +char JoystickPressedString[] = "Joystick Pressed\r\n"; + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then + * starts the scheduler to run the application tasks. + */ +int main(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable Clock Division */ + SetSystemClockPrescaler(0); + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + Joystick_Init(); + LEDs_Init(); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); + + /* Initialize Scheduler so that it can be used */ + Scheduler_Init(); + + /* Initialize USB Subsystem */ + USB_Init(); + + /* Scheduling - routine never returns, so put this last in the main function */ + Scheduler_Start(); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs and + * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Connect) +{ + /* Start USB management task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_RUN); + + /* Indicate USB enumerating */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBEnumerating); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via + * the status LEDs and stops the USB management and CDC management tasks. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Disconnect) +{ + /* Stop running CDC and USB management tasks */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(CDC_Task, TASK_STOP); + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_STOP); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host set the current configuration + * of the USB device after enumeration - the device endpoints are configured and the CDC management task started. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_ConfigurationChanged) +{ + /* Setup CDC Notification, Rx and Tx Endpoints */ + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_TX_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK, + ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_RX_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK, + ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + /* Indicate USB connected and ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady); + + /* Start CDC task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(CDC_Task, TASK_RUN); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event. This is used to catch standard and class specific + * control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the CDC control commands, + * which are all issued via the control endpoint), so that they can be handled appropriately for the application. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_UnhandledControlPacket) +{ + uint8_t* LineCodingData = (uint8_t*)&LineCoding; + + /* Process CDC specific control requests */ + switch (bRequest) + { + case REQ_GetLineEncoding: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + /* Acknowedge the SETUP packet, ready for data transfer */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Write the line coding data to the control endpoint */ + Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(LineCodingData, sizeof(CDC_Line_Coding_t)); + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet or clear the host abort */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT(); + } + + break; + case REQ_SetLineEncoding: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + /* Acknowedge the SETUP packet, ready for data transfer */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Read the line coding data in from the host into the global struct */ + Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE(LineCodingData, sizeof(CDC_Line_Coding_t)); + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to clear the last packet from the host */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + case REQ_SetControlLineState: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { +#if 0 + /* NOTE: Here you can read in the line state mask from the host, to get the current state of the output handshake + lines. The mask is read in from the wValue parameter, and can be masked against the CONTROL_LINE_OUT_* masks + to determine the RTS and DTR line states using the following code: + */ + + uint16_t wIndex = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(); + + // Do something with the given line states in wIndex +#endif + + /* Acknowedge the SETUP packet, ready for data transfer */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Send an empty packet to acknowedge the command */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + } +} + +/** Function to manage status updates to the user. This is done via LEDs on the given board, if available, but may be changed to + * log to a serial port, or anything else that is suitable for status updates. + * + * \param CurrentStatus Current status of the system, from the CDC_StatusCodes_t enum + */ +void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus) +{ + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS; + + /* Set the LED mask to the appropriate LED mask based on the given status code */ + switch (CurrentStatus) + { + case Status_USBNotReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1); + break; + case Status_USBEnumerating: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2); + break; + case Status_USBReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4); + break; + } + + /* Set the board LEDs to the new LED mask */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); +} + +/** Function to manage CDC data transmission and reception to and from the host. */ +TASK(CDC_Task) +{ + char* ReportString = NULL; + uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL = Joystick_GetStatus(); + static bool ActionSent = false; + +#if 0 + /* NOTE: Here you can use the notification endpoint to send back line state changes to the host, for the special RS-232 + handshake signal lines (and some error states), via the CONTROL_LINE_IN_* masks and the following code: + */ + USB_Notification_Header_t Notification = (USB_Notification_Header_t) + { + NotificationType: (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE), + Notification: NOTIF_SerialState, + wValue: 0, + wIndex: 0, + wLength: sizeof(uint16_t), + }; + + uint16_t LineStateMask; + + // Set LineStateMask here to a mask of CONTROL_LINE_IN_* masks to set the input handshake line states to send to the host + + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM); + Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&Notification, sizeof(Notification)); + Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&LineStateMask, sizeof(LineStateMask)); + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); +#endif + + /* Determine if a joystick action has occurred */ + if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP) + ReportString = JoystickUpString; + else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN) + ReportString = JoystickDownString; + else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT) + ReportString = JoystickLeftString; + else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT) + ReportString = JoystickRightString; + else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS) + ReportString = JoystickPressedString; + + /* Flag management - Only allow one string to be sent per action */ + if (ReportString == NULL) + { + ActionSent = false; + } + else if (ActionSent == false) + { + ActionSent = true; + + /* Select the Serial Tx Endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_TX_EPNUM); + + /* Write the String to the Endpoint */ + Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(ReportString, strlen(ReportString)); + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + } + + /* Select the Serial Rx Endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_RX_EPNUM); + + /* Throw away any received data from the host */ + if (Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed()) + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); +} diff --git a/Demos/CDC/CDC.h b/Demos/CDC/CDC.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..98f30b52fc9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/CDC/CDC.h @@ -0,0 +1,190 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for CDC.c. + */ + +#ifndef _CDC_H_ +#define _CDC_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + + #include "Descriptors.h" + + #include // Library Version Information + #include // PROGMEM tags readable by the ButtLoad project + #include // USB Functionality + #include // Joystick driver + #include // LEDs driver + #include // Simple scheduler for task management + + /* Macros: */ + /** CDC Class specific request to get the current virtual serial port configuration settings. */ + #define REQ_GetLineEncoding 0x21 + + /** CDC Class specific request to set the current virtual serial port configuration settings. */ + #define REQ_SetLineEncoding 0x20 + + /** CDC Class specific request to set the current virtual serial port handshake line states. */ + #define REQ_SetControlLineState 0x22 + + /** Notification type constant for a change in the virtual serial port handshake line states, for + * use with a USB_Notification_Header_t notification structure when sent to the host via the CDC + * notification endpoint. + */ + #define NOTIF_SerialState 0x20 + + /** Mask for the DTR handshake line for use with the REQ_SetControlLineState class specific request + * from the host, to indicate that the DTR line state should be high. + */ + #define CONTROL_LINE_OUT_DTR (1 << 0) + + /** Mask for the RTS handshake line for use with the REQ_SetControlLineState class specific request + * from the host, to indicate that theRTS line state should be high. + */ + #define CONTROL_LINE_OUT_RTS (1 << 1) + + /** Mask for the DCD handshake line for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification + * from the device to the host, to indicate that the DCD line state is currently high. + */ + #define CONTROL_LINE_IN_DCD (1 << 0) + + /** Mask for the DSR handshake line for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification + * from the device to the host, to indicate that the DSR line state is currently high. + */ + #define CONTROL_LINE_IN_DSR (1 << 1) + + /** Mask for the BREAK handshake line for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification + * from the device to the host, to indicate that the BREAK line state is currently high. + */ + #define CONTROL_LINE_IN_BREAK (1 << 2) + + /** Mask for the RING handshake line for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification + * from the device to the host, to indicate that the RING line state is currently high. + */ + #define CONTROL_LINE_IN_RING (1 << 3) + + /** Mask for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification from the device to the host, + * to indicate that a framing error has ocurred on the virtual serial port. + */ + #define CONTROL_LINE_IN_FRAMEERROR (1 << 4) + + /** Mask for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification from the device to the host, + * to indicate that a parity error has ocurred on the virtual serial port. + */ + #define CONTROL_LINE_IN_PARITYERROR (1 << 5) + + /** Mask for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification from the device to the host, + * to indicate that a data overrun error has ocurred on the virtual serial port. + */ + #define CONTROL_LINE_IN_OVERRUNERROR (1 << 6) + + /* Event Handlers: */ + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Connect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Connect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Disconnect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Disconnect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_ConfigurationChanged event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_ConfigurationChanged); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_UnhandledControlPacket); + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the virtual serial port line encoding settings, for storing the current USART configuration + * as set by the host via a class specific request. + */ + typedef struct + { + uint32_t BaudRateBPS; /**< Baud rate of the virtual serial port, in bits per second */ + uint8_t CharFormat; /**< Character format of the virtual serial port, a value from the + * CDCDevice_CDC_LineCodingFormats_t enum + */ + uint8_t ParityType; /**< Parity setting of the virtual serial port, a value from the + * CDCDevice_LineCodingParity_t enum + */ + uint8_t DataBits; /**< Bits of data per charater of the virtual serial port */ + } CDC_Line_Coding_t; + + /** Type define for a CDC notification, sent to the host via the CDC notification endpoint to indicate a + * change in the device state asynchronously. + */ + typedef struct + { + uint8_t NotificationType; /**< Notification type, a mask of REQDIR_*, REQTYPE_* and REQREC_* constants + * from the library StdRequestType.h header + */ + uint8_t Notification; /**< Notification value, a NOTIF_* constant */ + uint16_t wValue; /**< Notification wValue, notification-specific */ + uint16_t wIndex; /**< Notification wIndex, notification-specific */ + uint16_t wLength; /**< Notification wLength, notification-specific */ + } USB_Notification_Header_t; + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible line encoding formats of a virtual serial port. */ + enum CDCDevice_CDC_LineCodingFormats_t + { + OneStopBit = 0, /**< Each frame contains one stop bit */ + OneAndAHalfStopBits = 1, /**< Each frame contains one and a half stop bits */ + TwoStopBits = 2, /**< Each frame contains two stop bits */ + }; + + /** Enum for the possible line encoding parity settings of a virtual serial port. */ + enum CDCDevice_LineCodingParity_t + { + Parity_None = 0, /**< No parity bit mode on each frame */ + Parity_Odd = 1, /**< Odd parity bit mode on each frame */ + Parity_Even = 2, /**< Even parity bit mode on each frame */ + Parity_Mark = 3, /**< Mark parity bit mode on each frame */ + Parity_Space = 4, /**< Space parity bit mode on each frame */ + }; + + /** Enum for the possible status codes for passing to the UpdateStatus() function. */ + enum CDC_StatusCodes_t + { + Status_USBNotReady = 0, /**< USB is not ready (disconnected from a USB host) */ + Status_USBEnumerating = 1, /**< USB interface is enumerating */ + Status_USBReady = 2, /**< USB interface is connected and ready */ + }; + + /* Tasks: */ + TASK(CDC_Task); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/CDC/CDC.txt b/Demos/CDC/CDC.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..34e1c82a195 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/CDC/CDC.txt @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage Communications Device Class Device (Virtual Serial Port) + * + * Communications Device Class demonstration application. + * This gives a simple reference application for implementing + * a CDC device acting as a virtual serial port. Joystick + * actions are transmitted to the host as strings. The device + * does not respond to serial data sent from the host. + * + * After running this demo for the first time on a new computer, + * you will need to supply the .INF file located in this demo + * project's directory as the device's driver when running under + * Windows. This will enable Windows to use its inbuilt CDC drivers, + * negating the need for custom drivers for the device. Other + * Operating Systems should automatically use their own inbuilt + * CDC-ACM drivers. + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + *
USB Mode:Device
USB Class:Communications Device Class (CDC)
USB Subclass:Abstract Control Model (ACM)
Relevant Standards:USBIF CDC Class Standard
Usable Speeds:Full Speed Mode
+ */ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Demos/CDC/Descriptors.c b/Demos/CDC/Descriptors.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..fa0c79da094 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/CDC/Descriptors.c @@ -0,0 +1,263 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special + * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine + * the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "Descriptors.h" + +/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall + * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the + * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration + * process begins. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor = +{ + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), Type: DTYPE_Device}, + + USBSpecification: VERSION_BCD(01.10), + Class: 0x02, + SubClass: 0x00, + Protocol: 0x00, + + Endpoint0Size: 8, + + VendorID: 0x03EB, + ProductID: 0x2044, + ReleaseNumber: 0x0000, + + ManufacturerStrIndex: 0x01, + ProductStrIndex: 0x02, + SerialNumStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + NumberOfConfigurations: 1 +}; + +/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage + * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces + * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting + * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor = +{ + Config: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), Type: DTYPE_Configuration}, + + TotalConfigurationSize: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t), + TotalInterfaces: 2, + + ConfigurationNumber: 1, + ConfigurationStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + ConfigAttributes: (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED), + + MaxPowerConsumption: USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100) + }, + + CCI_Interface: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface}, + + InterfaceNumber: 0, + AlternateSetting: 0, + + TotalEndpoints: 1, + + Class: 0x02, + SubClass: 0x02, + Protocol: 0x01, + + InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + CDC_Functional_IntHeader: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), Type: 0x24}, + SubType: 0x00, + + Data: {0x01, 0x10} + }, + + CDC_Functional_CallManagement: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), Type: 0x24}, + SubType: 0x01, + + Data: {0x03, 0x01} + }, + + CDC_Functional_AbstractControlManagement: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)), Type: 0x24}, + SubType: 0x02, + + Data: {0x06} + }, + + CDC_Functional_Union: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), Type: 0x24}, + SubType: 0x06, + + Data: {0x00, 0x01} + }, + + ManagementEndpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM), + Attributes: EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + EndpointSize: CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0xFF + }, + + DCI_Interface: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface}, + + InterfaceNumber: 1, + AlternateSetting: 0, + + TotalEndpoints: 2, + + Class: 0x0A, + SubClass: 0x00, + Protocol: 0x00, + + InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + DataOutEndpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | CDC_RX_EPNUM), + Attributes: EP_TYPE_BULK, + EndpointSize: CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0x00 + }, + + DataInEndpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_TX_EPNUM), + Attributes: EP_TYPE_BULK, + EndpointSize: CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0x00 + } +}; + +/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests + * the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate + * via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(1), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG} +}; + +/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable + * form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(11), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"Dean Camera" +}; + +/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form, + * and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(13), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"LUFA CDC Demo" +}; + +/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see StdDescriptors.h + * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given + * to the USB library. When the device recieves a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function + * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the + * USB host. + */ +uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) +{ + const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8); + const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF); + + void* Address = NULL; + uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR; + + switch (DescriptorType) + { + case DTYPE_Device: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(DeviceDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Configuration: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t); + break; + case DTYPE_String: + switch (DescriptorNumber) + { + case 0x00: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(LanguageString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x01: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ManufacturerString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x02: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ProductString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size); + break; + } + + break; + } + + *DescriptorAddress = Address; + return Size; +} diff --git a/Demos/CDC/Descriptors.h b/Demos/CDC/Descriptors.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..bec5e40d4af --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/CDC/Descriptors.h @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Descriptors.c. + */ + +#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_ +#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + + #include + + /* Macros: */ + /** Macro to define a CDC class-specific functional descriptor. CDC functional descriptors have a + * uniform structure but variable sized data payloads, thus cannot be represented accurately by + * a single typedef struct. A macro is used instead so that functional descriptors can be created + * easily by specifying the size of the payload. This allows sizeof() to work correctly. + * + * \param DataSize Size in bytes of the CDC functional descriptor's data payload + */ + #define CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(DataSize) \ + struct \ + { \ + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; \ + uint8_t SubType; \ + uint8_t Data[DataSize]; \ + } + + /** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */ + #define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM 2 + + /** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host data IN endpoint. */ + #define CDC_TX_EPNUM 3 + + /** Endpoint number of the CDC host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */ + #define CDC_RX_EPNUM 4 + + /** Size in bytes of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */ + #define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE 8 + + /** Size in bytes of the CDC data IN and OUT endpoints. */ + #define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE 16 + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the + * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which + * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config; + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t CCI_Interface; + CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2) CDC_Functional_IntHeader; + CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2) CDC_Functional_CallManagement; + CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1) CDC_Functional_AbstractControlManagement; + CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2) CDC_Functional_Union; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t ManagementEndpoint; + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t DCI_Interface; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t DataOutEndpoint; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t DataInEndpoint; + } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) + ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/CDC/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/CDC/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..3493347c50c --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/CDC/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - CDC Device Demo" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek, +# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish, +# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene, +# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command , where is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command , where +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Namespace. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file . + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are +# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values +# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list; +# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which +# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous +# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE +# respectively. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin" + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to the search engine +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be +# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO diff --git a/Demos/CDC/LUFA CDC.inf b/Demos/CDC/LUFA CDC.inf new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..d9d9ed63a97 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/CDC/LUFA CDC.inf @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ +; Windows LUFA CDC Setup File +; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation + +[Version] +Signature="$Windows NT$" +Class=Ports +ClassGuid={4D36E978-E325-11CE-BFC1-08002BE10318} +Provider=%COMPANY% +LayoutFile=layout.inf +DriverVer=06/06/2006,1.0.0.0 + +[Manufacturer] +%MFGNAME% = ManufName + +[DestinationDirs] +DefaultDestDir=12 + +[ManufName] +%Modem3% = Modem3, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2044 + +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +; Windows 2000/XP Sections +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + +[Modem3.nt] +CopyFiles=USBModemCopyFileSection +AddReg=Modem3.nt.AddReg + +[USBModemCopyFileSection] +usbser.sys,,,0x20 + +[Modem3.nt.AddReg] +HKR,,DevLoader,,*ntkern +HKR,,NTMPDriver,,usbser.sys +HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"MsPorts.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider" + +[Modem3.nt.Services] +AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, DriverService + +[DriverService] +DisplayName=%SERVICE% +ServiceType=1 +StartType=3 +ErrorControl=1 +ServiceBinary=%12%\usbser.sys + +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +; String Definitions +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + +[Strings] +COMPANY="LUFA Library" +MFGNAME="Dean Camera" +Modem3="USB Virtual Serial Port" +SERVICE="USB Virtual Serial Port CDC Driver" \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Demos/CDC/makefile b/Demos/CDC/makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..b2bc1e269f7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/CDC/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,702 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# Denver Gingerich +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb1287 + + +# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# Typical values are: +# F_CPU = 1000000 +# F_CPU = 1843200 +# F_CPU = 2000000 +# F_CPU = 3686400 +# F_CPU = 4000000 +# F_CPU = 7372800 +# F_CPU = 8000000 +# F_CPU = 11059200 +# F_CPU = 14745600 +# F_CPU = 16000000 +# F_CPU = 18432000 +# F_CPU = 20000000 +F_CPU = 8000000 + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = CDC + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + Descriptors.c \ + ../../LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.c \ + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = ../../ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS +CDEFS += -DUSB_DEVICE_ONLY -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)" + + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20 +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd +# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500 +# +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf +MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) ) +FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr ) + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +checkhooks: build + @echo + @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events ------- + @$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \ + cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \ + echo "(None)" + @echo ----- End Unhooked LUFA Events ----- + +checklibmode: + @echo + @echo ----------- Library Mode ----------- + @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \ + | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \ + || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)." + @echo ------------------------------------ + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + copy $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom --debug 1 $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end + +clean_binary: + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + +clean_list: + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode begin \ +finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \ +clean clean_list clean_binary program debug \ +gdb-config doxygen dfu flip diff --git a/Demos/CDCHost/CDCHost.aps b/Demos/CDCHost/CDCHost.aps new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..b68991caef7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/CDCHost/CDCHost.aps @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +CDCHost30-Sep-2008 14:05:2030-Sep-2008 14:05:44241030-Sep-2008 14:05:2044, 14, 0, 589AVR GCCC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\CDCHost\falseR00R01R02R03R04R05R06R07R08R09R10R11R12R13R14R15R16R17R18R19R20R21R22R23R24R25R26R27R28R29R30R31000CDCHost.cConfigDescriptor.cCDCHost.hConfigDescriptor.hmakefiledefaultYESmakefileatmega128111CDCHost.elfdefault\1-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enumsdefault1C:\WinAVR-20080512\bin\avr-gcc.exeC:\WinAVR-20080512\utils\bin\make.exe diff --git a/Demos/CDCHost/CDCHost.c b/Demos/CDCHost/CDCHost.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..ac6d89ad116 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/CDCHost/CDCHost.c @@ -0,0 +1,278 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the CDCHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of + * the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + +#include "CDCHost.h" + +/* Project Tags, for reading out using the ButtLoad project */ +BUTTLOADTAG(ProjName, "LUFA CDC Host App"); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildTime, __TIME__); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildDate, __DATE__); +BUTTLOADTAG(LUFAVersion, "LUFA V" LUFA_VERSION_STRING); + +/* Scheduler Task List */ +TASK_LIST +{ + { Task: USB_USBTask , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, + { Task: USB_CDC_Host , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, +}; + + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then + * starts the scheduler to run the application tasks. + */ +int main(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable Clock Division */ + SetSystemClockPrescaler(0); + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + SerialStream_Init(9600, false); + LEDs_Init(); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); + + /* Initialize Scheduler so that it can be used */ + Scheduler_Init(); + + /* Initialize USB Subsystem */ + USB_Init(); + + /* Startup message */ + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_RESET ESC_BG_WHITE ESC_INVERSE_ON ESC_ERASE_DISPLAY + "CDC Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_INVERSE_OFF)); + + /* Scheduling - routine never returns, so put this last in the main function */ + Scheduler_Start(); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and + * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceAttached) +{ + puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n")); + UpdateStatus(Status_USBEnumerating); + + /* Start USB management task to enumerate the device */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_RUN); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and + * stops the library USB task management process. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceUnattached) +{ + /* Stop keyboard and USB management task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_STOP); + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_CDC_Host, TASK_STOP); + + puts_P(PSTR("\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n")); + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully + * enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete) +{ + /* Start CDC Host task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_CDC_Host, TASK_RUN); + + /* Indicate device enumeration complete */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_HostError) +{ + USB_ShutDown(); + + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + UpdateStatus(Status_HardwareError); + for(;;); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occured while + * enumerating an attached USB device. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed) +{ + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"), SubErrorCode); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- In State %d\r\n"), USB_HostState); + + UpdateStatus(Status_EnumerationError); +} + +/** Function to manage status updates to the user. This is done via LEDs on the given board, if available, but may be changed to + * log to a serial port, or anything else that is suitable for status updates. + * + * \param CurrentStatus Current status of the system, from the CDCHost_StatusCodes_t enum + */ +void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus) +{ + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS; + + /* Set the LED mask to the appropriate LED mask based on the given status code */ + switch (CurrentStatus) + { + case Status_USBNotReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1); + break; + case Status_USBEnumerating: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2); + break; + case Status_USBReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED2); + break; + case Status_EnumerationError: + case Status_HardwareError: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3); + break; + } + + /* Set the board LEDs to the new LED mask */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); +} + +/** Task to set the configuration of the attached device after it has been enumerated, and to read in + * data received from the attached CDC device and print it to the serial port. + */ +TASK(USB_CDC_Host) +{ + uint8_t ErrorCode; + + switch (USB_HostState) + { + case HOST_STATE_Addressed: + /* Standard request to set the device configuration to configuration 1 */ + USB_HostRequest = (USB_Host_Request_Header_t) + { + bmRequestType: (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE), + bRequest: REQ_SetConfiguration, + wValue: 1, + wIndex: 0, + wLength: 0, + }; + + /* Send the request, display error and wait for device detatch if request fails */ + if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + { + puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error via status LEDs */ + UpdateStatus(Status_EnumerationError); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + break; + } + + USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured; + break; + case HOST_STATE_Configured: + puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n")); + + /* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */ + if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead) + { + if (ErrorCode == ControlError) + puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n")); + else + puts_P(PSTR("Invalid Device.\r\n")); + + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error via status LEDs */ + UpdateStatus(Status_EnumerationError); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + break; + } + + puts_P(PSTR("CDC Device Enumerated.\r\n")); + + USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Ready; + break; + case HOST_STATE_Ready: + /* Select and the data IN pipe */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(CDC_DATAPIPE_IN); + + /* Check if data is in the pipe */ + if (Pipe_ReadWriteAllowed()) + { + /* Get the length of the pipe data, and create a new buffer to hold it */ + uint16_t BufferLength = Pipe_BytesInPipe(); + uint8_t Buffer[BufferLength]; + + /* Read in the pipe data to the tempoary buffer */ + Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(Buffer, BufferLength); + + /* Clear the pipe after it is read, ready for the next packet */ + Pipe_ClearCurrentBank(); + + /* Print out the buffer contents to the USART */ + for (uint16_t BufferByte = 0; BufferByte < BufferLength; BufferByte++) + putchar(Buffer[BufferByte]); + } + + /* Select and unfreeze the notification pipe */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(CDC_NOTIFICATIONPIPE); + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + /* Check if data is in the pipe */ + if (Pipe_ReadWriteAllowed()) + { + /* Discard the event notification */ + Pipe_ClearCurrentBank(); + } + + /* Freeze notification IN pipe after use */ + Pipe_Freeze(); + + break; + } +} diff --git a/Demos/CDCHost/CDCHost.h b/Demos/CDCHost/CDCHost.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..2adbefd3079 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/CDCHost/CDCHost.h @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for CDCHost.c. + */ + +#ifndef _CDC_HOST_H_ +#define _CDC_HOST_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + #include + + #include // Library Version Information + #include // PROGMEM tags readable by the ButtLoad project + #include // ANSI Terminal Escape Codes + #include // USB Functionality + #include // Serial stream driver + #include // LEDs driver + #include // Simple scheduler for task management + + #include "ConfigDescriptor.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Pipe number for the CDC data IN pipe */ + #define CDC_DATAPIPE_IN 1 + + /** Pipe number for the CDC data OUT pipe */ + #define CDC_DATAPIPE_OUT 2 + + /** Pipe number for the CDC notification pipe */ + #define CDC_NOTIFICATIONPIPE 3 + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible status codes for passing to the UpdateStatus() function. */ + enum CDCHost_StatusCodes_t + { + Status_USBNotReady = 0, /**< USB is not ready (disconnected from a USB device) */ + Status_USBEnumerating = 1, /**< USB interface is enumerating */ + Status_USBReady = 2, /**< USB interface is connected and ready */ + Status_EnumerationError = 3, /**< Software error while enumerating the attached USB device */ + Status_HardwareError = 4, /**< Hardware error while enumerating the attached USB device */ + }; + + /* Task Definitions: */ + TASK(USB_CDC_Host); + + /* Event Handlers: */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceAttached); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceUnattached); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_HostError); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/CDCHost/CDCHost.txt b/Demos/CDCHost/CDCHost.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..5f8dc8cc020 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/CDCHost/CDCHost.txt @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage CDC Host Demo + * + * CDC host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference application + * for implementing a USB CDC host, for CDC devices using the standard ACM profile. + * + * This demo prints out received CDC data through the serial port. + * + * Not that this demo is only compatible with devices which report the correct CDC + * and ACM class, subclass and protocol values. Most USB-Serial cables have vendor + * specific features, thus use vendor-specfic class/subclass/protocol codes to force + * the user to use specialized drivers. This demo is not compaible with such devices. + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + *
USB Mode:Host
USB Class:Communications Device Class (CDC)
USB Subclass:Abstract Control Model (ACM)
Relevant Standards:USBIF CDC Class Standard
Usable Speeds:Full Speed Mode
+ */ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Demos/CDCHost/ConfigDescriptor.c b/Demos/CDCHost/ConfigDescriptor.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..eb80ec3ea8b --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/CDCHost/ConfigDescriptor.c @@ -0,0 +1,212 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations + * needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special computer-readable structures + * which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "ConfigDescriptor.h" + +/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This + * routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate + * with compatible devices. + * + * This routine searches for a CDC interface descriptor containing bulk data IN and OUT endpoints, and an interrupt event endpoint. + * + * \return An error code from the CDCHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum. + */ +uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void) +{ + uint8_t* ConfigDescriptorData; + uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize; + uint8_t FoundEndpoints = 0; + + /* Get Configuration Descriptor size from the device */ + if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(&ConfigDescriptorSize, NULL) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + return ControlError; + + /* Ensure that the Configuration Descriptor isn't too large */ + if (ConfigDescriptorSize > MAX_CONFIG_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE) + return DescriptorTooLarge; + + /* Allocate enough memory for the entire config descriptor */ + ConfigDescriptorData = alloca(ConfigDescriptorSize); + + /* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */ + USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(&ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData); + + /* Validate returned data - ensure first entry is a configuration header descriptor */ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(ConfigDescriptorData) != DTYPE_Configuration) + return InvalidConfigDataReturned; + + /* Get the CDC interface from the configuration descriptor */ + if (USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData, NextCDCInterface)) + { + /* Descriptor not found, error out */ + return NoCDCInterfaceFound; + } + + /* Get the IN and OUT data endpoints for the CDC interface */ + while (FoundEndpoints != ((1 << CDC_NOTIFICATIONPIPE) | (1 << CDC_DATAPIPE_IN) | (1 << CDC_DATAPIPE_OUT))) + { + /* Fetch the next bulk or interrupt endpoint from the current CDC interface */ + if (USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData, + NextInterfaceCDCDataEndpoint)) + { + /* Get the next CDC interface from the configuration descriptor (CDC class has two CDC interfaces) */ + if (USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData, NextCDCInterface)) + { + /* Descriptor not found, error out */ + return NoCDCInterfaceFound; + } + + /* Fetch the next bulk or interrupt endpoint from the current CDC interface */ + if (USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData, + NextInterfaceCDCDataEndpoint)) + { + /* Descriptor not found, error out */ + return NoEndpointFound; + } + } + + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t); + + /* Check if the found endpoint is a interrupt or bulk type descriptor */ + if ((EndpointData->Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK) == EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT) + { + /* If the endpoint is a IN type interrupt endpoint */ + if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN) + { + /* Configure the notification pipe */ + Pipe_ConfigurePipe(CDC_NOTIFICATIONPIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, PIPE_TOKEN_IN, + EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE); + + Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests(); + Pipe_SetInterruptPeriod(EndpointData->PollingIntervalMS); + + /* Set the flag indicating that the notification pipe has been found */ + FoundEndpoints |= (1 << CDC_NOTIFICATIONPIPE); + } + } + else + { + /* Check if the endpoint is a bulk IN or bulk OUT endpoint */ + if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN) + { + /* Configure the data IN pipe */ + Pipe_ConfigurePipe(CDC_DATAPIPE_IN, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_IN, + EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE); + + Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests(); + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + /* Set the flag indicating that the data IN pipe has been found */ + FoundEndpoints |= (1 << CDC_DATAPIPE_IN); + } + else + { + /* Configure the data OUT pipe */ + Pipe_ConfigurePipe(CDC_DATAPIPE_OUT, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_OUT, + EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE); + + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + /* Set the flag indicating that the data OUT pipe has been found */ + FoundEndpoints |= (1 << CDC_DATAPIPE_OUT); + } + } + } + + /* Valid data found, return success */ + return SuccessfulConfigRead; +} + +/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's + * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration + * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found. + * + * This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct CDC Class, Subclass and Protocol values. + * + * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextCDCInterface) +{ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface) + { + /* Check the CDC descriptor class, subclass and protocol, break out if correct control interface found */ + if ((DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Class == CDC_CONTROL_CLASS) && + (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).SubClass == CDC_CONTROL_SUBCLASS) && + (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Protocol == CDC_CONTROL_PROTOCOL)) + { + return Descriptor_Search_Found; + } + + /* Check the CDC descriptor class, subclass and protocol, break out if correct data interface found */ + if ((DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Class == CDC_DATA_CLASS) && + (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).SubClass == CDC_DATA_SUBCLASS) && + (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Protocol == CDC_DATA_PROTOCOL)) + { + return Descriptor_Search_Found; + } + } + + return Descriptor_Search_NotFound; +} + +/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's + * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration + * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found. + * + * This comparator searches for the next bulk IN or OUT endpoint, or interrupt IN endpoint within the current interface, + * aborting the search if another interface descriptor is found before the required endpoint (so that it may be compared + * using a different comparator to determine if it is another CDC class interface). + * + * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextInterfaceCDCDataEndpoint) +{ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint) + { + uint8_t EndpointType = (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t).Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK); + + if ((EndpointType == EP_TYPE_BULK) || (EndpointType == EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT)) + return Descriptor_Search_Found; + } + else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface) + { + return Descriptor_Search_Fail; + } + + return Descriptor_Search_NotFound; +} diff --git a/Demos/CDCHost/ConfigDescriptor.h b/Demos/CDCHost/ConfigDescriptor.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..04d71aade19 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/CDCHost/ConfigDescriptor.h @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c. + */ + +#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_ +#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include // USB Functionality + #include // Configuration Descriptor Parser + + #include "CDCHost.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Interface Class value for the CDC class */ + #define CDC_CONTROL_CLASS 0x02 + + /** Interface Class value for the CDC Communication Interface subclass */ + #define CDC_CONTROL_SUBCLASS 0x02 + + /** Interface Class value for the CDC protocol */ + #define CDC_CONTROL_PROTOCOL 0x01 + + /** Interface Class value for the CDC data class */ + #define CDC_DATA_CLASS 0x0A + + /** Interface Class value for the CDC data subclass (unused) */ + #define CDC_DATA_SUBCLASS 0x00 + + /** Interface Class value for the CDC data protocol */ + #define CDC_DATA_PROTOCOL 0x00 + + /** Maximum size of a device configuration descriptor which can be processed by the host, in bytes */ + #define MAX_CONFIG_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE 512 + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible return codes of the ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */ + enum CDCHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t + { + SuccessfulConfigRead = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */ + ControlError = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */ + DescriptorTooLarge = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */ + InvalidConfigDataReturned = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */ + NoCDCInterfaceFound = 4, /**< A compatible CDC interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */ + NoEndpointFound = 5, /**< Cmpatible CDC endpoints were not found in the device's CDC interface */ + }; + + /* Configuration Descriptor Comparison Functions: */ + DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextCDCInterface); + DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextInterfaceCDCDataEndpoint); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/CDCHost/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/CDCHost/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..320951a5fb1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/CDCHost/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - CDC Host Demo" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek, +# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish, +# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene, +# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command , where is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command , where +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Namespace. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file . + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are +# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values +# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list; +# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which +# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous +# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE +# respectively. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin" + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to the search engine +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be +# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO diff --git a/Demos/CDCHost/makefile b/Demos/CDCHost/makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..1152a891af8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/CDCHost/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,705 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# Denver Gingerich +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb1287 + + +# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# Typical values are: +# F_CPU = 1000000 +# F_CPU = 1843200 +# F_CPU = 2000000 +# F_CPU = 3686400 +# F_CPU = 4000000 +# F_CPU = 7372800 +# F_CPU = 8000000 +# F_CPU = 11059200 +# F_CPU = 14745600 +# F_CPU = 16000000 +# F_CPU = 18432000 +# F_CPU = 20000000 +F_CPU = 8000000 + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = CDCHost + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + ConfigDescriptor.c \ + ../../LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial_Stream.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/ConfigDescriptor.c \ + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = ../../ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS +CDEFS += -DUSB_HOST_ONLY -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)" + + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20 +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd +# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500 +# +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf +MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) ) +FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr ) + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +checkhooks: build + @echo + @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events ------- + @$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \ + cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \ + echo "(None)" + @echo ----- End Unhooked LUFA Events ----- + +checklibmode: + @echo + @echo ----------- Library Mode ----------- + @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \ + | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \ + || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)." + @echo ------------------------------------ + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + copy $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom --debug 1 $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +## Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end + +clean_binary: + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + +clean_list: + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode begin \ +finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \ +clean clean_list clean_binary program debug \ +gdb-config doxygen dfu flip diff --git a/Demos/DualCDC/Descriptors.c b/Demos/DualCDC/Descriptors.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..4f74b138b73 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/DualCDC/Descriptors.c @@ -0,0 +1,385 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special + * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine + * the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "Descriptors.h" + +/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall + * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the + * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration + * process begins. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor = +{ + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), Type: DTYPE_Device}, + + USBSpecification: VERSION_BCD(01.10), + Class: 0xEF, + SubClass: 0x02, + Protocol: 0x01, + + Endpoint0Size: 8, + + VendorID: 0x03EB, + ProductID: 0x204E, + ReleaseNumber: 0x0000, + + ManufacturerStrIndex: 0x01, + ProductStrIndex: 0x02, + SerialNumStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + NumberOfConfigurations: 1 +}; + +/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage + * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces + * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting + * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor = +{ + Config: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), Type: DTYPE_Configuration}, + + TotalConfigurationSize: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t), + TotalInterfaces: 4, + + ConfigurationNumber: 1, + ConfigurationStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + ConfigAttributes: (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED), + + MaxPowerConsumption: USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100) + }, + + IAD1: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_Association_t), Type: DTYPE_InterfaceAssociation}, + + FirstInterfaceIndex: 0, + TotalInterfaces: 2, + + Class: 0x02, + SubClass: 0x02, + Protocol: 0x01, + + IADStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + CDC1_CCI_Interface: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface}, + + InterfaceNumber: 0, + AlternateSetting: 0, + + TotalEndpoints: 1, + + Class: 0x02, + SubClass: 0x02, + Protocol: 0x01, + + InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + CDC1_Functional_IntHeader: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), Type: 0x24}, + SubType: 0x00, + + Data: {0x01, 0x10} + }, + + CDC1_Functional_CallManagement: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), Type: 0x24}, + SubType: 0x01, + + Data: {0x03, 0x01} + }, + + CDC1_Functional_AbstractControlManagement: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)), Type: 0x24}, + SubType: 0x02, + + Data: {0x06} + }, + + CDC1_Functional_Union: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), Type: 0x24}, + SubType: 0x06, + + Data: {0x00, 0x01} + }, + + CDC1_ManagementEndpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC1_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM), + Attributes: EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + EndpointSize: CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0xFF + }, + + CDC1_DCI_Interface: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface}, + + InterfaceNumber: 1, + AlternateSetting: 0, + + TotalEndpoints: 2, + + Class: 0x0A, + SubClass: 0x00, + Protocol: 0x00, + + InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + CDC1_DataOutEndpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | CDC1_RX_EPNUM), + Attributes: EP_TYPE_BULK, + EndpointSize: CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0x00 + }, + + CDC1_DataInEndpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC1_TX_EPNUM), + Attributes: EP_TYPE_BULK, + EndpointSize: CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0x00 + }, + + IAD2: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_Association_t), Type: DTYPE_InterfaceAssociation}, + + FirstInterfaceIndex: 2, + TotalInterfaces: 2, + + Class: 0x02, + SubClass: 0x02, + Protocol: 0x01, + + IADStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + CDC2_CCI_Interface: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface}, + + InterfaceNumber: 2, + AlternateSetting: 0, + + TotalEndpoints: 1, + + Class: 0x02, + SubClass: 0x02, + Protocol: 0x01, + + InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + CDC2_Functional_IntHeader: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), Type: 0x24}, + SubType: 0x00, + + Data: {0x01, 0x10} + }, + + CDC2_Functional_CallManagement: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), Type: 0x24}, + SubType: 0x01, + + Data: {0x03, 0x03} + }, + + CDC2_Functional_AbstractControlManagement: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)), Type: 0x24}, + SubType: 0x02, + + Data: {0x06} + }, + + CDC2_Functional_Union: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), Type: 0x24}, + SubType: 0x06, + + Data: {0x02, 0x03} + }, + + CDC2_ManagementEndpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC2_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM), + Attributes: EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + EndpointSize: CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0xFF + }, + + CDC2_DCI_Interface: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface}, + + InterfaceNumber: 3, + AlternateSetting: 0, + + TotalEndpoints: 2, + + Class: 0x0A, + SubClass: 0x00, + Protocol: 0x00, + + InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + CDC2_DataOutEndpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | CDC2_RX_EPNUM), + Attributes: EP_TYPE_BULK, + EndpointSize: CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0x00 + }, + + CDC2_DataInEndpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC2_TX_EPNUM), + Attributes: EP_TYPE_BULK, + EndpointSize: CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0x00 + } +}; + +/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests + * the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate + * via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(1), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG} +}; + +/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable + * form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(11), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"Dean Camera" +}; + +/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form, + * and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(13), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"LUFA Dual CDC Demo" +}; + +/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see StdDescriptors.h + * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given + * to the USB library. When the device recieves a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function + * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the + * USB host. + */ +uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) +{ + const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8); + const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF); + + void* Address = NULL; + uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR; + + switch (DescriptorType) + { + case DTYPE_Device: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(DeviceDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Configuration: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t); + break; + case DTYPE_String: + switch (DescriptorNumber) + { + case 0x00: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(LanguageString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x01: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ManufacturerString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x02: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ProductString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size); + break; + } + + break; + } + + *DescriptorAddress = Address; + return Size; +} diff --git a/Demos/DualCDC/Descriptors.h b/Demos/DualCDC/Descriptors.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..7bbe52fe3cb --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/DualCDC/Descriptors.h @@ -0,0 +1,118 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Descriptors.c. + */ + +#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_ +#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + + #include + + /* Macros: */ + /** Macro to define a CDC class-specific functional descriptor. CDC functional descriptors have a + * uniform structure but variable sized data payloads, thus cannot be represented accurately by + * a single typedef struct. A macro is used instead so that functional descriptors can be created + * easily by specifying the size of the payload. This allows sizeof() to work correctly. + * + * \param DataSize Size in bytes of the CDC functional descriptor's data payload + */ + #define CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(DataSize) \ + struct \ + { \ + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; \ + uint8_t SubType; \ + uint8_t Data[DataSize]; \ + } + + /** Endpoint number of the first CDC interface's device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */ + #define CDC1_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM 3 + + /** Endpoint number of the first CDC interface's device-to-host data IN endpoint. */ + #define CDC1_TX_EPNUM 1 + + /** Endpoint number of the first CDC interface's host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */ + #define CDC1_RX_EPNUM 2 + + /** Endpoint number of the second CDC interface's device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */ + #define CDC2_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM 4 + + /** Endpoint number of the second CDC interface's device-to-host data IN endpoint. */ + #define CDC2_TX_EPNUM 5 + + /** Endpoint number of the second CDC interface's host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */ + #define CDC2_RX_EPNUM 6 + + /** Size in bytes of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoints. */ + #define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE 8 + + /** Size in bytes of the CDC data IN and OUT endpoints. */ + #define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE 16 + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the + * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which + * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config; + USB_Descriptor_Interface_Association_t IAD1; + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t CDC1_CCI_Interface; + CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2) CDC1_Functional_IntHeader; + CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2) CDC1_Functional_CallManagement; + CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1) CDC1_Functional_AbstractControlManagement; + CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2) CDC1_Functional_Union; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t CDC1_ManagementEndpoint; + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t CDC1_DCI_Interface; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t CDC1_DataOutEndpoint; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t CDC1_DataInEndpoint; + USB_Descriptor_Interface_Association_t IAD2; + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t CDC2_CCI_Interface; + CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2) CDC2_Functional_IntHeader; + CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2) CDC2_Functional_CallManagement; + CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1) CDC2_Functional_AbstractControlManagement; + CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2) CDC2_Functional_Union; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t CDC2_ManagementEndpoint; + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t CDC2_DCI_Interface; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t CDC2_DataOutEndpoint; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t CDC2_DataInEndpoint; + } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) + ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/DualCDC/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/DualCDC/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..7b3b741761c --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/DualCDC/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Dual CDC Device Demo" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek, +# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish, +# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene, +# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command , where is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command , where +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Namespace. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file . + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are +# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values +# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list; +# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which +# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous +# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE +# respectively. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin" + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to the search engine +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be +# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO diff --git a/Demos/DualCDC/DualCDC.aps b/Demos/DualCDC/DualCDC.aps new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..276e7435640 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/DualCDC/DualCDC.aps @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +DualCDC30-Sep-2008 14:06:0330-Sep-2008 14:06:18241030-Sep-2008 14:06:0344, 14, 0, 589AVR GCCC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\DualCDC\falseR00R01R02R03R04R05R06R07R08R09R10R11R12R13R14R15R16R17R18R19R20R21R22R23R24R25R26R27R28R29R30R31Auto000Descriptors.cDualCDC.cDescriptors.hDualCDC.hmakefiledefaultYESmakefileatmega128111DualCDC.elfdefault\1-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enumsdefault1C:\WinAVR-20080512\bin\avr-gcc.exeC:\WinAVR-20080512\utils\bin\make.exe diff --git a/Demos/DualCDC/DualCDC.c b/Demos/DualCDC/DualCDC.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..90f00997ee8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/DualCDC/DualCDC.c @@ -0,0 +1,358 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the DualCDC demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and + * is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + +#include "DualCDC.h" + +/* Project Tags, for reading out using the ButtLoad project */ +BUTTLOADTAG(ProjName, "LUFA DualCDC App"); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildTime, __TIME__); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildDate, __DATE__); +BUTTLOADTAG(LUFAVersion, "LUFA V" LUFA_VERSION_STRING); + +/* Scheduler Task List */ +TASK_LIST +{ + { Task: USB_USBTask , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, + { Task: CDC1_Task , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, + { Task: CDC2_Task , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, +}; + +/* Globals: */ +/** Contains the current baud rate and other settings of the first virtual serial port. While this demo does not use + * the physical USART and thus does not use these settings, they must still be retained and returned to the host + * upon request or the host will assume the device is non-functional. + * + * These values are set by the host via a class-specific request, however they are not required to be used accurately. + * It is possible to completely ignore these value or use other settings as the host is completely unaware of the physical + * serial link characteristics and instead sends and recieves data in endpoint streams. + */ +CDC_Line_Coding_t LineCoding1 = { BaudRateBPS: 9600, + CharFormat: OneStopBit, + ParityType: Parity_None, + DataBits: 8 }; + +/** Contains the current baud rate and other settings of the second virtual serial port. While this demo does not use + * the physical USART and thus does not use these settings, they must still be retained and returned to the host + * upon request or the host will assume the device is non-functional. + * + * These values are set by the host via a class-specific request, however they are not required to be used accurately. + * It is possible to completely ignore these value or use other settings as the host is completely unaware of the physical + * serial link characteristics and instead sends and recieves data in endpoint streams. + */ +CDC_Line_Coding_t LineCoding2 = { BaudRateBPS: 9600, + CharFormat: OneStopBit, + ParityType: Parity_None, + DataBits: 8 }; + +/** String to print through the first virtual serial port when the joystick is pressed upwards. */ +char JoystickUpString[] = "Joystick Up\r\n"; + +/** String to print through the first virtual serial port when the joystick is pressed downwards. */ +char JoystickDownString[] = "Joystick Down\r\n"; + +/** String to print through the first virtual serial port when the joystick is pressed left. */ +char JoystickLeftString[] = "Joystick Left\r\n"; + +/** String to print through the first virtual serial port when the joystick is pressed right. */ +char JoystickRightString[] = "Joystick Right\r\n"; + +/** String to print through the first virtual serial port when the joystick is pressed inwards. */ +char JoystickPressedString[] = "Joystick Pressed\r\n"; + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then + * starts the scheduler to run the application tasks. + */ +int main(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable Clock Division */ + SetSystemClockPrescaler(0); + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + Joystick_Init(); + LEDs_Init(); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); + + /* Initialize Scheduler so that it can be used */ + Scheduler_Init(); + + /* Initialize USB Subsystem */ + USB_Init(); + + /* Scheduling - routine never returns, so put this last in the main function */ + Scheduler_Start(); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs and + * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Connect) +{ + /* Start USB management task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_RUN); + + /* Indicate USB enumerating */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBEnumerating); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via + * the status LEDs and stops the USB management and CDC management tasks. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Disconnect) +{ + /* Stop running CDC and USB management tasks */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(CDC1_Task, TASK_STOP); + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(CDC2_Task, TASK_STOP); + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_STOP); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host set the current configuration + * of the USB device after enumeration - the device endpoints are configured and the CDC management tasks are started. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_ConfigurationChanged) +{ + /* Setup CDC Notification, Rx and Tx Endpoints for the first CDC */ + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC1_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC1_TX_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK, + ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC1_RX_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK, + ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + /* Setup CDC Notification, Rx and Tx Endpoints for the second CDC */ + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC2_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC2_TX_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK, + ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC2_RX_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK, + ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + /* Indicate USB connected and ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady); + + /* Start CDC tasks */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(CDC1_Task, TASK_RUN); + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(CDC2_Task, TASK_RUN); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event. This is used to catch standard and class specific + * control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the CDC control commands, + * which are all issued via the control endpoint), so that they can be handled appropriately for the application. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_UnhandledControlPacket) +{ + uint8_t* LineCodingData; + + /* Discard the unused wValue parameter */ + Endpoint_Ignore_Word(); + + /* wIndex indicates the interface being controlled */ + uint16_t wIndex = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(); + + /* Determine which interface's Line Coding data is being set from the wIndex parameter */ + LineCodingData = (wIndex == 0) ? (uint8_t*)&LineCoding1 : (uint8_t*)&LineCoding2; + + /* Process CDC specific control requests */ + switch (bRequest) + { + case REQ_GetLineEncoding: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + /* Acknowedge the SETUP packet, ready for data transfer */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Write the line coding data to the control endpoint */ + Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(LineCodingData, sizeof(CDC_Line_Coding_t)); + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet or clear the host abort */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT(); + } + + break; + case REQ_SetLineEncoding: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + /* Acknowedge the SETUP packet, ready for data transfer */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Read the line coding data in from the host into the global struct */ + Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE(LineCodingData, sizeof(CDC_Line_Coding_t)); + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to clear the last packet from the host */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + case REQ_SetControlLineState: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + /* Acknowedge the SETUP packet, ready for data transfer */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Send an empty packet to acknowedge the command (currently unused) */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + } +} + +/** Function to manage status updates to the user. This is done via LEDs on the given board, if available, but may be changed to + * log to a serial port, or anything else that is suitable for status updates. + * + * \param CurrentStatus Current status of the system, from the DualCDC_StatusCodes_t enum + */ +void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus) +{ + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS; + + /* Set the LED mask to the appropriate LED mask based on the given status code */ + switch (CurrentStatus) + { + case Status_USBNotReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1); + break; + case Status_USBEnumerating: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2); + break; + case Status_USBReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4); + break; + } + + /* Set the board LEDs to the new LED mask */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); +} + +/** Function to manage CDC data transmission and reception to and from the host for the first CDC interface, which sends joystick + * movements to the host as ASCII strings. + */ +TASK(CDC1_Task) +{ + char* ReportString = NULL; + uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL = Joystick_GetStatus(); + static bool ActionSent = false; + + /* Determine if a joystick action has occurred */ + if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP) + ReportString = JoystickUpString; + else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN) + ReportString = JoystickDownString; + else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT) + ReportString = JoystickLeftString; + else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT) + ReportString = JoystickRightString; + else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS) + ReportString = JoystickPressedString; + + /* Flag management - Only allow one string to be sent per action */ + if (ReportString == NULL) + { + ActionSent = false; + } + else if (ActionSent == false) + { + ActionSent = true; + + /* Select the Serial Tx Endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC1_TX_EPNUM); + + /* Write the String to the Endpoint */ + Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(ReportString, strlen(ReportString)); + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + } + + /* Select the Serial Rx Endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC1_RX_EPNUM); + + /* Throw away any received data from the host */ + if (Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed()) + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); +} + +/** Function to manage CDC data transmission and reception to and from the host for the second CDC interface, which echos back + * all data sent to it from the host. + */ +TASK(CDC2_Task) +{ + /* Select the Serial Rx Endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC2_RX_EPNUM); + + /* Check to see if any data has been received */ + if (Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed()) + { + /* Create a temp buffer big enough to hold the incomming endpoint packet */ + uint8_t Buffer[Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint()]; + + /* Remember how large the incomming packet is */ + uint16_t DataLength = Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint(); + + /* Read in the incomming packet into the buffer */ + Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&Buffer, DataLength); + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + + /* Select the Serial Tx Endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC2_TX_EPNUM); + + /* Write the received data to the endpoint */ + Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&Buffer, DataLength); + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + } +} diff --git a/Demos/DualCDC/DualCDC.h b/Demos/DualCDC/DualCDC.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..5a01e07f78d --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/DualCDC/DualCDC.h @@ -0,0 +1,126 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for DualCDC.c. + */ + +#ifndef _DUAL_CDC_H_ +#define _DUAL_CDC_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + + #include "Descriptors.h" + + #include // Library Version Information + #include // PROGMEM tags readable by the ButtLoad project + #include // USB Functionality + #include // Joystick driver + #include // LEDs driver + #include // Simple scheduler for task management + + /* Macros: */ + /** CDC Class specific request to get the current virtual serial port configuration settings. */ + #define REQ_GetLineEncoding 0x21 + + /** CDC Class specific request to set the current virtual serial port configuration settings. */ + #define REQ_SetLineEncoding 0x20 + + /** CDC Class specific request to set the current virtual serial port handshake line states. */ + #define REQ_SetControlLineState 0x22 + + /* Event Handlers: */ + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Connect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Connect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Disconnect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Disconnect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_ConfigurationChanged event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_ConfigurationChanged); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_UnhandledControlPacket); + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the virtual serial port line encoding settings, for storing the current USART configuration + * as set by the host via a class specific request. + */ + typedef struct + { + uint32_t BaudRateBPS; /**< Baud rate of the virtual serial port, in bits per second */ + uint8_t CharFormat; /**< Character format of the virtual serial port, a value from the + * CDCDevice_CDC_LineCodingFormats_t enum + */ + uint8_t ParityType; /**< Parity setting of the virtual serial port, a value from the + * CDCDevice_LineCodingParity_t enum + */ + uint8_t DataBits; /**< Bits of data per charater of the virtual serial port */ + } CDC_Line_Coding_t; + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible line encoding formats of a virtual serial port. */ + enum CDCDevice_CDC_LineCodingFormats_t + { + OneStopBit = 0, /**< Each frame contains one stop bit */ + OneAndAHalfStopBits = 1, /**< Each frame contains one and a half stop bits */ + TwoStopBits = 2, /**< Each frame contains two stop bits */ + }; + + /** Enum for the possible line encoding parity settings of a virtual serial port. */ + enum CDCDevice_LineCodingParity_t + { + Parity_None = 0, /**< No parity bit mode on each frame */ + Parity_Odd = 1, /**< Odd parity bit mode on each frame */ + Parity_Even = 2, /**< Even parity bit mode on each frame */ + Parity_Mark = 3, /**< Mark parity bit mode on each frame */ + Parity_Space = 4, /**< Space parity bit mode on each frame */ + }; + + /** Enum for the possible status codes for passing to the UpdateStatus() function. */ + enum DualCDC_StatusCodes_t + { + Status_USBNotReady = 0, /**< USB is not ready (disconnected from a USB host) */ + Status_USBEnumerating = 1, /**< USB interface is enumerating */ + Status_USBReady = 2, /**< USB interface is connected and ready */ + }; + + /* Tasks: */ + TASK(CDC1_Task); + TASK(CDC2_Task); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/DualCDC/DualCDC.txt b/Demos/DualCDC/DualCDC.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..aebbec3531b --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/DualCDC/DualCDC.txt @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage Dual Communications Device Class Device (Dual Virtual Serial Port) + * + * Dual Communications Device Class demonstration application. + * This gives a simple reference application for implementing + * a compound device with dual CDC functions acting as a pair + * of virtual serial ports. This demo uses Interface Association + * Descriptors to link together the pair of related CDC + * descriptors for each virtual serial port, which may not be + * supported in all OSes - Windows Vista is supported, as is + * XP (although the latter may need a hotfix to function). + * + * Joystick actions are transmitted to the host as strings + * through the first serial port. The device does not respond to + * serial data sent from the host in the first serial port. + * + * The second serial port echoes back data sent from the host. + * + * After running this demo for the first time on a new computer, + * you will need to supply the .INF file located in this demo + * project's directory as the device's driver when running under + * Windows. This will enable Windows to use its inbuilt CDC drivers, + * negating the need for custom drivers for the device. Other + * Operating Systems should automatically use their own inbuilt + * CDC-ACM drivers. + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + *
USB Mode:Device
USB Class:Miscellaneous Device Class( Sub-Interface: Communications Device Class (CDC) )
USB Subclass:Common Class( Sub-Interface: Abstract Control Model (ACM) )
Relevant Standards:USBIF Interface Association Descriptor ECNUSBIF CDC Class Standard
Usable Speeds:Full Speed Mode
+ */ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Demos/DualCDC/LUFA DualCDC.inf b/Demos/DualCDC/LUFA DualCDC.inf new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..10ba560f82d --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/DualCDC/LUFA DualCDC.inf @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ +; Windows LUFA Dual CDC Setup File +; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation + +[Version] +Signature="$Windows NT$" +Class=Ports +ClassGuid={4D36E978-E325-11CE-BFC1-08002BE10318} +Provider=%COMPANY% +LayoutFile=layout.inf +DriverVer=06/06/2006,1.0.0.0 + +[Manufacturer] +%MFGNAME% = ManufName + +[DestinationDirs] +DefaultDestDir=12 + +[ManufName] +%Modem3% = Modem3, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204E&MI_00 +%Modem3% = Modem3, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204E&MI_02 + +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +; Windows 2000/XP Sections +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + +[Modem3.nt] +CopyFiles=USBModemCopyFileSection +AddReg=Modem3.nt.AddReg + +[USBModemCopyFileSection] +usbser.sys,,,0x20 + +[Modem3.nt.AddReg] +HKR,,DevLoader,,*ntkern +HKR,,NTMPDriver,,usbser.sys +HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"MsPorts.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider" + +[Modem3.nt.Services] +AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, DriverService + +[DriverService] +DisplayName=%SERVICE% +ServiceType=1 +StartType=3 +ErrorControl=1 +ServiceBinary=%12%\usbser.sys + +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +; String Definitions +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + +[Strings] +COMPANY="LUFA Library" +MFGNAME="Dean Camera" +Modem3="USB Virtual Serial Port" +SERVICE="USB Virtual Serial Port CDC Driver" \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Demos/DualCDC/makefile b/Demos/DualCDC/makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..50d8efea160 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/DualCDC/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,702 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# Denver Gingerich +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb1287 + + +# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# Typical values are: +# F_CPU = 1000000 +# F_CPU = 1843200 +# F_CPU = 2000000 +# F_CPU = 3686400 +# F_CPU = 4000000 +# F_CPU = 7372800 +# F_CPU = 8000000 +# F_CPU = 11059200 +# F_CPU = 14745600 +# F_CPU = 16000000 +# F_CPU = 18432000 +# F_CPU = 20000000 +F_CPU = 8000000 + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = DualCDC + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + Descriptors.c \ + ../../LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.c \ + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = ../../ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS +CDEFS += -DUSB_DEVICE_ONLY -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)" + + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20 +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd +# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500 +# +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf +MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) ) +FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr ) + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +checkhooks: build + @echo + @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events ------- + @$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \ + cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \ + echo "(None)" + @echo ----- End Unhooked LUFA Events ----- + +checklibmode: + @echo + @echo ----------- Library Mode ----------- + @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \ + | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \ + || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)." + @echo ------------------------------------ + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + copy $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom --debug 1 $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end + +clean_binary: + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + +clean_list: + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode begin \ +finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \ +clean clean_list clean_binary program debug \ +gdb-config doxygen dfu flip diff --git a/Demos/Joystick/Descriptors.c b/Demos/Joystick/Descriptors.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..36e644c26d7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Joystick/Descriptors.c @@ -0,0 +1,250 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special + * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine + * the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "Descriptors.h" + +/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the + * USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This + * descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding) + * the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for + * more details on HID report descriptors. + */ +USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM JoystickReport[] = +{ + 0x05, 0x01, /* Usage Page (Generic Desktop) */ + 0x09, 0x04, /* Usage (Joystick) */ + 0xa1, 0x01, /* Collection (Application) */ + 0x09, 0x01, /* Usage (Pointer) */ + 0xa1, 0x00, /* Collection (Physical) */ + 0x05, 0x01, /* Usage Page (Generic Desktop) */ + 0x09, 0x30, /* Usage (X) */ + 0x09, 0x31, /* Usage (Y) */ + 0x15, 0x9c, /* Logical Minimum (-100) */ + 0x25, 0x64, /* Logical Maximum (100) */ + 0x75, 0x08, /* Report Size (8) */ + 0x95, 0x02, /* Report Count (2) */ + 0x81, 0x82, /* Input (Data, Variable, Absolute, Volatile) */ + 0x05, 0x09, /* Usage Page (Button) */ + 0x09, 0x02, /* Usage (Button 2) */ + 0x09, 0x01, /* Usage (Button 1) */ + 0x15, 0x00, /* Logical Minimum (0) */ + 0x25, 0x01, /* Logical Maximum (1) */ + 0x75, 0x01, /* Report Size (1) */ + 0x95, 0x02, /* Report Count (2) */ + 0x81, 0x02, /* Input (Data, Variable, Absolute) */ + 0x75, 0x06, /* Report Size (6) */ + 0x95, 0x01, /* Report Count (1) */ + 0x81, 0x01, /* Input (Constant) */ + 0xc0, /* End Collection */ + 0xc0 /* End Collection */ +}; + +/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall + * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the + * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration + * process begins. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor = +{ + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), Type: DTYPE_Device}, + + USBSpecification: VERSION_BCD(01.10), + Class: 0x00, + SubClass: 0x00, + Protocol: 0x00, + + Endpoint0Size: 8, + + VendorID: 0x03EB, + ProductID: 0x2043, + ReleaseNumber: 0x0000, + + ManufacturerStrIndex: 0x01, + ProductStrIndex: 0x02, + SerialNumStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + NumberOfConfigurations: 1 +}; + +/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage + * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces + * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting + * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor = +{ + Config: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), Type: DTYPE_Configuration}, + + TotalConfigurationSize: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t), + TotalInterfaces: 1, + + ConfigurationNumber: 1, + ConfigurationStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + ConfigAttributes: (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED), + + MaxPowerConsumption: USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100) + }, + + Interface: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface}, + + InterfaceNumber: 0x00, + AlternateSetting: 0x00, + + TotalEndpoints: 1, + + Class: 0x03, + SubClass: 0x00, + Protocol: 0x00, + + InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + JoystickHID: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t), Type: DTYPE_HID}, + + HIDSpec: VERSION_BCD(01.11), + CountryCode: 0x00, + TotalHIDReports: 0x01, + HIDReportType: DTYPE_Report, + HIDReportLength: sizeof(JoystickReport) + }, + + JoystickEndpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | JOYSTICK_EPNUM), + Attributes: EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + EndpointSize: JOYSTICK_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0x02 + } +}; + +/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests + * the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate + * via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(1), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG} +}; + +/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable + * form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(11), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"Dean Camera" +}; + +/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form, + * and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(18), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"LUFA Joystick Demo" +}; + +/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see StdDescriptors.h + * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given + * to the USB library. When the device recieves a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function + * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the + * USB host. + */ +uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) +{ + const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8); + const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF); + + void* Address = NULL; + uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR; + + switch (DescriptorType) + { + case DTYPE_Device: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(DeviceDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Configuration: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t); + break; + case DTYPE_String: + switch (DescriptorNumber) + { + case 0x00: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(LanguageString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x01: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ManufacturerString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x02: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ProductString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size); + break; + } + + break; + case DTYPE_HID: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor.JoystickHID); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Report: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(JoystickReport); + Size = sizeof(JoystickReport); + break; + } + + *DescriptorAddress = Address; + return Size; +} diff --git a/Demos/Joystick/Descriptors.h b/Demos/Joystick/Descriptors.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..3463d96237d --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Joystick/Descriptors.h @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Descriptors.c. + */ + +#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_ +#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + + #include + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the HID class specific HID descriptor, to describe the HID device's specifications. Refer to the HID + * specification for details on the structure elements. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; + + uint16_t HIDSpec; + uint8_t CountryCode; + + uint8_t TotalHIDReports; + + uint8_t HIDReportType; + uint16_t HIDReportLength; + } USB_Descriptor_HID_t; + + /** Type define for the data type used to store HID report descriptor elements. */ + typedef uint8_t USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t; + + /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the + * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which + * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config; + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t Interface; + USB_Descriptor_HID_t JoystickHID; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t JoystickEndpoint; + } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t; + + /* Macros: */ + /** Endpoint number of the Joystick HID reporting IN endpoint. */ + #define JOYSTICK_EPNUM 1 + + /** Size in bytes of the Joystick HID reporting IN endpoint. */ + #define JOYSTICK_EPSIZE 8 + + /** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID descriptor. */ + #define DTYPE_HID 0x21 + + /** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID report descriptor. */ + #define DTYPE_Report 0x22 + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) + ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/Joystick/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Joystick/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..2af5ce68e46 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Joystick/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Joystick Device Demo" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek, +# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish, +# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene, +# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command , where is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command , where +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Namespace. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file . + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are +# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values +# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list; +# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which +# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous +# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE +# respectively. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin" + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to the search engine +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be +# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO diff --git a/Demos/Joystick/Joystick.aps b/Demos/Joystick/Joystick.aps new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..245245daa89 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Joystick/Joystick.aps @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +Joystick30-Sep-2008 14:06:3830-Sep-2008 14:07:27241030-Sep-2008 14:06:3844, 14, 0, 589AVR GCCC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\Joystick\JTAGICE mkIIAT90USB1287.xmlfalseR00R01R02R03R04R05R06R07R08R09R10R11R12R13R14R15R16R17R18R19R20R21R22R23R24R25R26R27R28R29R30R31Auto000Descriptors.cJoystick.cDescriptors.hJoystick.hmakefiledefaultYESmakefileat90usb1287111Joystick.elfdefault\1-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enumsdefault1C:\WinAVR-20080512\bin\avr-gcc.exeC:\WinAVR-20080512\utils\bin\make.exe diff --git a/Demos/Joystick/Joystick.c b/Demos/Joystick/Joystick.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..88d4158430b --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Joystick/Joystick.c @@ -0,0 +1,264 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the Joystick demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and + * is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + +#include "Joystick.h" + +/* Project Tags, for reading out using the ButtLoad project */ +BUTTLOADTAG(ProjName, "LUFA Joystick App"); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildTime, __TIME__); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildDate, __DATE__); +BUTTLOADTAG(LUFAVersion, "LUFA V" LUFA_VERSION_STRING); + +/* Scheduler Task List */ +TASK_LIST +{ + { Task: USB_USBTask , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, + { Task: USB_Joystick_Report , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, +}; + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then + * starts the scheduler to run the application tasks. + */ +int main(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable Clock Division */ + SetSystemClockPrescaler(0); + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + Joystick_Init(); + LEDs_Init(); + HWB_Init(); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); + + /* Initialize Scheduler so that it can be used */ + Scheduler_Init(); + + /* Initialize USB Subsystem */ + USB_Init(); + + /* Scheduling - routine never returns, so put this last in the main function */ + Scheduler_Start(); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs and + * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Connect) +{ + /* Start USB management task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_RUN); + + /* Indicate USB enumerating */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBEnumerating); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via + * the status LEDs and stops the USB management and joystick reporting tasks. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Disconnect) +{ + /* Stop running joystick reporting and USB management tasks */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_Joystick_Report, TASK_STOP); + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_STOP); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host set the current configuration + * of the USB device after enumeration - the device endpoints are configured and the joystick reporting task started. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_ConfigurationChanged) +{ + /* Setup Joystick Report Endpoint */ + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(JOYSTICK_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, JOYSTICK_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + /* Indicate USB connected and ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady); + + /* Start joystick reporting task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_Joystick_Report, TASK_RUN); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event. This is used to catch standard and class specific + * control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the HID commands, which are + * all issued via the control endpoint), so that they can be handled appropriately for the application. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_UnhandledControlPacket) +{ + /* Handle HID Class specific requests */ + switch (bRequest) + { + case REQ_GetReport: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + USB_JoystickReport_Data_t JoystickReportData; + + /* Create the next HID report to send to the host */ + GetNextReport(&JoystickReportData); + + /* Ignore report type and ID number value */ + Endpoint_Discard_Word(); + + /* Ignore unused Interface number value */ + Endpoint_Discard_Word(); + + /* Read in the number of bytes in the report to send to the host */ + uint16_t wLength = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(); + + /* If trying to send more bytes than exist to the host, clamp the value at the report size */ + if (wLength > sizeof(JoystickReportData)) + wLength = sizeof(JoystickReportData); + + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Write the report data to the control endpoint */ + Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(&JoystickReportData, wLength); + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet or clear the host abort */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT(); + } + + break; + } +} + +/** Fills the given HID report data structure with the next HID report to send to the host. + * + * \param ReportData Pointer to a HID report data structure to be filled + * + * \return Boolean true if the new report differs from the last report, false otherwise + */ +bool GetNextReport(USB_JoystickReport_Data_t* ReportData) +{ + static uint8_t PrevJoyStatus = 0; + uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL = Joystick_GetStatus(); + bool InputChanged = false; + + /* Clear the report contents */ + memset(ReportData, 0, sizeof(USB_JoystickReport_Data_t)); + + if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP) + ReportData->Y = -100; + else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN) + ReportData->Y = 100; + + if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT) + ReportData->X = 100; + else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT) + ReportData->X = -100; + + if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS) + ReportData->Button = (1 << 1); + + if (HWB_GetStatus()) + ReportData->Button |= (1 << 0); + + /* Check if the new report is different to the previous report */ + InputChanged = (uint8_t)(PrevJoyStatus ^ JoyStatus_LCL); + + /* Save the current joystick status for later comparison */ + PrevJoyStatus = JoyStatus_LCL; + + /* Return whether the new report is different to the previous report or not */ + return InputChanged; +} + +/** Function to manage status updates to the user. This is done via LEDs on the given board, if available, but may be changed to + * log to a serial port, or anything else that is suitable for status updates. + * + * \param CurrentStatus Current status of the system, from the Joystick_StatusCodes_t enum + */ +void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus) +{ + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS; + + /* Set the LED mask to the appropriate LED mask based on the given status code */ + switch (CurrentStatus) + { + case Status_USBNotReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1); + break; + case Status_USBEnumerating: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2); + break; + case Status_USBReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4); + break; + } + + /* Set the board LEDs to the new LED mask */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); +} + +/** Function to manage HID report generation and transmission to the host. */ +TASK(USB_Joystick_Report) +{ + /* Check if the USB System is connected to a Host */ + if (USB_IsConnected) + { + /* Select the Joystick Report Endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(JOYSTICK_EPNUM); + + /* Check if Joystick Endpoint Ready for Read/Write */ + if (Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed()) + { + USB_JoystickReport_Data_t JoystickReportData; + + /* Create the next HID report to send to the host */ + GetNextReport(&JoystickReportData); + + /* Write Joystick Report Data */ + Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&JoystickReportData, sizeof(JoystickReportData)); + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + + /* Clear the report data afterwards */ + JoystickReportData.X = 0; + JoystickReportData.Y = 0; + JoystickReportData.Button = 0; + } + } +} diff --git a/Demos/Joystick/Joystick.h b/Demos/Joystick/Joystick.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..966fa7e1044 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Joystick/Joystick.h @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Joystick.c. + */ + +#ifndef _JOYSTICK_H_ +#define _JOYSTICK_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + + #include "Descriptors.h" + + #include // Library Version Information + #include // PROGMEM tags readable by the ButtLoad project + #include // USB Functionality + #include // Joystick driver + #include // LEDs driver + #include // Hardware Button driver + #include // Simple scheduler for task management + + /* Task Definitions: */ + TASK(USB_Joystick_Report); + + /* Macros: */ + /** HID Class specific request to get the next HID report from the device. */ + #define REQ_GetReport 0x01 + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the joystick HID report structure, for creating and sending HID reports to the host PC. + * This mirrors the layout described to the host in the HID report descriptor, in Descriptors.c. + */ + typedef struct + { + int8_t X; /**< Current absolute joystick X position, as a signed 8-bit integer */ + int8_t Y; /**< Current absolute joystick Y position, as a signed 8-bit integer */ + uint8_t Button; /**< Bit mask of the currently pressed joystick buttons */ + } USB_JoystickReport_Data_t; + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible status codes for passing to the UpdateStatus() function. */ + enum Joystick_StatusCodes_t + { + Status_USBNotReady = 0, /**< USB is not ready (disconnected from a USB host) */ + Status_USBEnumerating = 1, /**< USB interface is enumerating */ + Status_USBReady = 2, /**< USB interface is connected and ready */ + }; + + /* Event Handlers: */ + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Connect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Connect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Disconnect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Disconnect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_ConfigurationChanged event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_ConfigurationChanged); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_UnhandledControlPacket); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + bool GetNextReport(USB_JoystickReport_Data_t* ReportData); + void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/Joystick/Joystick.txt b/Demos/Joystick/Joystick.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..6229aa042d3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Joystick/Joystick.txt @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage Joystick Device Demo + * + * Joystick demonstration application. This gives a simple reference + * application for implementing a USB Keyboard device, for USB Joysticks + * using the standard Keyboard HID profile. + * + * This device will show up as a generic joystick device, with two buttons. + * Pressing the joystick inwards is the first button, and the HWB button + * is the second. + * + * Moving the joystick on the selected board moves the joystick location on + * the host computer. + * + * Currently only single interface joysticks are supported. + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + *
USB Mode:Device
USB Class:Human Interface Device (HID)
USB Subclass:N/A
Relevant Standards:USBIF HID Specification, USBIF HID Usage Tables
Usable Speeds:Low Speed Mode, Full Speed Mode
+ */ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Demos/Joystick/makefile b/Demos/Joystick/makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..0802e2d53aa --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Joystick/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,700 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# Denver Gingerich +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb1287 + + +# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# Typical values are: +# F_CPU = 1000000 +# F_CPU = 1843200 +# F_CPU = 2000000 +# F_CPU = 3686400 +# F_CPU = 4000000 +# F_CPU = 7372800 +# F_CPU = 8000000 +# F_CPU = 11059200 +# F_CPU = 14745600 +# F_CPU = 16000000 +# F_CPU = 18432000 +# F_CPU = 20000000 +F_CPU = 8000000 + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = Joystick + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + Descriptors.c \ + ../../LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.c \ + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = ../../ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS +CDEFS += -DUSB_DEVICE_ONLY -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)" + + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20 +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd +# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500 +# +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf +MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) ) +FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr ) + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +checkhooks: build + @echo + @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events ------- + @$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \ + cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \ + echo "(None)" + @echo ----- End Unhooked LUFA Events ----- + +checklibmode: + @echo + @echo ----------- Library Mode ----------- + @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \ + | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \ + || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)." + @echo ------------------------------------ + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + copy $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom --debug 1 $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end + +clean_binary: + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + +clean_list: + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode begin \ +finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \ +clean clean_list clean_binary program debug \ +gdb-config doxygen dfu flip diff --git a/Demos/Keyboard/Descriptors.c b/Demos/Keyboard/Descriptors.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..e11ef6626fb --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Keyboard/Descriptors.c @@ -0,0 +1,267 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com) + Based on code by Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special + * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine + * the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "Descriptors.h" + +/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the + * USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This + * descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding) + * the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for + * more details on HID report descriptors. + */ +USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM KeyboardReport[] = +{ + 0x05, 0x01, /* Usage Page (Generic Desktop) */ + 0x09, 0x06, /* Usage (Keyboard) */ + 0xa1, 0x01, /* Collection (Application) */ + 0x75, 0x01, /* Report Size (1) */ + 0x95, 0x08, /* Report Count (8) */ + 0x05, 0x07, /* Usage Page (Key Codes) */ + 0x19, 0xe0, /* Usage Minimum (Keyboard LeftControl) */ + 0x29, 0xe7, /* Usage Maximum (Keyboard Right GUI) */ + 0x15, 0x00, /* Logical Minimum (0) */ + 0x25, 0x01, /* Logical Maximum (1) */ + 0x81, 0x02, /* Input (Data, Variable, Absolute) */ + 0x95, 0x01, /* Report Count (1) */ + 0x75, 0x08, /* Report Size (8) */ + 0x81, 0x03, /* Input (Const, Variable, Absolute) */ + 0x95, 0x05, /* Report Count (5) */ + 0x75, 0x01, /* Report Size (1) */ + 0x05, 0x08, /* Usage Page (LEDs) */ + 0x19, 0x01, /* Usage Minimum (Num Lock) */ + 0x29, 0x05, /* Usage Maximum (Kana) */ + 0x91, 0x02, /* Output (Data, Variable, Absolute) */ + 0x95, 0x01, /* Report Count (1) */ + 0x75, 0x03, /* Report Size (3) */ + 0x91, 0x03, /* Output (Const, Variable, Absolute) */ + 0x95, 0x06, /* Report Count (6) */ + 0x75, 0x08, /* Report Size (8) */ + 0x15, 0x00, /* Logical Minimum (0) */ + 0x25, 0x65, /* Logical Maximum (101) */ + 0x05, 0x07, /* Usage Page (Keyboard) */ + 0x19, 0x00, /* Usage Minimum (Reserved (no event indicated)) */ + 0x29, 0x65, /* Usage Maximum (Keyboard Application) */ + 0x81, 0x00, /* Input (Data, Array, Absolute) */ + 0xc0 /* End Collection */ +}; + +/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall + * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the + * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration + * process begins. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor = +{ + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), Type: DTYPE_Device}, + + USBSpecification: VERSION_BCD(01.10), + Class: 0x00, + SubClass: 0x00, + Protocol: 0x00, + + Endpoint0Size: 8, + + VendorID: 0x03EB, + ProductID: 0x2042, + ReleaseNumber: 0x0000, + + ManufacturerStrIndex: 0x01, + ProductStrIndex: 0x02, + SerialNumStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + NumberOfConfigurations: 1 +}; + +/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage + * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces + * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting + * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor = +{ + Config: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), Type: DTYPE_Configuration}, + + TotalConfigurationSize: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t), + TotalInterfaces: 1, + + ConfigurationNumber: 1, + ConfigurationStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + ConfigAttributes: (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED), + + MaxPowerConsumption: USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100) + }, + + Interface: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface}, + + InterfaceNumber: 0x00, + AlternateSetting: 0x00, + + TotalEndpoints: 2, + + Class: 0x03, + SubClass: 0x01, + Protocol: 0x01, + + InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + KeyboardHID: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t), Type: DTYPE_HID}, + + HIDSpec: VERSION_BCD(01.11), + CountryCode: 0x00, + TotalHIDReports: 0x01, + HIDReportType: DTYPE_Report, + HIDReportLength: sizeof(KeyboardReport) + }, + + KeyboardEndpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | KEYBOARD_EPNUM), + Attributes: EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + EndpointSize: KEYBOARD_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0x02 + }, + + KeyboardLEDsEndpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | KEYBOARD_LEDS_EPNUM), + Attributes: EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + EndpointSize: KEYBOARD_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0x02 + } +}; + +/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests + * the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate + * via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(1), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG} +}; + +/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable + * form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(11), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"Dean Camera" +}; + +/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form, + * and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(18), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"LUFA Keyboard Demo" +}; + +/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see StdDescriptors.h + * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given + * to the USB library. When the device recieves a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function + * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the + * USB host. + */ +uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) +{ + const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8); + const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF); + + void* Address = NULL; + uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR; + + switch (DescriptorType) + { + case DTYPE_Device: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(DeviceDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Configuration: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t); + break; + case DTYPE_String: + switch (DescriptorNumber) + { + case 0x00: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(LanguageString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x01: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ManufacturerString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x02: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ProductString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size); + break; + } + + break; + case DTYPE_HID: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor.KeyboardHID); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Report: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(KeyboardReport); + Size = sizeof(KeyboardReport); + break; + } + + *DescriptorAddress = Address; + return Size; +} diff --git a/Demos/Keyboard/Descriptors.h b/Demos/Keyboard/Descriptors.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..aa1bf05b6ad --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Keyboard/Descriptors.h @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com) + Based on code by Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Descriptors.c. + */ + +#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_ +#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + + #include + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the HID class specific HID descriptor, to describe the HID device's specifications. Refer to the HID + * specification for details on the structure elements. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; + + uint16_t HIDSpec; + uint8_t CountryCode; + + uint8_t TotalHIDReports; + + uint8_t HIDReportType; + uint16_t HIDReportLength; + } USB_Descriptor_HID_t; + + /** Type define for the data type used to store HID report descriptor elements. */ + typedef uint8_t USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t; + + /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the + * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which + * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config; + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t Interface; + USB_Descriptor_HID_t KeyboardHID; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t KeyboardEndpoint; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t KeyboardLEDsEndpoint; + } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t; + + /* Macros: */ + /** Endpoint number of the Keyboard HID reporting IN endpoint. */ + #define KEYBOARD_EPNUM 1 + + /** Endpoint number of the Keyboard HID reporting OUT endpoint. */ + #define KEYBOARD_LEDS_EPNUM 2 + + /** Size in bytes of the Keyboard HID reporting IN and OUT endpoints. */ + #define KEYBOARD_EPSIZE 8 + + /** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID descriptor. */ + #define DTYPE_HID 0x21 + + /** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID report descriptor. */ + #define DTYPE_Report 0x22 + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) + ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/Keyboard/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Keyboard/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..79a300aed4f --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Keyboard/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Keyboard Device Demo" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek, +# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish, +# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene, +# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command , where is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command , where +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Namespace. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file . + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are +# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values +# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list; +# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which +# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous +# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE +# respectively. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin" + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to the search engine +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be +# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO diff --git a/Demos/Keyboard/Keyboard.aps b/Demos/Keyboard/Keyboard.aps new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..541c1750318 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Keyboard/Keyboard.aps @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +Keyboard30-Sep-2008 13:59:2930-Sep-2008 14:00:25241030-Sep-2008 13:59:2944, 14, 0, 589AVR GCCKeyboard.elfC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\Keyboard\JTAGICE mkIIAT90USB1287.xmlfalseR00R01R02R03R04R05R06R07R08R09R10R11R12R13R14R15R16R17R18R19R20R21R22R23R24R25R26R27R28R29R30R31Auto000Descriptors.cKeyboard.cDescriptors.hKeyboard.hmakefiledefaultYESmakefileat90usb1287111Keyboard.elfdefault\1-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enumsdefault1C:\WinAVR-20080512\bin\avr-gcc.exeC:\WinAVR-20080512\utils\bin\make.exe00000makefile1 diff --git a/Demos/Keyboard/Keyboard.c b/Demos/Keyboard/Keyboard.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..92f4ae94862 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Keyboard/Keyboard.c @@ -0,0 +1,429 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com) + Based on code by Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the Keyboard demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and + * is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + +#include "Keyboard.h" + +/* Project Tags, for reading out using the ButtLoad project */ +BUTTLOADTAG(ProjName, "LUFA Keyboard App"); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildTime, __TIME__); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildDate, __DATE__); +BUTTLOADTAG(LUFAVersion, "LUFA V" LUFA_VERSION_STRING); + +/* Scheduler Task List */ +TASK_LIST +{ + { Task: USB_USBTask , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, + { Task: USB_Keyboard_Report , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, +}; + +/* Global Variables */ +/** Indicates what report mode the host has requested, true for normal HID reporting mode, false for special boot + * protocol reporting mode. + */ +bool UsingReportProtocol = true; + +/** Current Idle period. This is set by the host via a Set Idle HID class request to silence the device's reports + * for either the entire idle duration, or until the report status changes (e.g. the user moves the mouse). + */ +uint8_t IdleCount = 0; + +/** Current Idle period remaining. When the IdleCount value is set, this tracks the remaining number of idle + * milliseconds. This is seperate to the IdleCount timer and is incremented and compared as the host may request + * the current idle period via a Get Idle HID class request, thus its value must be preserved. + */ +uint16_t IdleMSRemaining = 0; + + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then + * starts the scheduler to run the application tasks. + */ +int main(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable Clock Division */ + SetSystemClockPrescaler(0); + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + Joystick_Init(); + LEDs_Init(); + + /* Millisecond timer initialization, with output compare interrupt enabled for the idle timing */ + OCR0A = 0x7D; + TCCR0A = (1 << WGM01); + TCCR0B = ((1 << CS01) | (1 << CS00)); + TIMSK0 = (1 << OCIE0A); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); + + /* Initialize Scheduler so that it can be used */ + Scheduler_Init(); + + /* Initialize USB Subsystem */ + USB_Init(); + + /* Scheduling - routine never returns, so put this last in the main function */ + Scheduler_Start(); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs and + * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Connect) +{ + /* Start USB management task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_RUN); + + /* Indicate USB enumerating */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBEnumerating); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via + * the status LEDs and stops the USB management and Keyboard reporting tasks. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Disconnect) +{ + /* Stop running keyboard reporting and USB management tasks */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_Keyboard_Report, TASK_STOP); + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_STOP); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host set the current configuration + * of the USB device after enumeration - the device endpoints are configured and the keyboard reporting task started. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_ConfigurationChanged) +{ + /* Setup Keyboard Keycode Report Endpoint */ + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(KEYBOARD_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, KEYBOARD_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + /* Setup Keyboard LED Report Endpoint */ + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(KEYBOARD_LEDS_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, KEYBOARD_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + /* Indicate USB connected and ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady); + + /* Default to report protocol on connect */ + UsingReportProtocol = true; + + /* Start Keyboard reporting task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_Keyboard_Report, TASK_RUN); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event. This is used to catch standard and class specific + * control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the HID commands, which are + * all issued via the control endpoint), so that they can be handled appropriately for the application. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_UnhandledControlPacket) +{ + /* Handle HID Class specific requests */ + switch (bRequest) + { + case REQ_GetReport: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t KeyboardReportData; + + /* Create the next keyboard report for transmission to the host */ + GetNextReport(&KeyboardReportData); + + /* Ignore report type and ID number value */ + Endpoint_Discard_Word(); + + /* Ignore unused Interface number value */ + Endpoint_Discard_Word(); + + /* Read in the number of bytes in the report to send to the host */ + uint16_t wLength = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(); + + /* If trying to send more bytes than exist to the host, clamp the value at the report size */ + if (wLength > sizeof(KeyboardReportData)) + wLength = sizeof(KeyboardReportData); + + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Write the report data to the control endpoint */ + Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(&KeyboardReportData, wLength); + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet or clear the host abort */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT(); + } + + break; + case REQ_SetReport: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Wait until the LED report has been sent by the host */ + while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupOUTReceived())); + + /* Read in the LED report from the host */ + uint8_t LEDStatus = Endpoint_Read_Byte(); + + /* Process the incomming LED report */ + ProcessLEDReport(LEDStatus); + + /* Clear the endpoint data */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT(); + + /* Wait until the host is ready to receive the request confirmation */ + while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupINReady())); + + /* Handshake the request by sending an empty IN packet */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + case REQ_GetProtocol: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Write the current protocol flag to the host */ + Endpoint_Write_Byte(UsingReportProtocol); + + /* Send the flag to the host */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + case REQ_SetProtocol: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + /* Read in the wValue parameter containing the new protocol mode */ + uint16_t wValue = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(); + + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Set or clear the flag depending on what the host indicates that the current Protocol should be */ + UsingReportProtocol = (wValue != 0x0000); + + /* Send an empty packet to acknowedge the command */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + case REQ_SetIdle: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + /* Read in the wValue parameter containing the idle period */ + uint16_t wValue = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(); + + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Get idle period in MSB */ + IdleCount = (wValue >> 8); + + /* Send an empty packet to acknowedge the command */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + case REQ_GetIdle: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Write the current idle duration to the host */ + Endpoint_Write_Byte(IdleCount); + + /* Send the flag to the host */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + } +} + +/** ISR for the timer 0 compare vector. This ISR fires once each millisecond, and increments the + * scheduler elapsed idle period counter when the host has set an idle period. + */ +ISR(TIMER0_COMPA_vect, ISR_BLOCK) +{ + /* One millisecond has elapsed, decrement the idle time remaining counter if it has not already elapsed */ + if (IdleMSRemaining) + IdleMSRemaining--; +} + +/** Fills the given HID report data structure with the next HID report to send to the host. + * + * \param ReportData Pointer to a HID report data structure to be filled + * + * \return Boolean true if the new report differs from the last report, false otherwise + */ +bool GetNextReport(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t* ReportData) +{ + static uint8_t PrevJoyStatus = 0; + uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL = Joystick_GetStatus(); + bool InputChanged = false; + + /* Clear the report contents */ + memset(ReportData, 0, sizeof(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t)); + + if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP) + ReportData->KeyCode[0] = 0x04; // A + else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN) + ReportData->KeyCode[0] = 0x05; // B + + if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT) + ReportData->KeyCode[0] = 0x06; // C + else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT) + ReportData->KeyCode[0] = 0x07; // D + + if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS) + ReportData->KeyCode[0] = 0x08; // E + + /* Check if the new report is different to the previous report */ + InputChanged = (uint8_t)(PrevJoyStatus ^ JoyStatus_LCL); + + /* Save the current joystick status for later comparison */ + PrevJoyStatus = JoyStatus_LCL; + + /* Return whether the new report is different to the previous report or not */ + return InputChanged; +} + +/** Processes a given LED report mask from the host and sets the board LEDs to match. + * + * \param LEDReport LED mask from the host, containing a mask of what LEDs are set + */ +void ProcessLEDReport(uint8_t LEDReport) +{ + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_LED2; + + if (LEDReport & 0x01) // NUM Lock + LEDMask |= LEDS_LED1; + + if (LEDReport & 0x02) // CAPS Lock + LEDMask |= LEDS_LED3; + + if (LEDReport & 0x04) // SCROLL Lock + LEDMask |= LEDS_LED4; + + /* Set the status LEDs to the current Keyboard LED status */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); +} + +/** Function to manage status updates to the user. This is done via LEDs on the given board, if available, but may be changed to + * log to a serial port, or anything else that is suitable for status updates. + * + * \param CurrentStatus Current status of the system, from the Keyboard_StatusCodes_t enum + */ +void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus) +{ + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS; + + /* Set the LED mask to the appropriate LED mask based on the given status code */ + switch (CurrentStatus) + { + case Status_USBNotReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1); + break; + case Status_USBEnumerating: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2); + break; + case Status_USBReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4); + break; + } + + /* Set the board LEDs to the new LED mask */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); +} + +/** Function to manage HID report generation and transmission to the host, when in report mode. */ +TASK(USB_Keyboard_Report) +{ + USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t KeyboardReportData; + bool SendReport; + + /* Create the next keyboard report for transmission to the host */ + SendReport = GetNextReport(&KeyboardReportData); + + /* Check if the idle period is set and has elapsed */ + if (IdleCount && !(IdleMSRemaining)) + { + /* Idle period elapsed, indicate that a report must be sent */ + SendReport = true; + + /* Reset the idle time remaining counter, must multiply by 4 to get the duration in milliseconds */ + IdleMSRemaining = (IdleCount << 2); + } + + /* Check if the USB system is connected to a host */ + if (USB_IsConnected) + { + /* Select the Keyboard Report Endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(KEYBOARD_EPNUM); + + /* Check if Keyboard Endpoint Ready for Read/Write, and if we should send a report */ + if (Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed() && SendReport) + { + /* Write Keyboard Report Data */ + Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&KeyboardReportData, sizeof(KeyboardReportData)); + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + } + + /* Select the Keyboard LED Report Endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(KEYBOARD_LEDS_EPNUM); + + /* Check if Keyboard LED Endpoint Ready for Read/Write */ + if (Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed()) + { + /* Read in the LED report from the host */ + uint8_t LEDStatus = Endpoint_Read_Byte(); + + /* Process the incomming LED report */ + ProcessLEDReport(LEDStatus); + + /* Handshake the OUT Endpoint - clear endpoint and ready for next report */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + } + } +} diff --git a/Demos/Keyboard/Keyboard.h b/Demos/Keyboard/Keyboard.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..e1aed1ec99b --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Keyboard/Keyboard.h @@ -0,0 +1,116 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com) + Based on code by Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Keyboard.c. + */ + +#ifndef _KEYBOARD_H_ +#define _KEYBOARD_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + #include + #include + + #include "Descriptors.h" + + #include // Library Version Information + #include // PROGMEM tags readable by the ButtLoad project + #include // USB Functionality + #include // Joystick driver + #include // LEDs driver + #include // Simple scheduler for task management + + /* Task Definitions: */ + TASK(USB_Keyboard_Report); + + /* Macros: */ + /** HID Class specific request to get the next HID report from the device. */ + #define REQ_GetReport 0x01 + + /** HID Class specific request to get the idle timeout period of the device. */ + #define REQ_GetIdle 0x02 + + /** HID Class specific request to send the next HID report to the device. */ + #define REQ_SetReport 0x09 + + /** HID Class specific request to set the idle timeout period of the device. */ + #define REQ_SetIdle 0x0A + + /** HID Class specific request to get the current HID protocol in use, either report or boot. */ + #define REQ_GetProtocol 0x03 + + /** HID Class specific request to set the current HID protocol in use, either report or boot. */ + #define REQ_SetProtocol 0x0B + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the keyboard HID report structure, for creating and sending HID reports to the host PC. + * This mirrors the layout described to the host in the HID report descriptor, in Descriptors.c. + */ + typedef struct + { + uint8_t Modifier; /**< Modifier mask byte, containing a mask of modifier keys set (such as shift or CTRL) */ + uint8_t Reserved; /**< Reserved, always set as 0x00 */ + uint8_t KeyCode[6]; /**< Array of up to six simultaneous key codes of pressed keys */ + } USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t; + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible status codes for passing to the UpdateStatus() function. */ + enum Keyboard_StatusCodes_t + { + Status_USBNotReady = 0, /**< USB is not ready (disconnected from a USB host) */ + Status_USBEnumerating = 1, /**< USB interface is enumerating */ + Status_USBReady = 2, /**< USB interface is connected and ready */ + }; + + /* Event Handlers: */ + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Connect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Connect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Disconnect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Disconnect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_ConfigurationChanged event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_ConfigurationChanged); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_UnhandledControlPacket); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + bool GetNextReport(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t* ReportData); + void ProcessLEDReport(uint8_t LEDReport); + void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/Keyboard/Keyboard.txt b/Demos/Keyboard/Keyboard.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..c22772558a2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Keyboard/Keyboard.txt @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage Keyboard Device Demo + * + * Keyboard demonstration application. This gives a simple reference + * application for implementing a USB Keyboard using the basic USB HID + * drivers in all modern OSes (i.e. no special drivers required). It is + * boot protocol compatible, and thus works under compatible BIOS as if + * it was a native keyboard (e.g. PS/2). + * + * On startup the system will automatically enumerate and function + * as a keyboard when the USB connection to a host is present. To use + * the keyboard example, manipulate the joystick to send the letters + * a, b, c, d and e. See the USB HID documentation for more information + * on sending keyboard event and keypresses. + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + *
USB Mode:Device
USB Class:Human Interface Device (HID)
USB Subclass:N/A
Relevant Standards:USBIF HID Specification, USBIF HID Usage Tables
Usable Speeds:Low Speed Mode, Full Speed Mode
+ */ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Demos/Keyboard/makefile b/Demos/Keyboard/makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..b2a3bee0f68 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Keyboard/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,704 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# Denver Gingerich +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb1287 + + +# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# Typical values are: +# F_CPU = 1000000 +# F_CPU = 1843200 +# F_CPU = 2000000 +# F_CPU = 3686400 +# F_CPU = 4000000 +# F_CPU = 7372800 +# F_CPU = 8000000 +# F_CPU = 11059200 +# F_CPU = 14745600 +# F_CPU = 16000000 +# F_CPU = 18432000 +# F_CPU = 20000000 +F_CPU = 8000000 + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = Keyboard + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + Descriptors.c \ + ../../LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.c \ + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = ../../ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS +CDEFS += -DUSB_DEVICE_ONLY -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)" + + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20 +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd +# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500 +# +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf +MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) ) +FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr ) +MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) ) +FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr ) + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +checkhooks: build + @echo + @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events ------- + @$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \ + cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \ + echo "(None)" + @echo ----- End Unhooked LUFA Events ----- + +checklibmode: + @echo + @echo ----------- Library Mode ----------- + @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \ + | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \ + || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)." + @echo ------------------------------------ + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + copy $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom --debug 1 $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end + +clean_binary: + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + +clean_list: + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode begin \ +finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \ +clean clean_list clean_binary program debug \ +gdb-config doxygen dfu flip diff --git a/Demos/KeyboardFullInt/Descriptors.c b/Demos/KeyboardFullInt/Descriptors.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..23c4165a692 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/KeyboardFullInt/Descriptors.c @@ -0,0 +1,267 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com) + Based on code by Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special + * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine + * the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "Descriptors.h" + +/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the + * USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This + * descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding) + * the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for + * more details on HID report descriptors. + */ +USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM KeyboardReport[] = +{ + 0x05, 0x01, /* Usage Page (Generic Desktop) */ + 0x09, 0x06, /* Usage (Keyboard) */ + 0xa1, 0x01, /* Collection (Application) */ + 0x75, 0x01, /* Report Size (1) */ + 0x95, 0x08, /* Report Count (8) */ + 0x05, 0x07, /* Usage Page (Key Codes) */ + 0x19, 0xe0, /* Usage Minimum (Keyboard LeftControl) */ + 0x29, 0xe7, /* Usage Maximum (Keyboard Right GUI) */ + 0x15, 0x00, /* Logical Minimum (0) */ + 0x25, 0x01, /* Logical Maximum (1) */ + 0x81, 0x02, /* Input (Data, Variable, Absolute) */ + 0x95, 0x01, /* Report Count (1) */ + 0x75, 0x08, /* Report Size (8) */ + 0x81, 0x03, /* Input (Const, Variable, Absolute) */ + 0x95, 0x05, /* Report Count (5) */ + 0x75, 0x01, /* Report Size (1) */ + 0x05, 0x08, /* Usage Page (LEDs) */ + 0x19, 0x01, /* Usage Minimum (Num Lock) */ + 0x29, 0x05, /* Usage Maximum (Kana) */ + 0x91, 0x02, /* Output (Data, Variable, Absolute) */ + 0x95, 0x01, /* Report Count (1) */ + 0x75, 0x03, /* Report Size (3) */ + 0x91, 0x03, /* Output (Const, Variable, Absolute) */ + 0x95, 0x06, /* Report Count (6) */ + 0x75, 0x08, /* Report Size (8) */ + 0x15, 0x00, /* Logical Minimum (0) */ + 0x25, 0x65, /* Logical Maximum (101) */ + 0x05, 0x07, /* Usage Page (Keyboard) */ + 0x19, 0x00, /* Usage Minimum (Reserved (no event indicated)) */ + 0x29, 0x65, /* Usage Maximum (Keyboard Application) */ + 0x81, 0x00, /* Input (Data, Array, Absolute) */ + 0xc0 /* End Collection */ +}; + +/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall + * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the + * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration + * process begins. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor = +{ + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), Type: DTYPE_Device}, + + USBSpecification: VERSION_BCD(01.10), + Class: 0x00, + SubClass: 0x00, + Protocol: 0x00, + + Endpoint0Size: 8, + + VendorID: 0x03EB, + ProductID: 0x2042, + ReleaseNumber: 0x0000, + + ManufacturerStrIndex: 0x01, + ProductStrIndex: 0x02, + SerialNumStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + NumberOfConfigurations: 1 +}; + +/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage + * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces + * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting + * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor = +{ + Config: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), Type: DTYPE_Configuration}, + + TotalConfigurationSize: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t), + TotalInterfaces: 1, + + ConfigurationNumber: 1, + ConfigurationStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + ConfigAttributes: (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED), + + MaxPowerConsumption: USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100) + }, + + Interface: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface}, + + InterfaceNumber: 0x00, + AlternateSetting: 0x00, + + TotalEndpoints: 2, + + Class: 0x03, + SubClass: 0x01, + Protocol: 0x01, + + InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + KeyboardHID: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t), Type: DTYPE_HID}, + + HIDSpec: VERSION_BCD(01.11), + CountryCode: 0x00, + TotalHIDReports: 0x01, + HIDReportType: DTYPE_Report, + HIDReportLength: sizeof(KeyboardReport) + }, + + KeyboardEndpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | KEYBOARD_EPNUM), + Attributes: EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + EndpointSize: KEYBOARD_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0x02 + }, + + KeyboardLEDsEndpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | KEYBOARD_LEDS_EPNUM), + Attributes: EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + EndpointSize: KEYBOARD_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0x02 + } +}; + +/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests + * the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate + * via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(1), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG} +}; + +/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable + * form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(16), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"Denver Gingerich" +}; + +/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form, + * and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(18), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"LUFA Keyboard Demo" +}; + +/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see StdDescriptors.h + * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given + * to the USB library. When the device recieves a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function + * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the + * USB host. + */ +uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) +{ + const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8); + const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF); + + void* Address = NULL; + uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR; + + switch (DescriptorType) + { + case DTYPE_Device: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(DeviceDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Configuration: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t); + break; + case DTYPE_String: + switch (DescriptorNumber) + { + case 0x00: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(LanguageString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x01: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ManufacturerString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x02: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ProductString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size); + break; + } + + break; + case DTYPE_HID: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor.KeyboardHID); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Report: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(KeyboardReport); + Size = sizeof(KeyboardReport); + break; + } + + *DescriptorAddress = Address; + return Size; +} diff --git a/Demos/KeyboardFullInt/Descriptors.h b/Demos/KeyboardFullInt/Descriptors.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..aa1bf05b6ad --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/KeyboardFullInt/Descriptors.h @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com) + Based on code by Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Descriptors.c. + */ + +#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_ +#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + + #include + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the HID class specific HID descriptor, to describe the HID device's specifications. Refer to the HID + * specification for details on the structure elements. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; + + uint16_t HIDSpec; + uint8_t CountryCode; + + uint8_t TotalHIDReports; + + uint8_t HIDReportType; + uint16_t HIDReportLength; + } USB_Descriptor_HID_t; + + /** Type define for the data type used to store HID report descriptor elements. */ + typedef uint8_t USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t; + + /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the + * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which + * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config; + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t Interface; + USB_Descriptor_HID_t KeyboardHID; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t KeyboardEndpoint; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t KeyboardLEDsEndpoint; + } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t; + + /* Macros: */ + /** Endpoint number of the Keyboard HID reporting IN endpoint. */ + #define KEYBOARD_EPNUM 1 + + /** Endpoint number of the Keyboard HID reporting OUT endpoint. */ + #define KEYBOARD_LEDS_EPNUM 2 + + /** Size in bytes of the Keyboard HID reporting IN and OUT endpoints. */ + #define KEYBOARD_EPSIZE 8 + + /** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID descriptor. */ + #define DTYPE_HID 0x21 + + /** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID report descriptor. */ + #define DTYPE_Report 0x22 + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) + ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/KeyboardFullInt/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/KeyboardFullInt/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..0a35a143668 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/KeyboardFullInt/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Keyboard Device Demo (Fully Interrupt Driven)" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek, +# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish, +# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene, +# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command , where is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command , where +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Namespace. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file . + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are +# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values +# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list; +# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which +# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous +# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE +# respectively. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin" + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to the search engine +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be +# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO diff --git a/Demos/KeyboardFullInt/KeyboardFullInt.aps b/Demos/KeyboardFullInt/KeyboardFullInt.aps new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..f23575e3515 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/KeyboardFullInt/KeyboardFullInt.aps @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +KeyboardFullInt30-Sep-2008 14:07:5930-Sep-2008 14:08:25241030-Sep-2008 14:07:5944, 14, 0, 589AVR GCCC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\KeyboardFullInt\JTAGICE mkIIAT90USB1287.xmlfalseR00R01R02R03R04R05R06R07R08R09R10R11R12R13R14R15R16R17R18R19R20R21R22R23R24R25R26R27R28R29R30R31Auto000Descriptors.cKeyboardFullInt.cDescriptors.hKeyboardFullInt.hmakefiledefaultYESmakefileat90usb1287111KeyboardFullInt.elfdefault\1-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enumsdefault1C:\WinAVR-20080512\bin\avr-gcc.exeC:\WinAVR-20080512\utils\bin\make.exe00000makefile1 diff --git a/Demos/KeyboardFullInt/KeyboardFullInt.c b/Demos/KeyboardFullInt/KeyboardFullInt.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..7e90b5ff283 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/KeyboardFullInt/KeyboardFullInt.c @@ -0,0 +1,462 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com) + Based on code by Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the KeyboardFullInt demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and + * is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + +#include "KeyboardFullInt.h" + +/* Project Tags, for reading out using the ButtLoad project */ +BUTTLOADTAG(ProjName, "LUFA KeyboardFI App"); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildTime, __TIME__); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildDate, __DATE__); +BUTTLOADTAG(LUFAVersion, "LUFA V" LUFA_VERSION_STRING); + +/* Global Variables */ +/** Indicates what report mode the host has requested, true for normal HID reporting mode, false for special boot + * protocol reporting mode. + */ +bool UsingReportProtocol = true; + +/** Current Idle period. This is set by the host via a Set Idle HID class request to silence the device's reports + * for either the entire idle duration, or until the report status changes (e.g. the user moves the mouse). + */ +uint8_t IdleCount = 0; + +/** Current Idle period remaining. When the IdleCount value is set, this tracks the remaining number of idle + * milliseconds. This is seperate to the IdleCount timer and is incremented and compared as the host may request + * the current idle period via a Get Idle HID class request, thus its value must be preserved. + */ +uint16_t IdleMSRemaining = 0; + + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then + * starts the scheduler to run the USB management task. + */ +int main(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable Clock Division */ + SetSystemClockPrescaler(0); + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + Joystick_Init(); + LEDs_Init(); + + /* Millisecond timer initialization, with output compare interrupt enabled for the idle timing */ + OCR0A = 0x7D; + TCCR0A = (1 << WGM01); + TCCR0B = ((1 << CS01) | (1 << CS00)); + TIMSK0 = (1 << OCIE0A); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); + + /* Initialize USB Subsystem */ + USB_Init(); + + /* Main program code loop */ + for (;;) + { + /* No main code -- all USB code is interrupt driven */ + } +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs and + * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Connect) +{ + /* Indicate USB enumerating */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBEnumerating); + + /* Default to report protocol on connect */ + UsingReportProtocol = true; +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Reset event. This fires when the USB interface is reset by the USB host, before the + * enumeration process begins, and enables the control endpoint interrupt so that control requests can be handled + * asynchronously when they arrive rather than when the control endpoint is polled manually. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Reset) +{ + /* Select the control endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP); + + /* Enable the endpoint SETUP interrupt ISR for the control endpoint */ + USB_INT_Enable(ENDPOINT_INT_SETUP); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via + * the status LEDs. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Disconnect) +{ + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host sets the current configuration + * of the USB device after enumeration, and configures the keyboard device endpoints. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_ConfigurationChanged) +{ + /* Setup Keyboard Keycode Report Endpoint */ + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(KEYBOARD_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, KEYBOARD_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + /* Enable the endpoint IN interrupt ISR for the report endpoint */ + USB_INT_Enable(ENDPOINT_INT_IN); + + /* Setup Keyboard LED Report Endpoint */ + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(KEYBOARD_LEDS_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, KEYBOARD_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + /* Enable the endpoint OUT interrupt ISR for the LED report endpoint */ + USB_INT_Enable(ENDPOINT_INT_OUT); + + /* Indicate USB connected and ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event. This is used to catch standard and class specific + * control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the HID commands, which are + * all issued via the control endpoint), so that they can be handled appropriately for the application. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_UnhandledControlPacket) +{ + /* Handle HID Class specific requests */ + switch (bRequest) + { + case REQ_GetReport: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t KeyboardReportData; + + /* Create the next keyboard report for transmission to the host */ + GetNextReport(&KeyboardReportData); + + /* Ignore report type and ID number value */ + Endpoint_Discard_Word(); + + /* Ignore unused Interface number value */ + Endpoint_Discard_Word(); + + /* Read in the number of bytes in the report to send to the host */ + uint16_t wLength = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(); + + /* If trying to send more bytes than exist to the host, clamp the value at the report size */ + if (wLength > sizeof(KeyboardReportData)) + wLength = sizeof(KeyboardReportData); + + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Write the report data to the control endpoint */ + Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(&KeyboardReportData, wLength); + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet or clear the host abort */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT(); + } + + break; + case REQ_SetReport: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Wait until the LED report has been sent by the host */ + while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupOUTReceived())); + + /* Read in the LED report from the host */ + uint8_t LEDStatus = Endpoint_Read_Byte(); + + /* Process the incomming LED report */ + ProcessLEDReport(LEDStatus); + + /* Clear the endpoint data */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT(); + + /* Wait until the host is ready to receive the request confirmation */ + while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupINReady())); + + /* Handshake the request by sending an empty IN packet */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + case REQ_GetProtocol: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Write the current protocol flag to the host */ + Endpoint_Write_Byte(UsingReportProtocol); + + /* Send the flag to the host */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + case REQ_SetProtocol: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + /* Read in the wValue parameter containing the new protocol mode */ + uint16_t wValue = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(); + + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Set or clear the flag depending on what the host indicates that the current Protocol should be */ + UsingReportProtocol = (wValue != 0x0000); + + /* Send an empty packet to acknowedge the command */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + case REQ_SetIdle: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + /* Read in the wValue parameter containing the idle period */ + uint16_t wValue = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(); + + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Get idle period in MSB */ + IdleCount = (wValue >> 8); + + /* Send an empty packet to acknowedge the command */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + case REQ_GetIdle: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Write the current idle duration to the host */ + Endpoint_Write_Byte(IdleCount); + + /* Send the flag to the host */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + } +} + +/** ISR for the timer 0 compare vector. This ISR fires once each millisecond, and increments the + * scheduler elapsed idle period counter when the host has set an idle period. + */ +ISR(TIMER0_COMPA_vect, ISR_BLOCK) +{ + /* One millisecond has elapsed, decrement the idle time remaining counter if it has not already elapsed */ + if (IdleMSRemaining) + IdleMSRemaining--; +} + +/** Fills the given HID report data structure with the next HID report to send to the host. + * + * \param ReportData Pointer to a HID report data structure to be filled + * + * \return Boolean true if the new report differs from the last report, false otherwise + */ +bool GetNextReport(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t* ReportData) +{ + static uint8_t PrevJoyStatus = 0; + uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL = Joystick_GetStatus(); + bool InputChanged = false; + + /* Clear the report contents */ + memset(ReportData, 0, sizeof(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t)); + + if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP) + ReportData->KeyCode[0] = 0x04; // A + else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN) + ReportData->KeyCode[0] = 0x05; // B + + if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT) + ReportData->KeyCode[0] = 0x06; // C + else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT) + ReportData->KeyCode[0] = 0x07; // D + + if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS) + ReportData->KeyCode[0] = 0x08; // E + + /* Check if the new report is different to the previous report */ + InputChanged = (uint8_t)(PrevJoyStatus ^ JoyStatus_LCL); + + /* Save the current joystick status for later comparison */ + PrevJoyStatus = JoyStatus_LCL; + + /* Return whether the new report is different to the previous report or not */ + return InputChanged; +} + +/** Processes a given LED report mask from the host and sets the board LEDs to match. + * + * \param LEDReport LED mask from the host, containing a mask of what LEDs are set + */ +void ProcessLEDReport(uint8_t LEDReport) +{ + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_LED2; + + if (LEDReport & 0x01) // NUM Lock + LEDMask |= LEDS_LED1; + + if (LEDReport & 0x02) // CAPS Lock + LEDMask |= LEDS_LED3; + + if (LEDReport & 0x04) // SCROLL Lock + LEDMask |= LEDS_LED4; + + /* Set the status LEDs to the current Keyboard LED status */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); +} + +/** Function to manage status updates to the user. This is done via LEDs on the given board, if available, but may be changed to + * log to a serial port, or anything else that is suitable for status updates. + * + * \param CurrentStatus Current status of the system, from the KeyboardFullInt_StatusCodes_t enum + */ +void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus) +{ + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS; + + /* Set the LED mask to the appropriate LED mask based on the given status code */ + switch (CurrentStatus) + { + case Status_USBNotReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1); + break; + case Status_USBEnumerating: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2); + break; + case Status_USBReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4); + break; + } + + /* Set the board LEDs to the new LED mask */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); +} + +/** ISR for the general Pipe/Endpoint interrupt vector. This ISR fires when an endpoint's status changes (such as + * a packet has been received) on an endpoint with its corresponding ISR enabling bits set. This is used to send + * HID packets to the host each time the HID interrupt endpoints polling period elapses, as managed by the USB + * controller. It is also used to respond to standard and class specific requests send to the device on the control + * endpoint, by handing them off to the LUFA library when they are received. + */ +ISR(ENDPOINT_PIPE_vect, ISR_BLOCK) +{ + /* Check if the control endpoint has received a request */ + if (Endpoint_HasEndpointInterrupted(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP)) + { + /* Clear the endpoint interrupt */ + Endpoint_ClearEndpointInterrupt(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP); + + /* Process the control request */ + USB_USBTask(); + + /* Handshake the endpoint setup interrupt - must be after the call to USB_USBTask() */ + USB_INT_Clear(ENDPOINT_INT_SETUP); + } + + /* Check if keyboard endpoint has interrupted */ + if (Endpoint_HasEndpointInterrupted(KEYBOARD_EPNUM)) + { + USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t KeyboardReportData; + bool SendReport; + + /* Create the next keyboard report for transmission to the host */ + SendReport = GetNextReport(&KeyboardReportData); + + /* Check if the idle period is set and has elapsed */ + if (IdleCount && !(IdleMSRemaining)) + { + /* Idle period elapsed, indicate that a report must be sent */ + SendReport = true; + + /* Reset the idle time remaining counter, must multiply by 4 to get the duration in milliseconds */ + IdleMSRemaining = (IdleCount << 2); + } + + /* Check to see if a report should be issued */ + if (SendReport) + { + /* Select the Keyboard Report Endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(KEYBOARD_EPNUM); + + /* Clear the endpoint IN interrupt flag */ + USB_INT_Clear(ENDPOINT_INT_IN); + + /* Clear the Keyboard Report endpoint interrupt */ + Endpoint_ClearEndpointInterrupt(KEYBOARD_EPNUM); + + /* Write Keyboard Report Data */ + Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&KeyboardReportData, sizeof(KeyboardReportData)); + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + } + } + + /* Check if Keyboard LED status Endpoint has interrupted */ + if (Endpoint_HasEndpointInterrupted(KEYBOARD_LEDS_EPNUM)) + { + /* Select the Keyboard LED Report Endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(KEYBOARD_LEDS_EPNUM); + + /* Clear the endpoint OUT interrupt flag */ + USB_INT_Clear(ENDPOINT_INT_OUT); + + /* Clear the Keyboard LED Report endpoint interrupt */ + Endpoint_ClearEndpointInterrupt(KEYBOARD_LEDS_EPNUM); + + /* Read in the LED report from the host */ + uint8_t LEDStatus = Endpoint_Read_Byte(); + + /* Process the incomming LED report */ + ProcessLEDReport(LEDStatus); + + /* Handshake the OUT Endpoint - clear endpoint and ready for next report */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + } +} + diff --git a/Demos/KeyboardFullInt/KeyboardFullInt.h b/Demos/KeyboardFullInt/KeyboardFullInt.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..7711faaa3e6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/KeyboardFullInt/KeyboardFullInt.h @@ -0,0 +1,115 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com) + Based on code by Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for KeyboardFullInt.c. + */ + +#ifndef _KEYBOARD_H_ +#define _KEYBOARD_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + #include + #include + + #include "Descriptors.h" + + #include // Library Version Information + #include // PROGMEM tags readable by the ButtLoad project + #include // USB Functionality + #include // Joystick driver + #include // LEDs driver + + /* Macros: */ + /** HID Class specific request to get the next HID report from the device. */ + #define REQ_GetReport 0x01 + + /** HID Class specific request to get the idle timeout period of the device. */ + #define REQ_GetIdle 0x02 + + /** HID Class specific request to send the next HID report to the device. */ + #define REQ_SetReport 0x09 + + /** HID Class specific request to set the idle timeout period of the device. */ + #define REQ_SetIdle 0x0A + + /** HID Class specific request to get the current HID protocol in use, either report or boot. */ + #define REQ_GetProtocol 0x03 + + /** HID Class specific request to set the current HID protocol in use, either report or boot. */ + #define REQ_SetProtocol 0x0B + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the keyboard HID report structure, for creating and sending HID reports to the host PC. + * This mirrors the layout described to the host in the HID report descriptor, in Descriptors.c. + */ + typedef struct + { + uint8_t Modifier; /**< Modifier mask byte, containing a mask of modifier keys set (such as shift or CTRL) */ + uint8_t Reserved; /**< Reserved, always set as 0x00 */ + uint8_t KeyCode[6]; /**< Array of up to six simultaneous key codes of pressed keys */ + } USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t; + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible status codes for passing to the UpdateStatus() function. */ + enum KeyboardFullInt_StatusCodes_t + { + Status_USBNotReady = 0, /**< USB is not ready (disconnected from a USB host) */ + Status_USBEnumerating = 1, /**< USB interface is enumerating */ + Status_USBReady = 2, /**< USB interface is connected and ready */ + }; + + /* Event Handlers: */ + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Connect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Connect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Disconnect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Disconnect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Reset event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Reset); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_ConfigurationChanged event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_ConfigurationChanged); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_UnhandledControlPacket); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + bool GetNextReport(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t* ReportData); + void ProcessLEDReport(uint8_t LEDReport); + void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/KeyboardFullInt/KeyboardFullInt.txt b/Demos/KeyboardFullInt/KeyboardFullInt.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..89071188bb8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/KeyboardFullInt/KeyboardFullInt.txt @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage Fully Interrupt Driven Keyboard Device Demo + * + * Keyboard demonstration application, using endpoint interrupts for the + * exchange of data to the USB host, and control requests on the control + * endpoint. This gives a simple reference application for implementing a + * USB Keyboard using the basic USB HID drivers in all modern OSes (i.e. + * no special drivers required). It is boot protocol compatible, and thus + * works under compatible BIOS as if it was a native keyboard (e.g. PS/2). + * + * On startup the system will automatically enumerate and function + * as a keyboard when the USB connection to a host is present. To use + * the keyboard example, manipulate the joystick to send the letters + * a, b, c, d and e. See the USB HID documentation for more information + * on sending keyboard event and keypresses. + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + *
USB Mode:Device
USB Class:Human Interface Device (HID)
USB Subclass:N/A
Relevant Standards:USBIF HID Specification, USBIF HID Usage Tables
Usable Speeds:Low Speed Mode, Full Speed Mode
+ */ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Demos/KeyboardFullInt/makefile b/Demos/KeyboardFullInt/makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..20fcc131537 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/KeyboardFullInt/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,701 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# Denver Gingerich +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb1287 + + +# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# Typical values are: +# F_CPU = 1000000 +# F_CPU = 1843200 +# F_CPU = 2000000 +# F_CPU = 3686400 +# F_CPU = 4000000 +# F_CPU = 7372800 +# F_CPU = 8000000 +# F_CPU = 11059200 +# F_CPU = 14745600 +# F_CPU = 16000000 +# F_CPU = 18432000 +# F_CPU = 20000000 +F_CPU = 8000000 + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = KeyboardFullInt + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + Descriptors.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.c \ + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = ../../ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS +CDEFS += -DUSB_DEVICE_ONLY -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED)" + + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20 +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd +# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500 +# +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf +MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) ) +FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr ) + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +checkhooks: build + @echo + @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events ------- + @$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \ + cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \ + echo "(None)" + @echo ----- End Unhooked LUFA Events ----- + +checklibmode: + @echo + @echo ----------- Library Mode ----------- + @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \ + | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \ + || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)." + @echo ------------------------------------ + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + copy $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom --debug 1 $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end + +clean_binary: + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + +clean_list: + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode begin \ +finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \ +clean clean_list clean_binary program debug \ +gdb-config doxygen dfu flip diff --git a/Demos/KeyboardHost/ConfigDescriptor.c b/Demos/KeyboardHost/ConfigDescriptor.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..7a704cfc82a --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/KeyboardHost/ConfigDescriptor.c @@ -0,0 +1,144 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations + * needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special computer-readable structures + * which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "ConfigDescriptor.h" + +/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This + * routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate + * with compatible devices. + * + * This routine searches for a HID interface descriptor containing at least one Interrupt type IN endpoint. + * + * \return An error code from the KeyboardHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum. + */ +uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void) +{ + uint8_t* ConfigDescriptorData; + uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize; + + /* Get Configuration Descriptor size from the device */ + if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(&ConfigDescriptorSize, NULL) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + return ControlError; + + /* Ensure that the Configuration Descriptor isn't too large */ + if (ConfigDescriptorSize > MAX_CONFIG_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE) + return DescriptorTooLarge; + + /* Allocate enough memory for the entire config descriptor */ + ConfigDescriptorData = alloca(ConfigDescriptorSize); + + /* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */ + USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(&ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData); + + /* Validate returned data - ensure first entry is a configuration header descriptor */ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(ConfigDescriptorData) != DTYPE_Configuration) + return InvalidConfigDataReturned; + + /* Get the keyboard interface from the configuration descriptor */ + if (USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData, NextKeyboardInterface)) + { + /* Descriptor not found, error out */ + return NoHIDInterfaceFound; + } + + /* Get the keyboard interface's data endpoint descriptor */ + if (USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData, + NextInterfaceKeyboardDataEndpoint)) + { + /* Descriptor not found, error out */ + return NoEndpointFound; + } + + /* Retrieve the endpoint address from the endpoint descriptor */ + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t); + + /* Configure the keyboard data pipe */ + Pipe_ConfigurePipe(KEYBOARD_DATAPIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, PIPE_TOKEN_IN, + EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE); + + Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests(); + + /* Valid data found, return success */ + return SuccessfulConfigRead; +} + +/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's + * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration + * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found. + * + * This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct Keyboard HID Class and Protocol values. + * + * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextKeyboardInterface) +{ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface) + { + /* Check the HID descriptor class and protocol, break out if correct class/protocol interface found */ + if ((DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Class == KEYBOARD_CLASS) && + (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Protocol == KEYBOARD_PROTOCOL)) + { + return Descriptor_Search_Found; + } + } + + return Descriptor_Search_NotFound; +} + +/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's + * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration + * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found. + * + * This comparator searches for the next IN Endpoint descriptor inside the current interface descriptor, + * aborting the search if another interface descriptor is found before the required endpoint. + * + * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextInterfaceKeyboardDataEndpoint) +{ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint) + { + if (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t).EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN) + return Descriptor_Search_Found; + } + else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface) + { + return Descriptor_Search_Fail; + } + + return Descriptor_Search_NotFound; +} diff --git a/Demos/KeyboardHost/ConfigDescriptor.h b/Demos/KeyboardHost/ConfigDescriptor.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..1d168b45328 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/KeyboardHost/ConfigDescriptor.h @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c. + */ + +#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_ +#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include // USB Functionality + #include // Configuration Descriptor Parser + + #include "KeyboardHost.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Interface Class value for the Human Interface Device class */ + #define KEYBOARD_CLASS 0x03 + + /** Interface Protocol value for a Boot Protocol Keyboard compliant device */ + #define KEYBOARD_PROTOCOL 0x01 + + /** Maximum size of a device configuration descriptor which can be processed by the host, in bytes */ + #define MAX_CONFIG_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE 512 + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible return codes of the ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */ + enum KeyboardHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t + { + SuccessfulConfigRead = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */ + ControlError = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */ + DescriptorTooLarge = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */ + InvalidConfigDataReturned = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */ + NoHIDInterfaceFound = 4, /**< A compatible HID interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */ + NoEndpointFound = 5, /**< A compatible HID IN endpoint was not found in the device's HID interface */ + }; + + /* Configuration Descriptor Comparison Functions: */ + DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextKeyboardInterface); + DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextInterfaceKeyboardDataEndpoint); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/KeyboardHost/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/KeyboardHost/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..3bdbc95ee5b --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/KeyboardHost/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Keyboard Host Demo" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek, +# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish, +# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene, +# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command , where is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command , where +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Namespace. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file . + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are +# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values +# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list; +# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which +# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous +# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE +# respectively. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin" + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to the search engine +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be +# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO diff --git a/Demos/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.aps b/Demos/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.aps new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..f80c86dc0ec --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.aps @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +KeyboardHost30-Sep-2008 14:08:4830-Sep-2008 14:09:04241030-Sep-2008 14:08:4844, 14, 0, 589AVR GCCC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\KeyboardHost\JTAGICE mkIIAT90USB1287.xmlfalseR00R01R02R03R04R05R06R07R08R09R10R11R12R13R14R15R16R17R18R19R20R21R22R23R24R25R26R27R28R29R30R31Auto000ConfigDescriptor.cKeyboardHost.cConfigDescriptor.hKeyboardHost.hmakefiledefaultYESmakefileat90usb1287111KeyboardHost.elfdefault\1-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enumsdefault1C:\WinAVR-20080512\bin\avr-gcc.exeC:\WinAVR-20080512\utils\bin\make.exe diff --git a/Demos/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.c b/Demos/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..dd05bdea267 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.c @@ -0,0 +1,314 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the KeyboardHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of + * the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + +#include "KeyboardHost.h" + +/* Project Tags, for reading out using the ButtLoad project */ +BUTTLOADTAG(ProjName, "LUFA KBD Host App"); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildTime, __TIME__); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildDate, __DATE__); +BUTTLOADTAG(LUFAVersion, "LUFA V" LUFA_VERSION_STRING); + +/* Scheduler Task List */ +TASK_LIST +{ + { Task: USB_USBTask , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, + { Task: USB_Keyboard_Host , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, +}; + + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then + * starts the scheduler to run the application tasks. + */ +int main(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable Clock Division */ + SetSystemClockPrescaler(0); + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + SerialStream_Init(9600, false); + LEDs_Init(); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); + + /* Initialize Scheduler so that it can be used */ + Scheduler_Init(); + + /* Initialize USB Subsystem */ + USB_Init(); + + /* Startup message */ + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_RESET ESC_BG_WHITE ESC_INVERSE_ON ESC_ERASE_DISPLAY + "Keyboard Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_INVERSE_OFF)); + + /* Scheduling - routine never returns, so put this last in the main function */ + Scheduler_Start(); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and + * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceAttached) +{ + puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n")); + UpdateStatus(Status_USBEnumerating); + + /* Start USB management task to enumerate the device */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_RUN); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and + * stops the library USB task management process. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceUnattached) +{ + /* Stop Keyboard and USB management task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_STOP); + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_Keyboard_Host, TASK_STOP); + + puts_P(PSTR("Device Unattached.\r\n")); + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully + * enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete) +{ + /* Start Keyboard Host task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_Keyboard_Host, TASK_RUN); + + /* Indicate device enumeration complete */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_HostError) +{ + USB_ShutDown(); + + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + UpdateStatus(Status_HardwareError); + for(;;); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occured while + * enumerating an attached USB device. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed) +{ + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"), SubErrorCode); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- In State %d\r\n"), USB_HostState); + + UpdateStatus(Status_EnumerationError); +} + +/** Function to manage status updates to the user. This is done via LEDs on the given board, if available, but may be changed to + * log to a serial port, or anything else that is suitable for status updates. + * + * \param CurrentStatus Current status of the system, from the KeyboardHost_StatusCodes_t enum + */ +void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus) +{ + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS; + + /* Set the LED mask to the appropriate LED mask based on the given status code */ + switch (CurrentStatus) + { + case Status_USBNotReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1); + break; + case Status_USBEnumerating: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2); + break; + case Status_USBReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED2); + break; + case Status_EnumerationError: + case Status_HardwareError: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3); + break; + } + + /* Set the board LEDs to the new LED mask */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); +} + +/** Task to set the configuration of the attached device after it has been enumerated, and to read and process + * HID reports from the device and display the results onto the board LEDs. + */ +TASK(USB_Keyboard_Host) +{ + uint8_t ErrorCode; + + switch (USB_HostState) + { + case HOST_STATE_Addressed: + /* Standard request to set the device configuration to configuration 1 */ + USB_HostRequest = (USB_Host_Request_Header_t) + { + bmRequestType: (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE), + bRequest: REQ_SetConfiguration, + wValue: 1, + wIndex: 0, + wLength: 0, + }; + + /* Send the request, display error and wait for device detatch if request fails */ + if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + { + puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error status */ + UpdateStatus(Status_EnumerationError); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + break; + } + + USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured; + break; + case HOST_STATE_Configured: + puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n")); + + /* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */ + if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead) + { + if (ErrorCode == ControlError) + puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n")); + else + puts_P(PSTR("Invalid Device.\r\n")); + + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error status */ + UpdateStatus(Status_EnumerationError); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + break; + } + + /* HID class request to set the keyboard protocol to the Boot Protocol */ + USB_HostRequest = (USB_Host_Request_Header_t) + { + bmRequestType: (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE), + bRequest: REQ_SetProtocol, + wValue: 0, + wIndex: 0, + wLength: 0, + }; + + /* Send the request, display error and wait for device detatch if request fails */ + if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + { + puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Set Protocol).\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error status */ + UpdateStatus(Status_EnumerationError); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + break; + } + + puts_P(PSTR("Keyboard Enumerated.\r\n")); + + USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Ready; + break; + case HOST_STATE_Ready: + /* Select and unfreeze keyboard data pipe */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(KEYBOARD_DATAPIPE); + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + /* Check if data has been received from the attached keyboard */ + if (Pipe_ReadWriteAllowed()) + { + USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t KeyboardReport; + + /* Read in keyboard report data */ + Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&KeyboardReport, sizeof(KeyboardReport)); + + /* Clear the IN endpoint, ready for next data packet */ + Pipe_ClearCurrentBank(); + + /* Indicate if the modifier byte is non-zero */ + LEDs_ChangeLEDs(LEDS_LED1, (KeyboardReport.Modifier) ? LEDS_LED1 : 0); + + /* Check if a key has been pressed */ + if (KeyboardReport.KeyCode) + { + /* Toggle status LED to indicate keypress */ + if (LEDs_GetLEDs() & LEDS_LED2) + LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(LEDS_LED2); + else + LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(LEDS_LED2); + + char PressedKey = 0; + + /* Retrieve pressed key character if alphanumeric */ + if ((KeyboardReport.KeyCode >= 0x04) && (KeyboardReport.KeyCode <= 0x1D)) + PressedKey = (KeyboardReport.KeyCode - 0x04) + 'A'; + else if ((KeyboardReport.KeyCode >= 0x1E) && (KeyboardReport.KeyCode <= 0x27)) + PressedKey = (KeyboardReport.KeyCode - 0x1E) + '0'; + else if (KeyboardReport.KeyCode == 0x2C) + PressedKey = ' '; + else if (KeyboardReport.KeyCode == 0x28) + PressedKey = '\n'; + + /* Print the pressed key character out through the serial port if valid */ + if (PressedKey) + putchar(PressedKey); + } + } + + /* Freeze keyboard data pipe */ + Pipe_Freeze(); + break; + } +} diff --git a/Demos/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.h b/Demos/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..97695f748b1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.h @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for KeyboardHost.c. + */ + +#ifndef _KEYBOARD_HOST_H_ +#define _KEYBOARD_HOST_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + #include + + #include // Library Version Information + #include // PROGMEM tags readable by the ButtLoad project + #include // ANSI Terminal Escape Codes + #include // USB Functionality + #include // Serial stream driver + #include // LEDs driver + #include // Simple scheduler for task management + + #include "ConfigDescriptor.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Pipe number for the keyboard data IN pipe */ + #define KEYBOARD_DATAPIPE 1 + + /** HID Class Specific request to set the report protocol mode */ + #define REQ_SetProtocol 0x0B + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for a standard Boot Protocol Keyboard report */ + typedef struct + { + uint8_t Modifier; /**< Keyboard modifier byte, indicating pressed modifier keys (such as Shift, Control, etc.) */ + uint8_t RESERVED; /**< Reserved for OEM use, always set to 0 */ + uint8_t KeyCode; /**< Key code of the currently pressed key */ + } USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t; + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible status codes for passing to the UpdateStatus() function. */ + enum KeyboardHost_StatusCodes_t + { + Status_USBNotReady = 0, /**< USB is not ready (disconnected from a USB device) */ + Status_USBEnumerating = 1, /**< USB interface is enumerating */ + Status_USBReady = 2, /**< USB interface is connected and ready */ + Status_EnumerationError = 3, /**< Software error while enumerating the attached USB device */ + Status_HardwareError = 4, /**< Hardware error while enumerating the attached USB device */ + }; + + /* Task Definitions: */ + TASK(USB_Keyboard_Host); + + /* Event Handlers: */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceAttached); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceUnattached); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_HostError); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.txt b/Demos/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..92e380789d3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.txt @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage Keyboard Host Demo + * + * Keyboard host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference + * application for implementing a USB Mouse keyboard, for USB keyboards using + * the standard keyboard HID profile. + * + * Pressed alpha-numeric, enter or space key is transmitted through the serial + * USART at serial settings 9600, 8, N, 1. + * + * This uses a naive method where the keyboard is set to Boot Protocol mode, so + * that the report structure is fixed and known. A better implementation + * uses the HID report parser for correct report data processing across + * all compatable mice with advanced characteristics, as shown in the + * KeyboardHostWithParser demo application. + * + * Currently only single interface keyboards are supported. + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + *
USB Mode:Host
USB Class:Human Interface Device (HID)
USB Subclass:N/A
Relevant Standards:USBIF HID Specification, USBIF HID Usage Tables
Usable Speeds:Low Speed Mode, Full Speed Mode
+ */ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Demos/KeyboardHost/makefile b/Demos/KeyboardHost/makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..5140e7d98f6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/KeyboardHost/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,705 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# Denver Gingerich +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb1287 + + +# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# Typical values are: +# F_CPU = 1000000 +# F_CPU = 1843200 +# F_CPU = 2000000 +# F_CPU = 3686400 +# F_CPU = 4000000 +# F_CPU = 7372800 +# F_CPU = 8000000 +# F_CPU = 11059200 +# F_CPU = 14745600 +# F_CPU = 16000000 +# F_CPU = 18432000 +# F_CPU = 20000000 +F_CPU = 8000000 + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = KeyboardHost + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + ConfigDescriptor.c \ + ../../LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial_Stream.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/ConfigDescriptor.c \ + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = ../../ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS +CDEFS += -DUSB_HOST_ONLY -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)" + + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20 +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd +# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500 +# +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf +MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) ) +FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr ) + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +checkhooks: build + @echo + @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events ------- + @$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \ + cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \ + echo "(None)" + @echo ----- End Unhooked LUFA Events ----- + +checklibmode: + @echo + @echo ----------- Library Mode ----------- + @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \ + | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \ + || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)." + @echo ------------------------------------ + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + copy $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom --debug 1 $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +## Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end + +clean_binary: + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + +clean_list: + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode begin \ +finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \ +clean clean_list clean_binary program debug \ +gdb-config doxygen dfu flip diff --git a/Demos/KeyboardHostViaInt/ConfigDescriptor.c b/Demos/KeyboardHostViaInt/ConfigDescriptor.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..aaf929fe960 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/KeyboardHostViaInt/ConfigDescriptor.c @@ -0,0 +1,149 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations + * needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special computer-readable structures + * which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "ConfigDescriptor.h" + +/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This + * routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate + * with compatible devices. + * + * This routine searches for a HID interface descriptor containing at least one Interrupt type IN endpoint. + * + * \return An error code from the KeyboardHostViaInt_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum. + */ +uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void) +{ + uint8_t* ConfigDescriptorData; + uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize; + + /* Get Configuration Descriptor size from the device */ + if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(&ConfigDescriptorSize, NULL) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + return ControlError; + + /* Ensure that the Configuration Descriptor isn't too large */ + if (ConfigDescriptorSize > MAX_CONFIG_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE) + return DescriptorTooLarge; + + /* Allocate enough memory for the entire config descriptor */ + ConfigDescriptorData = alloca(ConfigDescriptorSize); + + /* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */ + USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(&ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData); + + /* Validate returned data - ensure first entry is a configuration header descriptor */ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(ConfigDescriptorData) != DTYPE_Configuration) + return InvalidConfigDataReturned; + + /* Get the keyboard interface from the configuration descriptor */ + if (USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData, NextKeyboardInterface)) + { + /* Descriptor not found, error out */ + return NoHIDInterfaceFound; + } + + /* Get the keyboard interface's data endpoint descriptor */ + if (USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData, + NextInterfaceKeyboardDataEndpoint)) + { + /* Descriptor not found, error out */ + return NoEndpointFound; + } + + /* Retrieve the endpoint address from the endpoint descriptor */ + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t); + + /* Configure the keyboard data pipe */ + Pipe_ConfigurePipe(KEYBOARD_DATAPIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, PIPE_TOKEN_IN, + EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE); + + Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests(); + Pipe_SetInterruptPeriod(EndpointData->PollingIntervalMS); + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + /* Enable the pipe IN interrupt for the data pipe */ + USB_INT_Enable(PIPE_INT_IN); + + /* Valid data found, return success */ + return SuccessfulConfigRead; +} + +/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's + * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration + * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found. + * + * This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct Keyboard HID Class and Protocol values. + * + * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextKeyboardInterface) +{ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface) + { + /* Check the HID descriptor class and protocol, break out if correct class/protocol interface found */ + if ((DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Class == KEYBOARD_CLASS) && + (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Protocol == KEYBOARD_PROTOCOL)) + { + return Descriptor_Search_Found; + } + } + + return Descriptor_Search_NotFound; +} + +/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's + * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration + * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found. + * + * This comparator searches for the next IN Endpoint descriptor inside the current interface descriptor, + * aborting the search if another interface descriptor is found before the required endpoint. + * + * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextInterfaceKeyboardDataEndpoint) +{ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint) + { + if (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t).EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN) + return Descriptor_Search_Found; + } + else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface) + { + return Descriptor_Search_Fail; + } + + return Descriptor_Search_NotFound; +} diff --git a/Demos/KeyboardHostViaInt/ConfigDescriptor.h b/Demos/KeyboardHostViaInt/ConfigDescriptor.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..95854509d3b --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/KeyboardHostViaInt/ConfigDescriptor.h @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c. + */ + +#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_ +#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include // USB Functionality + #include // Configuration Descriptor Parser + + #include "KeyboardHostViaInt.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Interface Class value for the Human Interface Device class */ + #define KEYBOARD_CLASS 0x03 + + /** Interface Protocol value for a Boot Protocol Keyboard compliant device */ + #define KEYBOARD_PROTOCOL 0x01 + + /** Maximum size of a device configuration descriptor which can be processed by the host, in bytes */ + #define MAX_CONFIG_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE 512 + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible return codes of the ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */ + enum KeyboardHostViaInt_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t + { + SuccessfulConfigRead = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */ + ControlError = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */ + DescriptorTooLarge = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */ + InvalidConfigDataReturned = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */ + NoHIDInterfaceFound = 4, /**< A compatible HID interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */ + NoEndpointFound = 5, /**< A compatible HID IN endpoint was not found in the device's HID interface */ + }; + + /* Configuration Descriptor Comparison Functions: */ + DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextKeyboardInterface); + DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextInterfaceKeyboardDataEndpoint); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/KeyboardHostViaInt/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/KeyboardHostViaInt/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..185fcd32609 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/KeyboardHostViaInt/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Keyboard Host Demo (Via Pipe Interrupts)" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek, +# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish, +# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene, +# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command , where is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command , where +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Namespace. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file . + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are +# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values +# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list; +# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which +# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous +# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE +# respectively. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin" + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to the search engine +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be +# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO diff --git a/Demos/KeyboardHostViaInt/KeyboardHostViaInt.aps b/Demos/KeyboardHostViaInt/KeyboardHostViaInt.aps new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..7a7cdb4c60f --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/KeyboardHostViaInt/KeyboardHostViaInt.aps @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +KeyboardHostViaInt30-Sep-2008 14:09:2330-Sep-2008 14:09:46241030-Sep-2008 14:09:2344, 14, 0, 589AVR GCCC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\KeyboardHostViaInt\JTAGICE mkIIAT90USB1287.xmlfalseR00R01R02R03R04R05R06R07R08R09R10R11R12R13R14R15R16R17R18R19R20R21R22R23R24R25R26R27R28R29R30R31Auto000ConfigDescriptor.cKeyboardHostViaInt.cConfigDescriptor.hKeyboardHostViaInt.hmakefiledefaultYESmakefileat90usb1287111KeyboardHostViaInt.elfdefault\1-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enumsdefault1C:\WinAVR-20080512\bin\avr-gcc.exeC:\WinAVR-20080512\utils\bin\make.exe diff --git a/Demos/KeyboardHostViaInt/KeyboardHostViaInt.c b/Demos/KeyboardHostViaInt/KeyboardHostViaInt.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..ecff9511473 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/KeyboardHostViaInt/KeyboardHostViaInt.c @@ -0,0 +1,321 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the KeyboardHostViaInt demo. This file contains the main tasks of + * the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + +#include "KeyboardHostViaInt.h" + +/* Project Tags, for reading out using the ButtLoad project */ +BUTTLOADTAG(ProjName, "LUFA KBD Host App"); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildTime, __TIME__); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildDate, __DATE__); +BUTTLOADTAG(LUFAVersion, "LUFA V" LUFA_VERSION_STRING); + +/* Scheduler Task List */ +TASK_LIST +{ + { Task: USB_USBTask , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, + { Task: USB_Keyboard_Host , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, +}; + + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then + * starts the scheduler to run the application tasks. + */ +int main(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable Clock Division */ + SetSystemClockPrescaler(0); + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + SerialStream_Init(9600, false); + LEDs_Init(); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); + + /* Initialize Scheduler so that it can be used */ + Scheduler_Init(); + + /* Initialize USB Subsystem */ + USB_Init(); + + /* Startup message */ + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_RESET ESC_BG_WHITE ESC_INVERSE_ON ESC_ERASE_DISPLAY + "Keyboard Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_INVERSE_OFF)); + + /* Scheduling - routine never returns, so put this last in the main function */ + Scheduler_Start(); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and + * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceAttached) +{ + puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n")); + UpdateStatus(Status_USBEnumerating); + + /* Start USB management task to enumerate the device */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_RUN); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and + * stops the library USB task management process. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceUnattached) +{ + /* Stop keyboard and USB management task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_STOP); + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_Keyboard_Host, TASK_STOP); + + puts_P(PSTR("\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n")); + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully + * enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete) +{ + /* Start Keyboard Host task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_Keyboard_Host, TASK_RUN); + + /* Indicate device enumeration complete */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_HostError) +{ + USB_ShutDown(); + + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + UpdateStatus(Status_HardwareError); + for(;;); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occured while + * enumerating an attached USB device. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed) +{ + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"), SubErrorCode); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- In State %d\r\n"), USB_HostState); + + UpdateStatus(Status_EnumerationError); +} + +/** Task to set the configuration of the attached device after it has been enumerated, and to enable the pipe + * interrupts so that reports can be processed as they arrive from the device. + */ +TASK(USB_Keyboard_Host) +{ + uint8_t ErrorCode; + + switch (USB_HostState) + { + case HOST_STATE_Addressed: + /* Standard request to set the device configuration to configuration 1 */ + USB_HostRequest = (USB_Host_Request_Header_t) + { + bmRequestType: (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE), + bRequest: REQ_SetConfiguration, + wValue: 1, + wIndex: 0, + wLength: 0, + }; + + /* Send the request, display error and wait for device detatch if request fails */ + if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + { + puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error via status LEDs */ + UpdateStatus(Status_EnumerationError); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + break; + } + + USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured; + break; + case HOST_STATE_Configured: + puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n")); + + /* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */ + if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead) + { + if (ErrorCode == ControlError) + puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n")); + else + puts_P(PSTR("Invalid Device.\r\n")); + + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error via status LEDs */ + UpdateStatus(Status_EnumerationError); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + break; + } + + /* HID class request to set the keyboard protocol to the Boot Protocol */ + USB_HostRequest = (USB_Host_Request_Header_t) + { + bmRequestType: (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE), + bRequest: REQ_SetProtocol, + wValue: 0, + wIndex: 0, + wLength: 0, + }; + + /* Send the request, display error and wait for device detatch if request fails */ + if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + { + puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Set Protocol).\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error status */ + UpdateStatus(Status_EnumerationError); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + break; + } + + puts_P(PSTR("Keyboard Enumerated.\r\n")); + + USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Ready; + break; + } +} + +/** Function to manage status updates to the user. This is done via LEDs on the given board, if available, but may be changed to + * log to a serial port, or anything else that is suitable for status updates. + * + * \param CurrentStatus Current status of the system, from the KeyboardHostViaInt_StatusCodes_t enum + */ +void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus) +{ + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS; + + /* Set the LED mask to the appropriate LED mask based on the given status code */ + switch (CurrentStatus) + { + case Status_USBNotReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1); + break; + case Status_USBEnumerating: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2); + break; + case Status_USBReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED2); + break; + case Status_EnumerationError: + case Status_HardwareError: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3); + break; + } + + /* Set the board LEDs to the new LED mask */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); +} + +/** Interrupt handler for the Endpoint/Pipe interrupt vector. This interrupt fires each time an enabled + * pipe interrupt occurs on a pipe which has had that interrupt enabled. + */ +ISR(ENDPOINT_PIPE_vect, ISR_BLOCK) +{ + USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t KeyboardReport; + char PressedKey = 0; + + /* Check to see if the keyboard data pipe has caused the interrupt */ + if (Pipe_HasPipeInterrupted(KEYBOARD_DATAPIPE)) + { + /* Clear the pipe interrupt, and select the keyboard pipe */ + Pipe_ClearPipeInterrupt(KEYBOARD_DATAPIPE); + Pipe_SelectPipe(KEYBOARD_DATAPIPE); + + /* Check to see if the pipe IN interrupt has fired */ + if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(PIPE_INT_IN) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(PIPE_INT_IN)) + { + /* Clear interrupt flag */ + USB_INT_Clear(PIPE_INT_IN); + + /* Read in keyboard report data */ + Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&KeyboardReport, sizeof(KeyboardReport)); + + /* Clear the IN endpoint, ready for next data packet */ + Pipe_ClearCurrentBank(); + + LEDs_ChangeLEDs(LEDS_LED1, (KeyboardReport.Modifier) ? LEDS_LED1 : 0); + + /* Check if a key has been pressed */ + if (KeyboardReport.KeyCode) + { + /* Toggle status LED to indicate keypress */ + if (LEDs_GetLEDs() & LEDS_LED4) + LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(LEDS_LED4); + else + LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(LEDS_LED4); + + /* Retrieve pressed key character if alphanumeric */ + if ((KeyboardReport.KeyCode >= 0x04) && (KeyboardReport.KeyCode <= 0x1D)) + PressedKey = (KeyboardReport.KeyCode - 0x04) + 'A'; + else if ((KeyboardReport.KeyCode >= 0x1E) && (KeyboardReport.KeyCode <= 0x27)) + PressedKey = (KeyboardReport.KeyCode - 0x1E) + '0'; + else if (KeyboardReport.KeyCode == 0x2C) + PressedKey = ' '; + else if (KeyboardReport.KeyCode == 0x28) + PressedKey = '\n'; + + /* Print the pressed key character out through the serial port if valid */ + if (PressedKey) + putchar(PressedKey); + } + } + } +} diff --git a/Demos/KeyboardHostViaInt/KeyboardHostViaInt.h b/Demos/KeyboardHostViaInt/KeyboardHostViaInt.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..22848eeaf1b --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/KeyboardHostViaInt/KeyboardHostViaInt.h @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for KeyboardHostViaInt.c. + */ + +#ifndef _KEYBOARD_HOST_VIA_INT_H_ +#define _KEYBOARD_HOST_VIA_INT_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + #include + #include + + #include // Library Version Information + #include // PROGMEM tags readable by the ButtLoad project + #include // ANSI Terminal Escape Codes + #include // USB Functionality + #include // Serial stream driver + #include // LEDs driver + #include // Simple scheduler for task management + + #include "ConfigDescriptor.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Pipe number for the keyboard data IN pipe */ + #define KEYBOARD_DATAPIPE 1 + + /** HID Class Specific request to set the report protocol mode */ + #define REQ_SetProtocol 0x0B + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for a standard Boot Protocol Keyboard report */ + typedef struct + { + uint8_t Modifier; /**< Keyboard modifier byte, indicating pressed modifier keys (such as Shift, Control, etc.) */ + uint8_t RESERVED; /**< Reserved for OEM use, always set to 0 */ + uint8_t KeyCode; /**< Key code of the currently pressed key */ + } USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t; + + /** Enum for the possible status codes for passing to the UpdateStatus() function. */ + enum KeyboardHostViaInt_StatusCodes_t + { + Status_USBNotReady = 0, /**< USB is not ready (disconnected from a USB device) */ + Status_USBEnumerating = 1, /**< USB interface is enumerating */ + Status_USBReady = 2, /**< USB interface is connected and ready */ + Status_EnumerationError = 3, /**< Software error while enumerating the attached USB device */ + Status_HardwareError = 4, /**< Hardware error while enumerating the attached USB device */ + }; + + /* Task Definitions: */ + TASK(USB_Keyboard_Host); + + /* Event Handlers: */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceAttached); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceUnattached); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_HostError); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/KeyboardHostViaInt/KeyboardHostViaInt.txt b/Demos/KeyboardHostViaInt/KeyboardHostViaInt.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..07c11084895 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/KeyboardHostViaInt/KeyboardHostViaInt.txt @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage Keyboard Host Demo + * + * Keyboard host demonstration application, using pipe interrupts. This gives + * a simple reference application for implementing a USB Keyboard host utilizing + * the LUFA pipe interrupt system, for USB keyboards using the standard Keyboard + * HID profile. + * + * Pressed alpha-numeric, enter or space key is transmitted through the serial + * USART at serial settings 9600, 8, N, 1. + * + * This uses a naive method where the keyboard is set to Boot Protocol mode, so + * that the report structure is fixed and known. A better implementation + * uses the HID report parser for correct report data processing across + * all compatable mice with advanced characteristics, as shown in the + * KeyboardHostWithParser demo application. + * + * Currently only single interface keyboards are supported. + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + *
USB Mode:Host
USB Class:Human Interface Device (HID)
USB Subclass:N/A
Relevant Standards:USBIF HID Specification, USBIF HID Usage Tables
Usable Speeds:Low Speed Mode, Full Speed Mode
+ */ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Demos/KeyboardHostViaInt/makefile b/Demos/KeyboardHostViaInt/makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..9cd332e5af6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/KeyboardHostViaInt/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,705 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# Denver Gingerich +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb1287 + + +# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# Typical values are: +# F_CPU = 1000000 +# F_CPU = 1843200 +# F_CPU = 2000000 +# F_CPU = 3686400 +# F_CPU = 4000000 +# F_CPU = 7372800 +# F_CPU = 8000000 +# F_CPU = 11059200 +# F_CPU = 14745600 +# F_CPU = 16000000 +# F_CPU = 18432000 +# F_CPU = 20000000 +F_CPU = 8000000 + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = KeyboardHostViaInt + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + ConfigDescriptor.c \ + ../../LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial_Stream.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/ConfigDescriptor.c \ + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = ../../ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS +CDEFS += -DUSB_HOST_ONLY -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)" + + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20 +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd +# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500 +# +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf +MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) ) +FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr ) + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +checkhooks: build + @echo + @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events ------- + @$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \ + cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \ + echo "(None)" + @echo ----- End Unhooked LUFA Events ----- + +checklibmode: + @echo + @echo ----------- Library Mode ----------- + @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \ + | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \ + || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)." + @echo ------------------------------------ + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + copy $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom --debug 1 $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +## Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end + +clean_binary: + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + +clean_list: + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode begin \ +finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \ +clean clean_list clean_binary program debug \ +gdb-config doxygen dfu flip diff --git a/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.c b/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..2c962cbcbc0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.c @@ -0,0 +1,171 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations + * needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special computer-readable structures + * which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "ConfigDescriptor.h" + +/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This + * routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate + * with compatible devices. + * + * This routine searches for a HID interface descriptor containing at least one Interrupt type IN endpoint and HID descriptor. + * + * \return An error code from the KeyboardHostWithParser_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum. + */ +uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void) +{ + uint8_t* ConfigDescriptorData; + uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize; + uint8_t ErrorCode; + + /* Get Configuration Descriptor size from the device */ + if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(&ConfigDescriptorSize, NULL) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + return ControlError; + + /* Ensure that the Configuration Descriptor isn't too large */ + if (ConfigDescriptorSize > MAX_CONFIG_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE) + return DescriptorTooLarge; + + /* Allocate enough memory for the entire config descriptor */ + ConfigDescriptorData = alloca(ConfigDescriptorSize); + + /* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */ + USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(&ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData); + + /* Validate returned data - ensure first entry is a configuration header descriptor */ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(ConfigDescriptorData) != DTYPE_Configuration) + return InvalidConfigDataReturned; + + /* Get the keyboard interface from the configuration descriptor */ + if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData, NextKeyboardInterface))) + { + /* Descriptor not found, error out */ + return NoHIDInterfaceFound; + } + + /* Get the keyboard interface's HID descriptor */ + if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData, NextHID))) + { + /* Descriptor not found, error out */ + return NoHIDDescriptorFound; + } + + /* Save the HID report size for later use */ + HIDReportSize = DESCRIPTOR_CAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_HID_t).HIDReportLength; + + /* Get the keyboard interface's data endpoint descriptor */ + if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData, + NextInterfaceKeyboardDataEndpoint))) + { + /* Descriptor not found, error out */ + return NoEndpointFound; + } + + /* Retrieve the endpoint address from the endpoint descriptor */ + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t); + + /* Configure the keyboard data pipe */ + Pipe_ConfigurePipe(KEYBOARD_DATAPIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, PIPE_TOKEN_IN, + EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE); + + Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests(); + + /* Valid data found, return success */ + return SuccessfulConfigRead; +} + +/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's + * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration + * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found. + * + * This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct Keyboard HID Class and Protocol values. + * + * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextKeyboardInterface) +{ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface) + { + /* Check the HID descriptor class and protocol, break out if correct class/protocol interface found */ + if ((DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Class == KEYBOARD_CLASS) && + (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Protocol == KEYBOARD_PROTOCOL)) + { + return Descriptor_Search_Found; + } + } + + return Descriptor_Search_NotFound; +} + +/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's + * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration + * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found. + * + * This comparator searches for the next IN Endpoint descriptor inside the current interface descriptor, + * aborting the search if another interface descriptor is found before the required endpoint. + * + * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextInterfaceKeyboardDataEndpoint) +{ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint) + { + if (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t).EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN) + return Descriptor_Search_Found; + } + else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface) + { + return Descriptor_Search_Fail; + } + + return Descriptor_Search_NotFound; +} + +/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's + * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration + * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found. + * + * This comparator searches for the next HID descriptor within the current HID interface descriptor. + * + * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextHID) +{ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_HID) + return Descriptor_Search_Found; + else + return Descriptor_Search_NotFound; +} diff --git a/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.h b/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..e007a942aff --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.h @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c. + */ + +#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_ +#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include // USB Functionality + #include // Configuration Descriptor Parser + + #include "HIDReport.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Interface Class value for the Human Interface Device class */ + #define KEYBOARD_CLASS 0x03 + + /** Interface Protocol value for a Boot Protocol Keyboard compliant device */ + #define KEYBOARD_PROTOCOL 0x01 + + /** Maximum size of a device configuration descriptor which can be processed by the host, in bytes */ + #define MAX_CONFIG_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE 512 + + /** Descriptor header type constant for a HID descriptor */ + #define DTYPE_HID 0x21 + + /** Descriptor header type constant for a HID report descriptor */ + #define DTYPE_Report 0x22 + + /* Enums: */ + enum KeyboardHostWithParser_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t + { + SuccessfulConfigRead = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */ + ControlError = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */ + DescriptorTooLarge = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */ + InvalidConfigDataReturned = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */ + NoHIDInterfaceFound = 4, /**< A compatible HID interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */ + NoHIDDescriptorFound = 5, /**< A compatible HID descriptor was not found in the device's HID interface */ + NoEndpointFound = 5, /**< A compatible HID IN endpoint was not found in the device's HID interface */ + }; + + /* Configuration Descriptor Comparison Functions: */ + DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextKeyboardInterface); + DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextInterfaceKeyboardDataEndpoint); + DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextHID); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..6c6db18faea --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Keyboard Host (Using HID Descriptor Parser)" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek, +# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish, +# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene, +# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command , where is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command , where +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Namespace. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file . + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are +# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values +# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list; +# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which +# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous +# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE +# respectively. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin" + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to the search engine +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be +# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO diff --git a/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/HIDReport.c b/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/HIDReport.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..89bd1c866e2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/HIDReport.c @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#include "HIDReport.h" + +/** Size in bytes of the attached device's HID report descriptor */ +uint16_t HIDReportSize; + +/** Processed HID report descriptor items structure, containing information on each HID report element */ +HID_ReportInfo_t HIDReportInfo; + + +/** Function to read in the HID report descriptor from the attached device, and process it into easy-to-read + * structures via the HID parser routines in the LUFA library. + * + * \return A value from the KeyboardHostWithParser_GetHIDReportDataCodes_t enum + */ +uint8_t GetHIDReportData(void) +{ + /* Create a buffer big enough to hold the entire returned HID report */ + uint8_t HIDReportData[HIDReportSize]; + + USB_HostRequest = (USB_Host_Request_Header_t) + { + bmRequestType: (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_INTERFACE), + bRequest: REQ_GetDescriptor, + wValue: (DTYPE_Report << 8), + wIndex: 0, + wLength: HIDReportSize, + }; + + /* Send control request to retrieve the HID report from the attached device */ + if (USB_Host_SendControlRequest(HIDReportData) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + return ParseControlError; + + /* Send the HID report to the parser for processing */ + if (ProcessHIDReport(HIDReportData, HIDReportSize, &HIDReportInfo) != HID_PARSE_Successful) + return ParseError; + + return ParseSuccessful; +} + diff --git a/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/HIDReport.h b/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/HIDReport.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..5e18313f635 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/HIDReport.h @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for HIDReport.c. + */ + +#ifndef _HID_REPORT_H_ +#define _HID_REPORT_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include // HID Class Report Parser + + #include "KeyboardHostWithParser.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** HID Report Descriptor Usage Page value for a desktop keyboard */ + #define USAGE_PAGE_KEYBOARD 0x07 + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible return codes of the GetHIDReportData() function. */ + enum KeyboardHostWithParser_GetHIDReportDataCodes_t + { + ParseSuccessful = 0, /**< HID report descriptor parsed successfully */ + ParseError = 1, /**< Failed to fully process the HID report descriptor */ + ParseControlError = 2, /**< Control error occured while trying to read the device HID descriptor */ + }; + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for a HID descriptor. */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */ + + uint16_t HIDSpec; /**< Implemented HID class specification, in BCD encoded format */ + uint8_t CountryCode; /**< Country code value for localized hardware */ + + uint8_t TotalHIDReports; /**< Total number of HID report descriptors in the current interface */ + + uint8_t HIDReportType; /**< HID report type of the first HID report descriptor */ + uint16_t HIDReportLength; /**< Total size in bytes of the first HID report descriptor */ + } USB_Descriptor_HID_t; + + /* External Variables: */ + extern uint16_t HIDReportSize; + extern HID_ReportInfo_t HIDReportInfo; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint8_t GetHIDReportData(void); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.aps b/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.aps new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..3a51668be9e --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.aps @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +KeyboardHostWithParser30-Sep-2008 14:10:1030-Sep-2008 14:10:39241030-Sep-2008 14:10:1044, 14, 0, 589AVR GCCKeyboardHostWithParser.elfC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\KeyboardHostWithParser\falseR00R01R02R03R04R05R06R07R08R09R10R11R12R13R14R15R16R17R18R19R20R21R22R23R24R25R26R27R28R29R30R31Auto000ConfigDescriptor.cHIDReport.cKeyboardHostWithParser.cConfigDescriptor.hHIDReport.hKeyboardHostWithParser.hmakefiledefaultYESmakefileatmega128111KeyboardHostWithParser.elfdefault\1-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enumsdefault1C:\WinAVR-20080512\bin\avr-gcc.exeC:\WinAVR-20080512\utils\bin\make.exeC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\KeyboardHostWithParser\ConfigDescriptor.hC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\KeyboardHostWithParser\HIDReport.hC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\KeyboardHostWithParser\KeyboardHostWithParser.hC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\KeyboardHostWithParser\ConfigDescriptor.cC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\KeyboardHostWithParser\HIDReport.cC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\KeyboardHostWithParser\KeyboardHostWithParser.c diff --git a/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.c b/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..f0eec2b99c5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.c @@ -0,0 +1,340 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the KeyboardHostWithParser demo. This file contains the main tasks of + * the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + +#include "KeyboardHostWithParser.h" + +/* Project Tags, for reading out using the ButtLoad project */ +BUTTLOADTAG(ProjName, "LUFA KBD Host App"); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildTime, __TIME__); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildDate, __DATE__); +BUTTLOADTAG(LUFAVersion, "LUFA V" LUFA_VERSION_STRING); + +/* Scheduler Task List */ +TASK_LIST +{ + { Task: USB_USBTask , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, + { Task: USB_Keyboard_Host , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, +}; + + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then + * starts the scheduler to run the application tasks. + */ +int main(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable Clock Division */ + SetSystemClockPrescaler(0); + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + SerialStream_Init(9600, false); + LEDs_Init(); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); + + /* Initialize Scheduler so that it can be used */ + Scheduler_Init(); + + /* Initialize USB Subsystem */ + USB_Init(); + + /* Startup message */ + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_RESET ESC_BG_WHITE ESC_INVERSE_ON ESC_ERASE_DISPLAY + "Keyboard Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_INVERSE_OFF)); + + /* Scheduling - routine never returns, so put this last in the main function */ + Scheduler_Start(); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and + * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceAttached) +{ + puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n")); + UpdateStatus(Status_USBEnumerating); + + /* Start USB management task to enumerate the device */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_RUN); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and + * stops the library USB task management process. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceUnattached) +{ + /* Stop keyboard and USB management task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_STOP); + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_Keyboard_Host, TASK_STOP); + + puts_P(PSTR("\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n")); + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully + * enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete) +{ + /* Start Keyboard Host task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_Keyboard_Host, TASK_RUN); + + /* Indicate device enumeration complete */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_HostError) +{ + USB_ShutDown(); + + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + UpdateStatus(Status_HardwareError); + for(;;); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occured while + * enumerating an attached USB device. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed) +{ + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"), SubErrorCode); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- In State %d\r\n"), USB_HostState); + + UpdateStatus(Status_EnumerationError); +} + +/** Function to manage status updates to the user. This is done via LEDs on the given board, if available, but may be changed to + * log to a serial port, or anything else that is suitable for status updates. + * + * \param CurrentStatus Current status of the system, from the KeyboardHostWithParser_StatusCodes_t enum + */ +void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus) +{ + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS; + + /* Set the LED mask to the appropriate LED mask based on the given status code */ + switch (CurrentStatus) + { + case Status_USBNotReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1); + break; + case Status_USBEnumerating: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2); + break; + case Status_USBReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED2); + break; + case Status_EnumerationError: + case Status_HardwareError: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3); + break; + case Status_Busy: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED4); + break; + } + + /* Set the board LEDs to the new LED mask */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); +} + +/** Task to set the configuration of the attached device after it has been enumerated, and to read and process + * the HID report descriptor and HID reports from the device and display the results onto the board LEDs. + */ +TASK(USB_Keyboard_Host) +{ + uint8_t ErrorCode; + + switch (USB_HostState) + { + case HOST_STATE_Addressed: + /* Standard request to set the device configuration to configuration 1 */ + USB_HostRequest = (USB_Host_Request_Header_t) + { + bmRequestType: (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE), + bRequest: REQ_SetConfiguration, + wValue: 1, + wIndex: 0, + wLength: 0, + }; + + /* Send the request, display error and wait for device detatch if request fails */ + if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + { + puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error via status LEDs */ + UpdateStatus(Status_EnumerationError); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + break; + } + + USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured; + break; + case HOST_STATE_Configured: + puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n")); + + /* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */ + if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead) + { + if (ErrorCode == ControlError) + puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n")); + else + puts_P(PSTR("Invalid Device.\r\n")); + + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error via status LEDs */ + UpdateStatus(Status_EnumerationError); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + break; + } + + puts_P(PSTR("Processing HID Report.\r\n")); + + /* LEDs one and two on to indicate busy processing */ + UpdateStatus(Status_Busy); + + /* Get and process the device's first HID report descriptor */ + if ((ErrorCode = GetHIDReportData()) != ParseSuccessful) + { + puts_P(PSTR("Report Parse Error.\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error via status LEDs */ + UpdateStatus(Status_EnumerationError); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + break; + } + + /* All LEDs off - ready to indicate keypresses */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady); + + puts_P(PSTR("Keyboard Enumerated.\r\n")); + + USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Ready; + break; + case HOST_STATE_Ready: + /* Select and unfreeze keyboard data pipe */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(KEYBOARD_DATAPIPE); + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + /* Check if data has been received from the attached keyboard */ + if (Pipe_ReadWriteAllowed()) + { + /* Create buffer big enough for the report */ + uint8_t KeyboardReport[Pipe_BytesInPipe()]; + + /* Load in the keyboard report */ + Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(KeyboardReport, Pipe_BytesInPipe()); + + /* Clear the IN endpoint, ready for next data packet */ + Pipe_ClearCurrentBank(); + + /* Check each HID report item in turn, looking for keyboard scan code reports */ + for (uint8_t ReportNumber = 0; ReportNumber < HIDReportInfo.TotalReportItems; ReportNumber++) + { + /* Create a tempoary item pointer to the next report item */ + HID_ReportItem_t* ReportItem = &HIDReportInfo.ReportItems[ReportNumber]; + + /* Check if the current report item is a keyboard scancode */ + if ((ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Page == USAGE_PAGE_KEYBOARD) && + (ReportItem->Attributes.BitSize == 8) && + (ReportItem->Attributes.Logical.Maximum > 1) && + (ReportItem->ItemType == REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In)) + { + /* Retrieve the keyboard scancode from the report data retrieved from the device */ + bool FoundData = GetReportItemInfo(KeyboardReport, ReportItem); + + /* For multi-report devices - if the requested data was not in the issued report, continue */ + if (!(FoundData)) + continue; + + /* Key code is an unsigned char in length, cast to the appropriate type */ + uint8_t KeyCode = (uint8_t)ReportItem->Value; + + /* If scancode is non-zero, a key is being pressed */ + if (KeyCode) + { + /* Toggle status LED to indicate keypress */ + if (LEDs_GetLEDs() & LEDS_LED2) + LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(LEDS_LED2); + else + LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(LEDS_LED2); + + char PressedKey = 0; + + /* Convert scancode to printable character if alphanumeric */ + if ((KeyCode >= 0x04) && (KeyCode <= 0x1D)) + PressedKey = (KeyCode - 0x04) + 'A'; + else if ((KeyCode >= 0x1E) && (KeyCode <= 0x27)) + PressedKey = (KeyCode - 0x1E) + '0'; + else if (KeyCode == 0x2C) + PressedKey = ' '; + else if (KeyCode == 0x28) + PressedKey = '\n'; + + /* Print the pressed key character out through the serial port if valid */ + if (PressedKey) + putchar(PressedKey); + } + + /* Once a scancode is found, stop scanning through the report items */ + break; + } + } + } + + /* Freeze keyboard data pipe */ + Pipe_Freeze(); + break; + } +} diff --git a/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.h b/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..6846e179e2a --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.h @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#ifndef _KEYBOARD_HOST_H_ +#define _KEYBOARD_HOST_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + #include + + #include // Library Version Information + #include // PROGMEM tags readable by the ButtLoad project + #include // ANSI Terminal Escape Codes + #include // USB Functionality + #include // Serial stream driver + #include // LEDs driver + #include // Simple scheduler for task management + + #include "ConfigDescriptor.h" + #include "HIDReport.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Pipe number for the keyboard report data pipe */ + #define KEYBOARD_DATAPIPE 1 + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible status codes for passing to the UpdateStatus() function. */ + enum KeyboardHostWithParser_StatusCodes_t + { + Status_USBNotReady = 0, /**< USB is not ready (disconnected from a USB device) */ + Status_USBEnumerating = 1, /**< USB interface is enumerating */ + Status_USBReady = 2, /**< USB interface is connected and ready */ + Status_EnumerationError = 3, /**< Software error while enumerating the attached USB device */ + Status_HardwareError = 4, /**< Hardware error while enumerating the attached USB device */ + Status_Busy = 5, /**< Busy dumping HID report items to the serial port */ + }; + + /* Task Definitions: */ + TASK(USB_Keyboard_Host); + + /* Event Handlers: */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceAttached); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceUnattached); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_HostError); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.txt b/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..09a83ca5704 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.txt @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage Keyboard Host With HID Descriptor Parser Demo + * + * Keyboard host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference + * application for implementing a USB Keyboard host, for USB keyboards using + * the standard Keyboard HID profile. It uses a HID parser for the HID reports, + * allowing for correct operation across all USB keyboards. This demo supports + * keyboards with a single HID report. + * + * Pressed alpha-numeric, enter or space key is transmitted through the serial + * USART at serial settings 9600, 8, N, 1. On connection to a USB keyboard, the + * report items will be processed and printed as a formatted list through the + * USART before the keyboard is fully enumerated. + * + * Currently only single interface keyboards are supported. + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + *
USB Mode:Host
USB Class:Human Interface Device (HID)
USB Subclass:N/A
Relevant Standards:USBIF HID Specification, USBIF HID Usage Tables
Usable Speeds:Low Speed Mode, Full Speed Mode
+ */ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/makefile b/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..3082b8e9bcb --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,707 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# Denver Gingerich +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb1287 + + +# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# Typical values are: +# F_CPU = 1000000 +# F_CPU = 1843200 +# F_CPU = 2000000 +# F_CPU = 3686400 +# F_CPU = 4000000 +# F_CPU = 7372800 +# F_CPU = 8000000 +# F_CPU = 11059200 +# F_CPU = 14745600 +# F_CPU = 16000000 +# F_CPU = 18432000 +# F_CPU = 20000000 +F_CPU = 8000000 + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = KeyboardHostWithParser + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + ConfigDescriptor.c \ + HIDReport.c \ + ../../LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial_Stream.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HIDParser.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/ConfigDescriptor.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \ + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = ../../ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS +CDEFS += -DUSB_HOST_ONLY -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)" + + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20 +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd +# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500 +# +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf +MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) ) +FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr ) + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +checkhooks: build + @echo + @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events ------- + @$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \ + cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \ + echo "(None)" + @echo ----- End Unhooked LUFA Events ----- + +checklibmode: + @echo + @echo ----------- Library Mode ----------- + @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \ + | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \ + || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)." + @echo ------------------------------------ + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + copy $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom --debug 1 $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +## Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end + +clean_binary: + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + +clean_list: + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode begin \ +finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \ +clean clean_list clean_binary program debug \ +gdb-config doxygen dfu flip diff --git a/Demos/KeyboardMouse/Descriptors.c b/Demos/KeyboardMouse/Descriptors.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..c9d91039b4c --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/KeyboardMouse/Descriptors.c @@ -0,0 +1,354 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + Copyright 2009 Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special + * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine + * the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "Descriptors.h" + +/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the + * USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This + * descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding) + * the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for + * more details on HID report descriptors. + * + * This descriptor describes the mouse HID interface's report structure. + */ +USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM MouseReport[] = +{ + 0x05, 0x01, /* Usage Page (Generic Desktop) */ + 0x09, 0x02, /* Usage (Mouse) */ + 0xA1, 0x01, /* Collection (Application) */ + 0x09, 0x01, /* Usage (Pointer) */ + 0xA1, 0x00, /* Collection (Physical) */ + 0x95, 0x03, /* Report Count (3) */ + 0x75, 0x01, /* Report Size (1) */ + 0x05, 0x09, /* Usage Page (Button) */ + 0x19, 0x01, /* Usage Minimum (Button 1) */ + 0x29, 0x03, /* Usage Maximum (Button 3) */ + 0x15, 0x00, /* Logical Minimum (0) */ + 0x25, 0x01, /* Logical Maximum (1) */ + 0x81, 0x02, /* Input (Data, Variable, Absolute) */ + 0x95, 0x01, /* Report Count (1) */ + 0x75, 0x05, /* Report Size (5) */ + 0x81, 0x01, /* Input (Constant) */ + 0x75, 0x08, /* Report Size (8) */ + 0x95, 0x02, /* Report Count (2) */ + 0x05, 0x01, /* Usage Page (Generic Desktop Control) */ + 0x09, 0x30, /* Usage X */ + 0x09, 0x31, /* Usage Y */ + 0x15, 0x81, /* Logical Minimum (-127) */ + 0x25, 0x7F, /* Logical Maximum (127) */ + 0x81, 0x06, /* Input (Data, Variable, Relative) */ + 0xC0, /* End Collection */ + 0xC0, /* End Collection */ +}; + +/** Same as the MouseReport structure, but defines the keyboard HID interface's report structure. */ +USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM KeyboardReport[] = +{ + 0x05, 0x01, /* Usage Page (Generic Desktop) */ + 0x09, 0x06, /* Usage (Keyboard) */ + 0xa1, 0x01, /* Collection (Application) */ + 0x75, 0x01, /* Report Size (1) */ + 0x95, 0x08, /* Report Count (8) */ + 0x05, 0x07, /* Usage Page (Key Codes) */ + 0x19, 0xe0, /* Usage Minimum (Keyboard LeftControl) */ + 0x29, 0xe7, /* Usage Maximum (Keyboard Right GUI) */ + 0x15, 0x00, /* Logical Minimum (0) */ + 0x25, 0x01, /* Logical Maximum (1) */ + 0x81, 0x02, /* Input (Data, Variable, Absolute) */ + 0x95, 0x01, /* Report Count (1) */ + 0x75, 0x08, /* Report Size (8) */ + 0x81, 0x03, /* Input (Const, Variable, Absolute) */ + 0x95, 0x05, /* Report Count (5) */ + 0x75, 0x01, /* Report Size (1) */ + 0x05, 0x08, /* Usage Page (LEDs) */ + 0x19, 0x01, /* Usage Minimum (Num Lock) */ + 0x29, 0x05, /* Usage Maximum (Kana) */ + 0x91, 0x02, /* Output (Data, Variable, Absolute) */ + 0x95, 0x01, /* Report Count (1) */ + 0x75, 0x03, /* Report Size (3) */ + 0x91, 0x03, /* Output (Const, Variable, Absolute) */ + 0x95, 0x06, /* Report Count (6) */ + 0x75, 0x08, /* Report Size (8) */ + 0x15, 0x00, /* Logical Minimum (0) */ + 0x25, 0x65, /* Logical Maximum (101) */ + 0x05, 0x07, /* Usage Page (Keyboard) */ + 0x19, 0x00, /* Usage Minimum (Reserved (no event indicated)) */ + 0x29, 0x65, /* Usage Maximum (Keyboard Application) */ + 0x81, 0x00, /* Input (Data, Array, Absolute) */ + 0xC0 /* End Collection */ +}; + +/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall + * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the + * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration + * process begins. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor = +{ + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), Type: DTYPE_Device}, + + USBSpecification: VERSION_BCD(01.10), + Class: 0x00, + SubClass: 0x00, + Protocol: 0x00, + + Endpoint0Size: 8, + + VendorID: 0x03EB, + ProductID: 0x204D, + ReleaseNumber: 0x0000, + + ManufacturerStrIndex: 0x01, + ProductStrIndex: 0x02, + SerialNumStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + NumberOfConfigurations: 1 +}; + +/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage + * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces + * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting + * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor = +{ + Config: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), Type: DTYPE_Configuration}, + + TotalConfigurationSize: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t), + TotalInterfaces: 2, + + ConfigurationNumber: 1, + ConfigurationStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + ConfigAttributes: (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED), + + MaxPowerConsumption: USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100) + }, + + KeyboardInterface: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface}, + + InterfaceNumber: 0x00, + AlternateSetting: 0x00, + + TotalEndpoints: 2, + + Class: 0x03, + SubClass: 0x01, + Protocol: 0x00, + + InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + KeyboardHID: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t), Type: DTYPE_HID}, + + HIDSpec: VERSION_BCD(01.11), + CountryCode: 0x00, + TotalHIDReports: 0x01, + HIDReportType: DTYPE_Report, + HIDReportLength: sizeof(KeyboardReport) + }, + + KeyboardInEndpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | KEYBOARD_IN_EPNUM), + Attributes: EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + EndpointSize: HID_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0x02 + }, + + KeyboardOutEndpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | KEYBOARD_OUT_EPNUM), + Attributes: EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + EndpointSize: HID_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0x02 + }, + + MouseInterface: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface}, + + InterfaceNumber: 0x01, + AlternateSetting: 0x00, + + TotalEndpoints: 1, + + Class: 0x03, + SubClass: 0x02, + Protocol: 0x00, + + InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + MouseHID: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t), Type: DTYPE_HID}, + + HIDSpec: VERSION_BCD(01.11), + CountryCode: 0x00, + TotalHIDReports: 0x01, + HIDReportType: DTYPE_Report, + HIDReportLength: sizeof(MouseReport) + }, + + MouseInEndpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | MOUSE_IN_EPNUM), + Attributes: EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + EndpointSize: HID_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0x02 + } +}; + +/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests + * the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate + * via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(1), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG} +}; + +/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable + * form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(11), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"Dean Camera" +}; + +/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form, + * and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(28), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"LUFA Mouse and Keyboard Demo" +}; + +/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see StdDescriptors.h + * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given + * to the USB library. When the device recieves a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function + * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the + * USB host. + */ +uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) +{ + const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8); + const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF); + + void* Address = NULL; + uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR; + + switch (DescriptorType) + { + case DTYPE_Device: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(DeviceDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Configuration: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t); + break; + case DTYPE_String: + switch (DescriptorNumber) + { + case 0x00: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(LanguageString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x01: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ManufacturerString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x02: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ProductString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size); + break; + } + + break; + case DTYPE_HID: + if (!(wIndex)) + { + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor.KeyboardHID); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t); + } + else + { + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor.MouseHID); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t); + } + break; + case DTYPE_Report: + if (!(wIndex)) + { + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(KeyboardReport); + Size = sizeof(KeyboardReport); + } + else + { + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(MouseReport); + Size = sizeof(MouseReport); + } + + break; + } + + *DescriptorAddress = Address; + return Size; +} diff --git a/Demos/KeyboardMouse/Descriptors.h b/Demos/KeyboardMouse/Descriptors.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..59495425cc2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/KeyboardMouse/Descriptors.h @@ -0,0 +1,104 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + Copyright 2009 Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Descriptors.c. + */ + +#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_ +#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + + #include + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the HID class specific HID descriptor, to describe the HID device's specifications. Refer to the HID + * specification for details on the structure elements. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; + + uint16_t HIDSpec; + uint8_t CountryCode; + + uint8_t TotalHIDReports; + + uint8_t HIDReportType; + uint16_t HIDReportLength; + } USB_Descriptor_HID_t; + + /** Type define for the data type used to store HID report descriptor elements. */ + typedef uint8_t USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t; + + /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the + * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which + * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config; + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t KeyboardInterface; + USB_Descriptor_HID_t KeyboardHID; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t KeyboardInEndpoint; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t KeyboardOutEndpoint; + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t MouseInterface; + USB_Descriptor_HID_t MouseHID; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t MouseInEndpoint; + } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t; + + /* Macros: */ + /** Endpoint number of the Keyboard HID reporting IN endpoint. */ + #define KEYBOARD_IN_EPNUM 1 + + /** Endpoint number of the Keyboard HID reporting OUT endpoint. */ + #define KEYBOARD_OUT_EPNUM 2 + + /** Endpoint number of the Mouse HID reporting IN endpoint. */ + #define MOUSE_IN_EPNUM 3 + + /** Size in bytes of each of the HID reporting IN and OUT endpoints. */ + #define HID_EPSIZE 8 + + /** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID descriptor. */ + #define DTYPE_HID 0x21 + + /** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID report descriptor. */ + #define DTYPE_Report 0x22 + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) + ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/KeyboardMouse/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/KeyboardMouse/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..12916856b66 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/KeyboardMouse/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Combined Keyboard/Mouse Device Demo" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek, +# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish, +# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene, +# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command , where is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command , where +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Namespace. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file . + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are +# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values +# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list; +# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which +# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous +# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE +# respectively. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin" + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to the search engine +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be +# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO diff --git a/Demos/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.aps b/Demos/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.aps new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..eb54f1d4db8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.aps @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +KeyboardMouse30-Sep-2008 14:11:0030-Sep-2008 14:11:17241030-Sep-2008 14:11:0044, 14, 0, 589AVR GCCC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\KeyboardMouse\JTAGICE mkIIAT90USB1287.xmlfalseR00R01R02R03R04R05R06R07R08R09R10R11R12R13R14R15R16R17R18R19R20R21R22R23R24R25R26R27R28R29R30R31Auto000Descriptors.cKeyboardMouse.cDescriptors.hKeyboardMouse.hmakefiledefaultYESmakefileat90usb1287111KeyboardMouse.elfdefault\1-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enumsdefault1C:\WinAVR-20080512\bin\avr-gcc.exeC:\WinAVR-20080512\utils\bin\make.exe diff --git a/Demos/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.c b/Demos/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..383c66a58bf --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.c @@ -0,0 +1,369 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + Copyright 2009 Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the KeyboardMouse demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and + * is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + +#include "KeyboardMouse.h" + +/* Project Tags, for reading out using the ButtLoad project */ +BUTTLOADTAG(ProjName, "LUFA MouseKBD App"); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildTime, __TIME__); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildDate, __DATE__); +BUTTLOADTAG(LUFAVersion, "LUFA V" LUFA_VERSION_STRING); + +/* Scheduler Task List */ +TASK_LIST +{ + { Task: USB_USBTask , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, + { Task: USB_Mouse , TaskStatus: TASK_RUN }, + { Task: USB_Keyboard , TaskStatus: TASK_RUN }, +}; + +/* Global Variables */ +/** Global structure to hold the current keyboard interface HID report, for transmission to the host */ +USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t KeyboardReportData; + +/** Global structure to hold the current mouse interface HID report, for transmission to the host */ +USB_MouseReport_Data_t MouseReportData; + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then + * starts the scheduler to run the USB management task. + */ +int main(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable Clock Division */ + SetSystemClockPrescaler(0); + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + Joystick_Init(); + LEDs_Init(); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); + + /* Initialize Scheduler so that it can be used */ + Scheduler_Init(); + + /* Initialize USB Subsystem */ + USB_Init(); + + /* Scheduling - routine never returns, so put this last in the main function */ + Scheduler_Start(); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs and + * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Connect) +{ + /* Start USB management task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_RUN); + + /* Indicate USB enumerating */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBEnumerating); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via + * the status LEDs and stops the USB management task. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Disconnect) +{ + /* Stop running HID reporting and USB management tasks */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_STOP); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host sets the current configuration + * of the USB device after enumeration, and configures the keyboard and mouse device endpoints. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_ConfigurationChanged) +{ + /* Setup Keyboard Report Endpoint */ + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(KEYBOARD_IN_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, HID_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + /* Setup Keyboard LED Report Endpoint */ + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(KEYBOARD_OUT_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, HID_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + /* Setup Mouse Report Endpoint */ + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(MOUSE_IN_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, HID_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + /* Indicate USB connected and ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event. This is used to catch standard and class specific + * control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the HID commands, which are + * all issued via the control endpoint), so that they can be handled appropriately for the application. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_UnhandledControlPacket) +{ + uint8_t* ReportData; + uint8_t ReportSize; + + /* Handle HID Class specific requests */ + switch (bRequest) + { + case REQ_GetReport: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + Endpoint_Ignore_Word(); + + uint16_t wIndex = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(); + + /* Determine if it is the mouse or the keyboard data that is being requested */ + if (!(wIndex)) + { + ReportData = (uint8_t*)&KeyboardReportData; + ReportSize = sizeof(KeyboardReportData); + } + else + { + ReportData = (uint8_t*)&MouseReportData; + ReportSize = sizeof(MouseReportData); + } + + /* Read in the number of bytes in the report to send to the host */ + uint16_t wLength = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(); + + /* If trying to send more bytes than exist to the host, clamp the value at the report size */ + if (wLength > ReportSize) + wLength = ReportSize; + + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Write the report data to the control endpoint */ + Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(ReportData, wLength); + + /* Clear the report data afterwards */ + memset(ReportData, 0, ReportSize); + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet or clear the host abort */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT(); + } + + break; + case REQ_SetReport: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Wait until the LED report has been sent by the host */ + while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupOUTReceived())); + + /* Read in the LED report from the host */ + uint8_t LEDStatus = Endpoint_Read_Byte(); + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_LED2; + + if (LEDStatus & 0x01) // NUM Lock + LEDMask |= LEDS_LED1; + + if (LEDStatus & 0x02) // CAPS Lock + LEDMask |= LEDS_LED3; + + if (LEDStatus & 0x04) // SCROLL Lock + LEDMask |= LEDS_LED4; + + /* Set the status LEDs to the current HID LED status */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); + + /* Clear the endpoint data */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT(); + + /* Wait until the host is ready to receive the request confirmation */ + while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupINReady())); + + /* Handshake the request by sending an empty IN packet */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + } +} + +/** Function to manage status updates to the user. This is done via LEDs on the given board, if available, but may be changed to + * log to a serial port, or anything else that is suitable for status updates. + * + * \param CurrentStatus Current status of the system, from the KeyboardMouse_StatusCodes_t enum + */ +void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus) +{ + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS; + + /* Set the LED mask to the appropriate LED mask based on the given status code */ + switch (CurrentStatus) + { + case Status_USBNotReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1); + break; + case Status_USBEnumerating: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2); + break; + case Status_USBReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4); + break; + } + + /* Set the board LEDs to the new LED mask */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); +} + +/** Keyboard task. This generates the next keyboard HID report for the host, and transmits it via the + * keyboard IN endpoint when the host is ready for more data. Additionally, it processes host LED status + * reports sent to the device via the keyboard OUT reporting endpoint. + */ +TASK(USB_Keyboard) +{ + uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL = Joystick_GetStatus(); + + /* Check if HWB is not pressed, if so mouse mode enabled */ + if (!(HWB_GetStatus())) + { + if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP) + KeyboardReportData.KeyCode[0] = 0x04; // A + else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN) + KeyboardReportData.KeyCode[0] = 0x05; // B + + if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT) + KeyboardReportData.KeyCode[0] = 0x06; // C + else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT) + KeyboardReportData.KeyCode[0] = 0x07; // D + + if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS) + KeyboardReportData.KeyCode[0] = 0x08; // E + } + + /* Check if the USB system is connected to a host and report protocol mode is enabled */ + if (USB_IsConnected) + { + /* Select the Keyboard Report Endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(KEYBOARD_IN_EPNUM); + + /* Check if Keyboard Endpoint Ready for Read/Write */ + if (Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed()) + { + /* Write Keyboard Report Data */ + Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&KeyboardReportData, sizeof(KeyboardReportData)); + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + + /* Clear the report data afterwards */ + memset(&KeyboardReportData, 0, sizeof(KeyboardReportData)); + } + + /* Select the Keyboard LED Report Endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(KEYBOARD_OUT_EPNUM); + + /* Check if Keyboard LED Endpoint Ready for Read/Write */ + if (Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed()) + { + /* Read in the LED report from the host */ + uint8_t LEDStatus = Endpoint_Read_Byte(); + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_LED2; + + if (LEDStatus & 0x01) // NUM Lock + LEDMask |= LEDS_LED1; + + if (LEDStatus & 0x02) // CAPS Lock + LEDMask |= LEDS_LED3; + + if (LEDStatus & 0x04) // SCROLL Lock + LEDMask |= LEDS_LED4; + + /* Set the status LEDs to the current Keyboard LED status */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); + + /* Handshake the OUT Endpoint - clear endpoint and ready for next report */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + } + } +} + +/** Mouse task. This generates the next mouse HID report for the host, and transmits it via the + * mouse IN endpoint when the host is ready for more data. + */ +TASK(USB_Mouse) +{ + uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL = Joystick_GetStatus(); + + /* Check if HWB is pressed, if so mouse mode enabled */ + if (HWB_GetStatus()) + { + if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP) + MouseReportData.Y = 1; + else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN) + MouseReportData.Y = -1; + + if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT) + MouseReportData.X = 1; + else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT) + MouseReportData.X = -1; + + if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS) + MouseReportData.Button = (1 << 0); + } + + /* Check if the USB system is connected to a host and report protocol mode is enabled */ + if (USB_IsConnected) + { + /* Select the Mouse Report Endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MOUSE_IN_EPNUM); + + /* Check if Mouse Endpoint Ready for Read/Write */ + if (Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed()) + { + /* Write Mouse Report Data */ + Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&MouseReportData, sizeof(MouseReportData)); + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + + /* Clear the report data afterwards */ + memset(&MouseReportData, 0, sizeof(MouseReportData)); + } + } +} diff --git a/Demos/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.h b/Demos/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..f5c1d4e7751 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.h @@ -0,0 +1,114 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + Copyright 2009 Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#ifndef _KEYBOARD_MOUSE_H_ +#define _KEYBOARD_MOUSE_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + #include + + #include "Descriptors.h" + + #include // Library Version Information + #include // PROGMEM tags readable by the ButtLoad project + #include // USB Functionality + #include // Joystick driver + #include // LEDs driver + #include // Hardware Button driver + #include // Simple scheduler for task management + + /* Task Definitions: */ + TASK(USB_Keyboard); + TASK(USB_Mouse); + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible status codes for passing to the UpdateStatus() function. */ + enum KeyboardMouse_StatusCodes_t + { + Status_USBNotReady = 0, /**< USB is not ready (disconnected from a USB host) */ + Status_USBEnumerating = 1, /**< USB interface is enumerating */ + Status_USBReady = 2, /**< USB interface is connected and ready */ + }; + + /* Macros: */ + /** HID Class specific request to get the next HID report from the device. */ + #define REQ_GetReport 0x01 + + /** HID Class specific request to send the next HID report to the device. */ + #define REQ_SetReport 0x09 + + /** HID Class specific request to get the current HID protocol in use, either report or boot. */ + #define REQ_GetProtocol 0x03 + + /** HID Class specific request to set the current HID protocol in use, either report or boot. */ + #define REQ_SetProtocol 0x0B + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the keyboard HID report structure, for creating and sending HID reports to the host PC. + * This mirrors the layout described to the host in the HID report descriptor, in Descriptors.c. + */ + typedef struct + { + uint8_t Modifier; /**< Modifier mask byte, containing a mask of modifier keys set (such as shift or CTRL) */ + uint8_t Reserved; /**< Reserved, always set as 0x00 */ + uint8_t KeyCode[6]; /**< Array of up to six simultaneous key codes of pressed keys */ + } USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t; + + /** Type define for the mouse HID report structure, for creating and sending HID reports to the host PC. + * This mirrors the layout described to the host in the HID report descriptor, in Descriptors.c. + */ + typedef struct + { + uint8_t Button; /**< Bit mask of the currently pressed mouse buttons */ + int8_t X; /**< Current mouse delta X movement, as a signed 8-bit integer */ + int8_t Y; /**< Current mouse delta Y movement, as a signed 8-bit integer */ + } USB_MouseReport_Data_t; + + /* Event Handlers: */ + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Connect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Connect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Disconnect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Disconnect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_ConfigurationChanged event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_ConfigurationChanged); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_UnhandledControlPacket); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.txt b/Demos/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..969e2871b4a --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.txt @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage Dual HID Keyboard and Mouse Device Demo + * + * Keyboard/Mouse demonstration application. This gives a simple reference + * application for implementing a composite device containing both USB Keyboard + * and USB Mouse functionality using the basic USB HID drivers in all modern OSes + * (i.e. no special drivers required). This example uses two seperate HID + * interfaces for each function. It is boot protocol compatible, and thus works under + * compatible BIOS as if it was a native keyboard and mouse (e.g. PS/2). + * + * On startup the system will automatically enumerate and function + * as a keyboard when the USB connection to a host is present and the HWB is not + * pressed. When enabled, manipulate the joystick to send the letters + * a, b, c, d and e. See the USB HID documentation for more information + * on sending keyboard event and keypresses. + * + * When the HWB is pressed, the mouse mode is enabled. When enabled, move the + * joystick to move the pointer, and push the joystick inwards to simulate a + * left-button click. + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + *
USB Mode:Device
USB Class:Human Interface Device (HID)
USB Subclass:N/A
Relevant Standards:USBIF HID Specification, USBIF HID Usage Tables
Usable Speeds:Low Speed Mode, Full Speed Mode
+ */ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Demos/KeyboardMouse/makefile b/Demos/KeyboardMouse/makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..ceae7dc5890 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/KeyboardMouse/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,702 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# Denver Gingerich +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb1287 + + +# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# Typical values are: +# F_CPU = 1000000 +# F_CPU = 1843200 +# F_CPU = 2000000 +# F_CPU = 3686400 +# F_CPU = 4000000 +# F_CPU = 7372800 +# F_CPU = 8000000 +# F_CPU = 11059200 +# F_CPU = 14745600 +# F_CPU = 16000000 +# F_CPU = 18432000 +# F_CPU = 20000000 +F_CPU = 8000000 + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = KeyboardMouse + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + Descriptors.c \ + ../../LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.c \ + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = ../../ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS +CDEFS += -DUSB_DEVICE_ONLY -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)" + + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20 +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd +# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500 +# +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf +MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) ) +FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr ) + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +checkhooks: build + @echo + @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events ------- + @$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \ + cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \ + echo "(None)" + @echo ----- End Unhooked LUFA Events ----- + +checklibmode: + @echo + @echo ----------- Library Mode ----------- + @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \ + | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \ + || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)." + @echo ------------------------------------ + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + copy $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom --debug 1 $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end + +clean_binary: + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + +clean_list: + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode begin \ +finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \ +clean clean_list clean_binary program debug \ +gdb-config doxygen dfu flip diff --git a/Demos/KeyboardViaInt/Descriptors.c b/Demos/KeyboardViaInt/Descriptors.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..8e28b59ea16 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/KeyboardViaInt/Descriptors.c @@ -0,0 +1,267 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com) + Based on code by Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special + * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine + * the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "Descriptors.h" + +/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the + * USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This + * descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding) + * the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for + * more details on HID report descriptors. + */ +USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM KeyboardReport[] = +{ + 0x05, 0x01, /* Usage Page (Generic Desktop) */ + 0x09, 0x06, /* Usage (Keyboard) */ + 0xa1, 0x01, /* Collection (Application) */ + 0x75, 0x01, /* Report Size (1) */ + 0x95, 0x08, /* Report Count (8) */ + 0x05, 0x07, /* Usage Page (Key Codes) */ + 0x19, 0xe0, /* Usage Minimum (Keyboard LeftControl) */ + 0x29, 0xe7, /* Usage Maximum (Keyboard Right GUI) */ + 0x15, 0x00, /* Logical Minimum (0) */ + 0x25, 0x01, /* Logical Maximum (1) */ + 0x81, 0x02, /* Input (Data, Variable, Absolute) */ + 0x95, 0x01, /* Report Count (1) */ + 0x75, 0x08, /* Report Size (8) */ + 0x81, 0x03, /* Input (Const, Variable, Absolute) */ + 0x95, 0x05, /* Report Count (5) */ + 0x75, 0x01, /* Report Size (1) */ + 0x05, 0x08, /* Usage Page (LEDs) */ + 0x19, 0x01, /* Usage Minimum (Num Lock) */ + 0x29, 0x05, /* Usage Maximum (Kana) */ + 0x91, 0x02, /* Output (Data, Variable, Absolute) */ + 0x95, 0x01, /* Report Count (1) */ + 0x75, 0x03, /* Report Size (3) */ + 0x91, 0x03, /* Output (Const, Variable, Absolute) */ + 0x95, 0x06, /* Report Count (6) */ + 0x75, 0x08, /* Report Size (8) */ + 0x15, 0x00, /* Logical Minimum (0) */ + 0x25, 0x65, /* Logical Maximum (101) */ + 0x05, 0x07, /* Usage Page (Keyboard) */ + 0x19, 0x00, /* Usage Minimum (Reserved (no event indicated)) */ + 0x29, 0x65, /* Usage Maximum (Keyboard Application) */ + 0x81, 0x00, /* Input (Data, Array, Absolute) */ + 0xc0 /* End Collection */ +}; + +/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall + * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the + * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration + * process begins. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor = +{ + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), Type: DTYPE_Device}, + + USBSpecification: VERSION_BCD(01.10), + Class: 0x00, + SubClass: 0x00, + Protocol: 0x00, + + Endpoint0Size: 8, + + VendorID: 0x03EB, + ProductID: 0x2042, + ReleaseNumber: 0x0000, + + ManufacturerStrIndex: 0x01, + ProductStrIndex: 0x02, + SerialNumStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + NumberOfConfigurations: 1 +}; + +/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage + * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces + * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting + * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor = +{ + Config: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), Type: DTYPE_Configuration}, + + TotalConfigurationSize: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t), + TotalInterfaces: 1, + + ConfigurationNumber: 1, + ConfigurationStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + ConfigAttributes: (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED), + + MaxPowerConsumption: USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100) + }, + + Interface: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface}, + + InterfaceNumber: 0x00, + AlternateSetting: 0x00, + + TotalEndpoints: 2, + + Class: 0x03, + SubClass: 0x01, + Protocol: 0x01, + + InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + KeyboardHID: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t), Type: DTYPE_HID}, + + HIDSpec: VERSION_BCD(01.11), + CountryCode: 0x00, + TotalHIDReports: 0x01, + HIDReportType: DTYPE_Report, + HIDReportLength: sizeof(KeyboardReport) + }, + + KeyboardEndpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | KEYBOARD_EPNUM), + Attributes: EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + EndpointSize: KEYBOARD_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0x02 + }, + + KeyboardLEDsEndpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | KEYBOARD_LEDS_EPNUM), + Attributes: EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + EndpointSize: KEYBOARD_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0x02 + } +}; + +/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests + * the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate + * via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(1), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG} +}; + +/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable + * form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(16), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"Denver Gingerich" +}; + +/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form, + * and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(18), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"LUFA Keyboard Demo" +}; + +/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see StdDescriptors.h + * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given + * to the USB library. When the device recieves a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function + * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the + * USB host. + */ +uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) +{ + const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8); + const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF); + + void* Address = NULL; + uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR; + + switch (DescriptorType) + { + case DTYPE_Device: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(DeviceDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Configuration: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t); + break; + case DTYPE_String: + switch (DescriptorNumber) + { + case 0x00: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(LanguageString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x01: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ManufacturerString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x02: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ProductString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size); + break; + } + + break; + case DTYPE_HID: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor.KeyboardHID); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Report: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(KeyboardReport); + Size = sizeof(KeyboardReport); + break; + } + + *DescriptorAddress = Address; + return Size; +} diff --git a/Demos/KeyboardViaInt/Descriptors.h b/Demos/KeyboardViaInt/Descriptors.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..aa1bf05b6ad --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/KeyboardViaInt/Descriptors.h @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com) + Based on code by Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Descriptors.c. + */ + +#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_ +#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + + #include + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the HID class specific HID descriptor, to describe the HID device's specifications. Refer to the HID + * specification for details on the structure elements. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; + + uint16_t HIDSpec; + uint8_t CountryCode; + + uint8_t TotalHIDReports; + + uint8_t HIDReportType; + uint16_t HIDReportLength; + } USB_Descriptor_HID_t; + + /** Type define for the data type used to store HID report descriptor elements. */ + typedef uint8_t USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t; + + /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the + * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which + * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config; + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t Interface; + USB_Descriptor_HID_t KeyboardHID; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t KeyboardEndpoint; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t KeyboardLEDsEndpoint; + } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t; + + /* Macros: */ + /** Endpoint number of the Keyboard HID reporting IN endpoint. */ + #define KEYBOARD_EPNUM 1 + + /** Endpoint number of the Keyboard HID reporting OUT endpoint. */ + #define KEYBOARD_LEDS_EPNUM 2 + + /** Size in bytes of the Keyboard HID reporting IN and OUT endpoints. */ + #define KEYBOARD_EPSIZE 8 + + /** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID descriptor. */ + #define DTYPE_HID 0x21 + + /** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID report descriptor. */ + #define DTYPE_Report 0x22 + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) + ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/KeyboardViaInt/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/KeyboardViaInt/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..d354a312a1a --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/KeyboardViaInt/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Keyboard Device Demo (Via Endpoint Interrupts)" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek, +# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish, +# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene, +# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command , where is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command , where +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Namespace. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file . + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are +# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values +# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list; +# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which +# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous +# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE +# respectively. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin" + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to the search engine +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be +# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO diff --git a/Demos/KeyboardViaInt/KeyboardViaInt.aps b/Demos/KeyboardViaInt/KeyboardViaInt.aps new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..d31b4a0f935 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/KeyboardViaInt/KeyboardViaInt.aps @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +KeyboardViaInt30-Sep-2008 14:11:3530-Sep-2008 14:11:49241030-Sep-2008 14:11:3544, 14, 0, 589AVR GCCC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\KeyboardViaInt\falseR00R01R02R03R04R05R06R07R08R09R10R11R12R13R14R15R16R17R18R19R20R21R22R23R24R25R26R27R28R29R30R31000Descriptors.cKeyboardViaInt.cDescriptors.hKeyboardViaInt.hmakefiledefaultYESmakefileatmega128111KeyboardViaInt.elfdefault\1-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enumsdefault1C:\WinAVR-20080512\bin\avr-gcc.exeC:\WinAVR-20080512\utils\bin\make.exe diff --git a/Demos/KeyboardViaInt/KeyboardViaInt.c b/Demos/KeyboardViaInt/KeyboardViaInt.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..7f6fcd8cdbc --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/KeyboardViaInt/KeyboardViaInt.c @@ -0,0 +1,453 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com) + Based on code by Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the KeyboardViaInt demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and + * is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + +#include "KeyboardViaInt.h" + +/* Project Tags, for reading out using the ButtLoad project */ +BUTTLOADTAG(ProjName, "LUFA KeyboardI App"); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildTime, __TIME__); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildDate, __DATE__); +BUTTLOADTAG(LUFAVersion, "LUFA V" LUFA_VERSION_STRING); + +/* Scheduler Task List */ +TASK_LIST +{ + { Task: USB_USBTask , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, +}; + +/* Global Variables */ +/** Indicates what report mode the host has requested, true for normal HID reporting mode, false for special boot + * protocol reporting mode. + */ +bool UsingReportProtocol = true; + +/** Current Idle period. This is set by the host via a Set Idle HID class request to silence the device's reports + * for either the entire idle duration, or until the report status changes (e.g. the user moves the mouse). + */ +uint8_t IdleCount = 0; + +/** Current Idle period remaining. When the IdleCount value is set, this tracks the remaining number of idle + * milliseconds. This is seperate to the IdleCount timer and is incremented and compared as the host may request + * the current idle period via a Get Idle HID class request, thus its value must be preserved. + */ +uint16_t IdleMSRemaining = 0; + + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then + * starts the scheduler to run the USB management task. + */ +int main(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable Clock Division */ + SetSystemClockPrescaler(0); + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + Joystick_Init(); + LEDs_Init(); + + /* Millisecond timer initialization, with output compare interrupt enabled for the idle timing */ + OCR0A = 0x7D; + TCCR0A = (1 << WGM01); + TCCR0B = ((1 << CS01) | (1 << CS00)); + TIMSK0 = (1 << OCIE0A); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); + + /* Initialize Scheduler so that it can be used */ + Scheduler_Init(); + + /* Initialize USB Subsystem */ + USB_Init(); + + /* Scheduling - routine never returns, so put this last in the main function */ + Scheduler_Start(); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs and + * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Connect) +{ + /* Start USB management task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_RUN); + + /* Indicate USB enumerating */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBEnumerating); + + /* Default to report protocol on connect */ + UsingReportProtocol = true; +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via + * the status LEDs and stops the USB management task. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Disconnect) +{ + /* Stop running keyboard reporting and USB management tasks */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_STOP); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host sets the current configuration + * of the USB device after enumeration, and configures the keyboard device endpoints. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_ConfigurationChanged) +{ + /* Setup Keyboard Keycode Report Endpoint */ + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(KEYBOARD_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, KEYBOARD_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + /* Enable the endpoint IN interrupt ISR for the report endpoint */ + USB_INT_Enable(ENDPOINT_INT_IN); + + /* Setup Keyboard LED Report Endpoint */ + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(KEYBOARD_LEDS_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, KEYBOARD_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + /* Enable the endpoint OUT interrupt ISR for the LED report endpoint */ + USB_INT_Enable(ENDPOINT_INT_OUT); + + /* Indicate USB connected and ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event. This is used to catch standard and class specific + * control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the HID commands, which are + * all issued via the control endpoint), so that they can be handled appropriately for the application. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_UnhandledControlPacket) +{ + /* Handle HID Class specific requests */ + switch (bRequest) + { + case REQ_GetReport: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t KeyboardReportData; + + /* Create the next keyboard report for transmission to the host */ + GetNextReport(&KeyboardReportData); + + /* Ignore report type and ID number value */ + Endpoint_Discard_Word(); + + /* Ignore unused Interface number value */ + Endpoint_Discard_Word(); + + /* Read in the number of bytes in the report to send to the host */ + uint16_t wLength = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(); + + /* If trying to send more bytes than exist to the host, clamp the value at the report size */ + if (wLength > sizeof(KeyboardReportData)) + wLength = sizeof(KeyboardReportData); + + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Write the report data to the control endpoint */ + Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(&KeyboardReportData, wLength); + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet or clear the host abort */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT(); + } + + break; + case REQ_SetReport: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Wait until the LED report has been sent by the host */ + while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupOUTReceived())); + + /* Read in the LED report from the host */ + uint8_t LEDStatus = Endpoint_Read_Byte(); + + /* Process the incomming LED report */ + ProcessLEDReport(LEDStatus); + + /* Clear the endpoint data */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT(); + + /* Wait until the host is ready to receive the request confirmation */ + while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupINReady())); + + /* Handshake the request by sending an empty IN packet */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + case REQ_GetProtocol: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Write the current protocol flag to the host */ + Endpoint_Write_Byte(UsingReportProtocol); + + /* Send the flag to the host */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + case REQ_SetProtocol: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + /* Read in the wValue parameter containing the new protocol mode */ + uint16_t wValue = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(); + + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Set or clear the flag depending on what the host indicates that the current Protocol should be */ + UsingReportProtocol = (wValue != 0x0000); + + /* Send an empty packet to acknowedge the command */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + case REQ_SetIdle: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + /* Read in the wValue parameter containing the idle period */ + uint16_t wValue = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(); + + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Get idle period in MSB */ + IdleCount = (wValue >> 8); + + /* Send an empty packet to acknowedge the command */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + case REQ_GetIdle: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Write the current idle duration to the host */ + Endpoint_Write_Byte(IdleCount); + + /* Send the flag to the host */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + } +} + +/** ISR for the timer 0 compare vector. This ISR fires once each millisecond, and increments the + * scheduler elapsed idle period counter when the host has set an idle period. + */ +ISR(TIMER0_COMPA_vect, ISR_BLOCK) +{ + /* One millisecond has elapsed, decrement the idle time remaining counter if it has not already elapsed */ + if (IdleMSRemaining) + IdleMSRemaining--; +} + +/** Fills the given HID report data structure with the next HID report to send to the host. + * + * \param ReportData Pointer to a HID report data structure to be filled + * + * \return Boolean true if the new report differs from the last report, false otherwise + */ +bool GetNextReport(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t* ReportData) +{ + static uint8_t PrevJoyStatus = 0; + uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL = Joystick_GetStatus(); + bool InputChanged = false; + + /* Clear the report contents */ + memset(ReportData, 0, sizeof(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t)); + + if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP) + ReportData->KeyCode[0] = 0x04; // A + else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN) + ReportData->KeyCode[0] = 0x05; // B + + if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT) + ReportData->KeyCode[0] = 0x06; // C + else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT) + ReportData->KeyCode[0] = 0x07; // D + + if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS) + ReportData->KeyCode[0] = 0x08; // E + + /* Check if the new report is different to the previous report */ + InputChanged = (uint8_t)(PrevJoyStatus ^ JoyStatus_LCL); + + /* Save the current joystick status for later comparison */ + PrevJoyStatus = JoyStatus_LCL; + + /* Return whether the new report is different to the previous report or not */ + return InputChanged; +} + +/** Processes a given LED report mask from the host and sets the board LEDs to match. + * + * \param LEDReport LED mask from the host, containing a mask of what LEDs are set + */ +void ProcessLEDReport(uint8_t LEDReport) +{ + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_LED2; + + if (LEDReport & 0x01) // NUM Lock + LEDMask |= LEDS_LED1; + + if (LEDReport & 0x02) // CAPS Lock + LEDMask |= LEDS_LED3; + + if (LEDReport & 0x04) // SCROLL Lock + LEDMask |= LEDS_LED4; + + /* Set the status LEDs to the current Keyboard LED status */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); +} + +/** Function to manage status updates to the user. This is done via LEDs on the given board, if available, but may be changed to + * log to a serial port, or anything else that is suitable for status updates. + * + * \param CurrentStatus Current status of the system, from the KeyboardViaInt_StatusCodes_t enum + */ +void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus) +{ + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS; + + /* Set the LED mask to the appropriate LED mask based on the given status code */ + switch (CurrentStatus) + { + case Status_USBNotReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1); + break; + case Status_USBEnumerating: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2); + break; + case Status_USBReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4); + break; + } + + /* Set the board LEDs to the new LED mask */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); +} + +/** ISR for the general Pipe/Endpoint interrupt vector. This ISR fires when an endpoint's status changes (such as + * a packet has been received) on an endpoint with its corresponding ISR enabling bits set. This is used to send + * HID packets to the host each time the HID interrupt endpoints polling period elapses, as managed by the USB + * controller. + */ +ISR(ENDPOINT_PIPE_vect, ISR_BLOCK) +{ + /* Save previously selected endpoint before selecting a new endpoint */ + uint8_t PrevSelectedEndpoint = Endpoint_GetCurrentEndpoint(); + + /* Check if keyboard endpoint has interrupted */ + if (Endpoint_HasEndpointInterrupted(KEYBOARD_EPNUM)) + { + USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t KeyboardReportData; + bool SendReport; + + /* Create the next keyboard report for transmission to the host */ + SendReport = GetNextReport(&KeyboardReportData); + + /* Check if the idle period is set and has elapsed */ + if (IdleCount && !(IdleMSRemaining)) + { + /* Idle period elapsed, indicate that a report must be sent */ + SendReport = true; + + /* Reset the idle time remaining counter, must multiply by 4 to get the duration in milliseconds */ + IdleMSRemaining = (IdleCount << 2); + } + + /* Check to see if a report should be issued */ + if (SendReport) + { + /* Select the Keyboard Report Endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(KEYBOARD_EPNUM); + + /* Clear the endpoint IN interrupt flag */ + USB_INT_Clear(ENDPOINT_INT_IN); + + /* Clear the Keyboard Report endpoint interrupt */ + Endpoint_ClearEndpointInterrupt(KEYBOARD_EPNUM); + + /* Write Keyboard Report Data */ + Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&KeyboardReportData, sizeof(KeyboardReportData)); + } + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + } + + /* Check if Keyboard LED status Endpoint has interrupted */ + if (Endpoint_HasEndpointInterrupted(KEYBOARD_LEDS_EPNUM)) + { + /* Select the Keyboard LED Report Endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(KEYBOARD_LEDS_EPNUM); + + /* Clear the endpoint OUT interrupt flag */ + USB_INT_Clear(ENDPOINT_INT_OUT); + + /* Clear the Keyboard LED Report endpoint interrupt */ + Endpoint_ClearEndpointInterrupt(KEYBOARD_LEDS_EPNUM); + + /* Read in the LED report from the host */ + uint8_t LEDStatus = Endpoint_Read_Byte(); + + /* Process the incomming LED report */ + ProcessLEDReport(LEDStatus); + + /* Handshake the OUT Endpoint - clear endpoint and ready for next report */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + } + + /* Restore previously selected endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(PrevSelectedEndpoint); +} + diff --git a/Demos/KeyboardViaInt/KeyboardViaInt.h b/Demos/KeyboardViaInt/KeyboardViaInt.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..833bc919bc9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/KeyboardViaInt/KeyboardViaInt.h @@ -0,0 +1,112 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com) + Based on code by Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for KeyboardViaInt.c. + */ + +#ifndef _KEYBOARD_H_ +#define _KEYBOARD_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + #include + #include + + #include "Descriptors.h" + + #include // Library Version Information + #include // PROGMEM tags readable by the ButtLoad project + #include // USB Functionality + #include // Joystick driver + #include // LEDs driver + + /* Macros: */ + /** HID Class specific request to get the next HID report from the device. */ + #define REQ_GetReport 0x01 + + /** HID Class specific request to get the idle timeout period of the device. */ + #define REQ_GetIdle 0x02 + + /** HID Class specific request to send the next HID report to the device. */ + #define REQ_SetReport 0x09 + + /** HID Class specific request to set the idle timeout period of the device. */ + #define REQ_SetIdle 0x0A + + /** HID Class specific request to get the current HID protocol in use, either report or boot. */ + #define REQ_GetProtocol 0x03 + + /** HID Class specific request to set the current HID protocol in use, either report or boot. */ + #define REQ_SetProtocol 0x0B + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the keyboard HID report structure, for creating and sending HID reports to the host PC. + * This mirrors the layout described to the host in the HID report descriptor, in Descriptors.c. + */ + typedef struct + { + uint8_t Modifier; /**< Modifier mask byte, containing a mask of modifier keys set (such as shift or CTRL) */ + uint8_t Reserved; /**< Reserved, always set as 0x00 */ + uint8_t KeyCode[6]; /**< Array of up to six simultaneous key codes of pressed keys */ + } USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t; + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible status codes for passing to the UpdateStatus() function. */ + enum KeyboardViaInt_StatusCodes_t + { + Status_USBNotReady = 0, /**< USB is not ready (disconnected from a USB host) */ + Status_USBEnumerating = 1, /**< USB interface is enumerating */ + Status_USBReady = 2, /**< USB interface is connected and ready */ + }; + + /* Event Handlers: */ + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Connect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Connect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Disconnect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Disconnect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_ConfigurationChanged event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_ConfigurationChanged); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_UnhandledControlPacket); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + bool GetNextReport(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t* ReportData); + void ProcessLEDReport(uint8_t LEDReport); + void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/KeyboardViaInt/KeyboardViaInt.txt b/Demos/KeyboardViaInt/KeyboardViaInt.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..02ee7592dd4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/KeyboardViaInt/KeyboardViaInt.txt @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage Partially Interrupt Driven Keyboard Device Demo + * + * Keyboard demonstration application, using endpoint interrupts for the + * exchange of data to the USB host. This gives a simple reference + * application for implementing a USB Keyboard using the basic USB HID + * drivers in all modern OSes (i.e. no special drivers required). It is + * boot protocol compatible, and thus works under compatible BIOS as if + * it was a native keyboard (e.g. PS/2). + * + * On startup the system will automatically enumerate and function + * as a keyboard when the USB connection to a host is present. To use + * the keyboard example, manipulate the joystick to send the letters + * a, b, c, d and e. See the USB HID documentation for more information + * on sending keyboard event and keypresses. + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + *
USB Mode:Device
USB Class:Human Interface Device (HID)
USB Subclass:N/A
Relevant Standards:USBIF HID Specification, USBIF HID Usage Tables
Usable Speeds:Low Speed Mode, Full Speed Mode
+ */ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Demos/KeyboardViaInt/makefile b/Demos/KeyboardViaInt/makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..f1cb7a56930 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/KeyboardViaInt/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,702 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# Denver Gingerich +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb1287 + + +# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# Typical values are: +# F_CPU = 1000000 +# F_CPU = 1843200 +# F_CPU = 2000000 +# F_CPU = 3686400 +# F_CPU = 4000000 +# F_CPU = 7372800 +# F_CPU = 8000000 +# F_CPU = 11059200 +# F_CPU = 14745600 +# F_CPU = 16000000 +# F_CPU = 18432000 +# F_CPU = 20000000 +F_CPU = 8000000 + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = KeyboardViaInt + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + Descriptors.c \ + ../../LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.c \ + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = ../../ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS +CDEFS += -DUSB_DEVICE_ONLY -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)" + + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20 +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd +# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500 +# +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf +MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) ) +FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr ) + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +checkhooks: build + @echo + @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events ------- + @$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \ + cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \ + echo "(None)" + @echo ----- End Unhooked LUFA Events ----- + +checklibmode: + @echo + @echo ----------- Library Mode ----------- + @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \ + | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \ + || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)." + @echo ------------------------------------ + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + copy $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom --debug 1 $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end + +clean_binary: + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + +clean_list: + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode begin \ +finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \ +clean clean_list clean_binary program debug \ +gdb-config doxygen dfu flip diff --git a/Demos/MIDI/Descriptors.c b/Demos/MIDI/Descriptors.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..1dbc1d915ee --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MIDI/Descriptors.c @@ -0,0 +1,325 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special + * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine + * the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "Descriptors.h" + +/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall + * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the + * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration + * process begins. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor = +{ + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), Type: DTYPE_Device}, + + USBSpecification: VERSION_BCD(01.10), + Class: 0x00, + SubClass: 0x00, + Protocol: 0x00, + + Endpoint0Size: 8, + + VendorID: 0x03EB, + ProductID: 0x2048, + ReleaseNumber: 0x0000, + + ManufacturerStrIndex: 0x01, + ProductStrIndex: 0x02, + SerialNumStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + NumberOfConfigurations: 1 +}; + +/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage + * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces + * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting + * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor = +{ + Config: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), Type: DTYPE_Configuration}, + + TotalConfigurationSize: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t), + TotalInterfaces: 2, + + ConfigurationNumber: 1, + ConfigurationStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + ConfigAttributes: (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED), + + MaxPowerConsumption: USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100) + }, + + AudioControlInterface: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface}, + + InterfaceNumber: 0, + AlternateSetting: 0, + + TotalEndpoints: 0, + + Class: 0x01, + SubClass: 0x01, + Protocol: 0x00, + + InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + AudioControlInterface_SPC: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_AudioInterface_AC_t), Type: DTYPE_AudioInterface}, + Subtype: DSUBTYPE_Header, + + ACSpecification: VERSION_BCD(01.00), + TotalLength: sizeof(USB_AudioInterface_AC_t), + + InCollection: 1, + InterfaceNumbers: {1}, + }, + + AudioStreamInterface: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface}, + + InterfaceNumber: 1, + AlternateSetting: 0, + + TotalEndpoints: 2, + + Class: 0x01, + SubClass: 0x03, + Protocol: 0x00, + + InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + AudioStreamInterface_SPC: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_AudioInterface_MIDI_AS_t), Type: DTYPE_AudioInterface}, + Subtype: DSUBTYPE_General, + + AudioSpecification: VERSION_BCD(01.00), + + TotalLength: (sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t) - offsetof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t, AudioStreamInterface_SPC)) + }, + + MIDI_In_Jack_Emb: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_MIDI_In_Jack_t), Type: DTYPE_AudioInterface}, + Subtype: DSUBTYPE_InputJack, + + JackType: JACKTYPE_EMBEDDED, + JackID: 0x01, + + JackStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + MIDI_In_Jack_Ext: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_MIDI_In_Jack_t), Type: DTYPE_AudioInterface}, + Subtype: DSUBTYPE_InputJack, + + JackType: JACKTYPE_EXTERNAL, + JackID: 0x02, + + JackStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + MIDI_Out_Jack_Emb: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_MIDI_Out_Jack_t), Type: DTYPE_AudioInterface}, + Subtype: DSUBTYPE_OutputJack, + + JackType: JACKTYPE_EMBEDDED, + JackID: 0x03, + + NumberOfPins: 1, + SourceJackID: {0x02}, + SourcePinID: {0x01}, + + JackStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + MIDI_Out_Jack_Ext: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_MIDI_Out_Jack_t), Type: DTYPE_AudioInterface}, + Subtype: DSUBTYPE_OutputJack, + + JackType: JACKTYPE_EXTERNAL, + JackID: 0x04, + + NumberOfPins: 1, + SourceJackID: {0x01}, + SourcePinID: {0x01}, + + JackStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + MIDI_In_Jack_Endpoint: + { + Endpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_AudioStreamEndpoint_Std_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | MIDI_STREAM_OUT_EPNUM), + Attributes: (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA), + EndpointSize: MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0 + }, + + Refresh: 0, + SyncEndpointNumber: 0 + }, + + MIDI_In_Jack_Endpoint_SPC: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_MIDI_Jack_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_AudioEndpoint}, + Subtype: DSUBTYPE_General, + + TotalEmbeddedJacks: 0x01, + AssociatedJackID: {0x01} + }, + + MIDI_Out_Jack_Endpoint: + { + Endpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_AudioStreamEndpoint_Std_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | MIDI_STREAM_IN_EPNUM), + Attributes: (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA), + EndpointSize: MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0 + }, + + Refresh: 0, + SyncEndpointNumber: 0 + }, + + MIDI_Out_Jack_Endpoint_SPC: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_MIDI_Jack_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_AudioEndpoint}, + Subtype: DSUBTYPE_General, + + TotalEmbeddedJacks: 0x01, + AssociatedJackID: {0x03} + } +}; + +/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests + * the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate + * via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(1), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG} +}; + +/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable + * form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(11), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"Dean Camera" +}; + +/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form, + * and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(14), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"LUFA MIDI Demo" +}; + +/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see StdDescriptors.h + * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given + * to the USB library. When the device recieves a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function + * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the + * USB host. + */ +uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) +{ + const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8); + const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF); + + void* Address = NULL; + uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR; + + switch (DescriptorType) + { + case DTYPE_Device: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(DeviceDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Configuration: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t); + break; + case DTYPE_String: + switch (DescriptorNumber) + { + case 0x00: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(LanguageString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x01: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ManufacturerString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x02: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ProductString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size); + break; + } + + break; + } + + *DescriptorAddress = Address; + return Size; +} diff --git a/Demos/MIDI/Descriptors.h b/Demos/MIDI/Descriptors.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..f80e58b20ef --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MIDI/Descriptors.h @@ -0,0 +1,189 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Descriptors.c. + */ + +#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_ +#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + + #include + + /* Macros: */ + /** Descriptor header constant to indicate a Audio class interface descriptor. */ + #define DTYPE_AudioInterface 0x24 + + /** Descriptor header constant to indicate a Audio class endpoint descriptor. */ + #define DTYPE_AudioEndpoint 0x25 + + /** Audio class descriptor subtype value for a Audio class specific header descriptor. */ + #define DSUBTYPE_Header 0x01 + + /** Audio class descriptor subtype value for a Audio class specific MIDI input jack descriptor. */ + #define DSUBTYPE_InputJack 0x02 + + /** Audio class descriptor subtype value for a Audio class specific MIDI output jack descriptor. */ + #define DSUBTYPE_OutputJack 0x03 + + /** Audio class descriptor subtype value for a general Audio class specific descriptor. */ + #define DSUBTYPE_General 0x01 + + /** Audio class descriptor jack type value for an embedded (logical) MIDI input or output jack. */ + #define JACKTYPE_EMBEDDED 0x01 + + /** Audio class descriptor jack type value for an external (physical) MIDI input or output jack. */ + #define JACKTYPE_EXTERNAL 0x02 + + /** Endpoint number of the MIDI streaming data OUT endpoint, for host-to-device data transfers. */ + #define MIDI_STREAM_OUT_EPNUM 1 + + /** Endpoint number of the MIDI streaming data IN endpoint, for device-to-host data transfers. */ + #define MIDI_STREAM_IN_EPNUM 2 + + /** Endpoint size in bytes of the Audio isochronous streaming data IN and OUT endpoints. */ + #define MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE 64 + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for an Audio class specific interface descriptor. This follows a regular interface descriptor to + * supply extra information about the audio device's layout to the host. See the USB Audio specification for more + * details. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */ + uint8_t Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */ + + uint16_t ACSpecification; /** Binary coded decimal value, indicating the supported Audio Class specification version */ + uint16_t TotalLength; /** Total length of the Audio class specific control descriptors, including this descriptor */ + + uint8_t InCollection; /** Total number of audio class interfaces within this device */ + uint8_t InterfaceNumbers[1]; /** Interface numbers of each audio interface */ + } USB_AudioInterface_AC_t; + + /** Type define for an Audio class specific MIDI streaming interface descriptor. This indicates to the host + * how MIDI the specification compliance of the device and the total length of the Audio class specific descriptors. + * See the USB Audio specification for more details. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */ + uint8_t Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */ + + uint16_t AudioSpecification; /**< Binary coded decimal value, indicating the supported Audio Class specification version */ + uint16_t TotalLength; /**< Total length of the Audio class specific descriptors, including this descriptor */ + } USB_AudioInterface_MIDI_AS_t; + + /** Type define for an Audio class specific endpoint descriptor. This contains a regular endpoint + * descriptor with a few Audio-class specific extensions. See the USB Audio specification for more details. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t Endpoint; /**< Standard endpoint descriptor describing the audio endpoint */ + + uint8_t Refresh; /**< Always set to zero */ + uint8_t SyncEndpointNumber; /**< Endpoint address to send synchronisation information to, if needed (zero otherwise) */ + } USB_AudioStreamEndpoint_Std_t; + + /** Type define for an Audio class specific MIDI IN jack. This gives information to the host on a MIDI input, either + * a physical input jack, or a logical jack (recieving input data internally, or from the host via an endpoint). + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */ + uint8_t Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */ + + uint8_t JackType; /**< Type of jack, one of the JACKTYPE_* mask values */ + uint8_t JackID; /**< ID value of this jack - must be a unique value within the device */ + + uint8_t JackStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this descriptor within the device */ + } USB_MIDI_In_Jack_t; + + /** Type define for an Audio class specific MIDI OUT jack. This gives information to the host on a MIDI output, either + * a physical output jack, or a logical jack (sending output data internally, or to the host via an endpoint). + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */ + uint8_t Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */ + + uint8_t JackType; /**< Type of jack, one of the JACKTYPE_* mask values */ + uint8_t JackID; /**< ID value of this jack - must be a unique value within the device */ + + uint8_t NumberOfPins; /**< Number of output channels within the jack, either physical or logical */ + uint8_t SourceJackID[1]; /**< ID of each output pin's source data jack */ + uint8_t SourcePinID[1]; /**< Pin number in the input jack of each output pin's source data */ + + uint8_t JackStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this descriptor within the device */ + } USB_MIDI_Out_Jack_t; + + /** Type define for an Audio class specific extended MIDI jack endpoint descriptor. This contains extra information + * on the usage of MIDI endpoints used to stream MIDI events in and out of the USB Audio device, and follows an Audio + * class specific extended MIDI endpoint descriptor. See the USB Audio specification for more details. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */ + uint8_t Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */ + + uint8_t TotalEmbeddedJacks; /**< Total number of jacks inside this endpoint */ + uint8_t AssociatedJackID[1]; /**< IDs of each jack inside the endpoint */ + } USB_MIDI_Jack_Endpoint_t; + + /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the + * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which + * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config; + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t AudioControlInterface; + USB_AudioInterface_AC_t AudioControlInterface_SPC; + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t AudioStreamInterface; + USB_AudioInterface_MIDI_AS_t AudioStreamInterface_SPC; + USB_MIDI_In_Jack_t MIDI_In_Jack_Emb; + USB_MIDI_In_Jack_t MIDI_In_Jack_Ext; + USB_MIDI_Out_Jack_t MIDI_Out_Jack_Emb; + USB_MIDI_Out_Jack_t MIDI_Out_Jack_Ext; + USB_AudioStreamEndpoint_Std_t MIDI_In_Jack_Endpoint; + USB_MIDI_Jack_Endpoint_t MIDI_In_Jack_Endpoint_SPC; + USB_AudioStreamEndpoint_Std_t MIDI_Out_Jack_Endpoint; + USB_MIDI_Jack_Endpoint_t MIDI_Out_Jack_Endpoint_SPC; + } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) + ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/MIDI/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/MIDI/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..7d36de8ed77 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MIDI/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - MIDI Device Demo" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek, +# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish, +# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene, +# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command , where is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command , where +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Namespace. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file . + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are +# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values +# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list; +# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which +# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous +# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE +# respectively. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin" + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to the search engine +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be +# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO diff --git a/Demos/MIDI/MIDI.aps b/Demos/MIDI/MIDI.aps new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..e61e7701299 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MIDI/MIDI.aps @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +MIDI30-Sep-2008 14:13:1230-Sep-2008 14:13:33241030-Sep-2008 14:13:1244, 14, 0, 589AVR GCCC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\MIDI\falseR00R01R02R03R04R05R06R07R08R09R10R11R12R13R14R15R16R17R18R19R20R21R22R23R24R25R26R27R28R29R30R31Auto000Descriptors.cMIDI.cDescriptors.hMIDI.hmakefiledefaultYESmakefileatmega128111MIDI.elfdefault\1-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enumsdefault1C:\WinAVR-20080512\bin\avr-gcc.exeC:\WinAVR-20080512\utils\bin\make.exe diff --git a/Demos/MIDI/MIDI.c b/Demos/MIDI/MIDI.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..a9c827a0d31 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MIDI/MIDI.c @@ -0,0 +1,225 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the MIDI input demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and + * is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + +#include "MIDI.h" + +/* Project Tags, for reading out using the ButtLoad project */ +BUTTLOADTAG(ProjName, "LUFA MIDI App"); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildTime, __TIME__); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildDate, __DATE__); +BUTTLOADTAG(LUFAVersion, "LUFA V" LUFA_VERSION_STRING); + +/* Scheduler Task List */ +TASK_LIST +{ + { Task: USB_USBTask , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, + { Task: USB_MIDI_Task , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, +}; + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then + * starts the scheduler to run the application tasks. + */ +int main(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable Clock Division */ + SetSystemClockPrescaler(0); + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + Joystick_Init(); + LEDs_Init(); + HWB_Init(); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); + + /* Initialize Scheduler so that it can be used */ + Scheduler_Init(); + + /* Initialize USB Subsystem */ + USB_Init(); + + /* Scheduling - routine never returns, so put this last in the main function */ + Scheduler_Start(); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs. */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Connect) +{ + /* Start USB management task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_RUN); + + /* Indicate USB enumerating */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBEnumerating); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via + * the status LEDs, disables the sample update and PWM output timers and stops the USB and MIDI management tasks. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Disconnect) +{ + /* Stop running audio and USB management tasks */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_MIDI_Task, TASK_STOP); + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_STOP); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host set the current configuration + * of the USB device after enumeration - the device endpoints are configured and the MIDI management task started. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_ConfigurationChanged) +{ + /* Setup MIDI stream endpoints */ + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(MIDI_STREAM_OUT_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK, + ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(MIDI_STREAM_IN_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK, + ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + /* Indicate USB connected and ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady); + + /* Start MIDI task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_MIDI_Task, TASK_RUN); +} + +/** Task to handle the generation of MIDI note change events in response to presses of the board joystick, and send them + * to the host. + */ +TASK(USB_MIDI_Task) +{ + static uint8_t PrevJoystickStatus; + + /* Select the MIDI IN stream */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MIDI_STREAM_IN_EPNUM); + + /* Check if endpoint is ready to be written to */ + if (Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed()) + { + /* Get current joystick mask, XOR with previous to detect joystick changes */ + uint8_t JoystickStatus = Joystick_GetStatus(); + uint8_t JoystickChanges = (JoystickStatus ^ PrevJoystickStatus); + + /* Get HWB status - if set use channel 10 (percussion), otherwise use channel 1 */ + uint8_t Channel = ((HWB_GetStatus()) ? MIDI_CHANNEL(10) : MIDI_CHANNEL(1)); + + if (JoystickChanges & JOY_LEFT) + SendMIDINoteChange(0x3C, (JoystickStatus & JOY_LEFT), 0, Channel); + + if (JoystickChanges & JOY_UP) + SendMIDINoteChange(0x3D, (JoystickStatus & JOY_UP), 0, Channel); + + if (JoystickChanges & JOY_RIGHT) + SendMIDINoteChange(0x3E, (JoystickStatus & JOY_RIGHT), 0, Channel); + + if (JoystickChanges & JOY_DOWN) + SendMIDINoteChange(0x3F, (JoystickStatus & JOY_DOWN), 0, Channel); + + if (JoystickChanges & JOY_PRESS) + SendMIDINoteChange(0x3B, (JoystickStatus & JOY_PRESS), 0, Channel); + + /* Save previous joystick value for next joystick change detection */ + PrevJoystickStatus = JoystickStatus; + } + + /* Select the MIDI OUT stream */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MIDI_STREAM_OUT_EPNUM); + + /* Check if endpoint is ready to be read from, if so discard its (unused) data */ + if (Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed()) + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); +} + +/** Function to manage status updates to the user. This is done via LEDs on the given board, if available, but may be changed to + * log to a serial port, or anything else that is suitable for status updates. + * + * \param CurrentStatus Current status of the system, from the MIDI_StatusCodes_t enum + */ +void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus) +{ + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS; + + /* Set the LED mask to the appropriate LED mask based on the given status code */ + switch (CurrentStatus) + { + case Status_USBNotReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1); + break; + case Status_USBEnumerating: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2); + break; + case Status_USBReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4); + break; + } + + /* Set the board LEDs to the new LED mask */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); +} + +/** Sends a MIDI note change event (note on or off) to the MIDI output jack, on the given virtual cable ID and channel. + * + * \param Pitch Pitch of the note to turn on or off + * \param OnOff Set to true if the note is on (being held down), or false otherwise + * \param CableID ID of the virtual cable to send the note change to + * \param Channel MIDI channel number to send the note change event to + */ +void SendMIDINoteChange(const uint8_t Pitch, const bool OnOff, const uint8_t CableID, const uint8_t Channel) +{ + /* Wait until endpoint ready for more data */ + while (!(Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed())); + + /* Check if the message should be a Note On or Note Off command */ + uint8_t Command = ((OnOff)? MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON : MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF); + + /* Write the Packet Header to the endpoint */ + Endpoint_Write_Byte((CableID << 4) | (Command >> 4)); + + /* Write the Note On/Off command with the specified channel, pitch and velocity */ + Endpoint_Write_Byte(Command | Channel); + Endpoint_Write_Byte(Pitch); + Endpoint_Write_Byte(MIDI_STANDARD_VELOCITY); + + /* Send the data in the endpoint to the host */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); +} diff --git a/Demos/MIDI/MIDI.h b/Demos/MIDI/MIDI.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..1775c63747c --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MIDI/MIDI.h @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for AudioOutput.c. + */ + +#ifndef _AUDIO_OUTPUT_H_ +#define _AUDIO_OUTPUT_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + + #include "Descriptors.h" + + #include // Library Version Information + #include // PROGMEM tags readable by the ButtLoad project + #include // USB Functionality + #include // Joystick driver + #include // LEDs driver + #include // Hardware Button driver + #include // Simple scheduler for task management + + /* Macros: */ + /** MIDI command for a note on (activation) event */ + #define MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON 0x90 + + /** MIDI command for a note off (deactivation) event */ + #define MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF 0x80 + + /** Standard key press velocity value used for all note events, as no pressure sensor is mounted */ + #define MIDI_STANDARD_VELOCITY 64 + + /** Convenience macro. MIDI channels are numbered from 1-10 (natural numbers) however the logical channel + * addresses are zero-indexed. This converts a natural MIDI channel number into the logical channel address. + * + * \param channel MIDI channel number to address + */ + #define MIDI_CHANNEL(channel) (channel - 1) + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible status codes for passing to the UpdateStatus() function. */ + enum MIDI_StatusCodes_t + { + Status_USBNotReady = 0, /**< USB is not ready (disconnected from a USB host) */ + Status_USBEnumerating = 1, /**< USB interface is enumerating */ + Status_USBReady = 2, /**< USB interface is connected and ready */ + }; + + /* Task Definitions: */ + TASK(USB_MIDI_Task); + + /* Event Handlers: */ + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Connect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Connect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Disconnect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Disconnect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_ConfigurationChanged event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_ConfigurationChanged); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void SendMIDINoteChange(const uint8_t Pitch, const bool OnOff, + const uint8_t CableID, const uint8_t Channel); + void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/MIDI/MIDI.txt b/Demos/MIDI/MIDI.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..0b34ccb66d7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MIDI/MIDI.txt @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage MIDI Input Device Demo + * + * MIDI demonstration application. This gives a simple reference + * application for implementing the USB-MIDI class in USB devices. + * It is built upon the USB Audio class. + * + * Joystick movements are translated into note on/off messages and + * are sent to the host PC as MIDI streams which can be read by any + * MIDI program supporting MIDI IN devices. + * + * If the HWB is not pressed, channel 1 (default piano) is used. If + * the HWB is set, then channel 10 (default percussion) is selected. + * + * This device implements MIDI-THRU mode, with the IN MIDI data being + * generated by the device itself. OUT MIDI data is discarded. + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + *
USB Mode:Device
USB Class:Audio Class
USB Subclass:Standard Audio Device
Relevant Standards:USBIF Audio Class SpecificationUSB-MIDI Audio Class Extention SpecificationGeneral MIDI Specification
Usable Speeds:Full Speed Mode
+ */ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Demos/MIDI/makefile b/Demos/MIDI/makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..63f05130694 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MIDI/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,702 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# Denver Gingerich +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb1287 + + +# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# Typical values are: +# F_CPU = 1000000 +# F_CPU = 1843200 +# F_CPU = 2000000 +# F_CPU = 3686400 +# F_CPU = 4000000 +# F_CPU = 7372800 +# F_CPU = 8000000 +# F_CPU = 11059200 +# F_CPU = 14745600 +# F_CPU = 16000000 +# F_CPU = 18432000 +# F_CPU = 20000000 +F_CPU = 8000000 + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = MIDI + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + Descriptors.c \ + ../../LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.c \ + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = ../../ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS +CDEFS += -DUSB_DEVICE_ONLY -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)" + + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20 +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd +# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500 +# +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +EELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf +MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) ) +FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr ) + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +checkhooks: build + @echo + @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events ------- + @$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \ + cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \ + echo "(None)" + @echo ----- End Unhooked LUFA Events ----- + +checklibmode: + @echo + @echo ----------- Library Mode ----------- + @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \ + | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \ + || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)." + @echo ------------------------------------ + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + copy $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom --debug 1 $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end + +clean_binary: + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + +clean_list: + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode begin \ +finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \ +clean clean_list clean_binary program debug \ +gdb-config doxygen dfu flip diff --git a/Demos/MassStorage/DataflashManager.c b/Demos/MassStorage/DataflashManager.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..b2dbdda43c3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MassStorage/DataflashManager.c @@ -0,0 +1,308 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Functions to manage the physical dataflash media, including reading and writing of + * blocks of data. These functions are called by the SCSI layer when data must be stored + * or retrieved to/from the physical storage media. If a different media is used (such + * as a SD card or EEPROM), functions similar to these will need to be generated. + */ + +#define INCLUDE_FROM_DATAFLASHMANAGER_C +#include "DataflashManager.h" + +/** Writes blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) to the storage medium, the board dataflash IC(s), from + * the pre-selected data OUT endpoint. This routine reads in OS sized blocks from the endpoint and writes + * them to the dataflash in Dataflash page sized blocks. + * + * \param BlockAddress Data block starting address for the write sequence + * \param TotalBlocks Number of blocks of data to write + */ +void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks) +{ + uint16_t CurrDFPage = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE); + uint16_t CurrDFPageByte = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE); + uint8_t CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4); + + /* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the dataflash buffer */ + Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage); + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1); + Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0); + Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy(); + + /* Send the dataflash buffer write command */ + Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS(); + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE); + Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, CurrDFPageByte); + + /* Wait until endpoint is ready before continuing */ + while (!(Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed())); + + while (TotalBlocks) + { + uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0; + + /* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the dataflash */ + while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) + { + /* Check if the endpoint is currently empty */ + if (!(Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed())) + { + /* Clear the current endpoint bank */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + + /* Wait until the host has sent another packet */ + while (!(Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed())); + } + + /* Check if end of dataflash page reached */ + if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4)) + { + /* Write the dataflash buffer contents back to the dataflash page */ + Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS(); + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE); + Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0); + + /* Reset the dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */ + CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0; + CurrDFPage++; + + /* Select the next dataflash chip based on the new dataflash page index */ + Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage); + Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy(); + +#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) + /* If less than one dataflash page remaining, copy over the existing page to preserve trailing data */ + if ((TotalBlocks * (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) < (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4)) + { + /* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the dataflash buffer */ + Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS(); + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1); + Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0); + Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy(); + } +#endif + + /* Send the dataflash buffer write command */ + Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS(); + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE); + Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, 0); + } + + /* Write one 16-byte chunk of data to the dataflash */ + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte()); + + /* Increment the dataflash page 16 byte block counter */ + CurrDFPageByteDiv16++; + + /* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */ + BytesInBlockDiv16++; + + /* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */ + if (IsMassStoreReset) + return; + } + + /* Decrement the blocks remaining counter and reset the sub block counter */ + TotalBlocks--; + } + + /* Write the dataflash buffer contents back to the dataflash page */ + Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS(); + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE); + Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0x00); + Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy(); + + /* If the endpoint is empty, clear it ready for the next packet from the host */ + if (!(Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed())) + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + + /* Deselect all dataflash chips */ + Dataflash_DeselectChip(); +} + +/** Reads blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) from the storage medium, the board dataflash IC(s), into + * the pre-selected data IN endpoint. This routine reads in Dataflash page sized blocks from the Dataflash + * and writes them in OS sized blocks to the endpoint. + * + * \param BlockAddress Data block starting address for the read sequence + * \param TotalBlocks Number of blocks of data to read + */ +void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks) +{ + uint16_t CurrDFPage = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE); + uint16_t CurrDFPageByte = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE); + uint8_t CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4); + + /* Send the dataflash main memory page read command */ + Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage); + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD); + Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, CurrDFPageByte); + Dataflash_SendByte(0x00); + Dataflash_SendByte(0x00); + Dataflash_SendByte(0x00); + Dataflash_SendByte(0x00); + + /* Wait until endpoint is ready before continuing */ + while (!(Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed())); + + while (TotalBlocks) + { + uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0; + + /* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the dataflash */ + while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) + { + /* Check if the endpoint is currently full */ + if (!(Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed())) + { + /* Clear the endpoint bank to send its contents to the host */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + + /* Wait until the endpoint is ready for more data */ + while (!(Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed())); + } + + /* Check if end of dataflash page reached */ + if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4)) + { + /* Reset the dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */ + CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0; + CurrDFPage++; + + /* Select the next dataflash chip based on the new dataflash page index */ + Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage); + + /* Send the dataflash main memory page read command */ + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD); + Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0); + Dataflash_SendByte(0x00); + Dataflash_SendByte(0x00); + Dataflash_SendByte(0x00); + Dataflash_SendByte(0x00); + } + + /* Read one 16-byte chunk of data from the dataflash */ + Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + + /* Increment the dataflash page 16 byte block counter */ + CurrDFPageByteDiv16++; + + /* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */ + BytesInBlockDiv16++; + + /* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */ + if (IsMassStoreReset) + return; + } + + /* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */ + TotalBlocks--; + } + + /* If the endpoint is full, send its contents to the host */ + if (!(Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed())) + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + + /* Deselect all dataflash chips */ + Dataflash_DeselectChip(); +} + +/** Disables the dataflash memory write protection bits on the board Dataflash ICs, if enabled. */ +void DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections(void) +{ + /* Select first dataflash chip, send the read status register command */ + Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1); + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS); + + /* Check if sector protection is enabled */ + if (Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON) + { + Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS(); + + /* Send the commands to disable sector protection */ + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[0]); + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[1]); + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[2]); + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[3]); + } + + /* Select second dataflash chip (if present on selected board), send read status register command */ + #if (DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS == 2) + Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP2); + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS); + + /* Check if sector protection is enabled */ + if (Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON) + { + Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS(); + + /* Send the commands to disable sector protection */ + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[0]); + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[1]); + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[2]); + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[3]); + } + #endif + + /* Deselect current dataflash chip */ + Dataflash_DeselectChip(); +} diff --git a/Demos/MassStorage/DataflashManager.h b/Demos/MassStorage/DataflashManager.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..a0c43c39cf7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MassStorage/DataflashManager.h @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for DataflashManager.c. + */ + +#ifndef _DATAFLASH_MANAGER_H +#define _DATAFLASH_MANAGER_H + + /* Includes: */ + #include + + #include "MassStorage.h" + #include "Descriptors.h" + + #include // Function Attribute, Atomic, Debug and ISR Macros + #include // USB Functionality + #include // Dataflash chip driver + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE % 16) + #error Dataflash page size must be a multiple of 16 bytes. + #endif + + /* Defines: */ + /** Total number of bytes of the storage medium, comprised of one or more dataflash ICs. */ + #define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES ((uint32_t)DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS) + + /** Block size of the device. This is kept at 512 to remain compatible with the OS despite the underlying + * storage media (Dataflash) using a different native block size. + */ + #define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE 512 + + /** Total number of blocks of the virtual memory for reporting to the host as the device's total capacity. */ + #define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCKS (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES / VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks); + void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks); + void DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections(void); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/MassStorage/Descriptors.c b/Demos/MassStorage/Descriptors.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..a6173156ac2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MassStorage/Descriptors.c @@ -0,0 +1,223 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special + * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine + * the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "Descriptors.h" + +/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall + * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the + * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration + * process begins. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor = +{ + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), Type: DTYPE_Device}, + + USBSpecification: VERSION_BCD(01.10), + Class: 0x00, + SubClass: 0x00, + Protocol: 0x00, + + Endpoint0Size: 8, + + VendorID: 0x03EB, + ProductID: 0x2045, + ReleaseNumber: 0x0000, + + ManufacturerStrIndex: 0x01, + ProductStrIndex: 0x02, + SerialNumStrIndex: 0x03, + + NumberOfConfigurations: 1 +}; + +/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage + * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces + * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting + * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor = +{ + Config: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), Type: DTYPE_Configuration}, + + TotalConfigurationSize: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t), + TotalInterfaces: 1, + + ConfigurationNumber: 1, + ConfigurationStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + ConfigAttributes: USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED, + + MaxPowerConsumption: USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100) + }, + + Interface: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface}, + + InterfaceNumber: 0, + AlternateSetting: 0, + + TotalEndpoints: 2, + + Class: 0x08, + SubClass: 0x06, + Protocol: 0x50, + + InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + DataInEndpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM), + Attributes: EP_TYPE_BULK, + EndpointSize: MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0x00 + }, + + DataOutEndpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM), + Attributes: EP_TYPE_BULK, + EndpointSize: MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0x00 + } +}; + +/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests + * the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate + * via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(1), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG} +}; + +/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable + * form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(11), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"Dean Camera" +}; + +/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form, + * and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(22), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"LUFA Mass Storage Demo" +}; + +/** Serial number descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing a string of HEX characters at least 12 + * digits in length to uniquely identify a device when concatenated with the device's Vendor and Product IDs. By + * using the unique serial number string to identify a device, the device drivers do not need to be reinstalled + * each time the device is inserted into a different USB port on the same system. This should be unique between + * devices, or conflicts will occur if two devices sharing the same serial number are inserted into the same system + * at the same time. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM SerialNumberString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(12), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"000000000000" +}; + +/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see StdDescriptors.h + * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given + * to the USB library. When the device recieves a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function + * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the + * USB host. + */ +uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) +{ + const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8); + const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF); + + void* Address = NULL; + uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR; + + switch (DescriptorType) + { + case DTYPE_Device: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(DeviceDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Configuration: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t); + break; + case DTYPE_String: + switch (DescriptorNumber) + { + case 0x00: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(LanguageString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x01: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ManufacturerString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x02: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ProductString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x03: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(SerialNumberString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&SerialNumberString.Header.Size); + break; + } + + break; + } + + *DescriptorAddress = Address; + return Size; +} diff --git a/Demos/MassStorage/Descriptors.h b/Demos/MassStorage/Descriptors.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..a64d72e92c9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MassStorage/Descriptors.h @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Descriptors.c. + */ + +#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_ +#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + + #include + + /* Macros: */ + /** Endpoint number of the Mass Storage device-to-host data IN endpoint. */ + #define MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM 3 + + /** Endpoint number of the Mass Storage host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */ + #define MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM 4 + + /** Size in bytes of the Mass Storage data endpoints. */ + #define MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE 64 + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the + * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which + * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config; + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t Interface; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t DataInEndpoint; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t DataOutEndpoint; + } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) + ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/MassStorage/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/MassStorage/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..a7b90016068 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MassStorage/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Mass Storage Device Demo" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek, +# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish, +# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene, +# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command , where is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command , where +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Namespace. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file . + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are +# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values +# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list; +# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which +# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous +# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE +# respectively. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin" + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to the search engine +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be +# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO diff --git a/Demos/MassStorage/MassStorage.aps b/Demos/MassStorage/MassStorage.aps new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..483bc4caba4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MassStorage/MassStorage.aps @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +MassStorage30-Sep-2008 14:12:0930-Sep-2008 14:12:25241030-Sep-2008 14:12:0944, 14, 0, 589AVR GCCC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\MassStorage\JTAGICE mkIIAT90USB1287.xmlfalseR00R01R02R03R04R05R06R07R08R09R10R11R12R13R14R15R16R17R18R19R20R21R22R23R24R25R26R27R28R29R30R31Auto000DataflashManager.cDescriptors.cMassStorage.cSCSI.cDataflashManager.hDescriptors.hMassStorage.hSCSI.hSCSI_Codes.hmakefiledefaultYESmakefileat90usb1287111MassStorage.elfdefault\1-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enumsdefault1C:\WinAVR-20080512\bin\avr-gcc.exeC:\WinAVR-20080512\utils\bin\make.exe diff --git a/Demos/MassStorage/MassStorage.c b/Demos/MassStorage/MassStorage.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..fb61530ff36 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MassStorage/MassStorage.c @@ -0,0 +1,396 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the Mass Storage demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and + * is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + +#define INCLUDE_FROM_MASSSTORAGE_C +#include "MassStorage.h" + +/* Project Tags, for reading out using the ButtLoad project */ +BUTTLOADTAG(ProjName, "LUFA MassStore App"); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildTime, __TIME__); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildDate, __DATE__); +BUTTLOADTAG(LUFAVersion, "LUFA V" LUFA_VERSION_STRING); + +/* Scheduler Task List */ +TASK_LIST +{ + { Task: USB_MassStorage , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, +}; + +/* Global Variables */ +/** Structure to hold the latest Command Block Wrapper issued by the host, containing a SCSI command to execute. */ +CommandBlockWrapper_t CommandBlock; + +/** Structure to hold the latest Command Status Wrapper to return to the host, containing the status of the last issued command. */ +CommandStatusWrapper_t CommandStatus = { Signature: CSW_SIGNATURE }; + +/** Flag to asyncronously abort any in-progress data transfers upon the reception of a mass storage reset command. */ +volatile bool IsMassStoreReset = false; + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then + * starts the scheduler to run the application tasks. + */ +int main(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable Clock Division */ + SetSystemClockPrescaler(0); + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + LEDs_Init(); + Dataflash_Init(SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_2); + + /* Clear Dataflash sector protections, if enabled */ + DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections(); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); + + /* Initialize Scheduler so that it can be used */ + Scheduler_Init(); + + /* Initialize USB Subsystem */ + USB_Init(); + + /* Scheduling - routine never returns, so put this last in the main function */ + Scheduler_Start(); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Reset event. This fires when the USB interface is reset by the USB host, before the + * enumeration process begins, and enables the control endpoint interrupt so that control requests can be handled + * asynchronously when they arrive rather than when the control endpoint is polled manually. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Reset) +{ + /* Select the control endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP); + + /* Enable the endpoint SETUP interrupt ISR for the control endpoint */ + USB_INT_Enable(ENDPOINT_INT_SETUP); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs. */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Connect) +{ + /* Indicate USB enumerating */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBEnumerating); + + /* Reset the MSReset flag upon connection */ + IsMassStoreReset = false; +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via + * the status LEDs and stops the Mass Storage management task. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Disconnect) +{ + /* Stop running mass storage task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_MassStorage, TASK_STOP); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host set the current configuration + * of the USB device after enumeration - the device endpoints are configured and the Mass Storage management task started. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_ConfigurationChanged) +{ + /* Setup Mass Storage In and Out Endpoints */ + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK, + ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_DOUBLE); + + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK, + ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_DOUBLE); + + /* Indicate USB connected and ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady); + + /* Start mass storage task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_MassStorage, TASK_RUN); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event. This is used to catch standard and class specific + * control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the Mass Storage class-specific + * requests) so that they can be handled appropriately for the application. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_UnhandledControlPacket) +{ + /* Process UFI specific control requests */ + switch (bRequest) + { + case REQ_MassStorageReset: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + /* Indicate that the current transfer should be aborted */ + IsMassStoreReset = true; + + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + case REQ_GetMaxLUN: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + /* Indicate to the host the number of supported LUNs (virtual disks) on the device */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + Endpoint_Write_Byte(TOTAL_LUNS - 1); + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + } +} + +/** Function to manage status updates to the user. This is done via LEDs on the given board, if available, but may be changed to + * log to a serial port, or anything else that is suitable for status updates. + * + * \param CurrentStatus Current status of the system, from the MassStorage_StatusCodes_t enum + */ +void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus) +{ + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS; + + /* Set the LED mask to the appropriate LED mask based on the given status code */ + switch (CurrentStatus) + { + case Status_USBNotReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1); + break; + case Status_USBEnumerating: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2); + break; + case Status_USBReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4); + break; + case Status_CommandBlockError: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1); + break; + case Status_ProcessingCommandBlock: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2); + break; + } + + /* Set the board LEDs to the new LED mask */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); +} + +/** Task to manage the Mass Storage interface, reading in Command Block Wrappers from the host, processing the SCSI commands they + * contain, and returning Command Status Wrappers back to the host to indicate the success or failure of the last issued command. + */ +TASK(USB_MassStorage) +{ + /* Check if the USB System is connected to a Host */ + if (USB_IsConnected) + { + /* Select the Data Out Endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM); + + /* Check to see if a command from the host has been issued */ + if (Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed()) + { + /* Indicate busy */ + UpdateStatus(Status_ProcessingCommandBlock); + + /* Process sent command block from the host */ + if (ReadInCommandBlock()) + { + /* Check direction of command, select Data IN endpoint if data is from the device */ + if (CommandBlock.Flags & COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_IN) + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM); + + /* Decode the received SCSI command */ + SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(); + + /* Load in the CBW tag into the CSW to link them together */ + CommandStatus.Tag = CommandBlock.Tag; + + /* Load in the data residue counter into the CSW */ + CommandStatus.DataTransferResidue = CommandBlock.DataTransferLength; + + /* Stall the selected data pipe if command failed (if data is still to be transferred) */ + if ((CommandStatus.Status == Command_Fail) && (CommandStatus.DataTransferResidue)) + Endpoint_StallTransaction(); + + /* Return command status block to the host */ + ReturnCommandStatus(); + + /* Check if a Mass Storage Reset ocurred */ + if (IsMassStoreReset) + { + /* Reset the data endpoint banks */ + Endpoint_ResetFIFO(MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM); + Endpoint_ResetFIFO(MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM); + + /* Clear the abort transfer flag */ + IsMassStoreReset = false; + } + + /* Indicate ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady); + } + else + { + /* Indicate error reading in the command block from the host */ + UpdateStatus(Status_CommandBlockError); + } + } + } +} + +/** Function to read in a command block from the host, via the bulk data OUT endpoint. This function reads in the next command block + * if one has been issued, and performs validation to ensure that the block command is valid. + * + * \return Boolean true if a valid command block has been read in from the endpoint, false otherwise + */ +static bool ReadInCommandBlock(void) +{ + /* Select the Data Out endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM); + + /* Read in command block header */ + Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&CommandBlock, (sizeof(CommandBlock) - sizeof(CommandBlock.SCSICommandData)), + AbortOnMassStoreReset); + + /* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */ + if (IsMassStoreReset) + return false; + + /* Verify the command block - abort if invalid */ + if ((CommandBlock.Signature != CBW_SIGNATURE) || + (CommandBlock.LUN >= TOTAL_LUNS) || + (CommandBlock.SCSICommandLength > MAX_SCSI_COMMAND_LENGTH)) + { + /* Stall both data pipes until reset by host */ + Endpoint_StallTransaction(); + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM); + Endpoint_StallTransaction(); + + return false; + } + + /* Read in command block command data */ + Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&CommandBlock.SCSICommandData, + CommandBlock.SCSICommandLength, + AbortOnMassStoreReset); + + /* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */ + if (IsMassStoreReset) + return false; + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + + return true; +} + +/** Returns the filled Command Status Wrapper back to the host via the bulk data IN endpoint, waiting for the host to clear any + * stalled data endpoints as needed. + */ +static void ReturnCommandStatus(void) +{ + /* Select the Data Out endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM); + + /* While data pipe is stalled, wait until the host issues a control request to clear the stall */ + while (Endpoint_IsStalled()) + { + /* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */ + if (IsMassStoreReset) + return; + } + + /* Select the Data In endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM); + + /* While data pipe is stalled, wait until the host issues a control request to clear the stall */ + while (Endpoint_IsStalled()) + { + /* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */ + if (IsMassStoreReset) + return; + } + + /* Write the CSW to the endpoint */ + Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&CommandStatus, sizeof(CommandStatus), + AbortOnMassStoreReset); + + /* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */ + if (IsMassStoreReset) + return; + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); +} + +/** Stream callback function for the Endpoint stream read and write functions. This callback will abort the current stream transfer + * if a Mass Storage Reset request has been issued to the control endpoint. + */ +STREAM_CALLBACK(AbortOnMassStoreReset) +{ + /* Abort if a Mass Storage reset command was received */ + if (IsMassStoreReset) + return STREAMCALLBACK_Abort; + + /* Continue with the current stream operation */ + return STREAMCALLBACK_Continue; +} + +/** ISR for the general Pipe/Endpoint interrupt vector. This ISR fires when a control request has been issued to the control endpoint, + * so that the request can be processed. As several elements of the Mass Storage implementation require asynchronous control requests + * (such as endpoint stall clearing and Mass Storage Reset requests during data transfers) this is done via interrupts rather than + * polling. + */ +ISR(ENDPOINT_PIPE_vect, ISR_BLOCK) +{ + /* Check if the control endpoint has received a request */ + if (Endpoint_HasEndpointInterrupted(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP)) + { + /* Clear the endpoint interrupt */ + Endpoint_ClearEndpointInterrupt(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP); + + /* Process the control request */ + USB_USBTask(); + + /* Handshake the endpoint setup interrupt - must be after the call to USB_USBTask() */ + USB_INT_Clear(ENDPOINT_INT_SETUP); + } +} diff --git a/Demos/MassStorage/MassStorage.h b/Demos/MassStorage/MassStorage.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..4f0e5b58fd3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MassStorage/MassStorage.h @@ -0,0 +1,159 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for MassStorage.c. + */ + +#ifndef _MASS_STORAGE_H_ +#define _MASS_STORAGE_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + + #include "Descriptors.h" + #include "SCSI.h" + #include "DataflashManager.h" + + #include // Library Version Information + #include // PROGMEM tags readable by the ButtLoad project + #include // USB Functionality + #include // LEDs driver + #include // Dataflash chip driver + #include // Simple scheduler for task management + + /* Macros: */ + /** Mass Storage Class specific request to reset the Mass Storage interface, ready for the next command. */ + #define REQ_MassStorageReset 0xFF + + /** Mass Storage Class specific request to retrieve the total number of Logical Units (drives) in the SCSI device. */ + #define REQ_GetMaxLUN 0xFE + + /** Maximum length of a SCSI command which can be issued by the device or host in a Mass Storage bulk wrapper. */ + #define MAX_SCSI_COMMAND_LENGTH 16 + + /** Total number of Logical Units (drives) in the device. By default, the total device capacity is shared equally between + * each drive - this can be set to any positive non-zero amount. */ + #define TOTAL_LUNS 2 + + /** Blocks in each LUN, calculated from the total capacity divided by the total number of Logical Units in the device. */ + #define LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCKS / TOTAL_LUNS) + + /** Magic signature for a Command Block Wrapper used in the Mass Storage Bulk-Only transport protocol. */ + #define CBW_SIGNATURE 0x43425355UL + + /** Magic signature for a Command Status Wrapper used in the Mass Storage Bulk-Only transport protocol. */ + #define CSW_SIGNATURE 0x53425355UL + + /** Mask for a Command Block Wrapper's flags attribute to specify a command with data sent from host-to-device. */ + #define COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_OUT (0 << 7) + + /** Mask for a Command Block Wrapper's flags attribute to specify a command with data sent from device-to-host. */ + #define COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_IN (1 << 7) + + /* Type defines: */ + /** Type define for a Command Block Wrapper, used in the Mass Storage Bulk-Only Transport protocol. */ + typedef struct + { + uint32_t Signature; /**< Command block signature, must be CBW_SIGNATURE to indicate a valid Command Block */ + uint32_t Tag; /**< Unique command ID value, to associate a command block wrapper with its command status wrapper */ + uint32_t DataTransferLength; /** Length of the optional data portion of the issued command, in bytes */ + uint8_t Flags; /**< Command block flags, indicating command data direction */ + uint8_t LUN; /**< Logical Unit number this command is issued to */ + uint8_t SCSICommandLength; /**< Length of the issued SCSI command within the SCSI command data array */ + uint8_t SCSICommandData[MAX_SCSI_COMMAND_LENGTH]; /**< Issued SCSI command in the Command Block */ + } CommandBlockWrapper_t; + + /** Type define for a Command Status Wrapper, used in the Mass Storage Bulk-Only Transport protocol. */ + typedef struct + { + uint32_t Signature; /**< Status block signature, must be CSW_SIGNATURE to indicate a valid Command Status */ + uint32_t Tag; /**< Unique command ID value, to associate a command block wrapper with its command status wrapper */ + uint32_t DataTransferResidue; /**< Number of bytes of data not processed in the SCSI command */ + uint8_t Status; /**< Status code of the issued command - a value from the MassStorage_CommandStatusCodes_t enum */ + } CommandStatusWrapper_t; + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible command status wrapper return status codes. */ + enum MassStorage_CommandStatusCodes_t + { + Command_Pass = 0, /**< Command completed with no error */ + Command_Fail = 1, /**< Command failed to complete - host may check the exact error via a SCSI REQUEST SENSE command */ + Phase_Error = 2 /**< Command failed due to being invalid in the current phase */ + }; + + /** Enum for the possible status codes for passing to the UpdateStatus() function. */ + enum MassStorage_StatusCodes_t + { + Status_USBNotReady = 0, /**< USB is not ready (disconnected from a USB host) */ + Status_USBEnumerating = 1, /**< USB interface is enumerating */ + Status_USBReady = 2, /**< USB interface is connected and ready */ + Status_CommandBlockError = 3, /**< Processing a SCSI command block from the host */ + Status_ProcessingCommandBlock = 4, /**< Error during the processing of a SCSI command block from the host */ + }; + + /* Global Variables: */ + extern CommandBlockWrapper_t CommandBlock; + extern CommandStatusWrapper_t CommandStatus; + extern volatile bool IsMassStoreReset; + + /* Task Definitions: */ + TASK(USB_MassStorage); + + /* Stream Callbacks: */ + STREAM_CALLBACK(AbortOnMassStoreReset); + + /* Event Handlers: */ + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Reset event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Reset); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Connect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Connect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Disconnect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Disconnect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_ConfigurationChanged event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_ConfigurationChanged); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_UnhandledControlPacket); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus); + + #if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_MASSSTORAGE_C) + static bool ReadInCommandBlock(void); + static void ReturnCommandStatus(void); + #endif + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/MassStorage/MassStorage.txt b/Demos/MassStorage/MassStorage.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..428faa8e04c --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MassStorage/MassStorage.txt @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage Mass Storage Device Demo + * + * Dual LUN Mass Storage demonstration application. This gives a simple + * reference application for implementing a multiple LUN USB Mass Storage + * device using the basic USB UFI drivers in all modern OSes (i.e. no + * special drivers required). + * + * On startup the system will automatically enumerate and function as an + * external mass storage device with two LUNs (seperate disks) which may + * be formatted and used in the same manner as commercial USB Mass Storage + * devices. + * + * You will need to format the mass storage drives upon first run of this + * demonstration - as the device acts only as a data block transport between + * the host and the storage media, it does not matter what file system is used, + * as the data interpretation is performed by the host and not the USB device. + * + * This demo is not restricted to only two LUNs; by changing the TOTAL_LUNS + * value in MassStorageDualLUN.h, any number of LUNs can be used (from 1 to + * 255), with each LUN being allocated an equal portion of the available + * Dataflash memory. + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + *
USB Mode:Device
USB Class:Mass Storage Device
USB Subclass:Bulk-Only Transport
Relevant Standards:USBIF Mass Storage StandardUSB Bulk-Only Transport StandardSCSI Primary Commands SpecificationSCSI Block Commands Specification
Usable Speeds:Full Speed Mode
+ */ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Demos/MassStorage/SCSI.c b/Demos/MassStorage/SCSI.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..d9c5526915e --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MassStorage/SCSI.c @@ -0,0 +1,350 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * SCSI command processing routines, for SCSI commands issued by the host. Mass Storage + * devices use a thin "Bulk-Only Transport" protocol for issuing commands and status information, + * which wrap around standard SCSI device commands for controlling the actual storage medium. + */ + +#define INCLUDE_FROM_SCSI_C +#include "SCSI.h" + +/** Structure to hold the SCSI reponse data to a SCSI INQUIRY command. This gives information about the device's + * features and capabilities. + */ +SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t InquiryData = + { + DeviceType: 0, + PeripheralQualifier: 0, + + Removable: true, + + Version: 0, + + ResponseDataFormat: 2, + NormACA: false, + TrmTsk: false, + AERC: false, + + AdditionalLength: 0x1F, + + SoftReset: false, + CmdQue: false, + Linked: false, + Sync: false, + WideBus16Bit: false, + WideBus32Bit: false, + RelAddr: false, + + VendorID: "LUFA", + ProductID: "Dataflash Disk", + RevisionID: {'0','.','0','0'}, + }; + +/** Structure to hold the sense data for the last issued SCSI command, which is returned to the host after a SCSI REQUEST SENSE + * command is issued. This gives information on exactly why the last command failed to complete. + */ +SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t SenseData = + { + ResponseCode: 0x70, + AdditionalLength: 0x0A, + }; + + +/** Main routine to process the SCSI command located in the Command Block Wrapper read from the host. This dispatches + * to the appropriate SCSI command handling routine if the issued command is supported by the device, else it returns + * a command failure due to a ILLEGAL REQUEST. + */ +void SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(void) +{ + bool CommandSuccess = false; + + /* Run the apropriate SCSI command hander function based on the passed command */ + switch (CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[0]) + { + case SCSI_CMD_INQUIRY: + CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Inquiry(); + break; + case SCSI_CMD_REQUEST_SENSE: + CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(); + break; + case SCSI_CMD_READ_CAPACITY_10: + CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(); + break; + case SCSI_CMD_SEND_DIAGNOSTIC: + CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(); + break; + case SCSI_CMD_WRITE_10: + CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(DATA_WRITE); + break; + case SCSI_CMD_READ_10: + CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(DATA_READ); + break; + case SCSI_CMD_TEST_UNIT_READY: + case SCSI_CMD_PREVENT_ALLOW_MEDIUM_REMOVAL: + case SCSI_CMD_VERIFY_10: + /* These commands should just succeed, no handling required */ + CommandSuccess = true; + CommandBlock.DataTransferLength = 0; + break; + default: + /* Update the SENSE key to reflect the invalid command */ + SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST, + SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_COMMAND, + SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER); + break; + } + + /* Check if command was successfully processed */ + if (CommandSuccess) + { + /* Command succeeded - set the CSW status and update the SENSE key */ + CommandStatus.Status = Command_Pass; + + SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_GOOD, + SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION, + SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER); + } + else + { + /* Command failed - set the CSW status - failed command function updates the SENSE key */ + CommandStatus.Status = Command_Fail; + } +} + +/** Command processing for an issued SCSI INQUIRY command. This command returns information about the device's features + * and capabilities to the host. + * + * \return Boolean true if the command completed successfully, false otherwise. + */ +static bool SCSI_Command_Inquiry(void) +{ + uint16_t AllocationLength = (((uint16_t)CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[3] << 8) | + CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[4]); + uint16_t BytesTransferred = (AllocationLength < sizeof(InquiryData))? AllocationLength : + sizeof(InquiryData); + + /* Only the standard INQUIRY data is supported, check if any optional INQUIRY bits set */ + if ((CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[1] & ((1 << 0) | (1 << 1))) || + CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[2]) + { + /* Optional but unsupported bits set - update the SENSE key and fail the request */ + SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST, + SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB, + SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER); + + return false; + } + + /* Write the INQUIRY data to the endpoint */ + Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&InquiryData, BytesTransferred, AbortOnMassStoreReset); + + uint8_t PadBytes[AllocationLength - BytesTransferred]; + + /* Pad out remaining bytes with 0x00 */ + Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&PadBytes, (AllocationLength - BytesTransferred), AbortOnMassStoreReset); + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + + /* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */ + CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= BytesTransferred; + + return true; +} + +/** Command processing for an issued SCSI REQUEST SENSE command. This command returns information about the last issued command, + * including the error code and additional error information so that the host can determine why a command failed to complete. + * + * \return Boolean true if the command completed successfully, false otherwise. + */ +static bool SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(void) +{ + uint8_t AllocationLength = CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[4]; + uint8_t BytesTransferred = (AllocationLength < sizeof(SenseData))? AllocationLength : sizeof(SenseData); + + /* Send the SENSE data - this indicates to the host the status of the last command */ + Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&SenseData, BytesTransferred, AbortOnMassStoreReset); + + uint8_t PadBytes[AllocationLength - BytesTransferred]; + + /* Pad out remaining bytes with 0x00 */ + Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&PadBytes, (AllocationLength - BytesTransferred), AbortOnMassStoreReset); + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + + /* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */ + CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= BytesTransferred; + + return true; +} + +/** Command processing for an issued SCSI READ CAPACITY (10) command. This command returns information about the device's capacity + * on the selected Logical Unit (drive), as a number of OS-sized blocks. + * + * \return Boolean true if the command completed successfully, false otherwise. + */ +static bool SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(void) +{ + /* Send the total number of logical blocks in the current LUN */ + Endpoint_Write_DWord_BE(LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS - 1); + + /* Send the logical block size of the device (must be 512 bytes) */ + Endpoint_Write_DWord_BE(VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE); + + /* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */ + if (IsMassStoreReset) + return false; + + /* Send the endpoint data packet to the host */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + + /* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */ + CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= 8; + + return true; +} + +/** Command processing for an issued SCSI SEND DIAGNOSTIC command. This command peforms a quick check of the Dataflash ICs on the + * board, and indicates if they are present and functioning correctly. Only the Self-Test portion of the diagnostic command is + * supported. + * + * \return Boolean true if the command completed successfully, false otherwise. + */ +static bool SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(void) +{ + uint8_t ReturnByte; + + /* Check to see if the SELF TEST bit is not set */ + if (!(CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[1] & (1 << 2))) + { + /* Only self-test supported - update SENSE key and fail the command */ + SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST, + SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB, + SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER); + + return false; + } + + /* Test first Dataflash IC is present and responding to commands */ + Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1); + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO); + ReturnByte = Dataflash_ReceiveByte(); + Dataflash_DeselectChip(); + + /* If returned data is invalid, fail the command */ + if (ReturnByte != DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL) + { + /* Update SENSE key with a hardware error condition and return command fail */ + SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_HARDWARE_ERROR, + SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION, + SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER); + + return false; + } + + #if (DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS == 2) + /* Test second Dataflash IC is present and responding to commands */ + Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP2); + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO); + ReturnByte = Dataflash_ReceiveByte(); + Dataflash_DeselectChip(); + + /* If returned data is invalid, fail the command */ + if (ReturnByte != DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL) + { + /* Update SENSE key with a hardware error condition and return command fail */ + SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_HARDWARE_ERROR, + SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION, + SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER); + + return false; + } + #endif + + /* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */ + CommandBlock.DataTransferLength = 0; + + return true; +} + +/** Command processing for an issued SCSI READ (10) or WRITE (10) command. This command reads in the block start address + * and total number of blocks to process, then calls the appropriate low-level dataflash routine to handle the actual + * reading and writing of the data. + * + * \param IsDataRead Indicates if the command is a READ (10) command or WRITE (10) command (DATA_READ or DATA_WRITE) + * + * \return Boolean true if the command completed successfully, false otherwise. + */ +static bool SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(const bool IsDataRead) +{ + uint32_t BlockAddress; + uint16_t TotalBlocks; + + /* Load in the 32-bit block address (SCSI uses big-endian, so have to do it byte-by-byte) */ + ((uint8_t*)&BlockAddress)[3] = CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[2]; + ((uint8_t*)&BlockAddress)[2] = CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[3]; + ((uint8_t*)&BlockAddress)[1] = CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[4]; + ((uint8_t*)&BlockAddress)[0] = CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[5]; + + /* Load in the 16-bit total blocks (SCSI uses big-endian, so have to do it byte-by-byte) */ + ((uint8_t*)&TotalBlocks)[1] = CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[7]; + ((uint8_t*)&TotalBlocks)[0] = CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[8]; + + /* Check if the block address is outside the maximum allowable value for the LUN */ + if (BlockAddress >= LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS) + { + /* Block address is invalid, update SENSE key and return command fail */ + SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST, + SCSI_ASENSE_LOGICAL_BLOCK_ADDRESS_OUT_OF_RANGE, + SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER); + + return false; + } + + #if (TOTAL_LUNS > 1) + /* Adjust the given block address to the real media address based on the selected LUN */ + BlockAddress += ((uint32_t)CommandBlock.LUN * LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS); + #endif + + /* Determine if the packet is a READ (10) or WRITE (10) command, call appropriate function */ + if (IsDataRead == DATA_READ) + DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(BlockAddress, TotalBlocks); + else + DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(BlockAddress, TotalBlocks); + + /* Update the bytes transferred counter and succeed the command */ + CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= ((uint32_t)TotalBlocks * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE); + + return true; +} diff --git a/Demos/MassStorage/SCSI.h b/Demos/MassStorage/SCSI.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..a0be39001b2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MassStorage/SCSI.h @@ -0,0 +1,143 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for SCSI.c. + */ + +#ifndef _SCSI_H_ +#define _SCSI_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + + #include // Function Attribute, Atomic, Debug and ISR Macros + #include // USB Functionality + #include // LEDs driver + + #include "MassStorage.h" + #include "Descriptors.h" + #include "DataflashManager.h" + #include "SCSI_Codes.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Macro to set the current SCSI sense data to the given key, additional sense code and additional sense qualifier. This + * is for convenience, as it allows for all three sense values (returned upon request to the host to give information about + * the last command failure) in a quick and easy manner. + * + * \param key New SCSI sense key to set the sense code to + * \param acode New SCSI additional sense key to set the additional sense code to + * \param aqual New SCSI additional sense key qualifier to set the additional sense qualifier code to + */ + #define SCSI_SET_SENSE(key, acode, aqual) MACROS{ SenseData.SenseKey = key; \ + SenseData.AdditionalSenseCode = acode; \ + SenseData.AdditionalSenseQualifier = aqual; }MACROE + + /** Macro for the SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10() function, to indicate that data is to be read from the storage medium. */ + #define DATA_READ true + + /** Macro for the SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10() function, to indicate that data is to be written to the storage medium. */ + #define DATA_WRITE false + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for a SCSI response structure to a SCSI INQUIRY command. For details of the + * structure contents, refer to the SCSI specifications. + */ + typedef struct + { + unsigned int DeviceType : 5; + unsigned int PeripheralQualifier : 3; + + unsigned int _RESERVED1 : 7; + unsigned int Removable : 1; + + uint8_t Version; + + unsigned int ResponseDataFormat : 4; + unsigned int _RESERVED2 : 1; + unsigned int NormACA : 1; + unsigned int TrmTsk : 1; + unsigned int AERC : 1; + + uint8_t AdditionalLength; + uint8_t _RESERVED3[2]; + + unsigned int SoftReset : 1; + unsigned int CmdQue : 1; + unsigned int _RESERVED4 : 1; + unsigned int Linked : 1; + unsigned int Sync : 1; + unsigned int WideBus16Bit : 1; + unsigned int WideBus32Bit : 1; + unsigned int RelAddr : 1; + + uint8_t VendorID[8]; + uint8_t ProductID[16]; + uint8_t RevisionID[4]; + } SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t; + + /** Type define for a SCSI sense structure to a SCSI REQUEST SENSE command. For details of the + * structure contents, refer to the SCSI specifications. + */ + typedef struct + { + uint8_t ResponseCode; + + uint8_t SegmentNumber; + + unsigned int SenseKey : 4; + unsigned int _RESERVED1 : 1; + unsigned int ILI : 1; + unsigned int EOM : 1; + unsigned int FileMark : 1; + + uint8_t Information[4]; + uint8_t AdditionalLength; + uint8_t CmdSpecificInformation[4]; + uint8_t AdditionalSenseCode; + uint8_t AdditionalSenseQualifier; + uint8_t FieldReplaceableUnitCode; + uint8_t SenseKeySpecific[3]; + } SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(void); + + #if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_SCSI_C) + static bool SCSI_Command_Inquiry(void); + static bool SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(void); + static bool SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(void); + static bool SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(void); + static bool SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(const bool IsDataRead); + #endif + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/MassStorage/SCSI_Codes.h b/Demos/MassStorage/SCSI_Codes.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..2b2213de21c --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MassStorage/SCSI_Codes.h @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header containing macros for possible SCSI commands and SENSE data. Refer to + * the SCSI standard documentation for more information on each SCSI command and + * the SENSE data. + */ + +#ifndef _SCSI_CODES_H_ +#define _SCSI_CODES_H_ + + /* Macros: */ + #define SCSI_CMD_INQUIRY 0x12 + #define SCSI_CMD_REQUEST_SENSE 0x03 + #define SCSI_CMD_TEST_UNIT_READY 0x00 + #define SCSI_CMD_READ_CAPACITY_10 0x25 + #define SCSI_CMD_SEND_DIAGNOSTIC 0x1D + #define SCSI_CMD_PREVENT_ALLOW_MEDIUM_REMOVAL 0x1E + #define SCSI_CMD_WRITE_10 0x2A + #define SCSI_CMD_READ_10 0x28 + #define SCSI_CMD_WRITE_6 0x0A + #define SCSI_CMD_READ_6 0x08 + #define SCSI_CMD_VERIFY_10 0x2F + #define SCSI_CMD_MODE_SENSE_6 0x1A + #define SCSI_CMD_MODE_SENSE_10 0x5A + + #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_GOOD 0x00 + #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_RECOVERED_ERROR 0x01 + #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_NOT_READY 0x02 + #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_MEDIUM_ERROR 0x03 + #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_HARDWARE_ERROR 0x04 + #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST 0x05 + #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_UNIT_ATTENTION 0x06 + #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_DATA_PROTECT 0x07 + #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_BLANK_CHECK 0x08 + #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_VENDOR_SPECIFIC 0x09 + #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_COPY_ABORTED 0x0A + #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ABORTED_COMMAND 0x0B + #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_VOLUME_OVERFLOW 0x0D + #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_MISCOMPARE 0x0E + + #define SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION 0x00 + #define SCSI_ASENSE_LOGICAL_UNIT_NOT_READY 0x04 + #define SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB 0x24 + #define SCSI_ASENSE_WRITE_PROTECTED 0x27 + #define SCSI_ASENSE_FORMAT_ERROR 0x31 + #define SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_COMMAND 0x20 + #define SCSI_ASENSE_LOGICAL_BLOCK_ADDRESS_OUT_OF_RANGE 0x21 + #define SCSI_ASENSE_MEDIUM_NOT_PRESENT 0x3A + + #define SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER 0x00 + #define SCSI_ASENSEQ_FORMAT_COMMAND_FAILED 0x01 + #define SCSI_ASENSEQ_INITIALIZING_COMMAND_REQUIRED 0x02 + #define SCSI_ASENSEQ_OPERATION_IN_PROGRESS 0x07 + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/MassStorage/makefile b/Demos/MassStorage/makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..82e10908cda --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MassStorage/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,704 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# Denver Gingerich +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb1287 + + +# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# Typical values are: +# F_CPU = 1000000 +# F_CPU = 1843200 +# F_CPU = 2000000 +# F_CPU = 3686400 +# F_CPU = 4000000 +# F_CPU = 7372800 +# F_CPU = 8000000 +# F_CPU = 11059200 +# F_CPU = 14745600 +# F_CPU = 16000000 +# F_CPU = 18432000 +# F_CPU = 20000000 +F_CPU = 8000000 + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = MassStorage + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + Descriptors.c \ + SCSI.c \ + DataflashManager.c \ + ../../LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.c \ + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = ../../ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES +CDEFS += -DUSB_DEVICE_ONLY -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)" + + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20 +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd +# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500 +# +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf +MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) ) +FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr ) + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +checkhooks: build + @echo + @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events ------- + @$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \ + cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \ + echo "(None)" + @echo ----- End Unhooked LUFA Events ----- + +checklibmode: + @echo + @echo ----------- Library Mode ----------- + @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \ + | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \ + || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)." + @echo ------------------------------------ + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + copy $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom --debug 1 $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end + +clean_binary: + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + +clean_list: + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode begin \ +finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \ +clean clean_list clean_binary program debug \ +gdb-config doxygen dfu flip diff --git a/Demos/MassStorageHost/ConfigDescriptor.c b/Demos/MassStorageHost/ConfigDescriptor.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..53e44875718 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MassStorageHost/ConfigDescriptor.c @@ -0,0 +1,173 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations + * needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special computer-readable structures + * which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "ConfigDescriptor.h" + +/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This + * routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate + * with compatible devices. + * + * This routine searches for a MSD interface descriptor containing bulk IN and OUT data endpoints. + * + * \return An error code from the MassStorageHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum. + */ +uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void) +{ + uint8_t* ConfigDescriptorData; + uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize; + uint8_t ErrorCode; + uint8_t FoundEndpoints = 0; + + /* Get Configuration Descriptor size from the device */ + if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(&ConfigDescriptorSize, NULL) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + return ControlError; + + /* Ensure that the Configuration Descriptor isn't too large */ + if (ConfigDescriptorSize > MAX_CONFIG_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE) + return DescriptorTooLarge; + + /* Allocate enough memory for the entire config descriptor */ + ConfigDescriptorData = alloca(ConfigDescriptorSize); + + /* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */ + USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(&ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData); + + /* Validate returned data - ensure first entry is a configuration header descriptor */ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(ConfigDescriptorData) != DTYPE_Configuration) + return InvalidConfigDataReturned; + + /* Get the mass storage interface from the configuration descriptor */ + if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData, + NextMassStorageInterface))) + { + /* Descriptor not found, error out */ + return NoInterfaceFound; + } + + /* Get the IN and OUT data endpoints for the mass storage interface */ + while (FoundEndpoints != ((1 << MASS_STORE_DATA_IN_PIPE) | (1 << MASS_STORE_DATA_OUT_PIPE))) + { + /* Fetch the next bulk endpoint from the current mass storage interface */ + if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData, + NextInterfaceBulkDataEndpoint))) + { + /* Descriptor not found, error out */ + return NoEndpointFound; + } + + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t); + + /* Check if the endpoint is a bulk IN or bulk OUT endpoint, set appropriate globals */ + if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN) + { + /* Configure the data IN pipe */ + Pipe_ConfigurePipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_IN_PIPE, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_IN, + EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, + PIPE_BANK_DOUBLE); + + Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests(); + + /* Set the flag indicating that the data IN pipe has been found */ + FoundEndpoints |= (1 << MASS_STORE_DATA_IN_PIPE); + } + else + { + /* Configure the data OUT pipe */ + Pipe_ConfigurePipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_OUT_PIPE, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_OUT, + EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, + PIPE_BANK_DOUBLE); + + /* Set the flag indicating that the data OUT pipe has been found */ + FoundEndpoints |= (1 << MASS_STORE_DATA_OUT_PIPE); + } + } + + /* Valid data found, return success */ + return SuccessfulConfigRead; +} + +/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's + * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration + * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found. + * + * This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct Mass Storage Class, Subclass and Protocol values. + * + * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextMassStorageInterface) +{ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface) + { + /* Check the descriptor class and protocol, break out if correct class/protocol interface found */ + if ((DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Class == MASS_STORE_CLASS) && + (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).SubClass == MASS_STORE_SUBCLASS) && + (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Protocol == MASS_STORE_PROTOCOL)) + { + return Descriptor_Search_Found; + } + } + + return Descriptor_Search_NotFound; +} + +/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's + * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration + * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found. + * + * This comparator searches for the next Bulk Endpoint descriptor of the correct MSD interface, aborting the search if + * another interface descriptor is found before the next endpoint. + * + * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextInterfaceBulkDataEndpoint) +{ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint) + { + uint8_t EndpointType = (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t).Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK); + + /* Check the endpoint type, break out if correct BULK type endpoint found */ + if (EndpointType == EP_TYPE_BULK) + return Descriptor_Search_Found; + } + else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface) + { + return Descriptor_Search_Fail; + } + + return Descriptor_Search_NotFound; +} diff --git a/Demos/MassStorageHost/ConfigDescriptor.h b/Demos/MassStorageHost/ConfigDescriptor.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..908cc2ba571 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MassStorageHost/ConfigDescriptor.h @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c. + */ + +#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_ +#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include // USB Functionality + #include // Configuration Descriptor Parser + + #include "MassStorageHost.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Interface Class value for the Mass Storage Device class */ + #define MASS_STORE_CLASS 0x08 + + /** Interface Class value for the Mass Storage Device subclass */ + #define MASS_STORE_SUBCLASS 0x06 + + /** Interface Protocol value for the Bulk Only transport protocol */ + #define MASS_STORE_PROTOCOL 0x50 + + /** Maximum size of a device configuration descriptor which can be processed by the host, in bytes */ + #define MAX_CONFIG_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE 512 + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible return codes of the ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */ + enum MassStorageHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t + { + SuccessfulConfigRead = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */ + ControlError = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */ + DescriptorTooLarge = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */ + InvalidConfigDataReturned = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */ + NoInterfaceFound = 4, /**< A compatible MSD interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */ + NoEndpointFound = 5, /**< The correct MSD endpoint descriptors were not found in the device's MSD interface */ + }; + + /* Configuration Descriptor Comparison Functions: */ + DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextMassStorageInterface); + DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextInterfaceBulkDataEndpoint); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/MassStorageHost/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/MassStorageHost/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..b154575bf35 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MassStorageHost/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Mass Storage Host Demo" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek, +# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish, +# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene, +# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command , where is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command , where +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Namespace. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file . + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are +# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values +# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list; +# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which +# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous +# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE +# respectively. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin" + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to the search engine +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be +# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO diff --git a/Demos/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.aps b/Demos/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.aps new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..9481b3443bb --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.aps @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +MassStorageHost30-Sep-2008 14:12:4326-Jan-2009 16:08:24241030-Sep-2008 14:12:4344, 14, 0, 589AVR GCCC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\MassStorageHost\falseR00R01R02R03R04R05R06R07R08R09R10R11R12R13R14R15R16R17R18R19R20R21R22R23R24R25R26R27R28R29R30R31Auto000ConfigDescriptor.cMassStorageHost.cMassStoreCommands.cConfigDescriptor.hMassStorageHost.hMassStoreCommands.hSCSI_Codes.hmakefiledefaultYESmakefileatmega128111MassStorageHost.elfdefault\1-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enumsdefault1C:\WinAVR-20081205\bin\avr-gcc.exeC:\WinAVR-20081205\utils\bin\make.exeC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\MassStorageHost\ConfigDescriptor.hC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\MassStorageHost\MassStorageHost.hC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\MassStorageHost\MassStoreCommands.hC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\MassStorageHost\ConfigDescriptor.cC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\MassStorageHost\MassStorageHost.cC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\MassStorageHost\MassStoreCommands.c diff --git a/Demos/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.c b/Demos/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..ee4befd0499 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.c @@ -0,0 +1,420 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the MassStorageHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of + * the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + +#include "MassStorageHost.h" + +/* Project Tags, for reading out using the ButtLoad project */ +BUTTLOADTAG(ProjName, "LUFA MS Host App"); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildTime, __TIME__); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildDate, __DATE__); +BUTTLOADTAG(LUFAVersion, "LUFA V" LUFA_VERSION_STRING); + +/* Scheduler Task List */ +TASK_LIST +{ + { Task: USB_USBTask , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, + { Task: USB_MassStore_Host , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, +}; + +/* Globals */ +/** Index of the highest available LUN (Logical Unit) in the attached Mass Storage Device */ +uint8_t MassStore_MaxLUNIndex; + + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then + * starts the scheduler to run the application tasks. + */ +int main(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable Clock Division */ + SetSystemClockPrescaler(0); + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + SerialStream_Init(9600, false); + LEDs_Init(); + HWB_Init(); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); + + /* Startup message */ + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_RESET ESC_BG_WHITE ESC_INVERSE_ON ESC_ERASE_DISPLAY + "MassStore Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_INVERSE_OFF)); + + /* Initialize Scheduler so that it can be used */ + Scheduler_Init(); + + /* Initialize USB Subsystem */ + USB_Init(); + + /* Scheduling routine never returns, so put this last in the main function */ + Scheduler_Start(); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and + * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceAttached) +{ + puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n")); + UpdateStatus(Status_USBEnumerating); + + /* Start USB management task to enumerate the device */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_RUN); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and + * stops the library USB task management process. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceUnattached) +{ + /* Stop USB management and Mass Storage tasks */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_STOP); + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_MassStore_Host, TASK_STOP); + + puts_P(PSTR("\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n")); + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully + * enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete) +{ + /* Once device is fully enumerated, start the Mass Storage Host task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_MassStore_Host, TASK_RUN); + + /* Indicate device enumeration complete */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_HostError) +{ + USB_ShutDown(); + + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + UpdateStatus(Status_HardwareError); + for(;;); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occured while + * enumerating an attached USB device. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed) +{ + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"), SubErrorCode); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- In State %d\r\n"), USB_HostState); + + UpdateStatus(Status_EnumerationError); +} + +/** Task to set the configuration of the attached device after it has been enumerated, and to read in blocks from + * the device and print them to the serial port. + */ +TASK(USB_MassStore_Host) +{ + uint8_t ErrorCode; + + switch (USB_HostState) + { + case HOST_STATE_Addressed: + /* Standard request to set the device configuration to configuration 1 */ + USB_HostRequest = (USB_Host_Request_Header_t) + { + bmRequestType: (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE), + bRequest: REQ_SetConfiguration, + wValue: 1, + wIndex: 0, + wLength: 0, + }; + + /* Send the request, display error and wait for device detatch if request fails */ + if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + { + puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error via status LEDs */ + UpdateStatus(Status_EnumerationError); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + break; + } + + USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured; + break; + case HOST_STATE_Configured: + puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n")); + + /* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */ + if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead) + { + if (ErrorCode == ControlError) + puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n")); + else + puts_P(PSTR("Invalid Device.\r\n")); + + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error via status LEDs */ + UpdateStatus(Status_EnumerationError); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + break; + } + + puts_P(PSTR("Mass Storage Disk Enumerated.\r\n")); + + USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Ready; + break; + case HOST_STATE_Ready: + /* Indicate device busy via the status LEDs */ + UpdateStatus(Status_Busy); + + /* Reset the Mass Storage device interface, ready for use */ + if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_MassStorageReset()) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + { + ShowDiskReadError(PSTR("Mass Storage Reset"), ErrorCode); + break; + } + + /* Send the request, display error and wait for device detatch if request fails */ + if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_GetMaxLUN(&MassStore_MaxLUNIndex)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + { + ShowDiskReadError(PSTR("Get Max LUN"), ErrorCode); + break; + } + + /* Print number of LUNs detected in the attached device */ + printf_P(PSTR("Total LUNs: %d.\r\n"), (MassStore_MaxLUNIndex + 1)); + + /* Set the prevent removal flag for the device, allowing it to be accessed */ + if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_PreventAllowMediumRemoval(0, true)) != 0) + { + ShowDiskReadError(PSTR("Prevent/Allow Medium Removal"), ErrorCode); + break; + } + + /* Get sense data from the device - many devices will not accept any other commands until the sense data + * is read - both on startup and after a failed command */ + SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t SenseData; + if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_RequestSense(0, &SenseData)) != 0) + { + ShowDiskReadError(PSTR("Request Sense"), ErrorCode); + break; + } + + puts_P(PSTR("Waiting until ready")); + + /* Wait until disk ready */ + do + { + Serial_TxByte('.'); + MassStore_TestUnitReady(0); + } + while ((SCSICommandStatus.Status != Command_Pass) && USB_IsConnected); + + /* Abort if device removed */ + if (!(USB_IsConnected)) + break; + + puts_P(PSTR("\r\nRetrieving Capacity... ")); + + /* Create new structure for the disk's capacity in blocks and block size */ + SCSI_Capacity_t DiskCapacity; + + /* Retrieve disk capacity */ + if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_ReadCapacity(0, &DiskCapacity)) != 0) + { + ShowDiskReadError(PSTR("Read Capacity"), ErrorCode); + break; + } + + /* Display the disk capacity in blocks * block size bytes */ + printf_P(PSTR("%lu blocks of %lu bytes.\r\n"), DiskCapacity.Blocks, DiskCapacity.BlockSize); + + /* Create a new buffer capabable of holding a single block from the device */ + uint8_t BlockBuffer[DiskCapacity.BlockSize]; + + /* Read in the first 512 byte block from the device */ + if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_ReadDeviceBlock(0, 0x00000000, 1, DiskCapacity.BlockSize, BlockBuffer)) != 0) + { + ShowDiskReadError(PSTR("Read Device Block"), ErrorCode); + break; + } + + /* Show the number of bytes not transferred in the previous command */ + printf_P(PSTR("Transfer Residue: %lu\r\n"), SCSICommandStatus.DataTransferResidue); + + puts_P(PSTR("\r\nContents of first block:\r\n")); + + /* Print out the first block in both HEX and ASCII, 16 bytes per line */ + for (uint16_t Chunk = 0; Chunk < (DiskCapacity.BlockSize >> 4); Chunk++) + { + /* Pointer to the start of the current 16-byte chunk in the read block of data */ + uint8_t* ChunkPtr = &BlockBuffer[Chunk << 4]; + + /* Print out the 16 bytes of the chunk in HEX format */ + for (uint8_t ByteOffset = 0; ByteOffset < (1 << 4); ByteOffset++) + { + char CurrByte = *(ChunkPtr + ByteOffset); + + printf_P(PSTR("%.2X "), CurrByte); + } + + puts_P(PSTR(" ")); + + /* Print out the 16 bytes of the chunk in ASCII format */ + for (uint8_t ByteOffset = 0; ByteOffset < (1 << 4); ByteOffset++) + { + char CurrByte = *(ChunkPtr + ByteOffset); + + putchar(isprint(CurrByte) ? CurrByte : '.'); + } + + puts_P(PSTR("\r\n")); + } + + puts_P(PSTR("\r\n\r\nPress HWB to read entire ASCII contents of disk...\r\n\r\n")); + + /* Wait for HWB to be pressed */ + while (!(HWB_GetStatus())) + { + /* Abort if device removed */ + if (!(USB_IsConnected)) + break; + } + + /* Print out the entire disk contents in ASCII format */ + for (uint32_t CurrBlock = 0; CurrBlock < DiskCapacity.Blocks; CurrBlock++) + { + /* Read in the next block of data from the device */ + if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_ReadDeviceBlock(0, CurrBlock, 1, DiskCapacity.BlockSize, BlockBuffer)) != 0) + { + ShowDiskReadError(PSTR("Read Device Block"), ErrorCode); + break; + } + + /* Send the ASCII data in the read in block to the serial port */ + for (uint16_t Byte = 0; Byte < DiskCapacity.BlockSize; Byte++) + { + char CurrByte = BlockBuffer[Byte]; + + putchar(isprint(CurrByte) ? CurrByte : '.'); + } + + /* Abort if device removed */ + if (!(USB_IsConnected)) + break; + } + + /* Indicate device no longer busy */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + + break; + } +} + +/** Function to manage status updates to the user. This is done via LEDs on the given board, if available, but may be changed to + * log to a serial port, or anything else that is suitable for status updates. + * + * \param CurrentStatus Current status of the system, from the MassStorageHost_StatusCodes_t enum + */ +void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus) +{ + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS; + + /* Set the LED mask to the appropriate LED mask based on the given status code */ + switch (CurrentStatus) + { + case Status_USBNotReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1); + break; + case Status_USBEnumerating: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2); + break; + case Status_USBReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED2); + break; + case Status_EnumerationError: + case Status_HardwareError: + case Status_SCSICommandError: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3); + break; + case Status_Busy: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED4); + break; + } + + /* Set the board LEDs to the new LED mask */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); +} + +/** Indicates that a communication error has ocurred with the attached Mass Storage Device, + * printing error codes to the serial port and waiting until the device is removed before + * continuing. + * + * \param CommandString ASCII string located in PROGMEM space indicating what operation failed + * \param ErrorCode Error code of the function which failed to complete successfully + */ +void ShowDiskReadError(char* CommandString, uint8_t ErrorCode) +{ + /* Display the error code */ + printf_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Command error (%S).\r\n"), CommandString); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d"), ErrorCode); + + Pipe_Freeze(); + + /* Indicate device error via the status LEDs */ + UpdateStatus(Status_SCSICommandError); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); +} diff --git a/Demos/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.h b/Demos/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..3ace6d46ab6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.h @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for MassStoreHost.c. + */ + +#ifndef _MASS_STORE_HOST_H_ +#define _MASS_STORE_HOST_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + #include + #include + + #include "ConfigDescriptor.h" + #include "MassStoreCommands.h" + + #include // Library Version Information + #include // PROGMEM tags readable by the ButtLoad project + #include // ANSI Terminal Escape Codes + #include // USB Functionality + #include // Serial stream driver + #include // LEDs driver + #include // Hardware Button driver + #include // Simple scheduler for task management + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible status codes for passing to the UpdateStatus() function. */ + enum MassStorageHost_StatusCodes_t + { + Status_USBNotReady = 0, /**< USB is not ready (disconnected from a USB device) */ + Status_USBEnumerating = 1, /**< USB interface is enumerating */ + Status_USBReady = 2, /**< USB interface is connected and ready */ + Status_EnumerationError = 3, /**< Software error while enumerating the attached USB device */ + Status_HardwareError = 4, /**< Hardware error while enumerating the attached USB device */ + Status_Busy = 5, /**< Busy reading or writing to the attached Mass Storage device */ + Status_SCSICommandError = 6, /**< Error sending or recieving a command to or from the attached SCSI device */ + }; + + /* Task Definitions: */ + TASK(USB_MassStore_Host); + + /* Event Handlers: */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceAttached); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceUnattached); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_HostError); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void ShowDiskReadError(char* CommandString, uint8_t ErrorCode); + void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.txt b/Demos/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..2defd7fe8e9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.txt @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage Mass Storage Host Demo + * + * Mass Storage host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference + * application for implementing a USB Mass Storage host, for USB storage devices + * using the standard Mass Storage USB profile. + * + * The first 512 bytes (boot sector) of an attached disk's memory will be dumped + * out of the serial port in HEX and ASCII form when it is attached to the AT90USB1287 + * AVR. The device will then wait for HWB to be pressed, whereupon the entire ASCII contents + * of the disk will be dumped to the serial port. + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + *
USB Mode:Host
USB Class:Mass Storage Device
USB Subclass:Bulk Only
Relevant Standards:USBIF Mass Storage StandardUSB Bulk-Only Transport StandardSCSI Primary Commands SpecificationSCSI Block Commands Specification
Usable Speeds:Full Speed Mode
+ */ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Demos/MassStorageHost/MassStoreCommands.c b/Demos/MassStorageHost/MassStoreCommands.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..c4b315b0a88 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MassStorageHost/MassStoreCommands.c @@ -0,0 +1,673 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Mass Storage Device commands, to issue MSD commands to the device for + * reading device status, capacity, and other characteristics. This file + * also contains block read and write functions, so that device blocks + * can be read and written. In general, these functions would be chained + * to a FAT library to give file-level access to an attached device's contents. + * + * \note Many Mass Storage devices on the market are non-compliant to the + * specifications and thus can proove difficult to interface with. It + * may be neccesary to retry the functions in the module several times + * after they have returned and error to successfully send the command + * to the device. Some devices may also need to have the stream function + * timeout period extended beyond 100ms by defining USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS + * to a larger value in the project makefile and passing it to the compiler + * via the -D switch. + */ + +#define INCLUDE_FROM_MASSSTORE_COMMANDS_C +#include "MassStoreCommands.h" + +/* Globals: */ +/** Current CBW to send to the device. This is automatically filled by the routines + * in this file and is not externally accessable. + */ +static CommandBlockWrapper_t SCSICommandBlock; + +/** Current CSW received from the device. This is automatically filled by the routines + * in this file and is externally accessable so that the return codes may be checked. + */ +CommandStatusWrapper_t SCSICommandStatus; + +/** Current Tag value used in issued CBWs to the device. This is automatically incremented + * by the routines in this file, and is not externally accessable. + */ +static uint32_t MassStore_Tag = 1; + + +/** Routine to send the current CBW to the device, and increment the Tag value as needed. + * + * \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +static uint8_t MassStore_SendCommand(void) +{ + uint8_t ErrorCode = PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError; + + /* Each transmission should have a unique tag value, excluding valued 0 and 0xFFFFFFFF */ + if (++MassStore_Tag == 0xFFFFFFFF) + MassStore_Tag = 1; + + /* Select the OUT data pipe for CBW transmission */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_OUT_PIPE); + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + /* Write the CBW command to the OUT pipe */ + if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(&SCSICommandBlock, sizeof(CommandBlockWrapper_t))) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError) + return ErrorCode; + + /* Send the data in the OUT pipe to the attached device */ + Pipe_ClearCurrentBank(); + + /* Some buggy devices require a delay here before the pipe freezing or they will lock up */ + USB_Host_WaitMS(1); + + /* Freeze pipe after use */ + Pipe_Freeze(); + + return PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError; +} + +/** Waits until the attached device is ready to accept data following a CBW, checking + * to ensure that the device has not stalled the transaction. + * + * \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +static uint8_t MassStore_WaitForDataReceived(void) +{ + uint16_t TimeoutMSRem = COMMAND_DATA_TIMEOUT_MS; + + /* Unfreeze the OUT pipe so that it can be checked */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_OUT_PIPE); + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + /* Select the IN data pipe for data reception */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_IN_PIPE); + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + /* Wait until data received in the IN pipe */ + while (!(Pipe_ReadWriteAllowed())) + { + /* Check to see if a new frame has been issued (1ms elapsed) */ + if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_HSOFI)) + { + /* Clear the flag and decrement the timout period counter */ + USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_HSOFI); + TimeoutMSRem--; + + /* Check to see if the timeout period for the command has elapsed */ + if (!(TimeoutMSRem)) + return PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_Timeout; + } + + Pipe_SelectPipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_OUT_PIPE); + + /* Check if pipe stalled (command failed by device) */ + if (Pipe_IsStalled()) + { + /* Clear the stall condition on the OUT pipe */ + MassStore_ClearPipeStall(MASS_STORE_DATA_OUT_PIPE); + + return PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_PipeStalled; + } + + Pipe_SelectPipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_IN_PIPE); + + /* Check if pipe stalled (command failed by device) */ + if (Pipe_IsStalled()) + { + /* Clear the stall condition on the IN pipe */ + MassStore_ClearPipeStall(MASS_STORE_DATA_IN_PIPE); + + return PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_PipeStalled; + } + + /* Check to see if the device was disconnected, if so exit function */ + if (!(USB_IsConnected)) + return PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_DeviceDisconnected; + }; + + return PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError; +} + +/** Sends or receives the transaction's data stage to or from the attached device, reading or + * writing to the nominated buffer. + * + * \param BufferPtr Pointer to the data buffer to read from or write to + * + * \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +static uint8_t MassStore_SendReceiveData(void* BufferPtr) +{ + uint8_t ErrorCode = PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError; + uint16_t BytesRem = SCSICommandBlock.Header.DataTransferLength; + + /* Check the direction of the SCSI command data stage */ + if (SCSICommandBlock.Header.Flags & COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_IN) + { + /* Select the IN data pipe for data reception */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_IN_PIPE); + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + /* Read in the block data from the pipe */ + if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(BufferPtr, BytesRem)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError) + return ErrorCode; + } + else + { + /* Select the OUT data pipe for data transmission */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_OUT_PIPE); + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + /* Write the block data to the pipe */ + if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(BufferPtr, BytesRem)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError) + return ErrorCode; + } + + /* Acknowledge the packet */ + Pipe_ClearCurrentBank(); + + /* Some buggy devices require a delay here before the pipe freezing or they will lock up */ + USB_Host_WaitMS(1); + + /* Freeze used pipe after use */ + Pipe_Freeze(); + + return PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError; +} + +/** Routine to receive the current CSW from the device. + * + * \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +static uint8_t MassStore_GetReturnedStatus(void) +{ + uint8_t ErrorCode = PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError; + + /* Select the IN data pipe for data reception */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_IN_PIPE); + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + /* Load in the CSW from the attached device */ + if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&SCSICommandStatus, sizeof(CommandStatusWrapper_t))) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError) + return ErrorCode; + + /* Clear the data ready for next reception */ + Pipe_ClearCurrentBank(); + + /* Some buggy devices require a delay here before the pipe freezing or they will lock up */ + USB_Host_WaitMS(1); + + /* Freeze the IN pipe after use */ + Pipe_Freeze(); + + return PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError; +} + +/** Clears the stall condition in the attached device on the nominated endpoint number. + * + * \param EndpointNum Endpoint number in the attached device whose stall condition is to be cleared + * + * \return A value from the USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum + */ +uint8_t MassStore_ClearPipeStall(const uint8_t EndpointNum) +{ + USB_HostRequest = (USB_Host_Request_Header_t) + { + bmRequestType: (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_ENDPOINT), + bRequest: REQ_ClearFeature, + wValue: FEATURE_ENDPOINT_HALT, + wIndex: EndpointNum, + wLength: 0, + }; + + return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL); +} + +/** Issues a Mass Storage class specific request to reset the attached device's Mass Storage interface, + * readying the device for the next CBW. + * + * \return A value from the USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum + */ +uint8_t MassStore_MassStorageReset(void) +{ + USB_HostRequest = (USB_Host_Request_Header_t) + { + bmRequestType: (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE), + bRequest: REQ_MassStorageReset, + wValue: 0, + wIndex: 0, + wLength: 0, + }; + + return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL); +} + +/** Issues a Mass Storage class specific request to determine the index of the highest numbered Logical + * Unit in the attached device. + * + * \param MaxLUNIndex Pointer to the location that the maximum LUN index value should be stored + * + * \return A value from the USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum + */ +uint8_t MassStore_GetMaxLUN(uint8_t* const MaxLUNIndex) +{ + uint8_t ErrorCode; + + USB_HostRequest = (USB_Host_Request_Header_t) + { + bmRequestType: (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE), + bRequest: REQ_GetMaxLUN, + wValue: 0, + wIndex: 0, + wLength: 1, + }; + + if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(MaxLUNIndex)) == HOST_SENDCONTROL_SetupStalled) + { + /* Clear the pipe stall */ + Pipe_ClearStall(); + + /* Some faulty Mass Storage devices don't implement the GET_MAX_LUN request, so assume a single LUN */ + *MaxLUNIndex = 0; + } + + return ErrorCode; +} + +/** Issues a SCSI Request Sense command to the attached device, to determine the current SCSI sense information. This + * gives error codes for the last issued SCSI command to the device. + * + * \param LUNIndex Index of the LUN inside the device the command is being addressed to + * \param SensePtr Pointer to the sense data structure where the sense data from the device is to be stored + * + * \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +uint8_t MassStore_RequestSense(const uint8_t LUNIndex, const SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t* const SensePtr) +{ + uint8_t ReturnCode = PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError; + + /* Create a CBW with a SCSI command to issue REQUEST SENSE command */ + SCSICommandBlock = (CommandBlockWrapper_t) + { + Header: + { + Signature: CBW_SIGNATURE, + Tag: MassStore_Tag, + DataTransferLength: sizeof(SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t), + Flags: COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_IN, + LUN: LUNIndex, + SCSICommandLength: 6 + }, + + SCSICommandData: + { + SCSI_CMD_REQUEST_SENSE, + 0x00, // Reserved + 0x00, // Reserved + 0x00, // Reserved + sizeof(SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t), // Allocation Length + 0x00 // Unused (control) + } + }; + + /* Send SCSI command to the attached device */ + MassStore_SendCommand(); + + /* Wait until data received from the device */ + if ((ReturnCode = MassStore_WaitForDataReceived()) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError) + { + Pipe_Freeze(); + return ReturnCode; + } + + /* Read the returned sense data into the buffer */ + if ((ReturnCode = MassStore_SendReceiveData((uint8_t*)SensePtr)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError) + { + Pipe_Freeze(); + return ReturnCode; + } + + /* Read in the returned CSW from the device */ + if ((ReturnCode = MassStore_GetReturnedStatus()) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError) + { + Pipe_Freeze(); + return ReturnCode; + } + + return PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError; +} + +/** Issues a SCSI Device Block Read command to the attached device, to read in one or more data blocks from the + * storage medium into a buffer. + * + * \param LUNIndex Index of the LUN inside the device the command is being addressed to + * \param BlockAddress Start block address to read from + * \param Blocks Number of blocks to read from the device + * \param BlockSize Size in bytes of each block to read + * \param BufferPtr Pointer to the buffer where the read data is to be written to + * + * \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +uint8_t MassStore_ReadDeviceBlock(const uint8_t LUNIndex, const uint32_t BlockAddress, + const uint8_t Blocks, const uint16_t BlockSize, void* BufferPtr) +{ + uint8_t ReturnCode = PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError; + + /* Create a CBW with a SCSI command to read in the given blocks from the device */ + SCSICommandBlock = (CommandBlockWrapper_t) + { + Header: + { + Signature: CBW_SIGNATURE, + Tag: MassStore_Tag, + DataTransferLength: ((uint32_t)Blocks * BlockSize), + Flags: COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_IN, + LUN: LUNIndex, + SCSICommandLength: 10 + }, + + SCSICommandData: + { + SCSI_CMD_READ_10, + 0x00, // Unused (control bits, all off) + (BlockAddress >> 24), // MSB of Block Address + (BlockAddress >> 16), + (BlockAddress >> 8), + (BlockAddress & 0xFF), // LSB of Block Address + 0x00, // Unused (reserved) + 0x00, // MSB of Total Blocks to Read + Blocks, // LSB of Total Blocks to Read + 0x00 // Unused (control) + } + }; + + /* Send SCSI command to the attached device */ + MassStore_SendCommand(); + + /* Wait until data received from the device */ + if ((ReturnCode = MassStore_WaitForDataReceived()) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError) + { + Pipe_Freeze(); + return ReturnCode; + } + + /* Read the returned block data into the buffer */ + if ((ReturnCode = MassStore_SendReceiveData(BufferPtr)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError) + { + Pipe_Freeze(); + return ReturnCode; + } + + /* Read in the returned CSW from the device */ + if ((ReturnCode = MassStore_GetReturnedStatus()) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError) + { + Pipe_Freeze(); + return ReturnCode; + } + + return PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError; +} + +/** Issues a SCSI Device Block Write command to the attached device, to write one or more data blocks to the + * storage medium from a buffer. + * + * \param LUNIndex Index of the LUN inside the device the command is being addressed to + * \param BlockAddress Start block address to write to + * \param Blocks Number of blocks to write to in the device + * \param BlockSize Size in bytes of each block to write + * \param BufferPtr Pointer to the buffer where the write data is to be sourced from + * + * \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +uint8_t MassStore_WriteDeviceBlock(const uint8_t LUNIndex, const uint32_t BlockAddress, + const uint8_t Blocks, const uint16_t BlockSize, void* BufferPtr) +{ + uint8_t ReturnCode = PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError; + + /* Create a CBW with a SCSI command to write the given blocks to the device */ + SCSICommandBlock = (CommandBlockWrapper_t) + { + Header: + { + Signature: CBW_SIGNATURE, + Tag: MassStore_Tag, + DataTransferLength: ((uint32_t)Blocks * BlockSize), + Flags: COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_OUT, + LUN: LUNIndex, + SCSICommandLength: 10 + }, + + SCSICommandData: + { + SCSI_CMD_WRITE_10, + 0x00, // Unused (control bits, all off) + (BlockAddress >> 24), // MSB of Block Address + (BlockAddress >> 16), + (BlockAddress >> 8), + (BlockAddress & 0xFF), // LSB of Block Address + 0x00, // Unused (reserved) + 0x00, // MSB of Total Blocks to Write + Blocks, // LSB of Total Blocks to Write + 0x00 // Unused (control) + } + }; + + /* Send SCSI command to the attached device */ + MassStore_SendCommand(); + + /* Write the data to the device from the buffer */ + if ((ReturnCode = MassStore_SendReceiveData(BufferPtr)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError) + { + Pipe_Freeze(); + return ReturnCode; + } + + /* Read in the returned CSW from the device */ + if ((ReturnCode = MassStore_GetReturnedStatus()) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError) + { + Pipe_Freeze(); + return ReturnCode; + } + + return PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError; +} + +/** Issues a SCSI Device Test Unit Ready command to the attached device, to determine if the device is ready to accept + * other commands. + * + * \param LUNIndex Index of the LUN inside the device the command is being addressed to + * + * \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +uint8_t MassStore_TestUnitReady(const uint8_t LUNIndex) +{ + uint8_t ReturnCode = PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError; + + /* Create a CBW with a SCSI command to issue TEST UNIT READY command */ + SCSICommandBlock = (CommandBlockWrapper_t) + { + Header: + { + Signature: CBW_SIGNATURE, + Tag: MassStore_Tag, + DataTransferLength: 0, + Flags: COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_IN, + LUN: LUNIndex, + SCSICommandLength: 6 + }, + + SCSICommandData: + { + SCSI_CMD_TEST_UNIT_READY, + 0x00, // Reserved + 0x00, // Reserved + 0x00, // Reserved + 0x00, // Reserved + 0x00 // Unused (control) + } + }; + + /* Send SCSI command to the attached device */ + MassStore_SendCommand(); + + /* Read in the returned CSW from the device */ + if ((ReturnCode = MassStore_GetReturnedStatus()) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError) + { + Pipe_Freeze(); + return ReturnCode; + } + + return PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError; +} + +/** Issues a SCSI Device Read Capacity command to the attached device, to determine the capacity of the + * given Logical Unit within the device. + * + * \param LUNIndex Index of the LUN inside the device the command is being addressed to + * \param CapacityPtr Device capacity structure where the capacity data is to be stored + * + * \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +uint8_t MassStore_ReadCapacity(const uint8_t LUNIndex, SCSI_Capacity_t* const CapacityPtr) +{ + uint8_t ReturnCode = PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError; + + /* Create a CBW with a SCSI command to issue READ CAPACITY command */ + SCSICommandBlock = (CommandBlockWrapper_t) + { + Header: + { + Signature: CBW_SIGNATURE, + Tag: MassStore_Tag, + DataTransferLength: 8, + Flags: COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_IN, + LUN: LUNIndex, + SCSICommandLength: 10 + }, + + SCSICommandData: + { + SCSI_CMD_READ_CAPACITY_10, + 0x00, // Reserved + 0x00, // MSB of Logical block address + 0x00, + 0x00, + 0x00, // LSB of Logical block address + 0x00, // Reserved + 0x00, // Reserved + 0x00, // Partial Medium Indicator + 0x00 // Unused (control) + } + }; + + /* Send SCSI command to the attached device */ + MassStore_SendCommand(); + + /* Wait until data received from the device */ + if ((ReturnCode = MassStore_WaitForDataReceived()) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError) + { + Pipe_Freeze(); + return ReturnCode; + } + + /* Read the returned capacity data into the buffer */ + if ((ReturnCode = MassStore_SendReceiveData(CapacityPtr)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError) + { + Pipe_Freeze(); + return ReturnCode; + } + + /* Endian-correct the read data */ + CapacityPtr->Blocks = SwapEndian_32(CapacityPtr->Blocks); + CapacityPtr->BlockSize = SwapEndian_32(CapacityPtr->BlockSize); + + /* Read in the returned CSW from the device */ + if ((ReturnCode = MassStore_GetReturnedStatus()) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError) + { + Pipe_Freeze(); + return ReturnCode; + } + + return PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError; +} + +/** Issues a SCSI Device Prevent/Allow Medium Removal command to the attached device, to lock the physical media from + * being removed. This is a legacy command for SCSI disks with removable storage (such as ZIP disks), but should still + * be issued before the first read or write command is sent. + * + * \param LUNIndex Index of the LUN inside the device the command is being addressed to + * \param PreventRemoval Whether or not the LUN media should be locked to prevent removal or not + * + * \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +uint8_t MassStore_PreventAllowMediumRemoval(const uint8_t LUNIndex, const bool PreventRemoval) +{ + uint8_t ReturnCode = PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError; + + /* Create a CBW with a SCSI command to issue PREVENT ALLOW MEDIUM REMOVAL command */ + SCSICommandBlock = (CommandBlockWrapper_t) + { + Header: + { + Signature: CBW_SIGNATURE, + Tag: MassStore_Tag, + DataTransferLength: 0, + Flags: COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_OUT, + LUN: LUNIndex, + SCSICommandLength: 6 + }, + + SCSICommandData: + { + SCSI_CMD_PREVENT_ALLOW_MEDIUM_REMOVAL, + 0x00, // Reserved + 0x00, // Reserved + PreventRemoval, // Prevent flag + 0x00, // Reserved + 0x00 // Unused (control) + } + }; + + /* Send SCSI command to the attached device */ + MassStore_SendCommand(); + + /* Read in the returned CSW from the device */ + if ((ReturnCode = MassStore_GetReturnedStatus()) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError) + { + Pipe_Freeze(); + return ReturnCode; + } + + return PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError; +} diff --git a/Demos/MassStorageHost/MassStoreCommands.h b/Demos/MassStorageHost/MassStoreCommands.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..d3ddfeeb924 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MassStorageHost/MassStoreCommands.h @@ -0,0 +1,176 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for MassStoreCommands.c. + */ + +#ifndef _MASS_STORE_COMMANDS_H_ +#define _MASS_STORE_COMMANDS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + + #include "MassStorageHost.h" + #include "SCSI_Codes.h" + + #include // USB Functionality + + /* Macros: */ + /** Class specific request to reset the Mass Storage interface of the attached device */ + #define REQ_MassStorageReset 0xFF + + /** Class specific request to retrieve the maximum Logical Unit Number (LUN) index of the attached device */ + #define REQ_GetMaxLUN 0xFE + + /** Command Block Wrapper signature byte, for verification of valid CBW blocks */ + #define CBW_SIGNATURE 0x43425355UL + + /** Command Statuc Wrapper signature byte, for verification of valid CSW blocks */ + #define CSW_SIGNATURE 0x53425355UL + + /** Data direction mask for the Flags field of a CBW, indicating Host-to-Device transfer direction */ + #define COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_OUT (0 << 7) + + /** Data direction mask for the Flags field of a CBW, indicating Device-to-Host transfer direction */ + #define COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_IN (1 << 7) + + /** Timeout period between the issuing of a CBW to a device, and the reception of the first packet */ + #define COMMAND_DATA_TIMEOUT_MS 500 + + /** Pipe number of the Mass Storage data IN pipe */ + #define MASS_STORE_DATA_IN_PIPE 1 + + /** Pipe number of the Mass Storage data OUT pipe */ + #define MASS_STORE_DATA_OUT_PIPE 2 + + /* Type defines: */ + /** Type define for a Mass Storage class Command Block Wrapper, used to wrap SCSI + * commands for transport over the USB bulk endpoints to the device. + */ + typedef struct + { + struct + { + uint32_t Signature; /**< Command block signature, always equal to CBW_SIGNATURE */ + uint32_t Tag; /**< Current CBW tag, to positively associate a CBW with a CSW */ + uint32_t DataTransferLength; /**< Length of data to transfer, following the CBW */ + uint8_t Flags; /**< Block flags, equal to one of the COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_* macros */ + uint8_t LUN; /**< Logical Unit Number the CBW is addressed to in the device */ + uint8_t SCSICommandLength; /**< Length of the SCSI command in the CBW */ + } Header; + + uint8_t SCSICommandData[16]; /**< SCSI command to issue to the device */ + } CommandBlockWrapper_t; + + /** Type define for a Mass Storage class Command Status Wrapper, used to wrap SCSI + * responses for transport over the USB bulk endpoints from the device. + */ + typedef struct + { + uint32_t Signature; /**< Command status signature, always equal to CSW_SIGNATURE */ + uint32_t Tag; /**< Current CBW tag, to positively associate a CBW with a CSW */ + uint32_t DataTransferResidue; /**< Length of data not transfered */ + uint8_t Status; /**< Command status, a value from the MassStorageHost_CommandStatusCodes_t enum */ + } CommandStatusWrapper_t; + + /** Type define for a SCSI Sense structure. Structures of this type are filled out by the + * device via the MassStore_RequestSense() function, indicating the current sense data of the + * device (giving explitic error codes for the last issued command). For details of the + * structure contents, refer to the SCSI specifications. + */ + typedef struct + { + unsigned int ReponseCode : 7; + unsigned int Valid : 1; + + uint8_t SegmentNumber; + + unsigned int SenseKey : 4; + unsigned int _RESERVED1 : 1; + unsigned int ILI : 1; + unsigned int EOM : 1; + unsigned int FileMark : 1; + + uint8_t Information[4]; + uint8_t AdditionalLength; + uint8_t CmdSpecificInformation[4]; + uint8_t AdditionalSenseCode; + uint8_t AdditionalSenseQualifier; + uint8_t FieldReplaceableUnitCode; + uint8_t SenseKeySpecific[3]; + } SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t; + + /** SCSI capacity structure, to hold the total capacity of the device in both the number + * of blocks in the current LUN, and the size of each block. This structure is filled by + * the device when the MassStore_ReadCapacity() function is called. + */ + typedef struct + { + uint32_t Blocks; /**< Number of blocks in the addressed LUN of the device */ + uint32_t BlockSize; /**< Number of bytes in each block in the addressed LUN */ + } SCSI_Capacity_t; + + /* Enums: */ + /** CSW status return codes, indicating the overall status of the issued CBW */ + enum MassStorageHost_CommandStatusCodes_t + { + Command_Pass = 0, /**< Command completed successfully */ + Command_Fail = 1, /**< Command failed to complete successfully */ + Phase_Error = 2 /**< Phase error while processing the issued command */ + }; + + /* External Variables: */ + extern CommandStatusWrapper_t SCSICommandStatus; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + #if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_MASSSTORE_COMMANDS_C) + static uint8_t MassStore_SendCommand(void); + static uint8_t MassStore_WaitForDataReceived(void); + static uint8_t MassStore_SendReceiveData(void* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1); + static uint8_t MassStore_GetReturnedStatus(void); + #endif + + uint8_t MassStore_ClearPipeStall(const uint8_t EndpointNum); + uint8_t MassStore_MassStorageReset(void); + uint8_t MassStore_GetMaxLUN(uint8_t* const MaxLUNIndex); + uint8_t MassStore_RequestSense(const uint8_t LUNIndex, const SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t* const SensePtr) + ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2); + uint8_t MassStore_ReadDeviceBlock(const uint8_t LUNIndex, const uint32_t BlockAddress, + const uint8_t Blocks, const uint16_t BlockSize, void* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(5); + uint8_t MassStore_WriteDeviceBlock(const uint8_t LUNIndex, const uint32_t BlockAddress, + const uint8_t Blocks, const uint16_t BlockSize, void* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(5); + uint8_t MassStore_ReadCapacity(const uint8_t LUNIndex, SCSI_Capacity_t* const CapacityPtr) + ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2); + uint8_t MassStore_TestUnitReady(const uint8_t LUNIndex); + uint8_t MassStore_PreventAllowMediumRemoval(const uint8_t LUNIndex, const bool PreventRemoval); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/MassStorageHost/SCSI_Codes.h b/Demos/MassStorageHost/SCSI_Codes.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..2b2213de21c --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MassStorageHost/SCSI_Codes.h @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header containing macros for possible SCSI commands and SENSE data. Refer to + * the SCSI standard documentation for more information on each SCSI command and + * the SENSE data. + */ + +#ifndef _SCSI_CODES_H_ +#define _SCSI_CODES_H_ + + /* Macros: */ + #define SCSI_CMD_INQUIRY 0x12 + #define SCSI_CMD_REQUEST_SENSE 0x03 + #define SCSI_CMD_TEST_UNIT_READY 0x00 + #define SCSI_CMD_READ_CAPACITY_10 0x25 + #define SCSI_CMD_SEND_DIAGNOSTIC 0x1D + #define SCSI_CMD_PREVENT_ALLOW_MEDIUM_REMOVAL 0x1E + #define SCSI_CMD_WRITE_10 0x2A + #define SCSI_CMD_READ_10 0x28 + #define SCSI_CMD_WRITE_6 0x0A + #define SCSI_CMD_READ_6 0x08 + #define SCSI_CMD_VERIFY_10 0x2F + #define SCSI_CMD_MODE_SENSE_6 0x1A + #define SCSI_CMD_MODE_SENSE_10 0x5A + + #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_GOOD 0x00 + #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_RECOVERED_ERROR 0x01 + #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_NOT_READY 0x02 + #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_MEDIUM_ERROR 0x03 + #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_HARDWARE_ERROR 0x04 + #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST 0x05 + #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_UNIT_ATTENTION 0x06 + #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_DATA_PROTECT 0x07 + #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_BLANK_CHECK 0x08 + #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_VENDOR_SPECIFIC 0x09 + #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_COPY_ABORTED 0x0A + #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ABORTED_COMMAND 0x0B + #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_VOLUME_OVERFLOW 0x0D + #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_MISCOMPARE 0x0E + + #define SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION 0x00 + #define SCSI_ASENSE_LOGICAL_UNIT_NOT_READY 0x04 + #define SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB 0x24 + #define SCSI_ASENSE_WRITE_PROTECTED 0x27 + #define SCSI_ASENSE_FORMAT_ERROR 0x31 + #define SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_COMMAND 0x20 + #define SCSI_ASENSE_LOGICAL_BLOCK_ADDRESS_OUT_OF_RANGE 0x21 + #define SCSI_ASENSE_MEDIUM_NOT_PRESENT 0x3A + + #define SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER 0x00 + #define SCSI_ASENSEQ_FORMAT_COMMAND_FAILED 0x01 + #define SCSI_ASENSEQ_INITIALIZING_COMMAND_REQUIRED 0x02 + #define SCSI_ASENSEQ_OPERATION_IN_PROGRESS 0x07 + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/MassStorageHost/makefile b/Demos/MassStorageHost/makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..2379c385612 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MassStorageHost/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,706 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# Denver Gingerich +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb1287 + + +# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# Typical values are: +# F_CPU = 1000000 +# F_CPU = 1843200 +# F_CPU = 2000000 +# F_CPU = 3686400 +# F_CPU = 4000000 +# F_CPU = 7372800 +# F_CPU = 8000000 +# F_CPU = 11059200 +# F_CPU = 14745600 +# F_CPU = 16000000 +# F_CPU = 18432000 +# F_CPU = 20000000 +F_CPU = 8000000 + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = MassStorageHost + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + ConfigDescriptor.c \ + MassStoreCommands.c \ + ../../LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial_Stream.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/ConfigDescriptor.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \ + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = ../../ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS +CDEFS += -DUSB_HOST_ONLY -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)" + + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20 +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd +# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500 +# +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf +MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) ) +FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr ) + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +checkhooks: build + @echo + @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events ------- + @$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \ + cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \ + echo "(None)" + @echo ----- End Unhooked LUFA Events ----- + +checklibmode: + @echo + @echo ----------- Library Mode ----------- + @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \ + | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \ + || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)." + @echo ------------------------------------ + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + copy $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom --debug 1 $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +## Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end + +clean_binary: + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + +clean_list: + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode begin \ +finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \ +clean clean_list clean_binary program debug \ +gdb-config doxygen dfu flip diff --git a/Demos/Mouse/Descriptors.c b/Demos/Mouse/Descriptors.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..dac048b9715 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Mouse/Descriptors.c @@ -0,0 +1,251 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special + * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine + * the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "Descriptors.h" + +/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the + * USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This + * descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding) + * the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for + * more details on HID report descriptors. + */ +USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM MouseReport[] = +{ + 0x05, 0x01, /* Usage Page (Generic Desktop) */ + 0x09, 0x02, /* Usage (Mouse) */ + 0xA1, 0x01, /* Collection (Application) */ + 0x09, 0x01, /* Usage (Pointer) */ + 0xA1, 0x00, /* Collection (Application) */ + 0x95, 0x03, /* Report Count (3) */ + 0x75, 0x01, /* Report Size (1) */ + 0x05, 0x09, /* Usage Page (Button) */ + 0x19, 0x01, /* Usage Minimum (Button 1) */ + 0x29, 0x03, /* Usage Maximum (Button 3) */ + 0x15, 0x00, /* Logical Minimum (0) */ + 0x25, 0x01, /* Logical Maximum (1) */ + 0x81, 0x02, /* Input (Data, Variable, Absolute) */ + 0x95, 0x01, /* Report Count (1) */ + 0x75, 0x05, /* Report Size (5) */ + 0x81, 0x01, /* Input (Constant) */ + 0x75, 0x08, /* Report Size (8) */ + 0x95, 0x02, /* Report Count (2) */ + 0x05, 0x01, /* Usage Page (Generic Desktop Control) */ + 0x09, 0x30, /* Usage X */ + 0x09, 0x31, /* Usage Y */ + 0x15, 0x81, /* Logical Minimum (-127) */ + 0x25, 0x7F, /* Logical Maximum (127) */ + 0x81, 0x06, /* Input (Data, Variable, Relative) */ + 0xC0, /* End Collection */ + 0xC0 /* End Collection */ +}; + +/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall + * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the + * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration + * process begins. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor = +{ + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), Type: DTYPE_Device}, + + USBSpecification: VERSION_BCD(01.10), + Class: 0x00, + SubClass: 0x00, + Protocol: 0x00, + + Endpoint0Size: 8, + + VendorID: 0x03EB, + ProductID: 0x2041, + ReleaseNumber: 0x0000, + + ManufacturerStrIndex: 0x01, + ProductStrIndex: 0x02, + SerialNumStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + NumberOfConfigurations: 1 +}; + +/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage + * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces + * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting + * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor = +{ + Config: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), Type: DTYPE_Configuration}, + + TotalConfigurationSize: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t), + TotalInterfaces: 1, + + ConfigurationNumber: 1, + ConfigurationStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + ConfigAttributes: (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED), + + MaxPowerConsumption: USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100) + }, + + Interface: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface}, + + InterfaceNumber: 0x00, + AlternateSetting: 0x00, + + TotalEndpoints: 1, + + Class: 0x03, + SubClass: 0x02, + Protocol: 0x01, + + InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + MouseHID: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t), Type: DTYPE_HID}, + + HIDSpec: VERSION_BCD(01.11), + CountryCode: 0x00, + TotalHIDReports: 0x01, + HIDReportType: DTYPE_Report, + HIDReportLength: sizeof(MouseReport) + }, + + MouseEndpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | MOUSE_EPNUM), + Attributes: EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + EndpointSize: MOUSE_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0x02 + } +}; + +/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests + * the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate + * via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(1), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG} +}; + +/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable + * form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(11), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"Dean Camera" +}; + +/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form, + * and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(15), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"LUFA Mouse Demo" +}; + +/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see StdDescriptors.h + * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given + * to the USB library. When the device recieves a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function + * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the + * USB host. + */ +uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) +{ + const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8); + const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF); + + void* Address = NULL; + uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR; + + switch (DescriptorType) + { + case DTYPE_Device: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(DeviceDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Configuration: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t); + break; + case DTYPE_String: + switch (DescriptorNumber) + { + case 0x00: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(LanguageString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x01: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ManufacturerString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x02: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ProductString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size); + break; + } + + break; + case DTYPE_HID: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor.MouseHID); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Report: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(MouseReport); + Size = sizeof(MouseReport); + break; + } + + *DescriptorAddress = Address; + return Size; +} + diff --git a/Demos/Mouse/Descriptors.h b/Demos/Mouse/Descriptors.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..1fcee72128e --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Mouse/Descriptors.h @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Descriptors.c. + */ + +#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_ +#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + + #include + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the HID class specific HID descriptor, to describe the HID device's specifications. Refer to the HID + * specification for details on the structure elements. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; + + uint16_t HIDSpec; + uint8_t CountryCode; + + uint8_t TotalHIDReports; + + uint8_t HIDReportType; + uint16_t HIDReportLength; + } USB_Descriptor_HID_t; + + /** Type define for the data type used to store HID report descriptor elements. */ + typedef uint8_t USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t; + + /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the + * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which + * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config; + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t Interface; + USB_Descriptor_HID_t MouseHID; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t MouseEndpoint; + } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t; + + /* Macros: */ + /** Endpoint number of the Mouse HID reporting IN endpoint. */ + #define MOUSE_EPNUM 1 + + /** Size in bytes of the Mouse HID reporting IN endpoint. */ + #define MOUSE_EPSIZE 8 + + /** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID descriptor. */ + #define DTYPE_HID 0x21 + + /** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID report descriptor. */ + #define DTYPE_Report 0x22 + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) + ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/Mouse/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Mouse/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..62c4db1106a --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Mouse/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Mouse Device Demo" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek, +# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish, +# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene, +# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command , where is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command , where +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Namespace. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file . + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are +# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values +# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list; +# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which +# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous +# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE +# respectively. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin" + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to the search engine +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be +# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO diff --git a/Demos/Mouse/Mouse.aps b/Demos/Mouse/Mouse.aps new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..3ae163797fd --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Mouse/Mouse.aps @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +Mouse30-Sep-2008 14:13:5230-Sep-2008 14:14:08241030-Sep-2008 14:13:5244, 14, 0, 589AVR GCCC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\Mouse\JTAGICE mkIIAT90USB1287.xmlfalseR00R01R02R03R04R05R06R07R08R09R10R11R12R13R14R15R16R17R18R19R20R21R22R23R24R25R26R27R28R29R30R31Auto000Descriptors.cMouse.cDescriptors.hMouse.hmakefiledefaultYESmakefileat90usb1287111Mouse.elfdefault\1-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enumsdefault1C:\WinAVR-20080512\bin\avr-gcc.exeC:\WinAVR-20080512\utils\bin\make.exe diff --git a/Demos/Mouse/Mouse.c b/Demos/Mouse/Mouse.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..9080efba34e --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Mouse/Mouse.c @@ -0,0 +1,376 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the Mouse demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and + * is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + +#include "Mouse.h" + +/* Project Tags, for reading out using the ButtLoad project */ +BUTTLOADTAG(ProjName, "LUFA Mouse App"); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildTime, __TIME__); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildDate, __DATE__); +BUTTLOADTAG(LUFAVersion, "LUFA V" LUFA_VERSION_STRING); + +/* Scheduler Task List */ +TASK_LIST +{ + { Task: USB_USBTask , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, + { Task: USB_Mouse_Report , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, +}; + +/* Global Variables */ +/** Indicates what report mode the host has requested, true for normal HID reporting mode, false for special boot + * protocol reporting mode. + */ +bool UsingReportProtocol = true; + +/** Current Idle period. This is set by the host via a Set Idle HID class request to silence the device's reports + * for either the entire idle duration, or until the report status changes (e.g. the user moves the mouse). + */ +uint8_t IdleCount = 0; + +/** Current Idle period remaining. When the IdleCount value is set, this tracks the remaining number of idle + * milliseconds. This is seperate to the IdleCount timer and is incremented and compared as the host may request + * the current idle period via a Get Idle HID class request, thus its value must be preserved. + */ +uint16_t IdleMSRemaining = 0; + + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then + * starts the scheduler to run the application tasks. + */ +int main(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable Clock Division */ + SetSystemClockPrescaler(0); + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + Joystick_Init(); + LEDs_Init(); + HWB_Init(); + + /* Millisecond timer initialization, with output compare interrupt enabled for the idle timing */ + OCR0A = 0x7D; + TCCR0A = (1 << WGM01); + TCCR0B = ((1 << CS01) | (1 << CS00)); + TIMSK0 = (1 << OCIE0A); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); + + /* Initialize Scheduler so that it can be used */ + Scheduler_Init(); + + /* Initialize USB Subsystem */ + USB_Init(); + + /* Scheduling - routine never returns, so put this last in the main function */ + Scheduler_Start(); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs and + * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Connect) +{ + /* Start USB management task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_RUN); + + /* Indicate USB enumerating */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBEnumerating); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via + * the status LEDs and stops the USB management and Mouse reporting tasks. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Disconnect) +{ + /* Stop running mouse reporting and USB management tasks */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_Mouse_Report, TASK_STOP); + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_STOP); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host sets the current configuration + * of the USB device after enumeration - the device endpoints are configured and the mouse reporting task started. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_ConfigurationChanged) +{ + /* Setup Mouse Report Endpoint */ + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(MOUSE_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, MOUSE_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + /* Indicate USB connected and ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady); + + /* Default to report protocol on connect */ + UsingReportProtocol = true; + + /* Start running mouse reporting task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_Mouse_Report, TASK_RUN); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event. This is used to catch standard and class specific + * control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the HID commands, which are + * all issued via the control endpoint), so that they can be handled appropriately for the application. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_UnhandledControlPacket) +{ + /* Handle HID Class specific requests */ + switch (bRequest) + { + case REQ_GetReport: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + USB_MouseReport_Data_t MouseReportData; + + /* Create the next mouse report for transmission to the host */ + GetNextReport(&MouseReportData); + + /* Ignore report type and ID number value */ + Endpoint_Discard_Word(); + + /* Ignore unused Interface number value */ + Endpoint_Discard_Word(); + + /* Read in the number of bytes in the report to send to the host */ + uint16_t wLength = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(); + + /* If trying to send more bytes than exist to the host, clamp the value at the report size */ + if (wLength > sizeof(MouseReportData)) + wLength = sizeof(MouseReportData); + + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Write the report data to the control endpoint */ + Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(&MouseReportData, wLength); + + /* Clear the report data afterwards */ + memset(&MouseReportData, 0, sizeof(MouseReportData)); + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet or clear the host abort */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT(); + } + + break; + case REQ_GetProtocol: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Write the current protocol flag to the host */ + Endpoint_Write_Byte(UsingReportProtocol); + + /* Send the flag to the host */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + case REQ_SetProtocol: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + /* Read in the wValue parameter containing the new protocol mode */ + uint16_t wValue = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(); + + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Set or clear the flag depending on what the host indicates that the current Protocol should be */ + UsingReportProtocol = (wValue != 0x0000); + + /* Send an empty packet to acknowedge the command */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + case REQ_SetIdle: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + /* Read in the wValue parameter containing the idle period */ + uint16_t wValue = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(); + + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Get idle period in MSB */ + IdleCount = (wValue >> 8); + + /* Send an empty packet to acknowedge the command */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + case REQ_GetIdle: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Write the current idle duration to the host */ + Endpoint_Write_Byte(IdleCount); + + /* Send the flag to the host */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + } +} + +/** ISR for the timer 0 compare vector. This ISR fires once each millisecond, and increments the + * scheduler elapsed idle period counter when the host has set an idle period. + */ +ISR(TIMER0_COMPA_vect, ISR_BLOCK) +{ + /* One millisecond has elapsed, decrement the idle time remaining counter if it has not already elapsed */ + if (IdleMSRemaining) + IdleMSRemaining--; +} + +/** Fills the given HID report data structure with the next HID report to send to the host. + * + * \param ReportData Pointer to a HID report data structure to be filled + * + * \return Boolean true if the new report differs from the last report, false otherwise + */ +bool GetNextReport(USB_MouseReport_Data_t* ReportData) +{ + static uint8_t PrevJoyStatus = 0; + static bool PrevHWBStatus = false; + uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL = Joystick_GetStatus(); + bool InputChanged = false; + + /* Clear the report contents */ + memset(ReportData, 0, sizeof(USB_MouseReport_Data_t)); + + if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP) + ReportData->Y = -1; + else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN) + ReportData->Y = 1; + + if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT) + ReportData->X = 1; + else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT) + ReportData->X = -1; + + if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS) + ReportData->Button = (1 << 0); + + if (HWB_GetStatus()) + ReportData->Button |= (1 << 1); + + /* Check if the new report is different to the previous report */ + InputChanged = ((uint8_t)(PrevJoyStatus ^ JoyStatus_LCL) | (uint8_t)(HWB_GetStatus() ^ PrevHWBStatus)); + + /* Save the current joystick and HWB status for later comparison */ + PrevJoyStatus = JoyStatus_LCL; + PrevHWBStatus = HWB_GetStatus(); + + /* Return whether the new report is different to the previous report or not */ + return InputChanged; +} + +/** Function to manage status updates to the user. This is done via LEDs on the given board, if available, but may be changed to + * log to a serial port, or anything else that is suitable for status updates. + * + * \param CurrentStatus Current status of the system, from the Mouse_StatusCodes_t enum + */ +void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus) +{ + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS; + + /* Set the LED mask to the appropriate LED mask based on the given status code */ + switch (CurrentStatus) + { + case Status_USBNotReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1); + break; + case Status_USBEnumerating: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2); + break; + case Status_USBReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4); + break; + } + + /* Set the board LEDs to the new LED mask */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); +} + +/** Task to manage HID report generation and transmission to the host, when in report mode. */ +TASK(USB_Mouse_Report) +{ + USB_MouseReport_Data_t MouseReportData; + bool SendReport = true; + + /* Create the next mouse report for transmission to the host */ + GetNextReport(&MouseReportData); + + /* Check if the idle period is set*/ + if (IdleCount) + { + /* Determine if the idle period has elapsed */ + if (!(IdleMSRemaining)) + { + /* Reset the idle time remaining counter, must multiply by 4 to get the duration in milliseconds */ + IdleMSRemaining = (IdleCount << 2); + } + else + { + /* Idle period not elapsed, indicate that a report must not be sent */ + SendReport = false; + } + } + + /* Check if the USB system is connected to a host */ + if (USB_IsConnected) + { + /* Select the Mouse Report Endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MOUSE_EPNUM); + + /* Check if Mouse Endpoint Ready for Read/Write and if we should send a new report */ + if (Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed() && SendReport) + { + /* Write Mouse Report Data */ + Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&MouseReportData, sizeof(MouseReportData)); + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + } + } +} diff --git a/Demos/Mouse/Mouse.h b/Demos/Mouse/Mouse.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..1c7b5888da7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Mouse/Mouse.h @@ -0,0 +1,115 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Mouse.c. + */ + +#ifndef _MOUSE_H_ +#define _MOUSE_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + #include + #include + + #include "Descriptors.h" + + #include // Library Version Information + #include // PROGMEM tags readable by the ButtLoad project + #include // USB Functionality + #include // Joystick driver + #include // LEDs driver + #include // Hardware Button driver + #include // Simple scheduler for task management + + /* Task Definitions: */ + TASK(USB_Mouse_Report); + + /* Macros: */ + /** HID Class specific request to get the next HID report from the device. */ + #define REQ_GetReport 0x01 + + /** HID Class specific request to get the idle timeout period of the device. */ + #define REQ_GetIdle 0x02 + + /** HID Class specific request to send the next HID report to the device. */ + #define REQ_SetReport 0x09 + + /** HID Class specific request to set the idle timeout period of the device. */ + #define REQ_SetIdle 0x0A + + /** HID Class specific request to get the current HID protocol in use, either report or boot. */ + #define REQ_GetProtocol 0x03 + + /** HID Class specific request to set the current HID protocol in use, either report or boot. */ + #define REQ_SetProtocol 0x0B + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the mouse HID report structure, for creating and sending HID reports to the host PC. + * This mirrors the layout described to the host in the HID report descriptor, in Descriptors.c. + */ + typedef struct + { + uint8_t Button; /**< Bit mask of the currently pressed mouse buttons */ + int8_t X; /**< Current mouse delta X movement, as a signed 8-bit integer */ + int8_t Y; /**< Current mouse delta Y movement, as a signed 8-bit integer */ + } USB_MouseReport_Data_t; + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible status codes for passing to the UpdateStatus() function. */ + enum Mouse_StatusCodes_t + { + Status_USBNotReady = 0, /**< USB is not ready (disconnected from a USB host) */ + Status_USBEnumerating = 1, /**< USB interface is enumerating */ + Status_USBReady = 2, /**< USB interface is connected and ready */ + }; + + /* Event Handlers: */ + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Connect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Connect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Disconnect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Disconnect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_ConfigurationChanged event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_ConfigurationChanged); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_UnhandledControlPacket); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + bool GetNextReport(USB_MouseReport_Data_t* ReportData); + void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/Mouse/Mouse.txt b/Demos/Mouse/Mouse.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..7b7360f0ead --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Mouse/Mouse.txt @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage Mouse Device Demo + * + * Mouse demonstration application. This gives a simple reference + * application for implementing a USB Mouse using the basic USB HID + * drivers in all modern OSes (i.e. no special drivers required). It is + * boot protocol compatible, and thus works under compatible BIOS as if + * it was a native mouse (e.g. PS/2). + * + * On startup the system will automatically enumerate and function + * as a mouse when the USB connection to a host is present. To use + * the mouse, move the joystick to move the pointer, and push the + * joystick inwards to simulate a left-button click. The HWB serves as + * the right mouse button. + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + *
USB Mode:Device
USB Class:Human Interface Device (HID)
USB Subclass:N/A
Relevant Standards:USBIF HID Specification, USBIF HID Usage Tables
Usable Speeds:Low Speed Mode, Full Speed Mode
+ */ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Demos/Mouse/makefile b/Demos/Mouse/makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..329423f5ddb --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Mouse/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,703 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# Denver Gingerich +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb1287 + + +# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# Typical values are: +# F_CPU = 1000000 +# F_CPU = 1843200 +# F_CPU = 2000000 +# F_CPU = 3686400 +# F_CPU = 4000000 +# F_CPU = 7372800 +# F_CPU = 8000000 +# F_CPU = 11059200 +# F_CPU = 14745600 +# F_CPU = 16000000 +# F_CPU = 18432000 +# F_CPU = 20000000 +F_CPU = 8000000 + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = Mouse + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + Descriptors.c \ + ../../LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.c \ + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = ../../ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS +CDEFS += -DUSB_DEVICE_ONLY -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)" + + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20 +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CFLAGS += -mshort-calls +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd +# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500 +# +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf +MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) ) +FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr ) + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +checkhooks: build + @echo + @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events ------- + @$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \ + cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \ + echo "(None)" + @echo ----- End Unhooked LUFA Events ----- + +checklibmode: + @echo + @echo ----------- Library Mode ----------- + @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \ + | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \ + || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)." + @echo ------------------------------------ + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + copy $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom --debug 1 $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end + +clean_binary: + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + +clean_list: + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode begin \ +finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \ +clean clean_list clean_binary program debug \ +gdb-config doxygen dfu flip diff --git a/Demos/MouseFullInt/Descriptors.c b/Demos/MouseFullInt/Descriptors.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..6a139bc9447 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MouseFullInt/Descriptors.c @@ -0,0 +1,250 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special + * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine + * the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "Descriptors.h" + +/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the + * USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This + * descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding) + * the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for + * more details on HID report descriptors. + */ +USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM MouseReport[] = +{ + 0x05, 0x01, /* Usage Page (Generic Desktop) */ + 0x09, 0x02, /* Usage (Mouse) */ + 0xA1, 0x01, /* Collection (Application) */ + 0x09, 0x01, /* Usage (Pointer) */ + 0xA1, 0x00, /* Collection (Application) */ + 0x95, 0x03, /* Report Count (3) */ + 0x75, 0x01, /* Report Size (1) */ + 0x05, 0x09, /* Usage Page (Button) */ + 0x19, 0x01, /* Usage Minimum (Button 1) */ + 0x29, 0x03, /* Usage Maximum (Button 3) */ + 0x15, 0x00, /* Logical Minimum (0) */ + 0x25, 0x01, /* Logical Maximum (1) */ + 0x81, 0x02, /* Input (Data, Variable, Absolute) */ + 0x95, 0x01, /* Report Count (1) */ + 0x75, 0x05, /* Report Size (5) */ + 0x81, 0x01, /* Input (Constant) */ + 0x75, 0x08, /* Report Size (8) */ + 0x95, 0x02, /* Report Count (2) */ + 0x05, 0x01, /* Usage Page (Generic Desktop Control) */ + 0x09, 0x30, /* Usage X */ + 0x09, 0x31, /* Usage Y */ + 0x15, 0x81, /* Logical Minimum (-127) */ + 0x25, 0x7F, /* Logical Maximum (127) */ + 0x81, 0x06, /* Input (Data, Variable, Relative) */ + 0xC0, /* End Collection */ + 0xC0 /* End Collection */ +}; + +/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall + * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the + * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration + * process begins. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor = +{ + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), Type: DTYPE_Device}, + + USBSpecification: VERSION_BCD(01.10), + Class: 0x00, + SubClass: 0x00, + Protocol: 0x00, + + Endpoint0Size: 8, + + VendorID: 0x03EB, + ProductID: 0x2041, + ReleaseNumber: 0x0000, + + ManufacturerStrIndex: 0x01, + ProductStrIndex: 0x02, + SerialNumStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + NumberOfConfigurations: 1 +}; + +/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage + * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces + * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting + * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor = +{ + Config: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), Type: DTYPE_Configuration}, + + TotalConfigurationSize: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t), + TotalInterfaces: 1, + + ConfigurationNumber: 1, + ConfigurationStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + ConfigAttributes: (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED), + + MaxPowerConsumption: USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100) + }, + + Interface: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface}, + + InterfaceNumber: 0x00, + AlternateSetting: 0x00, + + TotalEndpoints: 1, + + Class: 0x03, + SubClass: 0x01, + Protocol: 0x02, + + InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + MouseHID: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t), Type: DTYPE_HID}, + + HIDSpec: VERSION_BCD(01.11), + CountryCode: 0x00, + TotalHIDReports: 0x01, + HIDReportType: DTYPE_Report, + HIDReportLength: sizeof(MouseReport) + }, + + MouseEndpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | MOUSE_EPNUM), + Attributes: EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + EndpointSize: MOUSE_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0x02 + } +}; + +/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests + * the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate + * via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(1), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG} +}; + +/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable + * form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(11), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"Dean Camera" +}; + +/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form, + * and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(15), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"LUFA Mouse Demo" +}; + +/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see StdDescriptors.h + * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given + * to the USB library. When the device recieves a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function + * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the + * USB host. + */ +uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) +{ + const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8); + const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF); + + void* Address = NULL; + uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR; + + switch (DescriptorType) + { + case DTYPE_Device: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(DeviceDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Configuration: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t); + break; + case DTYPE_String: + switch (DescriptorNumber) + { + case 0x00: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(LanguageString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x01: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ManufacturerString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x02: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ProductString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size); + break; + } + + break; + case DTYPE_HID: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor.MouseHID); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Report: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(MouseReport); + Size = sizeof(MouseReport); + break; + } + + *DescriptorAddress = Address; + return Size; +} diff --git a/Demos/MouseFullInt/Descriptors.h b/Demos/MouseFullInt/Descriptors.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..3aea3164c1f --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MouseFullInt/Descriptors.h @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Descriptors.c. + */ + +#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_ +#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + + #include + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the HID class specific HID descriptor, to describe the HID device's specifications. Refer to the HID + * specification for details on the structure elements. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; + + uint16_t HIDSpec; + uint8_t CountryCode; + + uint8_t TotalHIDReports; + + uint8_t HIDReportType; + uint16_t HIDReportLength; + } USB_Descriptor_HID_t; + + /** Type define for the data type used to store HID report descriptor elements. */ + typedef uint8_t USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t; + + /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the + * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which + * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config; + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t Interface; + USB_Descriptor_HID_t MouseHID; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t MouseEndpoint; + } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t; + + /* Macros: */ + /** Endpoint number of the Mouse HID reporting IN endpoint. */ + #define MOUSE_EPNUM 1 + + /** Size in bytes of the Mouse HID reporting IN endpoint. */ + #define MOUSE_EPSIZE 8 + + /** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID descriptor. */ + #define DTYPE_HID 0x21 + + /** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID report descriptor. */ + #define DTYPE_Report 0x22 + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) + ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/MouseFullInt/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/MouseFullInt/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..1ebd12da752 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MouseFullInt/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Mouse Device Demo (Fully Interrupt Driven)" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek, +# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish, +# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene, +# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command , where is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command , where +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Namespace. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file . + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are +# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values +# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list; +# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which +# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous +# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE +# respectively. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin" + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to the search engine +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be +# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO diff --git a/Demos/MouseFullInt/MouseFullInt.aps b/Demos/MouseFullInt/MouseFullInt.aps new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..ff9750a4cf0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MouseFullInt/MouseFullInt.aps @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +MouseFullInt30-Sep-2008 14:14:2530-Sep-2008 14:14:39241030-Sep-2008 14:14:2544, 14, 0, 589AVR GCCC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\MouseFullInt\falseR00R01R02R03R04R05R06R07R08R09R10R11R12R13R14R15R16R17R18R19R20R21R22R23R24R25R26R27R28R29R30R31Auto000Descriptors.cMouseFullInt.cDescriptors.hMouseFullInt.hmakefiledefaultYESmakefileatmega128111MouseFullInt.elfdefault\1-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enumsdefault1C:\WinAVR-20080512\bin\avr-gcc.exeC:\WinAVR-20080512\utils\bin\make.exe diff --git a/Demos/MouseFullInt/MouseFullInt.c b/Demos/MouseFullInt/MouseFullInt.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..c21959a2c81 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MouseFullInt/MouseFullInt.c @@ -0,0 +1,399 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the MouseFullInt demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and + * is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + +#include "MouseFullInt.h" + +/* Project Tags, for reading out using the ButtLoad project */ +BUTTLOADTAG(ProjName, "LUFA MouseFI App"); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildTime, __TIME__); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildDate, __DATE__); +BUTTLOADTAG(LUFAVersion, "LUFA V" LUFA_VERSION_STRING); + +/* Global Variables */ +/** Indicates what report mode the host has requested, true for normal HID reporting mode, false for special boot + * protocol reporting mode. + */ +bool UsingReportProtocol = true; + +/** Current Idle period. This is set by the host via a Set Idle HID class request to silence the device's reports + * for either the entire idle duration, or until the report status changes (e.g. the user moves the mouse). + */ +uint8_t IdleCount = 0; + +/** Current Idle period remaining. When the IdleCount value is set, this tracks the remaining number of idle + * milliseconds. This is seperate to the IdleCount timer and is incremented and compared as the host may request + * the current idle period via a Get Idle HID class request, thus its value must be preserved. + */ +uint16_t IdleMSRemaining = 0; + + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then + * starts the scheduler to run the USB management task. + */ +int main(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable Clock Division */ + SetSystemClockPrescaler(0); + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + Joystick_Init(); + LEDs_Init(); + HWB_Init(); + + /* Millisecond timer initialization, with output compare interrupt enabled for the idle timing */ + OCR0A = 0x7D; + TCCR0A = (1 << WGM01); + TCCR0B = ((1 << CS01) | (1 << CS00)); + TIMSK0 = (1 << OCIE0A); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); + + /* Initialize USB Subsystem */ + USB_Init(); + + /* Main program code loop */ + for (;;) + { + /* No main code -- all USB code is interrupt driven */ + } +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs and + * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Connect) +{ + /* Indicate USB enumerating */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBEnumerating); + + /* Default to report protocol on connect */ + UsingReportProtocol = true; +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Reset event. This fires when the USB interface is reset by the USB host, before the + * enumeration process begins, and enables the control endpoint interrupt so that control requests can be handled + * asynchronously when they arrive rather than when the control endpoint is polled manually. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Reset) +{ + /* Select the control endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP); + + /* Enable the endpoint SETUP interrupt ISR for the control endpoint */ + USB_INT_Enable(ENDPOINT_INT_SETUP); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via + * the status LEDs. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Disconnect) +{ + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host sets the current configuration + * of the USB device after enumeration, and configures the mouse device endpoints. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_ConfigurationChanged) +{ + /* Setup Mouse Report Endpoint */ + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(MOUSE_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, MOUSE_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + /* Enable the endpoint IN interrupt ISR for the report endpoint */ + USB_INT_Enable(ENDPOINT_INT_IN); + + /* Indicate USB connected and ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event. This is used to catch standard and class specific + * control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the HID commands, which are + * all issued via the control endpoint), so that they can be handled appropriately for the application. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_UnhandledControlPacket) +{ + /* Handle HID Class specific requests */ + switch (bRequest) + { + case REQ_GetReport: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + USB_MouseReport_Data_t MouseReportData; + + /* Create the next mouse report for transmission to the host */ + GetNextReport(&MouseReportData); + + /* Ignore report type and ID number value */ + Endpoint_Discard_Word(); + + /* Ignore unused Interface number value */ + Endpoint_Discard_Word(); + + /* Read in the number of bytes in the report to send to the host */ + uint16_t wLength = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(); + + /* If trying to send more bytes than exist to the host, clamp the value at the report size */ + if (wLength > sizeof(MouseReportData)) + wLength = sizeof(MouseReportData); + + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Write the report data to the control endpoint */ + Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(&MouseReportData, wLength); + + /* Clear the report data afterwards */ + memset(&MouseReportData, 0, sizeof(MouseReportData)); + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet or clear the host abort */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT(); + } + + break; + case REQ_GetProtocol: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Write the current protocol flag to the host */ + Endpoint_Write_Byte(UsingReportProtocol); + + /* Send the flag to the host */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + case REQ_SetProtocol: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + /* Read in the wValue parameter containing the new protocol mode */ + uint16_t wValue = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(); + + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Set or clear the flag depending on what the host indicates that the current Protocol should be */ + UsingReportProtocol = (wValue != 0x0000); + + /* Send an empty packet to acknowedge the command */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + case REQ_SetIdle: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + /* Read in the wValue parameter containing the idle period */ + uint16_t wValue = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(); + + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Get idle period in MSB */ + IdleCount = (wValue >> 8); + + /* Send an empty packet to acknowedge the command */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + case REQ_GetIdle: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Write the current idle duration to the host */ + Endpoint_Write_Byte(IdleCount); + + /* Send the flag to the host */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + } +} + +/** ISR for the timer 0 compare vector. This ISR fires once each millisecond, and increments the + * scheduler elapsed idle period counter when the host has set an idle period. + */ +ISR(TIMER0_COMPA_vect, ISR_BLOCK) +{ + /* One millisecond has elapsed, decrement the idle time remaining counter if it has not already elapsed */ + if (IdleMSRemaining) + IdleMSRemaining--; +} + +/** Fills the given HID report data structure with the next HID report to send to the host. + * + * \param ReportData Pointer to a HID report data structure to be filled + * + * \return Boolean true if the new report differs from the last report, false otherwise + */ +bool GetNextReport(USB_MouseReport_Data_t* ReportData) +{ + static uint8_t PrevJoyStatus = 0; + static bool PrevHWBStatus = false; + uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL = Joystick_GetStatus(); + bool InputChanged = false; + + /* Clear the report contents */ + memset(ReportData, 0, sizeof(USB_MouseReport_Data_t)); + + if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP) + ReportData->Y = -1; + else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN) + ReportData->Y = 1; + + if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT) + ReportData->X = 1; + else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT) + ReportData->X = -1; + + if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS) + ReportData->Button = (1 << 0); + + if (HWB_GetStatus()) + ReportData->Button |= (1 << 1); + + /* Check if the new report is different to the previous report */ + InputChanged = ((uint8_t)(PrevJoyStatus ^ JoyStatus_LCL) | (uint8_t)(HWB_GetStatus() ^ PrevHWBStatus)); + + /* Save the current joystick and HWB status for later comparison */ + PrevJoyStatus = JoyStatus_LCL; + PrevHWBStatus = HWB_GetStatus(); + + /* Return whether the new report is different to the previous report or not */ + return InputChanged; +} + +/** Function to manage status updates to the user. This is done via LEDs on the given board, if available, but may be changed to + * log to a serial port, or anything else that is suitable for status updates. + * + * \param CurrentStatus Current status of the system, from the MouseFullInt_StatusCodes_t enum + */ +void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus) +{ + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS; + + /* Set the LED mask to the appropriate LED mask based on the given status code */ + switch (CurrentStatus) + { + case Status_USBNotReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1); + break; + case Status_USBEnumerating: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2); + break; + case Status_USBReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4); + break; + } + + /* Set the board LEDs to the new LED mask */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); +} + +/** ISR for the general Pipe/Endpoint interrupt vector. This ISR fires when an endpoint's status changes (such as + * a packet has been received) on an endpoint with its corresponding ISR enabling bits set. This is used to send + * HID packets to the host each time the HID interrupt endpoints polling period elapses, as managed by the USB + * controller. It is also used to respond to standard and class specific requests send to the device on the control + * endpoint, by handing them off to the LUFA library when they are received. + */ +ISR(ENDPOINT_PIPE_vect, ISR_BLOCK) +{ + /* Check if the control endpoint has received a request */ + if (Endpoint_HasEndpointInterrupted(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP)) + { + /* Clear the endpoint interrupt */ + Endpoint_ClearEndpointInterrupt(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP); + + /* Process the control request */ + USB_USBTask(); + + /* Handshake the endpoint setup interrupt - must be after the call to USB_USBTask() */ + USB_INT_Clear(ENDPOINT_INT_SETUP); + } + + /* Check if mouse endpoint has interrupted */ + if (Endpoint_HasEndpointInterrupted(MOUSE_EPNUM)) + { + USB_MouseReport_Data_t MouseReportData; + bool SendReport = true; + + /* Create the next mouse report for transmission to the host */ + GetNextReport(&MouseReportData); + + /* Check if the idle period is set*/ + if (IdleCount) + { + /* Determine if the idle period has elapsed */ + if (!(IdleMSRemaining)) + { + /* Reset the idle time remaining counter, must multiply by 4 to get the duration in milliseconds */ + IdleMSRemaining = (IdleCount << 2); + } + else + { + /* Idle period not elapsed, indicate that a report must not be sent */ + SendReport = false; + } + } + + /* Check to see if a report should be issued */ + if (SendReport) + { + /* Select the Mouse Report Endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MOUSE_EPNUM); + + /* Clear the endpoint IN interrupt flag */ + USB_INT_Clear(ENDPOINT_INT_IN); + + /* Clear the Mouse Report endpoint interrupt and select the endpoint */ + Endpoint_ClearEndpointInterrupt(MOUSE_EPNUM); + + /* Write Mouse Report Data */ + Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&MouseReportData, sizeof(MouseReportData)); + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + } + } +} diff --git a/Demos/MouseFullInt/MouseFullInt.h b/Demos/MouseFullInt/MouseFullInt.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..9fdc51d3bc4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MouseFullInt/MouseFullInt.h @@ -0,0 +1,114 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for MouseFullInt.c. + */ + +#ifndef _MOUSE_H_ +#define _MOUSE_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + #include + #include + + #include "Descriptors.h" + + #include // Library Version Information + #include // PROGMEM tags readable by the ButtLoad project + #include // USB Functionality + #include // Joystick driver + #include // LEDs driver + #include // Hardware Button driver + + /* Macros: */ + /** HID Class specific request to get the next HID report from the device. */ + #define REQ_GetReport 0x01 + + /** HID Class specific request to get the idle timeout period of the device. */ + #define REQ_GetIdle 0x02 + + /** HID Class specific request to send the next HID report to the device. */ + #define REQ_SetReport 0x09 + + /** HID Class specific request to set the idle timeout period of the device. */ + #define REQ_SetIdle 0x0A + + /** HID Class specific request to get the current HID protocol in use, either report or boot. */ + #define REQ_GetProtocol 0x03 + + /** HID Class specific request to set the current HID protocol in use, either report or boot. */ + #define REQ_SetProtocol 0x0B + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the mouse HID report structure, for creating and sending HID reports to the host PC. + * This mirrors the layout described to the host in the HID report descriptor, in Descriptors.c. + */ + typedef struct + { + uint8_t Button; /**< Bit mask of the currently pressed mouse buttons */ + int8_t X; /**< Current mouse delta X movement, as a signed 8-bit integer */ + int8_t Y; /**< Current mouse delta Y movement, as a signed 8-bit integer */ + } USB_MouseReport_Data_t; + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible status codes for passing to the UpdateStatus() function. */ + enum MouseFullInt_StatusCodes_t + { + Status_USBNotReady = 0, /**< USB is not ready (disconnected from a USB host) */ + Status_USBEnumerating = 1, /**< USB interface is enumerating */ + Status_USBReady = 2, /**< USB interface is connected and ready */ + }; + + /* Event Handlers: */ + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Connect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Connect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Disconnect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Disconnect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Reset event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Reset); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_ConfigurationChanged event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_ConfigurationChanged); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_UnhandledControlPacket); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + bool GetNextReport(USB_MouseReport_Data_t* ReportData); + void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/MouseFullInt/MouseFullInt.txt b/Demos/MouseFullInt/MouseFullInt.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..460a8dd7dfc --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MouseFullInt/MouseFullInt.txt @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage Fully Interrupt Driven Mouse Device Demo + * + * Mouse demonstration application, using endpoint interrupts for the + * exchange of data to the USB host, and control requests on the control + * endpoint. This gives a simple reference application for implementing a + * USB Mouse using the basic USB HID drivers in all modern OSes (i.e. no + * special drivers required). It is boot protocol compatible, and thus works + * under compatible BIOS as if it was a native mouse (e.g. PS/2). + * + * On startup the system will automatically enumerate and function + * as a mouse when the USB connection to a host is present. To use + * the mouse, move the joystick to move the pointer, and push the + * joystick inwards to simulate a left-button click. The HWB serves as + * the right mouse button. + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + *
USB Mode:Device
USB Class:Human Interface Device (HID)
USB Subclass:N/A
Relevant Standards:USBIF HID Specification, USBIF HID Usage Tables
Usable Speeds:Low Speed Mode, Full Speed Mode
+ */ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Demos/MouseFullInt/makefile b/Demos/MouseFullInt/makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..317fc315d07 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MouseFullInt/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,703 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# Denver Gingerich +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb1287 + + +# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# Typical values are: +# F_CPU = 1000000 +# F_CPU = 1843200 +# F_CPU = 2000000 +# F_CPU = 3686400 +# F_CPU = 4000000 +# F_CPU = 7372800 +# F_CPU = 8000000 +# F_CPU = 11059200 +# F_CPU = 14745600 +# F_CPU = 16000000 +# F_CPU = 18432000 +# F_CPU = 20000000 +F_CPU = 8000000 + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = MouseFullInt + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + Descriptors.c \ + ../../LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.c \ + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = ../../ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS +CDEFS += -DUSB_DEVICE_ONLY -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED)" + + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20 +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CFLAGS += -mshort-calls +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd +# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500 +# +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf +MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) ) +FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr ) + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +checkhooks: build + @echo + @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events ------- + @$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \ + cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \ + echo "(None)" + @echo ----- End Unhooked LUFA Events ----- + +checklibmode: + @echo + @echo ----------- Library Mode ----------- + @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \ + | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \ + || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)." + @echo ------------------------------------ + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + copy $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom --debug 1 $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end + +clean_binary: + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + +clean_list: + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode begin \ +finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \ +clean clean_list clean_binary program debug \ +gdb-config doxygen dfu flip diff --git a/Demos/MouseHost/ConfigDescriptor.c b/Demos/MouseHost/ConfigDescriptor.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..645f6c80202 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MouseHost/ConfigDescriptor.c @@ -0,0 +1,155 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations + * needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special computer-readable structures + * which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "ConfigDescriptor.h" + +/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This + * routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate + * with compatible devices. + * + * This routine searches for a HID interface descriptor containing at least one Interrupt type IN endpoint. + * + * \return An error code from the MouseHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum. + */ +uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void) +{ + uint8_t* ConfigDescriptorData; + uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize; + + /* Get Configuration Descriptor size from the device */ + if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(&ConfigDescriptorSize, NULL) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + return ControlError; + + /* Ensure that the Configuration Descriptor isn't too large */ + if (ConfigDescriptorSize > MAX_CONFIG_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE) + return DescriptorTooLarge; + + /* Allocate enough memory for the entire config descriptor */ + ConfigDescriptorData = alloca(ConfigDescriptorSize); + + /* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */ + USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(&ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData); + + /* Validate returned data - ensure first entry is a configuration header descriptor */ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(ConfigDescriptorData) != DTYPE_Configuration) + return InvalidConfigDataReturned; + + /* Get the mouse interface from the configuration descriptor */ + if (USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData, NextMouseInterface)) + { + /* Descriptor not found, error out */ + return NoHIDInterfaceFound; + } + + /* Get the mouse interface's data endpoint descriptor */ + if (USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData, + NextInterfaceMouseDataEndpoint)) + { + /* Descriptor not found, error out */ + return NoEndpointFound; + } + + /* Retrieve the endpoint address from the endpoint descriptor */ + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t); + + /* Configure the mouse data pipe */ + Pipe_ConfigurePipe(MOUSE_DATAPIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, PIPE_TOKEN_IN, + EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE); + + Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests(); + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + /* Valid data found, return success */ + return SuccessfulConfigRead; +} + +/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's + * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration + * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found. + * + * This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct Mouse HID Class and Protocol values. + * + * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextMouseInterface) +{ + /* Determine if the current descriptor is an interface descriptor */ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface) + { + /* Check the HID descriptor class and protocol, break out if correct class/protocol interface found */ + if ((DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Class == MOUSE_CLASS) && + (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Protocol == MOUSE_PROTOCOL)) + { + /* Indicate that the descriptor being searched for has been found */ + return Descriptor_Search_Found; + } + } + + /* Current descriptor does not match what this comparator is looking for */ + return Descriptor_Search_NotFound; +} + +/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's + * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration + * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found. + * + * This comparator searches for the next IN Endpoint descriptor inside the current interface descriptor, + * aborting the search if another interface descriptor is found before the required endpoint. + * + * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextInterfaceMouseDataEndpoint) +{ + /* Determine the type of the current descriptor */ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint) + { + /* Check if the current Endpoint descriptor is of type IN */ + if (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t).EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN) + { + /* Indicate that the descriptor being searched for has been found */ + return Descriptor_Search_Found; + } + } + else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface) + { + /* Indicate that the search has failed prematurely and should be aborted */ + return Descriptor_Search_Fail; + } + + /* Current descriptor does not match what this comparator is looking for */ + return Descriptor_Search_NotFound; +} diff --git a/Demos/MouseHost/ConfigDescriptor.h b/Demos/MouseHost/ConfigDescriptor.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..22e7337148a --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MouseHost/ConfigDescriptor.h @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c. + */ + +#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_ +#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include // USB Functionality + #include // Configuration Descriptor Parser + + #include "MouseHost.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Interface Class value for the Human Interface Device class */ + #define MOUSE_CLASS 0x03 + + /** Interface Protocol value for a Boot Protocol Mouse compliant device */ + #define MOUSE_PROTOCOL 0x02 + + /** Maximum size of a device configuration descriptor which can be processed by the host, in bytes */ + #define MAX_CONFIG_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE 512 + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible return codes of the ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */ + enum MouseHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t + { + SuccessfulConfigRead = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */ + ControlError = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */ + DescriptorTooLarge = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */ + InvalidConfigDataReturned = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */ + NoHIDInterfaceFound = 4, /**< A compatible HID interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */ + NoEndpointFound = 5, /**< A compatible HID IN endpoint was not found in the device's HID interface */ + }; + + /* Configuration Descriptor Comparison Functions: */ + DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextMouseInterface); + DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextInterfaceMouseDataEndpoint); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/MouseHost/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/MouseHost/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..5194af37534 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MouseHost/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Mouse Host Demo" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek, +# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish, +# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene, +# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command , where is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command , where +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Namespace. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file . + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are +# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values +# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list; +# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which +# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous +# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE +# respectively. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin" + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to the search engine +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be +# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO diff --git a/Demos/MouseHost/MouseHost.aps b/Demos/MouseHost/MouseHost.aps new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..1e40b0c6eaf --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MouseHost/MouseHost.aps @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +MouseHost30-Sep-2008 14:14:5630-Sep-2008 14:15:10241030-Sep-2008 14:14:5644, 14, 0, 589AVR GCCC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\MouseHost\falseR00R01R02R03R04R05R06R07R08R09R10R11R12R13R14R15R16R17R18R19R20R21R22R23R24R25R26R27R28R29R30R31Auto000ConfigDescriptor.cMouseHost.cConfigDescriptor.hMouseHost.hmakefiledefaultYESmakefileatmega128111MouseHost.elfdefault\1-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enumsdefault1C:\WinAVR-20080512\bin\avr-gcc.exeC:\WinAVR-20080512\utils\bin\make.exe diff --git a/Demos/MouseHost/MouseHost.c b/Demos/MouseHost/MouseHost.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..2bc13a90771 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MouseHost/MouseHost.c @@ -0,0 +1,310 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the MouseHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of + * the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + +#include "MouseHost.h" + +/* Project Tags, for reading out using the ButtLoad project */ +BUTTLOADTAG(ProjName, "LUFA Mouse Host App"); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildTime, __TIME__); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildDate, __DATE__); +BUTTLOADTAG(LUFAVersion, "LUFA V" LUFA_VERSION_STRING); + +/* Scheduler Task List */ +TASK_LIST +{ + { Task: USB_USBTask , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, + { Task: USB_Mouse_Host , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, +}; + + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then + * starts the scheduler to run the application tasks. + */ +int main(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable Clock Division */ + SetSystemClockPrescaler(0); + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + SerialStream_Init(9600, false); + LEDs_Init(); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); + + /* Initialize Scheduler so that it can be used */ + Scheduler_Init(); + + /* Initialize USB Subsystem */ + USB_Init(); + + /* Startup message */ + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_RESET ESC_BG_WHITE ESC_INVERSE_ON ESC_ERASE_DISPLAY + "Mouse Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_INVERSE_OFF)); + + /* Scheduling - routine never returns, so put this last in the main function */ + Scheduler_Start(); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and + * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceAttached) +{ + puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n")); + UpdateStatus(Status_USBEnumerating); + + /* Start USB management task to enumerate the device */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_RUN); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and + * stops the library USB task management process. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceUnattached) +{ + /* Stop mouse and USB management task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_STOP); + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_Mouse_Host, TASK_STOP); + + puts_P(PSTR("Device Unattached.\r\n")); + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully + * enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete) +{ + /* Start Mouse Host task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_Mouse_Host, TASK_RUN); + + /* Indicate device enumeration complete */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_HostError) +{ + USB_ShutDown(); + + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + UpdateStatus(Status_HardwareError); + for(;;); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occured while + * enumerating an attached USB device. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed) +{ + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"), SubErrorCode); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- In State %d\r\n"), USB_HostState); + + UpdateStatus(Status_EnumerationError); +} + +/** Function to manage status updates to the user. This is done via LEDs on the given board, if available, but may be changed to + * log to a serial port, or anything else that is suitable for status updates. + * + * \param CurrentStatus Current status of the system, from the MouseHost_StatusCodes_t enum + */ +void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus) +{ + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS; + + /* Set the LED mask to the appropriate LED mask based on the given status code */ + switch (CurrentStatus) + { + case Status_USBNotReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1); + break; + case Status_USBEnumerating: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2); + break; + case Status_USBReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED2); + break; + case Status_EnumerationError: + case Status_HardwareError: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3); + break; + } + + /* Set the board LEDs to the new LED mask */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); +} + +/** Task to set the configuration of the attached device after it has been enumerated, and to read and process + * HID reports from the device and display the results onto the board LEDs. + */ +TASK(USB_Mouse_Host) +{ + uint8_t ErrorCode; + + /* Switch to determine what user-application handled host state the host state machine is in */ + switch (USB_HostState) + { + case HOST_STATE_Addressed: + /* Standard request to set the device configuration to configuration 1 */ + USB_HostRequest = (USB_Host_Request_Header_t) + { + bmRequestType: (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE), + bRequest: REQ_SetConfiguration, + wValue: 1, + wIndex: 0, + wLength: 0, + }; + + /* Send the request, display error and wait for device detatch if request fails */ + if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + { + puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error status */ + UpdateStatus(Status_EnumerationError); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + break; + } + + USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured; + break; + case HOST_STATE_Configured: + puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n")); + + /* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */ + if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead) + { + if (ErrorCode == ControlError) + puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n")); + else + puts_P(PSTR("Invalid Device.\r\n")); + + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error status */ + UpdateStatus(Status_EnumerationError); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + break; + } + + /* HID class request to set the mouse protocol to the Boot Protocol */ + USB_HostRequest = (USB_Host_Request_Header_t) + { + bmRequestType: (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE), + bRequest: REQ_SetProtocol, + wValue: 0, + wIndex: 0, + wLength: 0, + }; + + /* Send the request, display error and wait for device detatch if request fails */ + if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + { + puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Set Protocol).\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error status */ + UpdateStatus(Status_EnumerationError); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + break; + } + + puts_P(PSTR("Mouse Enumerated.\r\n")); + + USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Ready; + break; + case HOST_STATE_Ready: + /* Select and unfreeze mouse data pipe */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(MOUSE_DATAPIPE); + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + /* Check if data has been received from the attached mouse */ + if (Pipe_ReadWriteAllowed()) + { + USB_MouseReport_Data_t MouseReport; + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS; + + /* Read in mouse report data */ + Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&MouseReport, sizeof(MouseReport)); + + /* Clear the IN endpoint, ready for next data packet */ + Pipe_ClearCurrentBank(); + + /* Alter status LEDs according to mouse X movement */ + if (MouseReport.X > 0) + LEDMask |= LEDS_LED1; + else if (MouseReport.X < 0) + LEDMask |= LEDS_LED2; + + /* Alter status LEDs according to mouse Y movement */ + if (MouseReport.Y > 0) + LEDMask |= LEDS_LED3; + else if (MouseReport.Y < 0) + LEDMask |= LEDS_LED4; + + /* Alter status LEDs according to mouse button position */ + if (MouseReport.Button) + LEDMask = LEDS_ALL_LEDS; + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); + + /* Print mouse report data through the serial port */ + printf_P(PSTR("dX:%2d dY:%2d Button:%d\r\n"), MouseReport.X, + MouseReport.Y, + MouseReport.Button); + } + + /* Freeze mouse data pipe */ + Pipe_Freeze(); + break; + } +} diff --git a/Demos/MouseHost/MouseHost.h b/Demos/MouseHost/MouseHost.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..9e474956b41 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MouseHost/MouseHost.h @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for MouseHost.c. + */ + +#ifndef _MOUSE_HOST_H_ +#define _MOUSE_HOST_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + #include + + #include // Library Version Information + #include // PROGMEM tags readable by the ButtLoad project + #include // ANSI Terminal Escape Codes + #include // USB Functionality + #include // Serial stream driver + #include // LEDs driver + #include // Simple scheduler for task management + + #include "ConfigDescriptor.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Pipe number for the mouse data IN pipe */ + #define MOUSE_DATAPIPE 1 + + /** HID Class Specific request to set the report protocol mode */ + #define REQ_SetProtocol 0x0B + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for a standard Boot Protocol Mouse report */ + typedef struct + { + uint8_t Button; /**< Button mask for currently pressed buttons in the mouse */ + int8_t X; /**< Current delta X movement of the mouse */ + int8_t Y; /**< Current delta Y movement on the mouse */ + } USB_MouseReport_Data_t; + + /* Task Definitions: */ + TASK(USB_Mouse_Host); + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible status codes for passing to the UpdateStatus() function. */ + enum MouseHost_StatusCodes_t + { + Status_USBNotReady = 0, /**< USB is not ready (disconnected from a USB device) */ + Status_USBEnumerating = 1, /**< USB interface is enumerating */ + Status_USBReady = 2, /**< USB interface is connected and ready */ + Status_EnumerationError = 3, /**< Software error while enumerating the attached USB device */ + Status_HardwareError = 4, /**< Hardware error while enumerating the attached USB device */ + }; + + /* Event Handlers: */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceAttached); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceUnattached); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_HostError); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/MouseHost/MouseHost.txt b/Demos/MouseHost/MouseHost.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..11c434c696b --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MouseHost/MouseHost.txt @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage Mouse Host Demo + * + * Mouse host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference + * application for implementing a USB Mouse host, for USB mice using + * the standard mouse HID profile. + * + * Mouse movement and button presses are displayed on the board LEDs, + * as well as printed out the serial terminal as formatted dY, dY and + * button status information. + * + * This uses a naive method where the mouse is set to Boot Protocol mode, so + * that the report structure is fixed and known. A better implementation + * uses the HID report parser for correct report data processing across + * all compatable mice with advanced characteristics, as shown in the + * MouseHostWithParser demo application. + * + * Currently only single interface mice are supported. + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + *
USB Mode:Host
USB Class:Human Interface Device (HID)
USB Subclass:N/A
Relevant Standards:USBIF HID Specification, USBIF HID Usage Tables
Usable Speeds:Low Speed Mode, Full Speed Mode
+ */ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Demos/MouseHost/makefile b/Demos/MouseHost/makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..b387efe3489 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MouseHost/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,705 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# Denver Gingerich +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb1287 + + +# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# Typical values are: +# F_CPU = 1000000 +# F_CPU = 1843200 +# F_CPU = 2000000 +# F_CPU = 3686400 +# F_CPU = 4000000 +# F_CPU = 7372800 +# F_CPU = 8000000 +# F_CPU = 11059200 +# F_CPU = 14745600 +# F_CPU = 16000000 +# F_CPU = 18432000 +# F_CPU = 20000000 +F_CPU = 8000000 + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = MouseHost + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + ConfigDescriptor.c \ + ../../LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial_Stream.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/ConfigDescriptor.c \ + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = ../../ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS +CDEFS += -DUSB_HOST_ONLY -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)" + + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20 +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd +# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500 +# +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf +MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) ) +FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr ) + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +checkhooks: build + @echo + @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events ------- + @$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \ + cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \ + echo "(None)" + @echo ----- End Unhooked LUFA Events ----- + +checklibmode: + @echo + @echo ----------- Library Mode ----------- + @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \ + | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \ + || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)." + @echo ------------------------------------ + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + copy $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom --debug 1 $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end + +clean_binary: + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + +clean_list: + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode begin \ +finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \ +clean clean_list clean_binary program debug \ +gdb-config doxygen dfu flip diff --git a/Demos/MouseHostViaInt/ConfigDescriptor.c b/Demos/MouseHostViaInt/ConfigDescriptor.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..cb629d48f2c --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MouseHostViaInt/ConfigDescriptor.c @@ -0,0 +1,149 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations + * needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special computer-readable structures + * which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "ConfigDescriptor.h" + +/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This + * routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate + * with compatible devices. + * + * This routine searches for a HID interface descriptor containing at least one Interrupt type IN endpoint. + * + * \return An error code from the MouseHostViaInt_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum. + */ +uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void) +{ + uint8_t* ConfigDescriptorData; + uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize; + + /* Get Configuration Descriptor size from the device */ + if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(&ConfigDescriptorSize, NULL) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + return ControlError; + + /* Ensure that the Configuration Descriptor isn't too large */ + if (ConfigDescriptorSize > MAX_CONFIG_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE) + return DescriptorTooLarge; + + /* Allocate enough memory for the entire config descriptor */ + ConfigDescriptorData = alloca(ConfigDescriptorSize); + + /* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */ + USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(&ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData); + + /* Validate returned data - ensure first entry is a configuration header descriptor */ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(ConfigDescriptorData) != DTYPE_Configuration) + return InvalidConfigDataReturned; + + /* Get the mouse interface from the configuration descriptor */ + if (USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData, NextMouseInterface)) + { + /* Descriptor not found, error out */ + return NoHIDInterfaceFound; + } + + /* Get the mouse interface's data endpoint descriptor */ + if (USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData, + NextInterfaceMouseDataEndpoint)) + { + /* Descriptor not found, error out */ + return NoEndpointFound; + } + + /* Retrieve the endpoint address from the endpoint descriptor */ + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t); + + /* Configure the mouse data pipe */ + Pipe_ConfigurePipe(MOUSE_DATAPIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, PIPE_TOKEN_IN, + EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE); + + Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests(); + Pipe_SetInterruptPeriod(EndpointData->PollingIntervalMS); + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + /* Enable the pipe IN interrupt for the data pipe */ + USB_INT_Enable(PIPE_INT_IN); + + /* Valid data found, return success */ + return SuccessfulConfigRead; +} + +/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's + * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration + * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found. + * + * This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct Mouse HID Class and Protocol values. + * + * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextMouseInterface) +{ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface) + { + /* Check the HID descriptor class and protocol, break out if correct class/protocol interface found */ + if ((DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Class == MOUSE_CLASS) && + (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Protocol == MOUSE_PROTOCOL)) + { + return Descriptor_Search_Found; + } + } + + return Descriptor_Search_NotFound; +} + +/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's + * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration + * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found. + * + * This comparator searches for the next IN Endpoint descriptor inside the current interface descriptor, + * aborting the search if another interface descriptor is found before the required endpoint. + * + * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextInterfaceMouseDataEndpoint) +{ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint) + { + if (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t).EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN) + return Descriptor_Search_Found; + } + else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface) + { + return Descriptor_Search_Fail; + } + + return Descriptor_Search_NotFound; +} diff --git a/Demos/MouseHostViaInt/ConfigDescriptor.h b/Demos/MouseHostViaInt/ConfigDescriptor.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..4328646affa --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MouseHostViaInt/ConfigDescriptor.h @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c. + */ + +#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_ +#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include // USB Functionality + #include // Configuration Descriptor Parser + + #include "MouseHostViaInt.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Interface Class value for the Human Interface Device class */ + #define MOUSE_CLASS 0x03 + + /** Interface Protocol value for a Boot Protocol Mouse compliant device */ + #define MOUSE_PROTOCOL 0x02 + + /** Maximum size of a device configuration descriptor which can be processed by the host, in bytes */ + #define MAX_CONFIG_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE 512 + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible return codes of the ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */ + enum KeyboardHostViaInt_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t + { + SuccessfulConfigRead = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */ + ControlError = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */ + DescriptorTooLarge = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */ + InvalidConfigDataReturned = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */ + NoHIDInterfaceFound = 4, /**< A compatible HID interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */ + NoEndpointFound = 5, /**< A compatible HID IN endpoint was not found in the device's HID interface */ + }; + + /* Configuration Descriptor Comparison Functions: */ + DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextMouseInterface); + DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextInterfaceMouseDataEndpoint); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/MouseHostViaInt/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/MouseHostViaInt/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..ee9bcd5fe7e --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MouseHostViaInt/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Mouse Host Demo (Via Pipe Interrupts)" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek, +# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish, +# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene, +# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command , where is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command , where +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Namespace. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file . + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are +# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values +# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list; +# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which +# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous +# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE +# respectively. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin" + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to the search engine +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be +# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO diff --git a/Demos/MouseHostViaInt/MouseHostViaInt.aps b/Demos/MouseHostViaInt/MouseHostViaInt.aps new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..adf632fcbbd --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MouseHostViaInt/MouseHostViaInt.aps @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +MouseHostViaInt30-Sep-2008 14:15:2630-Sep-2008 14:15:40241030-Sep-2008 14:15:2644, 14, 0, 589AVR GCCC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\MouseHostViaInt\falseR00R01R02R03R04R05R06R07R08R09R10R11R12R13R14R15R16R17R18R19R20R21R22R23R24R25R26R27R28R29R30R31Auto000ConfigDescriptor.cMouseHostViaInt.cConfigDescriptor.hMouseHostViaInt.hmakefiledefaultYESmakefileatmega128111MouseHostViaInt.elfdefault\1-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enumsdefault1C:\WinAVR-20080512\bin\avr-gcc.exeC:\WinAVR-20080512\utils\bin\make.exe diff --git a/Demos/MouseHostViaInt/MouseHostViaInt.c b/Demos/MouseHostViaInt/MouseHostViaInt.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..c4c3778586a --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MouseHostViaInt/MouseHostViaInt.c @@ -0,0 +1,320 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the MouseHostViaInt demo. This file contains the main tasks of + * the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + + #include "MouseHostViaInt.h" + +/* Project Tags, for reading out using the ButtLoad project */ +BUTTLOADTAG(ProjName, "LUFA Mouse Host App"); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildTime, __TIME__); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildDate, __DATE__); +BUTTLOADTAG(LUFAVersion, "LUFA V" LUFA_VERSION_STRING); + +/* Scheduler Task List */ +TASK_LIST +{ + { Task: USB_USBTask , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, + { Task: USB_Mouse_Host , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, +}; + + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then + * starts the scheduler to run the application tasks. + */ +int main(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable Clock Division */ + SetSystemClockPrescaler(0); + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + SerialStream_Init(9600, false); + LEDs_Init(); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); + + /* Initialize Scheduler so that it can be used */ + Scheduler_Init(); + + /* Initialize USB Subsystem */ + USB_Init(); + + /* Startup message */ + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_RESET ESC_BG_WHITE ESC_INVERSE_ON ESC_ERASE_DISPLAY + "Mouse Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_INVERSE_OFF)); + + /* Scheduling - routine never returns, so put this last in the main function */ + Scheduler_Start(); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and + * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceAttached) +{ + puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n")); + UpdateStatus(Status_USBEnumerating); + + /* Start USB management task to enumerate the device */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_RUN); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and + * stops the library USB task management process. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceUnattached) +{ + /* Stop mouse and USB management task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_STOP); + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_Mouse_Host, TASK_STOP); + + puts_P(PSTR("Device Unattached.\r\n")); + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully + * enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete) +{ + /* Start Mouse Host task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_Mouse_Host, TASK_RUN); + + /* Indicate device enumeration complete */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_HostError) +{ + USB_ShutDown(); + + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + UpdateStatus(Status_HardwareError); + for(;;); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occured while + * enumerating an attached USB device. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed) +{ + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"), SubErrorCode); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- In State %d\r\n"), USB_HostState); + + UpdateStatus(Status_EnumerationError); +} + +/** Function to manage status updates to the user. This is done via LEDs on the given board, if available, but may be changed to + * log to a serial port, or anything else that is suitable for status updates. + * + * \param CurrentStatus Current status of the system, from the MouseHostViaInt_StatusCodes_t enum + */ +void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus) +{ + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS; + + /* Set the LED mask to the appropriate LED mask based on the given status code */ + switch (CurrentStatus) + { + case Status_USBNotReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1); + break; + case Status_USBEnumerating: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2); + break; + case Status_USBReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED2); + break; + case Status_EnumerationError: + case Status_HardwareError: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3); + break; + } + + /* Set the board LEDs to the new LED mask */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); +} + +/** Task to set the configuration of the attached device after it has been enumerated, and to enable the pipe + * interrupts so that reports can be processed as they arrive from the device. + */ +TASK(USB_Mouse_Host) +{ + uint8_t ErrorCode; + + /* Switch to determine what user-application handled host state the host state machine is in */ + switch (USB_HostState) + { + case HOST_STATE_Addressed: + /* Standard request to set the device configuration to configuration 1 */ + USB_HostRequest = (USB_Host_Request_Header_t) + { + bmRequestType: (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE), + bRequest: REQ_SetConfiguration, + wValue: 1, + wIndex: 0, + wLength: 0, + }; + + /* Send the request, display error and wait for device detatch if request fails */ + if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + { + puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error via status LEDs */ + UpdateStatus(Status_EnumerationError); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + break; + } + + USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured; + break; + case HOST_STATE_Configured: + puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n")); + + /* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */ + if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead) + { + if (ErrorCode == ControlError) + puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n")); + else + puts_P(PSTR("Invalid Device.\r\n")); + + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error via status LEDs */ + UpdateStatus(Status_EnumerationError); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + break; + } + + /* HID class request to set the mouse protocol to the Boot Protocol */ + USB_HostRequest = (USB_Host_Request_Header_t) + { + bmRequestType: (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE), + bRequest: REQ_SetProtocol, + wValue: 0, + wIndex: 0, + wLength: 0, + }; + + /* Send the request, display error and wait for device detatch if request fails */ + if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + { + puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Set Protocol).\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error status */ + UpdateStatus(Status_EnumerationError); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + break; + } + + puts_P(PSTR("Mouse Enumerated.\r\n")); + + USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Ready; + break; + } +} + +/** Interrupt handler for the Endpoint/Pipe interrupt vector. This interrupt fires each time an enabled + * pipe interrupt occurs on a pipe which has had that interrupt enabled. + */ +ISR(ENDPOINT_PIPE_vect, ISR_BLOCK) +{ + USB_MouseReport_Data_t MouseReport; + + /* Check to see if the mouse data pipe has caused the interrupt */ + if (Pipe_HasPipeInterrupted(MOUSE_DATAPIPE)) + { + /* Clear the pipe interrupt, and select the mouse pipe */ + Pipe_ClearPipeInterrupt(MOUSE_DATAPIPE); + Pipe_SelectPipe(MOUSE_DATAPIPE); + + /* Check to see if the pipe IN interrupt has fired */ + if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(PIPE_INT_IN) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(PIPE_INT_IN)) + { + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS; + + /* Clear interrupt flag */ + USB_INT_Clear(PIPE_INT_IN); + + /* Read in mouse report data */ + Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&MouseReport, sizeof(MouseReport)); + + /* Clear the IN endpoint, ready for next data packet */ + Pipe_ClearCurrentBank(); + + /* Alter status LEDs according to mouse X movement */ + if (MouseReport.X > 0) + LEDMask |= LEDS_LED1; + else if (MouseReport.X < 0) + LEDMask |= LEDS_LED2; + + /* Alter status LEDs according to mouse Y movement */ + if (MouseReport.Y > 0) + LEDMask |= LEDS_LED3; + else if (MouseReport.Y < 0) + LEDMask |= LEDS_LED4; + + /* Alter status LEDs according to mouse button position */ + if (MouseReport.Button) + LEDMask = LEDS_ALL_LEDS; + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); + + /* Print mouse report data through the serial port */ + printf_P(PSTR("dX:%2d dY:%2d Button:%d\r\n"), MouseReport.X, + MouseReport.Y, + MouseReport.Button); + } + } +} diff --git a/Demos/MouseHostViaInt/MouseHostViaInt.h b/Demos/MouseHostViaInt/MouseHostViaInt.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..c4238c80b09 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MouseHostViaInt/MouseHostViaInt.h @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for MouseHostViaInt.c. + */ + +#ifndef _MOUSE_HOST_VIA_INT_H_ +#define _MOUSE_HOST_VIA_INT_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + #include + #include + + #include // Library Version Information + #include // PROGMEM tags readable by the ButtLoad project + #include // ANSI Terminal Escape Codes + #include // USB Functionality + #include // Serial stream driver + #include // LEDs driver + #include // Simple scheduler for task management + + #include "ConfigDescriptor.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Pipe number for the mouse data IN pipe */ + #define MOUSE_DATAPIPE 1 + + /** HID Class Specific request to set the report protocol mode */ + #define REQ_SetProtocol 0x0B + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for a standard Boot Protocol Mouse report */ + typedef struct + { + uint8_t Button; /**< Button mask for currently pressed buttons in the mouse */ + int8_t X; /**< Current delta X movement of the mouse */ + int8_t Y; /**< Current delta Y movement on the mouse */ + } USB_MouseReport_Data_t; + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible status codes for passing to the UpdateStatus() function. */ + enum MouseHostViaInt_StatusCodes_t + { + Status_USBNotReady = 0, /**< USB is not ready (disconnected from a USB device) */ + Status_USBEnumerating = 1, /**< USB interface is enumerating */ + Status_USBReady = 2, /**< USB interface is connected and ready */ + Status_EnumerationError = 3, /**< Software error while enumerating the attached USB device */ + Status_HardwareError = 4, /**< Hardware error while enumerating the attached USB device */ + }; + + /* Task Definitions: */ + TASK(USB_Mouse_Host); + + /* Event Handlers: */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceAttached); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceUnattached); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_HostError); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/MouseHostViaInt/MouseHostViaInt.txt b/Demos/MouseHostViaInt/MouseHostViaInt.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..72ee1dbeee5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MouseHostViaInt/MouseHostViaInt.txt @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage Mouse Host Demo + * + * Mouse host demonstration application, using pipe interrupts. This + * gives a simple reference application for implementing a USB Mouse + * host utilizing the LUFA pipe interrupt system, for USB mice using + * the standard mouse HID profile. + * + * Mouse movement and button presses are displayed on the board LEDs, + * as well as printed out the serial terminal as formatted dY, dY and + * button status information. + * + * This uses a naive method where the mouse is set to Boot Protocol mode, so + * that the report structure is fixed and known. A better implementation + * uses the HID report parser for correct report data processing across + * all compatable mice with advanced characteristics, as shown in the + * MouseHostWithParser demo application. + * + * Currently only single interface mice are supported. + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + *
USB Mode:Host
USB Class:Human Interface Device (HID)
USB Subclass:N/A
Relevant Standards:USBIF HID Specification, USBIF HID Usage Tables
Usable Speeds:Low Speed Mode, Full Speed Mode
+ */ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Demos/MouseHostViaInt/makefile b/Demos/MouseHostViaInt/makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..0f8cae30056 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MouseHostViaInt/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,705 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# Denver Gingerich +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb1287 + + +# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# Typical values are: +# F_CPU = 1000000 +# F_CPU = 1843200 +# F_CPU = 2000000 +# F_CPU = 3686400 +# F_CPU = 4000000 +# F_CPU = 7372800 +# F_CPU = 8000000 +# F_CPU = 11059200 +# F_CPU = 14745600 +# F_CPU = 16000000 +# F_CPU = 18432000 +# F_CPU = 20000000 +F_CPU = 8000000 + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = MouseHostViaInt + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + ConfigDescriptor.c \ + ../../LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial_Stream.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/ConfigDescriptor.c \ + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = ../../ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS +CDEFS += -DUSB_HOST_ONLY -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)" + + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20 +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd +# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500 +# +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf +MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) ) +FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr ) + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +checkhooks: build + @echo + @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events ------- + @$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \ + cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \ + echo "(None)" + @echo ----- End Unhooked LUFA Events ----- + +checklibmode: + @echo + @echo ----------- Library Mode ----------- + @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \ + | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \ + || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)." + @echo ------------------------------------ + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + copy $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom --debug 1 $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end + +clean_binary: + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + +clean_list: + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode begin \ +finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \ +clean clean_list clean_binary program debug \ +gdb-config doxygen dfu flip diff --git a/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.c b/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..31e1aa13eb0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.c @@ -0,0 +1,171 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations + * needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special computer-readable structures + * which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "ConfigDescriptor.h" + +/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This + * routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate + * with compatible devices. + * + * This routine searches for a HID interface descriptor containing at least one Interrupt type IN endpoint and HID descriptor. + * + * \return An error code from the MouseHostWithParser_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum. + */ +uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void) +{ + uint8_t* ConfigDescriptorData; + uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize; + uint8_t ErrorCode; + + /* Get Configuration Descriptor size from the device */ + if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(&ConfigDescriptorSize, NULL) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + return ControlError; + + /* Ensure that the Configuration Descriptor isn't too large */ + if (ConfigDescriptorSize > MAX_CONFIG_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE) + return DescriptorTooLarge; + + /* Allocate enough memory for the entire config descriptor */ + ConfigDescriptorData = alloca(ConfigDescriptorSize); + + /* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */ + USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(&ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData); + + /* Validate returned data - ensure first entry is a configuration header descriptor */ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(ConfigDescriptorData) != DTYPE_Configuration) + return InvalidConfigDataReturned; + + /* Get the mouse interface from the configuration descriptor */ + if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData, NextMouseInterface))) + { + /* Descriptor not found, error out */ + return NoHIDInterfaceFound; + } + + /* Get the mouse interface's HID descriptor */ + if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData, NextHID))) + { + /* Descriptor not found, error out */ + return NoHIDDescriptorFound; + } + + /* Save the HID report size for later use */ + HIDReportSize = DESCRIPTOR_CAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_HID_t).HIDReportLength; + + /* Get the mouse interface's data endpoint descriptor */ + if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData, + NextInterfaceMouseDataEndpoint))) + { + /* Descriptor not found, error out */ + return NoEndpointFound; + } + + /* Retrieve the endpoint address from the endpoint descriptor */ + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t); + + /* Configure the mouse data pipe */ + Pipe_ConfigurePipe(MOUSE_DATAPIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, PIPE_TOKEN_IN, + EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE); + + Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests(); + + /* Valid data found, return success */ + return SuccessfulConfigRead; +} + +/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's + * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration + * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found. + * + * This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct Mouse HID Class and Protocol values. + * + * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextMouseInterface) +{ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface) + { + /* Check the HID descriptor class and protocol, break out if correct class/protocol interface found */ + if ((DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Class == MOUSE_CLASS) && + (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Protocol == MOUSE_PROTOCOL)) + { + return Descriptor_Search_Found; + } + } + + return Descriptor_Search_NotFound; +} + +/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's + * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration + * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found. + * + * This comparator searches for the next IN Endpoint descriptor inside the current interface descriptor, + * aborting the search if another interface descriptor is found before the required endpoint. + * + * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextInterfaceMouseDataEndpoint) +{ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint) + { + if (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t).EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN) + return Descriptor_Search_Found; + } + else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface) + { + return Descriptor_Search_Fail; + } + + return Descriptor_Search_NotFound; +} + +/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's + * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration + * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found. + * + * This comparator searches for the next HID descriptor within the current HID interface descriptor. + * + * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextHID) +{ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_HID) + return Descriptor_Search_Found; + else + return Descriptor_Search_NotFound; +} diff --git a/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.h b/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..971bdfeef96 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.h @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c. + */ + +#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_ +#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include // USB Functionality + #include // Configuration Descriptor Parser + + #include "HIDReport.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Interface Class value for the Human Interface Device class */ + #define MOUSE_CLASS 0x03 + + /** Interface Protocol value for a Boot Protocol Mouse compliant device */ + #define MOUSE_PROTOCOL 0x02 + + /** Maximum size of a device configuration descriptor which can be processed by the host, in bytes */ + #define MAX_CONFIG_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE 512 + + /** Descriptor header type constant for a HID descriptor */ + #define DTYPE_HID 0x21 + + /** Descriptor header type constant for a HID report descriptor */ + #define DTYPE_Report 0x22 + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible return codes of the ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */ + enum CDCHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t + { + SuccessfulConfigRead = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */ + ControlError = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */ + DescriptorTooLarge = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */ + InvalidConfigDataReturned = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */ + NoHIDInterfaceFound = 4, /**< A compatible HID interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */ + NoHIDDescriptorFound = 5, /**< A compatible HID descriptor was not found in the device's HID interface */ + NoEndpointFound = 5, /**< A compatible HID IN endpoint was not found in the device's HID interface */ + }; + + /* Configuration Descriptor Comparison Functions: */ + DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextMouseInterface); + DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextInterfaceMouseDataEndpoint); + DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextHID); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..f3f45e313ca --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Mouse Host (Using Mouse Descriptor Parser)" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek, +# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish, +# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene, +# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command , where is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command , where +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Namespace. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file . + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are +# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values +# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list; +# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which +# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous +# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE +# respectively. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin" + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to the search engine +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be +# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO diff --git a/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/HIDReport.c b/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/HIDReport.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..55f250dd983 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/HIDReport.c @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#include "HIDReport.h" + +/** Size in bytes of the attached device's HID report descriptor */ +uint16_t HIDReportSize; + +/** Processed HID report descriptor items structure, containing information on each HID report element */ +HID_ReportInfo_t HIDReportInfo; + + +/** Function to read in the HID report descriptor from the attached device, and process it into easy-to-read + * structures via the HID parser routines in the LUFA library. + * + * \return A value from the MouseHostWithParser_GetHIDReportDataCodes_t enum + */ +uint8_t GetHIDReportData(void) +{ + /* Create a buffer big enough to hold the entire returned HID report */ + uint8_t HIDReportData[HIDReportSize]; + + USB_HostRequest = (USB_Host_Request_Header_t) + { + bmRequestType: (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_INTERFACE), + bRequest: REQ_GetDescriptor, + wValue: (DTYPE_Report << 8), + wIndex: 0, + wLength: HIDReportSize, + }; + + /* Send control request to retrieve the HID report from the attached device */ + if (USB_Host_SendControlRequest(HIDReportData) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + return ParseControlError; + + /* Send the HID report to the parser for processing */ + if (ProcessHIDReport(HIDReportData, HIDReportSize, &HIDReportInfo) != HID_PARSE_Successful) + return ParseError; + + return ParseSuccessful; +} diff --git a/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/HIDReport.h b/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/HIDReport.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..8ebb97da12d --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/HIDReport.h @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for HIDReport.c. + */ + +#ifndef _HID_REPORT_H_ +#define _HID_REPORT_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include // HID Class Report Parser + + #include "MouseHostWithParser.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** HID Report Descriptor Usage Page value for a toggle button */ + #define USAGE_PAGE_BUTTON 0x09 + + /** HID Report Descriptor Usage Page value for a Generic Desktop Control */ + #define USAGE_PAGE_GENERIC_DCTRL 0x01 + + /** HID Report Descriptor Usage value for a X axis movement */ + #define USAGE_X 0x30 + + /** HID Report Descriptor Usage value for a Y axis movement */ + #define USAGE_Y 0x31 + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible return codes of the GetHIDReportData() function. */ + enum MouseHostWithParser_GetHIDReportDataCodes_t + { + ParseSuccessful = 0, /**< HID report descriptor parsed successfully */ + ParseError = 1, /**< Failed to fully process the HID report descriptor */ + ParseControlError = 2, /**< Control error occured while trying to read the device HID descriptor */ + }; + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for a HID descriptor. */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */ + + uint16_t HIDSpec; /**< Implemented HID class specification, in BCD encoded format */ + uint8_t CountryCode; /**< Country code value for localized hardware */ + + uint8_t TotalHIDReports; /**< Total number of HID report descriptors in the current interface */ + + uint8_t HIDReportType; /**< HID report type of the first HID report descriptor */ + uint16_t HIDReportLength; /**< Total size in bytes of the first HID report descriptor */ + } USB_Descriptor_HID_t; + + /* External Variables: */ + extern uint16_t HIDReportSize; + extern HID_ReportInfo_t HIDReportInfo; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint8_t GetHIDReportData(void); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.aps b/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.aps new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..81d82eba8b9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.aps @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +MouseHostWithParser30-Sep-2008 14:15:5730-Sep-2008 14:16:12241030-Sep-2008 14:15:5744, 14, 0, 589AVR GCCC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\MouseHostWithParser\falseR00R01R02R03R04R05R06R07R08R09R10R11R12R13R14R15R16R17R18R19R20R21R22R23R24R25R26R27R28R29R30R31Auto000ConfigDescriptor.cHIDReport.cMouseHostWithParser.cConfigDescriptor.hHIDReport.hMouseHostWithParser.hmakefiledefaultYESmakefileatmega128111MouseHostWithParser.elfdefault\1-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enumsdefault1C:\WinAVR-20080512\bin\avr-gcc.exeC:\WinAVR-20080512\utils\bin\make.exe diff --git a/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.c b/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..97bad3b5b4a --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.c @@ -0,0 +1,351 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the MouseHostWithParser demo. This file contains the main tasks of + * the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + +#include "MouseHostWithParser.h" + +/* Project Tags, for reading out using the ButtLoad project */ +BUTTLOADTAG(ProjName, "LUFA Mouse Host App"); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildTime, __TIME__); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildDate, __DATE__); +BUTTLOADTAG(LUFAVersion, "LUFA V" LUFA_VERSION_STRING); + +/* Scheduler Task List */ +TASK_LIST +{ + { Task: USB_USBTask , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, + { Task: USB_Mouse_Host , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, +}; + + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then + * starts the scheduler to run the application tasks. + */ +int main(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable Clock Division */ + SetSystemClockPrescaler(0); + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + SerialStream_Init(9600, false); + LEDs_Init(); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); + + /* Initialize Scheduler so that it can be used */ + Scheduler_Init(); + + /* Initialize USB Subsystem */ + USB_Init(); + + /* Startup message */ + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_RESET ESC_BG_WHITE ESC_INVERSE_ON ESC_ERASE_DISPLAY + "Mouse Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_INVERSE_OFF)); + + /* Scheduling - routine never returns, so put this last in the main function */ + Scheduler_Start(); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and + * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceAttached) +{ + puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n")); + UpdateStatus(Status_USBEnumerating); + + /* Start USB management task to enumerate the device */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_RUN); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and + * stops the library USB task management process. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceUnattached) +{ + /* Stop mouse and USB management task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_STOP); + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_Mouse_Host, TASK_STOP); + + puts_P(PSTR("Device Unattached.\r\n")); + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully + * enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete) +{ + /* Start Mouse Host task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_Mouse_Host, TASK_RUN); + + /* Indicate device enumeration complete */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_HostError) +{ + USB_ShutDown(); + + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + UpdateStatus(Status_HardwareError); + for(;;); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occured while + * enumerating an attached USB device. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed) +{ + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"), SubErrorCode); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- In State %d\r\n"), USB_HostState); + + UpdateStatus(Status_EnumerationError); +} + +/** Function to manage status updates to the user. This is done via LEDs on the given board, if available, but may be changed to + * log to a serial port, or anything else that is suitable for status updates. + * + * \param CurrentStatus Current status of the system, from the MouseHostWithParser_StatusCodes_t enum + */ +void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus) +{ + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS; + + /* Set the LED mask to the appropriate LED mask based on the given status code */ + switch (CurrentStatus) + { + case Status_USBNotReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1); + break; + case Status_USBEnumerating: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2); + break; + case Status_USBReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED2); + break; + case Status_EnumerationError: + case Status_HardwareError: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3); + break; + case Status_Busy: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED4); + break; + } + + /* Set the board LEDs to the new LED mask */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); +} + +/** Task to set the configuration of the attached device after it has been enumerated, and to read and process + * the HID report descriptor and HID reports from the device and display the results onto the board LEDs. + */ +TASK(USB_Mouse_Host) +{ + uint8_t ErrorCode; + + /* Switch to determine what user-application handled host state the host state machine is in */ + switch (USB_HostState) + { + case HOST_STATE_Addressed: + /* Standard request to set the device configuration to configuration 1 */ + USB_HostRequest = (USB_Host_Request_Header_t) + { + bmRequestType: (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE), + bRequest: REQ_SetConfiguration, + wValue: 1, + wIndex: 0, + wLength: 0, + }; + + /* Send the request, display error and wait for device detatch if request fails */ + if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + { + puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error via status LEDs */ + UpdateStatus(Status_EnumerationError); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + break; + } + + USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured; + break; + case HOST_STATE_Configured: + puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n")); + + /* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */ + if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead) + { + if (ErrorCode == ControlError) + puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n")); + else + puts_P(PSTR("Invalid Device.\r\n")); + + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error via status LEDs */ + UpdateStatus(Status_EnumerationError); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + break; + } + + puts_P(PSTR("Processing HID Report.\r\n")); + + /* LEDs one and two on to indicate busy processing */ + UpdateStatus(Status_Busy); + + /* Get and process the device's first HID report descriptor */ + if ((ErrorCode = GetHIDReportData()) != ParseSuccessful) + { + puts_P(PSTR("Report Parse Error.\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error via status LEDs */ + UpdateStatus(Status_EnumerationError); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + break; + } + + /* All LEDs off - ready to indicate keypresses */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady); + + puts_P(PSTR("Mouse Enumerated.\r\n")); + + USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Ready; + break; + case HOST_STATE_Ready: + /* Select and unfreeze mouse data pipe */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(MOUSE_DATAPIPE); + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + /* Check if data has been received from the attached mouse */ + if (Pipe_ReadWriteAllowed()) + { + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS; + + /* Create buffer big enough for the report */ + uint8_t MouseReport[Pipe_BytesInPipe()]; + + /* Load in the mouse report */ + Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(MouseReport, Pipe_BytesInPipe()); + + /* Clear the IN endpoint, ready for next data packet */ + Pipe_ClearCurrentBank(); + + /* Check each HID report item in turn, looking for mouse X/Y/button reports */ + for (uint8_t ReportNumber = 0; ReportNumber < HIDReportInfo.TotalReportItems; ReportNumber++) + { + /* Create a tempoary item pointer to the next report item */ + HID_ReportItem_t* ReportItem = &HIDReportInfo.ReportItems[ReportNumber]; + + bool FoundData; + + if ((ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Page == USAGE_PAGE_BUTTON) && + (ReportItem->ItemType == REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In)) + { + /* Get the mouse button value */ + FoundData = GetReportItemInfo(MouseReport, ReportItem); + + /* For multi-report devices - if the requested data was not in the issued report, continue */ + if (!(FoundData)) + continue; + + /* If button is pressed, all LEDs are turned on */ + if (ReportItem->Value) + LEDMask = LEDS_ALL_LEDS; + } + else if ((ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Page == USAGE_PAGE_GENERIC_DCTRL) && + ((ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Usage == USAGE_X) || + (ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Usage == USAGE_Y)) && + (ReportItem->ItemType == REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In)) + { + /* Get the mouse relative position value */ + FoundData = GetReportItemInfo(MouseReport, ReportItem); + + /* For multi-report devices - if the requested data was not in the issued report, continue */ + if (!(FoundData)) + continue; + + int16_t DeltaMovement; + + if (ReportItem->Attributes.BitSize > 8) + DeltaMovement = (int16_t)ReportItem->Value; + else + DeltaMovement = (int8_t)ReportItem->Value; + + /* Determine if the report is for the X or Y delta movement */ + if (ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Usage == USAGE_X) + { + /* Turn on the appropriate LED according to direction if the delta is non-zero */ + if (DeltaMovement) + LEDMask |= ((DeltaMovement > 0) ? LEDS_LED1 : LEDS_LED2); + } + else + { + /* Turn on the appropriate LED according to direction if the delta is non-zero */ + if (DeltaMovement) + LEDMask |= ((DeltaMovement > 0) ? LEDS_LED3 : LEDS_LED4); + } + } + } + + /* Display the button information on the board LEDs */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); + } + + /* Freeze mouse data pipe */ + Pipe_Freeze(); + break; + } +} + diff --git a/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.h b/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..6d1ce32d009 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.h @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#ifndef _MOUSE_HOST_H_ +#define _MOUSE_HOST_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + #include + + #include // Library Version Information + #include // PROGMEM tags readable by the ButtLoad project + #include // ANSI Terminal Escape Codes + #include // USB Functionality + #include // Serial stream driver + #include // LEDs driver + #include // Simple scheduler for task management + + #include "ConfigDescriptor.h" + #include "HIDReport.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Pipe number for the mouse report data pipe */ + #define MOUSE_DATAPIPE 1 + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible status codes for passing to the UpdateStatus() function. */ + enum MouseHostWithParser_StatusCodes_t + { + Status_USBNotReady = 0, /**< USB is not ready (disconnected from a USB device) */ + Status_USBEnumerating = 1, /**< USB interface is enumerating */ + Status_USBReady = 2, /**< USB interface is connected and ready */ + Status_EnumerationError = 3, /**< Software error while enumerating the attached USB device */ + Status_HardwareError = 4, /**< Hardware error while enumerating the attached USB device */ + Status_Busy = 5, /**< Busy dumping HID report items to the serial port */ + }; + + /* Task Definitions: */ + TASK(USB_Mouse_Host); + + /* Event Handlers: */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceAttached); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceUnattached); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_HostError); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.txt b/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..97ee8bfb864 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.txt @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage Mouse Host With HID Descriptor Parser Demo + * + * Mouse host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference + * application for implementing a USB Mouse host, for USB mice using + * the standard mouse HID profile. It uses a HID parser for the HID + * reports, allowing for correct operation across all USB mice. This + * demo supports mice with a single HID report. + * + * Mouse movement and button presses are displayed on the board LEDs. + * On connection to a USB mouse, the report items will be processed and + * printed as a formatted list through the USART before the mouse is + * fully enumerated. + * + * Currently only single interface mice are supported. + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + *
USB Mode:Host
USB Class:Human Interface Device (HID)
USB Subclass:N/A
Relevant Standards:USBIF HID Specification, USBIF HID Usage Tables
Usable Speeds:Low Speed Mode, Full Speed Mode
+ */ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/makefile b/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..d9fcb1bc721 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,707 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# Denver Gingerich +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb1287 + + +# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# Typical values are: +# F_CPU = 1000000 +# F_CPU = 1843200 +# F_CPU = 2000000 +# F_CPU = 3686400 +# F_CPU = 4000000 +# F_CPU = 7372800 +# F_CPU = 8000000 +# F_CPU = 11059200 +# F_CPU = 14745600 +# F_CPU = 16000000 +# F_CPU = 18432000 +# F_CPU = 20000000 +F_CPU = 8000000 + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = MouseHostWithParser + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + ConfigDescriptor.c \ + HIDReport.c \ + ../../LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial_Stream.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HIDParser.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/ConfigDescriptor.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \ + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = ../../ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS +CDEFS += -DUSB_HOST_ONLY -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)" + + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20 +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd +# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500 +# +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf +MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) ) +FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr ) + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +checkhooks: build + @echo + @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events ------- + @$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \ + cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \ + echo "(None)" + @echo ----- End Unhooked LUFA Events ----- + +checklibmode: + @echo + @echo ----------- Library Mode ----------- + @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \ + | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \ + || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)." + @echo ------------------------------------ + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + copy $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom --debug 1 $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end + +clean_binary: + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + +clean_list: + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode begin \ +finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \ +clean clean_list clean_binary program debug \ +gdb-config doxygen dfu flip diff --git a/Demos/MouseViaInt/Descriptors.c b/Demos/MouseViaInt/Descriptors.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..8f099692db6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MouseViaInt/Descriptors.c @@ -0,0 +1,250 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special + * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine + * the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "Descriptors.h" + +/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the + * USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This + * descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding) + * the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for + * more details on HID report descriptors. + */ +USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM MouseReport[] = +{ + 0x05, 0x01, /* Usage Page (Generic Desktop) */ + 0x09, 0x02, /* Usage (Mouse) */ + 0xA1, 0x01, /* Collection (Application) */ + 0x09, 0x01, /* Usage (Pointer) */ + 0xA1, 0x00, /* Collection (Application) */ + 0x95, 0x03, /* Report Count (3) */ + 0x75, 0x01, /* Report Size (1) */ + 0x05, 0x09, /* Usage Page (Button) */ + 0x19, 0x01, /* Usage Minimum (Button 1) */ + 0x29, 0x03, /* Usage Maximum (Button 3) */ + 0x15, 0x00, /* Logical Minimum (0) */ + 0x25, 0x01, /* Logical Maximum (1) */ + 0x81, 0x02, /* Input (Data, Variable, Absolute) */ + 0x95, 0x01, /* Report Count (1) */ + 0x75, 0x05, /* Report Size (5) */ + 0x81, 0x01, /* Input (Constant) */ + 0x75, 0x08, /* Report Size (8) */ + 0x95, 0x02, /* Report Count (2) */ + 0x05, 0x01, /* Usage Page (Generic Desktop Control) */ + 0x09, 0x30, /* Usage X */ + 0x09, 0x31, /* Usage Y */ + 0x15, 0x81, /* Logical Minimum (-127) */ + 0x25, 0x7F, /* Logical Maximum (127) */ + 0x81, 0x06, /* Input (Data, Variable, Relative) */ + 0xC0, /* End Collection */ + 0xC0 /* End Collection */ +}; + +/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall + * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the + * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration + * process begins. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor = +{ + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), Type: DTYPE_Device}, + + USBSpecification: VERSION_BCD(01.10), + Class: 0x00, + SubClass: 0x00, + Protocol: 0x00, + + Endpoint0Size: 8, + + VendorID: 0x03EB, + ProductID: 0x2041, + ReleaseNumber: 0x0000, + + ManufacturerStrIndex: 0x01, + ProductStrIndex: 0x02, + SerialNumStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + NumberOfConfigurations: 1 +}; + +/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage + * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces + * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting + * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor = +{ + Config: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), Type: DTYPE_Configuration}, + + TotalConfigurationSize: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t), + TotalInterfaces: 1, + + ConfigurationNumber: 1, + ConfigurationStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + ConfigAttributes: (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED), + + MaxPowerConsumption: USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100) + }, + + Interface: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface}, + + InterfaceNumber: 0x00, + AlternateSetting: 0x00, + + TotalEndpoints: 1, + + Class: 0x03, + SubClass: 0x01, + Protocol: 0x02, + + InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + MouseHID: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t), Type: DTYPE_HID}, + + HIDSpec: VERSION_BCD(01.11), + CountryCode: 0x00, + TotalHIDReports: 0x01, + HIDReportType: DTYPE_Report, + HIDReportLength: sizeof(MouseReport) + }, + + MouseEndpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | MOUSE_EPNUM), + Attributes: EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + EndpointSize: MOUSE_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0x02 + } +}; + +/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests + * the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate + * via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(1), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG} +}; + +/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable + * form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(11), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"Dean Camera" +}; + +/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form, + * and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(15), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"LUFA Mouse Demo" +}; + +/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see StdDescriptors.h + * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given + * to the USB library. When the device recieves a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function + * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the + * USB host. + */ +uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) +{ + const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8); + const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF); + + void* Address = NULL; + uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR; + + switch (DescriptorType) + { + case DTYPE_Device: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(DeviceDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Configuration: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t); + break; + case DTYPE_String: + switch (DescriptorNumber) + { + case 0x00: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(LanguageString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x01: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ManufacturerString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x02: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ProductString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size); + break; + } + + break; + case DTYPE_HID: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor.MouseHID); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Report: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(MouseReport); + Size = sizeof(MouseReport); + break; + } + + *DescriptorAddress = Address; + return Size; +} diff --git a/Demos/MouseViaInt/Descriptors.h b/Demos/MouseViaInt/Descriptors.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..3aea3164c1f --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MouseViaInt/Descriptors.h @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Descriptors.c. + */ + +#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_ +#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + + #include + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the HID class specific HID descriptor, to describe the HID device's specifications. Refer to the HID + * specification for details on the structure elements. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; + + uint16_t HIDSpec; + uint8_t CountryCode; + + uint8_t TotalHIDReports; + + uint8_t HIDReportType; + uint16_t HIDReportLength; + } USB_Descriptor_HID_t; + + /** Type define for the data type used to store HID report descriptor elements. */ + typedef uint8_t USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t; + + /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the + * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which + * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config; + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t Interface; + USB_Descriptor_HID_t MouseHID; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t MouseEndpoint; + } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t; + + /* Macros: */ + /** Endpoint number of the Mouse HID reporting IN endpoint. */ + #define MOUSE_EPNUM 1 + + /** Size in bytes of the Mouse HID reporting IN endpoint. */ + #define MOUSE_EPSIZE 8 + + /** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID descriptor. */ + #define DTYPE_HID 0x21 + + /** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID report descriptor. */ + #define DTYPE_Report 0x22 + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) + ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/MouseViaInt/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/MouseViaInt/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..3a36c2119a4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MouseViaInt/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Mouse Device Demo (Via Endpoint Interrupts)" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek, +# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish, +# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene, +# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command , where is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command , where +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Namespace. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file . + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are +# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values +# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list; +# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which +# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous +# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE +# respectively. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin" + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to the search engine +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be +# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO diff --git a/Demos/MouseViaInt/MouseViaInt.aps b/Demos/MouseViaInt/MouseViaInt.aps new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..02f8890e8e6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MouseViaInt/MouseViaInt.aps @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +MouseViaInt30-Sep-2008 14:16:2830-Sep-2008 14:16:44241030-Sep-2008 14:16:2844, 14, 0, 589AVR GCCC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\MouseViaInt\JTAGICE mkIIAT90USB1287.xmlfalseR00R01R02R03R04R05R06R07R08R09R10R11R12R13R14R15R16R17R18R19R20R21R22R23R24R25R26R27R28R29R30R31Auto000Descriptors.cMouseViaInt.cDescriptors.hMouseViaInt.hmakefiledefaultYESmakefileat90usb1287111MouseViaInt.elfdefault\1-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enumsdefault1C:\WinAVR-20080512\bin\avr-gcc.exeC:\WinAVR-20080512\utils\bin\make.exe diff --git a/Demos/MouseViaInt/MouseViaInt.c b/Demos/MouseViaInt/MouseViaInt.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..77e4c565e8a --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MouseViaInt/MouseViaInt.c @@ -0,0 +1,389 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the MouseViaInt demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and + * is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + +#include "MouseViaInt.h" + +/* Project Tags, for reading out using the ButtLoad project */ +BUTTLOADTAG(ProjName, "LUFA MouseI App"); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildTime, __TIME__); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildDate, __DATE__); +BUTTLOADTAG(LUFAVersion, "LUFA V" LUFA_VERSION_STRING); + +/* Scheduler Task List */ +TASK_LIST +{ + { Task: USB_USBTask , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, +}; + +/* Global Variables */ +/** Indicates what report mode the host has requested, true for normal HID reporting mode, false for special boot + * protocol reporting mode. + */ +bool UsingReportProtocol = true; + +/** Current Idle period. This is set by the host via a Set Idle HID class request to silence the device's reports + * for either the entire idle duration, or until the report status changes (e.g. the user moves the mouse). + */ +uint8_t IdleCount = 0; + +/** Current Idle period remaining. When the IdleCount value is set, this tracks the remaining number of idle + * milliseconds. This is seperate to the IdleCount timer and is incremented and compared as the host may request + * the current idle period via a Get Idle HID class request, thus its value must be preserved. + */ +uint16_t IdleMSRemaining = 0; + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then + * starts the scheduler to run the USB management task. + */ +int main(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable Clock Division */ + SetSystemClockPrescaler(0); + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + Joystick_Init(); + LEDs_Init(); + HWB_Init(); + + /* Millisecond timer initialization, with output compare interrupt enabled for the idle timing */ + OCR0A = 0x7D; + TCCR0A = (1 << WGM01); + TCCR0B = ((1 << CS01) | (1 << CS00)); + TIMSK0 = (1 << OCIE0A); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); + + /* Initialize Scheduler so that it can be used */ + Scheduler_Init(); + + /* Initialize USB Subsystem */ + USB_Init(); + + /* Scheduling - routine never returns, so put this last in the main function */ + Scheduler_Start(); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs and + * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Connect) +{ + /* Start USB management task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_RUN); + + /* Indicate USB enumerating */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBEnumerating); + + /* Default to report protocol on connect */ + UsingReportProtocol = true; +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via + * the status LEDs and stops the USB management task. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Disconnect) +{ + /* Stop running mouse reporting and USB management tasks */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_STOP); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host sets the current configuration + * of the USB device after enumeration, and configures the mouse device endpoints. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_ConfigurationChanged) +{ + /* Setup Mouse Report Endpoint */ + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(MOUSE_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, MOUSE_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + /* Enable the endpoint IN interrupt ISR for the report endpoint */ + USB_INT_Enable(ENDPOINT_INT_IN); + + /* Indicate USB connected and ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event. This is used to catch standard and class specific + * control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the HID commands, which are + * all issued via the control endpoint), so that they can be handled appropriately for the application. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_UnhandledControlPacket) +{ + /* Handle HID Class specific requests */ + switch (bRequest) + { + case REQ_GetReport: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + USB_MouseReport_Data_t MouseReportData; + + /* Create the next mouse report for transmission to the host */ + GetNextReport(&MouseReportData); + + /* Ignore report type and ID number value */ + Endpoint_Discard_Word(); + + /* Ignore unused Interface number value */ + Endpoint_Discard_Word(); + + /* Read in the number of bytes in the report to send to the host */ + uint16_t wLength = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(); + + /* If trying to send more bytes than exist to the host, clamp the value at the report size */ + if (wLength > sizeof(MouseReportData)) + wLength = sizeof(MouseReportData); + + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Write the report data to the control endpoint */ + Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(&MouseReportData, wLength); + + /* Clear the report data afterwards */ + memset(&MouseReportData, 0, sizeof(MouseReportData)); + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet or clear the host abort */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT(); + } + + break; + case REQ_GetProtocol: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Write the current protocol flag to the host */ + Endpoint_Write_Byte(UsingReportProtocol); + + /* Send the flag to the host */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + case REQ_SetProtocol: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + /* Read in the wValue parameter containing the new protocol mode */ + uint16_t wValue = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(); + + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Set or clear the flag depending on what the host indicates that the current Protocol should be */ + UsingReportProtocol = (wValue != 0x0000); + + /* Send an empty packet to acknowedge the command */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + case REQ_SetIdle: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + /* Read in the wValue parameter containing the idle period */ + uint16_t wValue = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(); + + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Get idle period in MSB */ + IdleCount = (wValue >> 8); + + /* Send an empty packet to acknowedge the command */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + case REQ_GetIdle: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Write the current idle duration to the host */ + Endpoint_Write_Byte(IdleCount); + + /* Send the flag to the host */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + } +} + +/** ISR for the timer 0 compare vector. This ISR fires once each millisecond, and increments the + * scheduler elapsed idle period counter when the host has set an idle period. + */ +ISR(TIMER0_COMPA_vect, ISR_BLOCK) +{ + /* One millisecond has elapsed, decrement the idle time remaining counter if it has not already elapsed */ + if (IdleMSRemaining) + IdleMSRemaining--; +} + +/** Fills the given HID report data structure with the next HID report to send to the host. + * + * \param ReportData Pointer to a HID report data structure to be filled + * + * \return Boolean true if the new report differs from the last report, false otherwise + */ +bool GetNextReport(USB_MouseReport_Data_t* ReportData) +{ + static uint8_t PrevJoyStatus = 0; + static bool PrevHWBStatus = false; + uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL = Joystick_GetStatus(); + bool InputChanged = false; + + /* Clear the report contents */ + memset(ReportData, 0, sizeof(USB_MouseReport_Data_t)); + + if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP) + ReportData->Y = -1; + else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN) + ReportData->Y = 1; + + if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT) + ReportData->X = 1; + else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT) + ReportData->X = -1; + + if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS) + ReportData->Button = (1 << 0); + + if (HWB_GetStatus()) + ReportData->Button |= (1 << 1); + + /* Check if the new report is different to the previous report */ + InputChanged = ((uint8_t)(PrevJoyStatus ^ JoyStatus_LCL) | (uint8_t)(HWB_GetStatus() ^ PrevHWBStatus)); + + /* Save the current joystick and HWB status for later comparison */ + PrevJoyStatus = JoyStatus_LCL; + PrevHWBStatus = HWB_GetStatus(); + + /* Return whether the new report is different to the previous report or not */ + return InputChanged; +} + +/** Function to manage status updates to the user. This is done via LEDs on the given board, if available, but may be changed to + * log to a serial port, or anything else that is suitable for status updates. + * + * \param CurrentStatus Current status of the system, from the MouseViaInt_StatusCodes_t enum + */ +void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus) +{ + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS; + + /* Set the LED mask to the appropriate LED mask based on the given status code */ + switch (CurrentStatus) + { + case Status_USBNotReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1); + break; + case Status_USBEnumerating: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2); + break; + case Status_USBReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4); + break; + } + + /* Set the board LEDs to the new LED mask */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); +} + +/** ISR for the general Pipe/Endpoint interrupt vector. This ISR fires when an endpoint's status changes (such as + * a packet has been received) on an endpoint with its corresponding ISR enabling bits set. This is used to send + * HID packets to the host each time the HID interrupt endpoints polling period elapses, as managed by the USB + * controller. + */ +ISR(ENDPOINT_PIPE_vect, ISR_BLOCK) +{ + /* Save previously selected endpoint before selecting a new endpoint */ + uint8_t PrevSelectedEndpoint = Endpoint_GetCurrentEndpoint(); + + /* Check if mouse endpoint has interrupted */ + if (Endpoint_HasEndpointInterrupted(MOUSE_EPNUM)) + { + USB_MouseReport_Data_t MouseReportData; + bool SendReport = true; + + /* Create the next mouse report for transmission to the host */ + GetNextReport(&MouseReportData); + + /* Check if the idle period is set*/ + if (IdleCount) + { + /* Determine if the idle period has elapsed */ + if (!(IdleMSRemaining)) + { + /* Reset the idle time remaining counter, must multiply by 4 to get the duration in milliseconds */ + IdleMSRemaining = (IdleCount << 2); + } + else + { + /* Idle period not elapsed, indicate that a report must not be sent */ + SendReport = false; + } + } + + /* Check to see if a report should be issued */ + if (SendReport) + { + /* Select the Mouse Report Endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MOUSE_EPNUM); + + /* Clear the endpoint IN interrupt flag */ + USB_INT_Clear(ENDPOINT_INT_IN); + + /* Clear the Mouse Report endpoint interrupt and select the endpoint */ + Endpoint_ClearEndpointInterrupt(MOUSE_EPNUM); + + /* Write Mouse Report Data */ + Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&MouseReportData, sizeof(MouseReportData)); + } + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + } + + /* Restore previously selected endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(PrevSelectedEndpoint); +} diff --git a/Demos/MouseViaInt/MouseViaInt.h b/Demos/MouseViaInt/MouseViaInt.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..6f4b9abe56d --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MouseViaInt/MouseViaInt.h @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for MouseViaInt.c. + */ + +#ifndef _MOUSE_H_ +#define _MOUSE_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + #include + #include + + #include "Descriptors.h" + + #include // Library Version Information + #include // PROGMEM tags readable by the ButtLoad project + #include // USB Functionality + #include // Joystick driver + #include // LEDs driver + #include // Hardware Button driver + + /* Macros: */ + /** HID Class specific request to get the next HID report from the device. */ + #define REQ_GetReport 0x01 + + /** HID Class specific request to get the idle timeout period of the device. */ + #define REQ_GetIdle 0x02 + + /** HID Class specific request to send the next HID report to the device. */ + #define REQ_SetReport 0x09 + + /** HID Class specific request to set the idle timeout period of the device. */ + #define REQ_SetIdle 0x0A + + /** HID Class specific request to get the current HID protocol in use, either report or boot. */ + #define REQ_GetProtocol 0x03 + + /** HID Class specific request to set the current HID protocol in use, either report or boot. */ + #define REQ_SetProtocol 0x0B + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the mouse HID report structure, for creating and sending HID reports to the host PC. + * This mirrors the layout described to the host in the HID report descriptor, in Descriptors.c. + */ + typedef struct + { + uint8_t Button; /**< Bit mask of the currently pressed mouse buttons */ + int8_t X; /**< Current mouse delta X movement, as a signed 8-bit integer */ + int8_t Y; /**< Current mouse delta Y movement, as a signed 8-bit integer */ + } USB_MouseReport_Data_t; + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible status codes for passing to the UpdateStatus() function. */ + enum MouseViaInt_StatusCodes_t + { + Status_USBNotReady = 0, /**< USB is not ready (disconnected from a USB host) */ + Status_USBEnumerating = 1, /**< USB interface is enumerating */ + Status_USBReady = 2, /**< USB interface is connected and ready */ + }; + + /* Event Handlers: */ + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Connect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Connect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Disconnect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Disconnect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_ConfigurationChanged event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_ConfigurationChanged); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_UnhandledControlPacket); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + bool GetNextReport(USB_MouseReport_Data_t* ReportData); + void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/MouseViaInt/MouseViaInt.txt b/Demos/MouseViaInt/MouseViaInt.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..f42c2b330f5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MouseViaInt/MouseViaInt.txt @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage Partially Interrupt Driven Mouse Device Demo + * + * Mouse demonstration application, using endpoint interrupts for the + * exchange of data to the USB host. This gives a simple reference + * application for implementing a USB Mouse using the basic USB HID + * drivers in all modern OSes (i.e. no special drivers required). It is + * boot protocol compatible, and thus works under compatible BIOS as if + * it was a native mouse (e.g. PS/2). + * + * On startup the system will automatically enumerate and function + * as a mouse when the USB connection to a host is present. To use + * the mouse, move the joystick to move the pointer, and push the + * joystick inwards to simulate a left-button click. The HWB serves as + * the right mouse button. + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + *
USB Mode:Device
USB Class:Human Interface Device (HID)
USB Subclass:N/A
Relevant Standards:USBIF HID Specification, USBIF HID Usage Tables
Usable Speeds:Low Speed Mode, Full Speed Mode
+ */ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Demos/MouseViaInt/makefile b/Demos/MouseViaInt/makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..0316b912d5f --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/MouseViaInt/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,703 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# Denver Gingerich +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb1287 + + +# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# Typical values are: +# F_CPU = 1000000 +# F_CPU = 1843200 +# F_CPU = 2000000 +# F_CPU = 3686400 +# F_CPU = 4000000 +# F_CPU = 7372800 +# F_CPU = 8000000 +# F_CPU = 11059200 +# F_CPU = 14745600 +# F_CPU = 16000000 +# F_CPU = 18432000 +# F_CPU = 20000000 +F_CPU = 8000000 + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = MouseViaInt + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + Descriptors.c \ + ../../LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.c \ + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = ../../ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS +CDEFS += -DUSB_DEVICE_ONLY -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)" + + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20 +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CFLAGS += -mshort-calls +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd +# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500 +# +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf +MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) ) +FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr ) + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +checkhooks: build + @echo + @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events ------- + @$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \ + cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \ + echo "(None)" + @echo ----- End Unhooked LUFA Events ----- + +checklibmode: + @echo + @echo ----------- Library Mode ----------- + @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \ + | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \ + || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)." + @echo ------------------------------------ + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + copy $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom --debug 1 $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end + +clean_binary: + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + +clean_list: + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode begin \ +finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \ +clean clean_list clean_binary program debug \ +gdb-config doxygen dfu flip diff --git a/Demos/RNDISEthernet/ARP.c b/Demos/RNDISEthernet/ARP.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..3560403f405 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/RNDISEthernet/ARP.c @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) packet handling routines. This protocol handles the + * conversion of physical MAC addresses to protocol IP addresses between the host and the + * device. + */ + +#include "ARP.h" + +/** Processes an ARP packet inside an Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response + * to the output Ethernet frame if the host is requesting the IP or MAC address of the + * virtual server device on the network. + * + * \param InDataStart Pointer to the start of the incomming packet's ARP header + * \param OutDataStart Pointer to the start of the outgoing packet's ARP header + * + * \return The number of bytes written to the out Ethernet frame if any, NO_RESPONSE otherwise + */ +int16_t ARP_ProcessARPPacket(void* InDataStart, void* OutDataStart) +{ + DecodeARPHeader(InDataStart); + + ARP_Header_t* ARPHeaderIN = (ARP_Header_t*)InDataStart; + ARP_Header_t* ARPHeaderOUT = (ARP_Header_t*)OutDataStart; + + /* Ensure that the ARP request is a IPv4 request packet */ + if ((SwapEndian_16(ARPHeaderIN->ProtocolType) == ETHERTYPE_IPV4) && + (SwapEndian_16(ARPHeaderIN->Operation) == ARP_OPERATION_REQUEST)) + { + /* If the ARP packet is requesting the MAC or IP of the virtual webserver, return the response */ + if (IP_COMPARE(&ARPHeaderIN->TPA, &ServerIPAddress) || + MAC_COMPARE(&ARPHeaderIN->THA, &ServerMACAddress)) + { + /* Fill out the ARP response header */ + ARPHeaderOUT->HardwareType = ARPHeaderIN->HardwareType; + ARPHeaderOUT->ProtocolType = ARPHeaderIN->ProtocolType; + ARPHeaderOUT->HLEN = ARPHeaderIN->HLEN; + ARPHeaderOUT->PLEN = ARPHeaderIN->PLEN; + ARPHeaderOUT->Operation = SwapEndian_16(ARP_OPERATION_REPLY); + + /* Copy over the sender MAC/IP to the target fields for the response */ + ARPHeaderOUT->THA = ARPHeaderIN->SHA; + ARPHeaderOUT->TPA = ARPHeaderIN->SPA; + + /* Copy over the new sender MAC/IP - MAC and IP addresses of the virtual webserver */ + ARPHeaderOUT->SHA = ServerMACAddress; + ARPHeaderOUT->SPA = ServerIPAddress; + + /* Return the size of the response so far */ + return sizeof(ARP_Header_t); + } + } + + return NO_RESPONSE; +} diff --git a/Demos/RNDISEthernet/ARP.h b/Demos/RNDISEthernet/ARP.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..8551df85b26 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/RNDISEthernet/ARP.h @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for ARP.c. + */ + +#ifndef _ARP_H_ +#define _ARP_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + + #include + + #include "EthernetProtocols.h" + #include "Ethernet.h" + #include "ProtocolDecoders.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** ARP header operation constant, indicating a request from a host for an address translation */ + #define ARP_OPERATION_REQUEST 1 + + /** ARP header operation constant, indicating a reply from a host giving an address translation */ + #define ARP_OPERATION_REPLY 2 + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for an ARP packet inside an Ethernet frame. */ + typedef struct + { + uint16_t HardwareType; /**< Hardware type constant, indicating the hardware used */ + uint16_t ProtocolType; /**< Protocol being resolved, usually ETHERTYPE_IPV4 */ + + uint8_t HLEN; /**< Length in bytes of the source/destination hardware addresses */ + uint8_t PLEN; /**< Length in bytes of the source/destination protocol addresses */ + uint16_t Operation; /**< Type of operation, either ARP_OPERATION_REQUEST or ARP_OPERATION_REPLY */ + + MAC_Address_t SHA; /**< Sender's hardware address */ + IP_Address_t SPA; /**< Sender's protocol address */ + MAC_Address_t THA; /**< Target's hardware address */ + IP_Address_t TPA; /**< Target's protocol address */ + } ARP_Header_t; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + int16_t ARP_ProcessARPPacket(void* InDataStart, void* OutDataStart); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/RNDISEthernet/DHCP.c b/Demos/RNDISEthernet/DHCP.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..7f220c423ff --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/RNDISEthernet/DHCP.c @@ -0,0 +1,118 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) packet handling routines. This protocol + * handles the automatic IP negotiation to the host, so that the host will use the provided + * IP address given to it by the device. + */ + +#include "DHCP.h" + +/** Processes a DHCP packet inside an Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response + * to the output Ethernet frame if the host is requesting or accepting an IP address. + * + * \param IPHeaderInStart Pointer to the start of the incomming packet's IP header + * \param DHCPHeaderInStart Pointer to the start of the incomming packet's DHCP header + * \param DHCPHeaderOutStart Pointer to the start of the outgoing packet's DHCP header + * + * \return The number of bytes written to the out Ethernet frame if any, NO_RESPONSE otherwise + */ +int16_t DHCP_ProcessDHCPPacket(void* IPHeaderInStart, void* DHCPHeaderInStart, void* DHCPHeaderOutStart) +{ + IP_Header_t* IPHeaderIN = (IP_Header_t*)IPHeaderInStart; + DHCP_Header_t* DHCPHeaderIN = (DHCP_Header_t*)DHCPHeaderInStart; + DHCP_Header_t* DHCPHeaderOUT = (DHCP_Header_t*)DHCPHeaderOutStart; + + uint8_t* DHCPOptionsINStart = (uint8_t*)(DHCPHeaderInStart + sizeof(DHCP_Header_t)); + uint8_t* DHCPOptionsOUTStart = (uint8_t*)(DHCPHeaderOutStart + sizeof(DHCP_Header_t)); + + DecodeDHCPHeader(DHCPHeaderInStart); + + /* Zero out the response DHCP packet, as much of it legacy and left at 0 */ + memset(DHCPHeaderOUT, 0, sizeof(DHCP_Header_t)); + + /* Fill out the response DHCP packet */ + DHCPHeaderOUT->HardwareType = DHCPHeaderIN->HardwareType; + DHCPHeaderOUT->Operation = DHCP_OP_BOOTREPLY; + DHCPHeaderOUT->HardwareAddressLength = DHCPHeaderIN->HardwareAddressLength; + DHCPHeaderOUT->Hops = 0; + DHCPHeaderOUT->TransactionID = DHCPHeaderIN->TransactionID; + DHCPHeaderOUT->ElapsedSeconds = 0; + DHCPHeaderOUT->Flags = DHCPHeaderIN->Flags; + DHCPHeaderOUT->YourIP = ClientIPAddress; + memcpy(&DHCPHeaderOUT->ClientHardwareAddress, &DHCPHeaderIN->ClientHardwareAddress, sizeof(MAC_Address_t)); + DHCPHeaderOUT->Cookie = SwapEndian_32(DHCP_MAGIC_COOKIE); + + /* Alter the incomming IP packet header so that the corrected IP source and destinations are used - this means that + when the response IP header is generated, it will use the corrected addresses and not the null/broatcast addresses */ + IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress = ClientIPAddress; + IPHeaderIN->DestinationAddress = ServerIPAddress; + + /* Process the incomming DHCP packet options */ + while (DHCPOptionsINStart[0] != DHCP_OPTION_END) + { + /* Find the Message Type DHCP option, to determine the type of DHCP packet */ + if (DHCPOptionsINStart[0] == DHCP_OPTION_MESSAGETYPE) + { + if ((DHCPOptionsINStart[2] == DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_DISCOVER) || (DHCPOptionsINStart[2] == DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_REQUEST)) + { + /* Fill out the response DHCP packet options for a DHCP OFFER or ACK response */ + + *(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = DHCP_OPTION_MESSAGETYPE; + *(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = 1; + *(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = (DHCPOptionsINStart[2] == DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_DISCOVER) ? DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_OFFER + : DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_ACK; + + *(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = DHCP_OPTION_SUBNETMASK; + *(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = 4; + *(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = 0xFF; + *(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = 0xFF; + *(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = 0xFF; + *(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = 0x00; + + *(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = DHCP_OPTION_DHCPSERVER; + *(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = sizeof(IP_Address_t); + memcpy(DHCPOptionsOUTStart, &ServerIPAddress, sizeof(IP_Address_t)); + DHCPOptionsOUTStart += sizeof(IP_Address_t); + + *(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = DHCP_OPTION_END; + + return (sizeof(DHCP_Header_t) + 12 + sizeof(IP_Address_t)); + } + } + + /* Go to the next DHCP option - skip one byte if option is a padding byte, else skip the complete option's size */ + DHCPOptionsINStart += ((DHCPOptionsINStart[0] == DHCP_OPTION_PAD) ? 1 : (DHCPOptionsINStart[1] + 2)); + } + + return NO_RESPONSE; +} diff --git a/Demos/RNDISEthernet/DHCP.h b/Demos/RNDISEthernet/DHCP.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..f1e14e196a7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/RNDISEthernet/DHCP.h @@ -0,0 +1,125 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for DHCP.c. + */ + +#ifndef _DHCP_H_ +#define _DHCP_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + + #include "EthernetProtocols.h" + #include "Ethernet.h" + #include "ProtocolDecoders.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** DHCP operation constant, indicating a request from a host to a DHCP server */ + #define DHCP_OP_BOOTREQUEST 0x01 + + /** DHCP operation constant, indicating a reply from a DHCP server to a host */ + #define DHCP_OP_BOOTREPLY 0x02 + + /** Hardware type constant, indicating Ethernet as a carrier */ + #define DHCP_HTYPE_ETHERNET 0x01 + + /** Magic boot protocol "cookie", inserted into all BOOTP packets (BOOTP is the carrier of DHCP) */ + #define DHCP_MAGIC_COOKIE 0x63825363 + + /** DHCP option list entry header, indicating that a subnet mask will follow */ + #define DHCP_OPTION_SUBNETMASK 1 + + /** DHCP option list entry header, indicating that the DHCP message type constant will follow */ + #define DHCP_OPTION_MESSAGETYPE 53 + + /** DHCP option list entry header, indicating that the IP address of the DHCP server will follow */ + #define DHCP_OPTION_DHCPSERVER 54 + + /** DHCP option list entry header, used to pad out option data */ + #define DHCP_OPTION_PAD 0 + + /** DHCP option list entry header, indicating the end of option data */ + #define DHCP_OPTION_END 255 + + /** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, requesting that a DHCP server offer an IP address */ + #define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_DISCOVER 1 + + /** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, indicating that a DHCP server is offering an IP address */ + #define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_OFFER 2 + + /** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, requesting that a DHCP server lease a given IP address */ + #define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_REQUEST 3 + + /** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, declining an offered DHCP server IP address lease */ + #define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_DECLINE 4 + + /** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, ACKing a host IP lease request */ + #define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_ACK 5 + + /** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, NACKing a host IP lease request */ + #define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_NACK 6 + + /** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, indicating that a host is releasing a leased IP address */ + #define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_RELEASE 7 + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for a DHCP packet inside an Ethernet frame. */ + typedef struct + { + uint8_t Operation; /**< DHCP operation, either DHCP_OP_BOOTREQUEST or DHCP_OP_BOOTREPLY */ + uint8_t HardwareType; /**< Hardware carrier type constant */ + uint8_t HardwareAddressLength; /**< Length in bytes of a hardware (MAC) address on the network */ + uint8_t Hops; /**< Number of hops required to reach the server, unused */ + + uint32_t TransactionID; /**< Unique ID of the DHCP packet, for postive matching between sent and recieved packets */ + + uint16_t ElapsedSeconds; /**< Elapsed seconds since the request was made */ + uint16_t Flags; /**< BOOTP packet flags */ + + IP_Address_t ClientIP; /**< Client IP address, if already leased an IP */ + IP_Address_t YourIP; /**< Client IP address */ + IP_Address_t NextServerIP; /**< Legacy BOOTP protocol field, unused for DHCP */ + IP_Address_t RelayAgentIP; /**< Legacy BOOTP protocol field, unused for DHCP */ + + uint8_t ClientHardwareAddress[16]; /**< Hardware (MAC) address of the client making a request to the DHCP server */ + uint8_t ServerHostnameString[64]; /**< Legacy BOOTP protocol field, unused for DHCP */ + uint8_t BootFileName[128]; /**< Legacy BOOTP protocol field, unused for DHCP */ + + uint32_t Cookie; /**< Magic BOOTP protocol cookie to indicate a valid packet */ + } DHCP_Header_t; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + int16_t DHCP_ProcessDHCPPacket(void* IPHeaderInStart, void* DHCPHeaderInStart, void* DHCPHeaderOutStart); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/RNDISEthernet/Descriptors.c b/Demos/RNDISEthernet/Descriptors.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..1994c601ca0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/RNDISEthernet/Descriptors.c @@ -0,0 +1,263 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special + * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine + * the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "Descriptors.h" + +/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall + * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the + * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration + * process begins. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor = +{ + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), Type: DTYPE_Device}, + + USBSpecification: VERSION_BCD(01.10), + Class: 0x02, + SubClass: 0x00, + Protocol: 0x00, + + Endpoint0Size: 8, + + VendorID: 0x03EB, + ProductID: 0x204C, + ReleaseNumber: 0x0000, + + ManufacturerStrIndex: 0x01, + ProductStrIndex: 0x02, + SerialNumStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + NumberOfConfigurations: 1 +}; + +/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage + * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces + * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting + * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor = +{ + Config: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), Type: DTYPE_Configuration}, + + TotalConfigurationSize: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t), + TotalInterfaces: 2, + + ConfigurationNumber: 1, + ConfigurationStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + ConfigAttributes: (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED), + + MaxPowerConsumption: USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100) + }, + + CCI_Interface: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface}, + + InterfaceNumber: 0, + AlternateSetting: 0, + + TotalEndpoints: 1, + + Class: 0x02, + SubClass: 0x02, + Protocol: 0xFF, + + InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + CDC_Functional_Header: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), Type: 0x24}, + SubType: 0x00, + + Data: {0x01, 0x10} + }, + + CDC_Functional_CallManagement: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), Type: 0x24}, + SubType: 0x01, + + Data: {0x00, 0x00} + }, + + CDC_Functional_AbstractControlManagement: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)), Type: 0x24}, + SubType: 0x02, + + Data: {0x00} + }, + + CDC_Functional_Union: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), Type: 0x24}, + SubType: 0x06, + + Data: {0x00, 0x01} + }, + + ManagementEndpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM), + Attributes: EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + EndpointSize: CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0x02 + }, + + DCI_Interface: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface}, + + InterfaceNumber: 1, + AlternateSetting: 0, + + TotalEndpoints: 2, + + Class: 0x0A, + SubClass: 0x00, + Protocol: 0x00, + + InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + DataOutEndpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | CDC_RX_EPNUM), + Attributes: EP_TYPE_BULK, + EndpointSize: CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0x00 + }, + + DataInEndpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_TX_EPNUM), + Attributes: EP_TYPE_BULK, + EndpointSize: CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0x00 + } +}; + +/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests + * the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate + * via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(1), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG} +}; + +/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable + * form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(11), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"Dean Camera" +}; + +/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form, + * and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(19), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"LUFA RNDIS CDC Demo" +}; + +/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see StdDescriptors.h + * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given + * to the USB library. When the device recieves a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function + * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the + * USB host. + */ +uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) +{ + const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8); + const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF); + + void* Address = NULL; + uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR; + + switch (DescriptorType) + { + case DTYPE_Device: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(DeviceDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Configuration: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t); + break; + case DTYPE_String: + switch (DescriptorNumber) + { + case 0x00: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(LanguageString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x01: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ManufacturerString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x02: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ProductString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size); + break; + } + + break; + } + + *DescriptorAddress = Address; + return Size; +} diff --git a/Demos/RNDISEthernet/Descriptors.h b/Demos/RNDISEthernet/Descriptors.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..070c118d682 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/RNDISEthernet/Descriptors.h @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Descriptors.c. + */ + +#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_ +#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + + #include + + /* Macros: */ + /** Macro to define a CDC class-specific functional descriptor. CDC functional descriptors have a + * uniform structure but variable sized data payloads, thus cannot be represented accurately by + * a single typedef struct. A macro is used instead so that functional descriptors can be created + * easily by specifying the size of the payload. This allows sizeof() to work correctly. + * + * \param DataSize Size in bytes of the CDC functional descriptor's data payload + */ + #define CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(DataSize) \ + struct \ + { \ + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; \ + uint8_t SubType; \ + uint8_t Data[DataSize]; \ + } + + /** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */ + #define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM 3 + + /** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host data IN endpoint. */ + #define CDC_TX_EPNUM 1 + + /** Endpoint number of the CDC host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */ + #define CDC_RX_EPNUM 2 + + /** Size in bytes of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */ + #define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE 8 + + /** Size in bytes of the CDC data IN and OUT endpoints. */ + #define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE 64 + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the + * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which + * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config; + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t CCI_Interface; + CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2) CDC_Functional_Header; + CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2) CDC_Functional_CallManagement; + CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1) CDC_Functional_AbstractControlManagement; + CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2) CDC_Functional_Union; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t ManagementEndpoint; + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t DCI_Interface; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t DataOutEndpoint; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t DataInEndpoint; + } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) + ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/RNDISEthernet/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/RNDISEthernet/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..9d7973b789c --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/RNDISEthernet/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - RNDIS Ethernet Demo" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek, +# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish, +# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene, +# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command , where is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command , where +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Namespace. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file . + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are +# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values +# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list; +# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which +# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous +# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE +# respectively. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin" + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to the search engine +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be +# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO diff --git a/Demos/RNDISEthernet/Ethernet.c b/Demos/RNDISEthernet/Ethernet.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..b8d56150961 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/RNDISEthernet/Ethernet.c @@ -0,0 +1,136 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Ethernet frame packet handling routines. This protocol handles the processing of raw Ethernet + * frames sent and receieved, deferring the processing of subpacket protocols to the appropriate + * protocol handlers, such as DHCP or ARP. + */ + +#include "Ethernet.h" + +/* Global Variables: */ +/** Ethernet Frame buffer structure, to hold the incomming Ethernet frame from the host. */ +Ethernet_Frame_Info_t FrameIN; + +/** Ethernet Frame buffer structure, to hold the outgoing Ethernet frame to the host. */ +Ethernet_Frame_Info_t FrameOUT; + +/** Constant for convenience when checking against or setting a MAC address to the virtual server MAC address. */ +const MAC_Address_t ServerMACAddress = {SERVER_MAC_ADDRESS}; + +/** Constant for convenience when checking against or setting an IP address to the virtual server IP address. */ +const IP_Address_t ServerIPAddress = {SERVER_IP_ADDRESS}; + +/** Constant for convenience when checking against or setting a MAC address to the broadcast MAC address. */ +const MAC_Address_t BroadcastMACAddress = {BROADCAST_MAC_ADDRESS}; + +/** Constant for convenience when checking against or setting a IP address to the broadcast IP address. */ +const IP_Address_t BroadcastIPAddress = {BROADCAST_IP_ADDRESS}; + +/** Constant for convenience when checking against or setting an IP address to the client (host) IP address. */ +const IP_Address_t ClientIPAddress = {CLIENT_IP_ADDRESS}; + + +/** Processes an incomming Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response to the output Ethernet + * frame buffer if the sub protocol handlers create a valid response. + */ +void Ethernet_ProcessPacket(void) +{ + DecodeEthernetFrameHeader(FrameIN.FrameData); + + /* Cast the incomming Ethernet frame to the Ethernet header type */ + Ethernet_Frame_Header_t* FrameINHeader = (Ethernet_Frame_Header_t*)&FrameIN.FrameData; + Ethernet_Frame_Header_t* FrameOUTHeader = (Ethernet_Frame_Header_t*)&FrameOUT.FrameData; + + int16_t RetSize = NO_RESPONSE; + + /* Ensure frame is addressed to either all (broadcast) or the virtual webserver, and is a type II frame */ + if ((MAC_COMPARE(&FrameINHeader->Destination, &ServerMACAddress) || + MAC_COMPARE(&FrameINHeader->Destination, &BroadcastMACAddress)) && + (SwapEndian_16(FrameIN.FrameLength) > ETHERNET_VER2_MINSIZE)) + { + /* Process the packet depending on its protocol */ + switch (SwapEndian_16(FrameINHeader->EtherType)) + { + case ETHERTYPE_ARP: + RetSize = ARP_ProcessARPPacket(&FrameIN.FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t)], + &FrameOUT.FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t)]); + break; + case ETHERTYPE_IPV4: + RetSize = IP_ProcessIPPacket(&FrameIN.FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t)], + &FrameOUT.FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t)]); + break; + } + + /* Protcol processing routine has filled a response, complete the ethernet frame header */ + if (RetSize > 0) + { + /* Fill out the response Ethernet frame header */ + FrameOUTHeader->Source = ServerMACAddress; + FrameOUTHeader->Destination = FrameINHeader->Source; + FrameOUTHeader->EtherType = FrameINHeader->EtherType; + + /* Set the response length in the buffer and indicate that a response is ready to be sent */ + FrameOUT.FrameLength = (sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t) + RetSize); + FrameOUT.FrameInBuffer = true; + } + } + + /* Check if the packet was processed */ + if (RetSize != NO_PROCESS) + { + /* Clear the frame buffer */ + FrameIN.FrameInBuffer = false; + } +} + +/** Calculates the appropriate ethernet checksum, consisting of the addition of the one's + * compliment of each word, complimented. + * + * \param Data Pointer to the packet buffer data whose checksum must be calculated + * \param Bytes Number of bytes in the data buffer to process + * + * \return A 16-bit Ethernet checksum value + */ +uint16_t Ethernet_Checksum16(void* Data, uint16_t Bytes) +{ + uint16_t* Words = (uint16_t*)Data; + uint32_t Checksum = 0; + + for (uint8_t CurrWord = 0; CurrWord < (Bytes >> 1); CurrWord++) + Checksum += Words[CurrWord]; + + while (Checksum & 0xFFFF0000) + Checksum = ((Checksum & 0xFFFF) + (Checksum >> 16)); + + return ~Checksum; +} diff --git a/Demos/RNDISEthernet/Ethernet.h b/Demos/RNDISEthernet/Ethernet.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..23fc325a5d5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/RNDISEthernet/Ethernet.h @@ -0,0 +1,116 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Ethernet.c. + */ + +#ifndef _ETHERNET_H_ +#define _ETHERNET_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + + #include "EthernetProtocols.h" + #include "ProtocolDecoders.h" + #include "ICMP.h" + #include "TCP.h" + #include "UDP.h" + #include "DHCP.h" + #include "ARP.h" + #include "IP.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Physical MAC address of the virtual server on the network */ + #define SERVER_MAC_ADDRESS {0x00, 0x01, 0x00, 0x01, 0x00, 0x01} + + /** Physical MAC address of the network broadcast address */ + #define BROADCAST_MAC_ADDRESS {0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF} + + /** Performs a comparison between two MAC addresses, indicating if they are identical. + * + * \param MAC1 First MAC address + * \param MAC2 Second MAC address + * + * \return True if the addresses match, false otherwise + */ + #define MAC_COMPARE(MAC1, MAC2) (memcmp(MAC1, MAC2, sizeof(MAC_Address_t)) == 0) + + /** Maximum size of an incomming or outgoing Ethernet frame in bytes */ + #define ETHERNET_FRAME_SIZE_MAX 1500 + + /** Minimum size of an Ethernet packet in bytes, to conform to the Ethernet V2 packet standard */ + #define ETHERNET_VER2_MINSIZE 0x0600 + + /** Return value for all sub protocol handling routines, indicating that no response packet has been generated */ + #define NO_RESPONSE 0 + + /** Return value for all sub protocol handling routines, indicating that the packet has not yet been handled */ + #define NO_PROCESS -1 + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for an Ethernet frame buffer. */ + typedef struct + { + uint8_t FrameData[ETHERNET_FRAME_SIZE_MAX]; /**< Ethernet frame contents */ + uint16_t FrameLength; /**< Length in bytes of the Ethernet frame stored in the buffer */ + bool FrameInBuffer; /**< Indicates if a frame is currently stored in the buffer */ + } Ethernet_Frame_Info_t; + + /** Type define for an Ethernet frame header */ + typedef struct + { + MAC_Address_t Destination; /**< Physical MAC address of the packet recipient */ + MAC_Address_t Source; /**< Physics MAC address of the packet source */ + + union + { + uint16_t EtherType; /**< Ethernet packet subprotocol type, for Ethernet V2 packets */ + uint16_t Length; /**< Ethernet frame length, for Ethernet V1 packets */ + }; + } Ethernet_Frame_Header_t; + + /* External Variables: */ + extern Ethernet_Frame_Info_t FrameIN; + extern Ethernet_Frame_Info_t FrameOUT; + + extern const MAC_Address_t ServerMACAddress; + extern const IP_Address_t ServerIPAddress; + extern const MAC_Address_t BroadcastMACAddress; + extern const IP_Address_t BroadcastIPAddress; + extern const IP_Address_t ClientIPAddress; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void Ethernet_ProcessPacket(void); + uint16_t Ethernet_Checksum16(void* Data, uint16_t Bytes); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/RNDISEthernet/EthernetProtocols.h b/Demos/RNDISEthernet/EthernetProtocols.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..3ff3433ae87 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/RNDISEthernet/EthernetProtocols.h @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * General Ethernet protocol constants and type defines, for use by + * all network protocol portions of the TCP/IP stack. + */ + +#ifndef _ETHERNET_PROTOCOLS_H_ +#define _ETHERNET_PROTOCOLS_H_ + + /* Macros: */ + #define ETHERTYPE_IPV4 0x0800 + #define ETHERTYPE_ARP 0x0806 + #define ETHERTYPE_RARP 0x8035 + #define ETHERTYPE_APPLETALK 0x809b + #define ETHERTYPE_APPLETALKARP 0x80f3 + #define ETHERTYPE_IEEE8021Q 0x8100 + #define ETHERTYPE_NOVELLIPX 0x8137 + #define ETHERTYPE_NOVELL 0x8138 + #define ETHERTYPE_IPV6 0x86DD + #define ETHERTYPE_COBRANET 0x8819 + #define ETHERTYPE_PROVIDERBRIDGING 0x88a8 + #define ETHERTYPE_MPLSUNICAST 0x8847 + #define ETHERTYPE_MPLSMULTICAST 0x8848 + #define ETHERTYPE_PPPoEDISCOVERY 0x8863 + #define ETHERTYPE_PPPoESESSION 0x8864 + #define ETHERTYPE_EAPOVERLAN 0x888E + #define ETHERTYPE_HYPERSCSI 0x889A + #define ETHERTYPE_ATAOVERETHERNET 0x88A2 + #define ETHERTYPE_ETHERCAT 0x88A4 + #define ETHERTYPE_SERCOSIII 0x88CD + #define ETHERTYPE_CESoE 0x88D8 + #define ETHERTYPE_MACSECURITY 0x88E5 + #define ETHERTYPE_FIBRECHANNEL 0x8906 + #define ETHERTYPE_QINQ 0x9100 + #define ETHERTYPE_VLLT 0xCAFE + + #define PROTOCOL_ICMP 1 + #define PROTOCOL_IGMP 2 + #define PROTOCOL_TCP 6 + #define PROTOCOL_UDP 17 + #define PROTOCOL_OSPF 89 + #define PROTOCOL_SCTP 132 + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for a physical MAC address of a device on a network */ + typedef struct + { + uint8_t Octets[6]; /**< Individual bytes of a MAC address */ + } MAC_Address_t; + + /** Type define for a protocol IP address of a device on a network */ + typedef struct + { + uint8_t Octets[4]; /**< Individual bytes of an IP address */ + } IP_Address_t; + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/RNDISEthernet/ICMP.c b/Demos/RNDISEthernet/ICMP.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..a15564059e9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/RNDISEthernet/ICMP.c @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) packet handling routines. This protocol handles + * Echo requests from the host, to indicate a successful network connection between the host + * and the virtual server. + */ + +#include "ICMP.h" + +/** Processes an ICMP packet inside an Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response + * to the output Ethernet frame if the host is issuing a ICMP ECHO request. + * + * \param InDataStart Pointer to the start of the incomming packet's ICMP header + * \param OutDataStart Pointer to the start of the outgoing packet's ICMP header + * + * \return The number of bytes written to the out Ethernet frame if any, NO_RESPONSE otherwise + */ +int16_t ICMP_ProcessICMPPacket(void* InDataStart, void* OutDataStart) +{ + ICMP_Header_t* ICMPHeaderIN = (ICMP_Header_t*)InDataStart; + ICMP_Header_t* ICMPHeaderOUT = (ICMP_Header_t*)OutDataStart; + + DecodeICMPHeader(InDataStart); + + /* Determine if the ICMP packet is an echo request (ping) */ + if (ICMPHeaderIN->Type == ICMP_TYPE_ECHOREQUEST) + { + /* Fill out the ICMP response packet */ + ICMPHeaderOUT->Type = ICMP_TYPE_ECHOREPLY; + ICMPHeaderOUT->Code = 0; + ICMPHeaderOUT->Checksum = 0; + ICMPHeaderOUT->Id = ICMPHeaderIN->Id; + ICMPHeaderOUT->Sequence = ICMPHeaderIN->Sequence; + + uint16_t DataSize = FrameIN.FrameLength - ((((uint16_t)InDataStart + sizeof(ICMP_Header_t)) - (uint16_t)FrameIN.FrameData)); + + /* Copy the remaining payload to the response - echo requests should echo back any sent data */ + memcpy(&((uint8_t*)OutDataStart)[sizeof(ICMP_Header_t)], + &((uint8_t*)InDataStart)[sizeof(ICMP_Header_t)], + DataSize); + + ICMPHeaderOUT->Checksum = Ethernet_Checksum16(ICMPHeaderOUT, (DataSize + sizeof(ICMP_Header_t))); + + /* Return the size of the response so far */ + return (DataSize + sizeof(ICMP_Header_t)); + } + + return NO_RESPONSE; +} diff --git a/Demos/RNDISEthernet/ICMP.h b/Demos/RNDISEthernet/ICMP.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..b20a557e9cc --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/RNDISEthernet/ICMP.h @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for ICMP.c. + */ + +#ifndef _ICMP_H_ +#define _ICMP_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + + #include "EthernetProtocols.h" + #include "Ethernet.h" + #include "ProtocolDecoders.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** ICMP message type constant, indicating an ICMP ECHO Reply message */ + #define ICMP_TYPE_ECHOREPLY 0 + + /** ICMP message type constant, indicating a packet destination is unreachable */ + #define ICMP_TYPE_DESTINATIONUNREACHABLE 3 + + /** ICMP message type constant, indicating an ICMP Source Quench message */ + #define ICMP_TYPE_SOURCEQUENCH 4 + + /** ICMP message type constant, indicating an ICMP Redirect message */ + #define ICMP_TYPE_REDIRECTMESSAGE 5 + + /** ICMP message type constant, indicating an ICMP ECHO Request message */ + #define ICMP_TYPE_ECHOREQUEST 8 + + /** ICMP message type constant, indicating an ICMP Time Exceeded message */ + #define ICMP_TYPE_TIMEEXCEEDED 11 + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for an ICMP message header. */ + typedef struct + { + uint8_t Type; /**< ICMP message type, a ICMP_TYPE_* constant */ + uint8_t Code; /**< ICMP message code, indicating the message value */ + uint16_t Checksum; /**< Ethernet checksum of the ICMP message */ + uint16_t Id; /**< Id of the ICMP message */ + uint16_t Sequence; /**< Sequence number of the ICMP message, to link together message responses */ + } ICMP_Header_t; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + int16_t ICMP_ProcessICMPPacket(void* InDataStart, void* OutDataStart); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/RNDISEthernet/IP.c b/Demos/RNDISEthernet/IP.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..65875bb0a47 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/RNDISEthernet/IP.c @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Internet Protocol (IP) packet handling routines. This protocol handles IP packets from the + * host which typically encapsulate other protocols such as ICMP, UDP and TCP. + */ + +#include "IP.h" + +/** Processes an IP packet inside an Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response + * to the output Ethernet frame if one is created by a subprotocol handler. + * + * \param InDataStart Pointer to the start of the incomming packet's IP header + * \param OutDataStart Pointer to the start of the outgoing packet's IP header + * + * \return The number of bytes written to the out Ethernet frame if any, NO_RESPONSE if no + * response was generated, NO_PROCESS if the packet processing was deferred until the + * next Ethernet packet handler iteration + */ +int16_t IP_ProcessIPPacket(void* InDataStart, void* OutDataStart) +{ + DecodeIPHeader(InDataStart); + + IP_Header_t* IPHeaderIN = (IP_Header_t*)InDataStart; + IP_Header_t* IPHeaderOUT = (IP_Header_t*)OutDataStart; + + /* Header length is specified in number of longs in the packet header, convert to bytes */ + uint16_t HeaderLengthBytes = (IPHeaderIN->HeaderLength * sizeof(uint32_t)); + + int16_t RetSize = NO_RESPONSE; + + /* Check to ensure the IP packet is addressed to the virtual webserver's IP or the broadcast IP address */ + if (!(IP_COMPARE(&IPHeaderIN->DestinationAddress, &ServerIPAddress)) && + !(IP_COMPARE(&IPHeaderIN->DestinationAddress, &BroadcastIPAddress))) + { + return NO_RESPONSE; + } + + /* Pass off the IP payload to the appropriate protocol processing routine */ + switch (IPHeaderIN->Protocol) + { + case PROTOCOL_ICMP: + RetSize = ICMP_ProcessICMPPacket(&((uint8_t*)InDataStart)[HeaderLengthBytes], + &((uint8_t*)OutDataStart)[sizeof(IP_Header_t)]); + break; + case PROTOCOL_TCP: + RetSize = TCP_ProcessTCPPacket(InDataStart, + &((uint8_t*)InDataStart)[HeaderLengthBytes], + &((uint8_t*)OutDataStart)[sizeof(IP_Header_t)]); + break; + case PROTOCOL_UDP: + RetSize = UDP_ProcessUDPPacket(InDataStart, + &((uint8_t*)InDataStart)[HeaderLengthBytes], + &((uint8_t*)OutDataStart)[sizeof(IP_Header_t)]); + break; + } + + /* Check to see if the protocol processing routine has filled out a response */ + if (RetSize > 0) + { + /* Fill out the response IP packet header */ + IPHeaderOUT->TotalLength = SwapEndian_16(sizeof(IP_Header_t) + RetSize); + IPHeaderOUT->TypeOfService = 0; + IPHeaderOUT->HeaderLength = (sizeof(IP_Header_t) / sizeof(uint32_t)); + IPHeaderOUT->Version = 4; + IPHeaderOUT->Flags = 0; + IPHeaderOUT->FragmentOffset = 0; + IPHeaderOUT->Identification = 0; + IPHeaderOUT->HeaderChecksum = 0; + IPHeaderOUT->Protocol = IPHeaderIN->Protocol; + IPHeaderOUT->TTL = DEFAULT_TTL; + IPHeaderOUT->SourceAddress = IPHeaderIN->DestinationAddress; + IPHeaderOUT->DestinationAddress = IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress; + + IPHeaderOUT->HeaderChecksum = Ethernet_Checksum16(IPHeaderOUT, sizeof(IP_Header_t)); + + /* Return the size of the response so far */ + return (sizeof(IP_Header_t) + RetSize); + } + + return RetSize; +} diff --git a/Demos/RNDISEthernet/IP.h b/Demos/RNDISEthernet/IP.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..119d219e2e8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/RNDISEthernet/IP.h @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for IP.c. + */ + +#ifndef _IP_H_ +#define _IP_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + + #include "EthernetProtocols.h" + #include "Ethernet.h" + #include "ProtocolDecoders.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Protocol IP address of the host (client) machine, once assigned by DHCP */ + #define CLIENT_IP_ADDRESS { 10, 0, 0, 1} + + /** Protocol IP address of the virtual server machine */ + #define SERVER_IP_ADDRESS { 10, 0, 0, 2} + + /** Protocol IP address of the broadcase address */ + #define BROADCAST_IP_ADDRESS {0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF} + + /** Default Time To Live (TTL) value for sent packets, indicating the maximum allowable hops until their destination is reached */ + #define DEFAULT_TTL 128 + + /** Performs a comparison between two IP addresses, indicating if they are identical. + * + * \param IP1 First IP address + * \param IP2 Second IP address + * + * \return True if the addresses match, false otherwise + */ + #define IP_COMPARE(IP1, IP2) (memcmp(IP1, IP2, sizeof(IP_Address_t)) == 0) + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define of an IP packet header. */ + typedef struct + { + unsigned int HeaderLength : 4; /**< Total length of the packet header, in 4-byte blocks */ + unsigned int Version : 4; /**< IP protocol version */ + unsigned int TypeOfService : 8; /**< Special service type identifier, indicating delay/throughput/reliability levels */ + unsigned int TotalLength : 16; /**< Total length of the IP packet, in bytes */ + + unsigned int Identification : 16; /**< Idenfication value for identifying fragmented packets */ + unsigned int FragmentOffset : 13; /**< Offset of this IP fragment */ + unsigned int Flags : 3; /**< Fragment flags, to indicate if a packet is fragmented */ + + unsigned int TTL : 8; /**< Maximum allowable number of hops to reach the packet destination */ + unsigned int Protocol : 8; /**< Encapsulated protocol type */ + unsigned int HeaderChecksum : 16; /**< Ethernet checksum of the IP header */ + + IP_Address_t SourceAddress; /**< Source protocol IP address of the packet */ + IP_Address_t DestinationAddress; /**< Destination protocol IP address of the packet */ + } IP_Header_t; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + int16_t IP_ProcessIPPacket(void* InDataStart, void* OutDataStart); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/RNDISEthernet/LUFA RNDIS.inf b/Demos/RNDISEthernet/LUFA RNDIS.inf new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..a124afec179 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/RNDISEthernet/LUFA RNDIS.inf @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ +; Windows LUFA RNDIS Setup File +; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation + +[Version] +Signature = "$Windows NT$" +Class = Net +ClassGUID = {4d36e972-e325-11ce-bfc1-08002be10318} +Provider = %COMPANY% +DriverVer = 06/21/2006,6.0.6000.16384 +;CatalogFile = device.cat + +[Manufacturer] +%COMPANY% = RndisDevices,NTx86,NTamd64,NTia64 + +; Decoration for x86 architecture +[RndisDevices.NTx86] +%RNDISDEV% = RNDIS.NT.5.1, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204C + +; Decoration for x64 architecture +[RndisDevices.NTamd64] +%RNDISDEV% = RNDIS.NT.5.1, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204C + +; Decoration for ia64 architecture +[RndisDevices.NTia64] +%RNDISDEV% = RNDIS.NT.5.1, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204C + +;@@@ This is the common setting for setup +[ControlFlags] +ExcludeFromSelect=* + +; DDInstall section +; References the in-build Netrndis.inf +[RNDIS.NT.5.1] +Characteristics = 0x84 ; NCF_PHYSICAL + NCF_HAS_UI +BusType = 15 +; NEVER REMOVE THE FOLLOWING REFERENCE FOR NETRNDIS.INF +include = netrndis.inf +needs = Usb_Rndis.ndi +AddReg = Rndis_AddReg_Vista + +; DDInstal.Services section +[RNDIS.NT.5.1.Services] +include = netrndis.inf +needs = Usb_Rndis.ndi.Services + +; No sys copyfiles - the sys files are already in-build +; (part of the operating system). + +; Modify these strings for your device as needed. +[Strings] +COMPANY="LUFA Library" +RNDISDEV="LUFA USB RNDIS Demo" \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Demos/RNDISEthernet/ProtocolDecoders.c b/Demos/RNDISEthernet/ProtocolDecoders.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..f0e6ebba84b --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/RNDISEthernet/ProtocolDecoders.c @@ -0,0 +1,280 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/* Protocol decoders for Ethernet, TCP, IP, ICMP and ARP. Each of these routines + accepts a header to the appropriate protocol and prints out pertient information + on the packet through the serial port. + + To disable printing of a specific protocol, define the token NO_DECODE_{Protocol} + in the project makefile, and pass it to the compiler using the -D switch. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Protocol decoding routines, for the plain-text decoding of Ethernet frames for debugging purposes. + * Enabled protocol decoders will print incomming Ethernet frame contents through the USART in a human + * readable format. + * + * Note that the USART is a slow transmission medium, and will slow down packet processing considerably. + * Packet decoding routines can be disabled by defining NO_DECODE_{Protocol Name} in the project makefile + * and passing it to the compiler via the -D switch. + */ + +#include "ProtocolDecoders.h" + +/** Decodes an Ethernet frame header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format. + * + * \param InDataStart Pointer to the start of an Ethernet frame header + */ +void DecodeEthernetFrameHeader(void* InDataStart) +{ + #if !defined(NO_DECODE_ETHERNET) + Ethernet_Frame_Header_t* FrameHeader = (Ethernet_Frame_Header_t*)InDataStart; + + printf_P(PSTR("\r\n")); + + printf_P(PSTR(" ETHERNET\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" + Frame Size: %u\r\n"), FrameIN.FrameLength); + + if (!(MAC_COMPARE(&FrameHeader->Destination, &ServerMACAddress)) && + !(MAC_COMPARE(&FrameHeader->Destination, &BroadcastMACAddress))) + { + printf_P(PSTR(" + NOT ADDRESSED TO DEVICE\r\n")); + return; + } + + printf_P(PSTR(" + MAC Source : %02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X\r\n"), FrameHeader->Source.Octets[0], + FrameHeader->Source.Octets[1], + FrameHeader->Source.Octets[2], + FrameHeader->Source.Octets[3], + FrameHeader->Source.Octets[4], + FrameHeader->Source.Octets[5]); + + printf_P(PSTR(" + MAC Dest: %02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X\r\n"), FrameHeader->Destination.Octets[0], + FrameHeader->Destination.Octets[1], + FrameHeader->Destination.Octets[2], + FrameHeader->Destination.Octets[3], + FrameHeader->Destination.Octets[4], + FrameHeader->Destination.Octets[5]); + + if (SwapEndian_16(FrameIN.FrameLength) > ETHERNET_VER2_MINSIZE) + printf_P(PSTR(" + Protocol: 0x%04x\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(FrameHeader->EtherType)); + else + printf_P(PSTR(" + Protocol: UNKNOWN E1\r\n")); + #endif +} + +/** Decodes an ARP header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format. + * + * \param InDataStart Pointer to the start of an ARP packet header + */ +void DecodeARPHeader(void* InDataStart) +{ + #if !defined(NO_DECODE_ARP) + ARP_Header_t* ARPHeader = (ARP_Header_t*)InDataStart; + + printf_P(PSTR(" \\\r\n ARP\r\n")); + + if (!(IP_COMPARE(&ARPHeader->TPA, &ServerIPAddress)) && + !(MAC_COMPARE(&ARPHeader->THA, &ServerMACAddress))) + { + printf_P(PSTR(" + NOT ADDRESSED TO DEVICE\r\n")); + return; + } + + printf_P(PSTR(" + Protocol: %x\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(ARPHeader->ProtocolType)); + printf_P(PSTR(" + Operation: %u\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(ARPHeader->Operation)); + + if (SwapEndian_16(ARPHeader->ProtocolType) == ETHERTYPE_IPV4) + { + printf_P(PSTR(" + SHA MAC: %02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X\r\n"), ARPHeader->SHA.Octets[0], + ARPHeader->SHA.Octets[1], + ARPHeader->SHA.Octets[2], + ARPHeader->SHA.Octets[3], + ARPHeader->SHA.Octets[4], + ARPHeader->SHA.Octets[5]); + + printf_P(PSTR(" + SPA IP: %u.%u.%u.%u\r\n"), ARPHeader->SPA.Octets[0], + ARPHeader->SPA.Octets[1], + ARPHeader->SPA.Octets[2], + ARPHeader->SPA.Octets[3]); + + printf_P(PSTR(" + THA MAC: %02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X\r\n"), ARPHeader->THA.Octets[0], + ARPHeader->THA.Octets[1], + ARPHeader->THA.Octets[2], + ARPHeader->THA.Octets[3], + ARPHeader->THA.Octets[4], + ARPHeader->THA.Octets[5]); + + printf_P(PSTR(" + TPA IP: %u.%u.%u.%u\r\n"), ARPHeader->TPA.Octets[0], + ARPHeader->TPA.Octets[1], + ARPHeader->TPA.Octets[2], + ARPHeader->TPA.Octets[3]); + } + #endif +} + +/** Decodes an IP header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format. + * + * \param InDataStart Pointer to the start of an IP packet header + */ +void DecodeIPHeader(void* InDataStart) +{ + #if !defined(NO_DECODE_IP) + IP_Header_t* IPHeader = (IP_Header_t*)InDataStart; + + uint16_t HeaderLengthBytes = (IPHeader->HeaderLength * sizeof(uint32_t)); + + printf_P(PSTR(" \\\r\n IP\r\n")); + + if (!(IP_COMPARE(&IPHeader->DestinationAddress, &ServerIPAddress))) + { + printf_P(PSTR(" + NOT ADDRESSED TO DEVICE\r\n")); + return; + } + + printf_P(PSTR(" + Header Length: %u Bytes\r\n"), HeaderLengthBytes); + printf_P(PSTR(" + Packet Version: %u\r\n"), IPHeader->Version); + printf_P(PSTR(" + Total Length: %u\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(IPHeader->TotalLength)); + + printf_P(PSTR(" + Protocol: %u\r\n"), IPHeader->Protocol); + printf_P(PSTR(" + TTL: %u\r\n"), IPHeader->TTL); + + printf_P(PSTR(" + IP Src: %u.%u.%u.%u\r\n"), IPHeader->SourceAddress.Octets[0], + IPHeader->SourceAddress.Octets[1], + IPHeader->SourceAddress.Octets[2], + IPHeader->SourceAddress.Octets[3]); + + printf_P(PSTR(" + IP Dst: %u.%u.%u.%u\r\n"), IPHeader->DestinationAddress.Octets[0], + IPHeader->DestinationAddress.Octets[1], + IPHeader->DestinationAddress.Octets[2], + IPHeader->DestinationAddress.Octets[3]); + #endif +} + +/** Decodes an ICMP header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format. + * + * \param InDataStart Pointer to the start of an ICMP packet header + */ +void DecodeICMPHeader(void* InDataStart) +{ + #if !defined(NO_DECODE_ICMP) + ICMP_Header_t* ICMPHeader = (ICMP_Header_t*)InDataStart; + + printf_P(PSTR(" \\\r\n ICMP\r\n")); + + printf_P(PSTR(" + Type: %u\r\n"), ICMPHeader->Type); + printf_P(PSTR(" + Code: %u\r\n"), ICMPHeader->Code); + #endif +} + +/** Decodes a TCP header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format. + * + * \param InDataStart Pointer to the start of a TCP packet header + */ +void DecodeTCPHeader(void* InDataStart) +{ + #if !defined(NO_DECODE_TCP) + TCP_Header_t* TCPHeader = (TCP_Header_t*)InDataStart; + + uint16_t HeaderLengthBytes = (TCPHeader->DataOffset * sizeof(uint32_t)); + + printf_P(PSTR(" \\\r\n TCP\r\n")); + + printf_P(PSTR(" + Header Length: %u Bytes\r\n"), HeaderLengthBytes); + + printf_P(PSTR(" + Source Port: %u\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(TCPHeader->SourcePort)); + printf_P(PSTR(" + Destination Port: %u\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(TCPHeader->DestinationPort)); + + printf_P(PSTR(" + Sequence Number: %lu\r\n"), SwapEndian_32(TCPHeader->SequenceNumber)); + printf_P(PSTR(" + Acknowledgment Number: %lu\r\n"), SwapEndian_32(TCPHeader->AcknowledgmentNumber)); + + printf_P(PSTR(" + Flags: 0x%02X\r\n"), TCPHeader->Flags); + + if (TCP_GetPortState(TCPHeader->DestinationPort) == TCP_Port_Closed) + printf_P(PSTR(" + NOT LISTENING ON DESTINATION PORT\r\n")); + #endif +} + +/** Decodes an UDP header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format. + * + * \param InDataStart Pointer to the start of a UDP packet header + */ +void DecodeUDPHeader(void* InDataStart) +{ + #if !defined(NO_DECODE_UDP) + UDP_Header_t* UDPHeader = (UDP_Header_t*)InDataStart; + + printf_P(PSTR(" \\\r\n UDP\r\n")); + + printf_P(PSTR(" + Source Port: %u\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(UDPHeader->SourcePort)); + printf_P(PSTR(" + Destination Port: %u\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(UDPHeader->DestinationPort)); + + printf_P(PSTR(" + Data Length: %d\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(UDPHeader->Length)); + #endif +} + +/** Decodes an DHCP header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format. + * + * \param InDataStart Pointer to the start of a DHCP packet header + */ +void DecodeDHCPHeader(void* InDataStart) +{ + #if !defined(NO_DECODE_DHCP) + uint8_t* DHCPOptions = (InDataStart + sizeof(DHCP_Header_t)); + + printf_P(PSTR(" \\\r\n DHCP\r\n")); + + while (DHCPOptions[0] != DHCP_OPTION_END) + { + if (DHCPOptions[0] == DHCP_OPTION_MESSAGETYPE) + { + switch (DHCPOptions[2]) + { + case DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_DISCOVER: + printf_P(PSTR(" + DISCOVER\r\n")); + break; + case DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_REQUEST: + printf_P(PSTR(" + REQUEST\r\n")); + break; + case DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_RELEASE: + printf_P(PSTR(" + RELEASE\r\n")); + break; + case DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_DECLINE: + printf_P(PSTR(" + DECLINE\r\n")); + break; + } + } + + DHCPOptionsINStart += ((DHCPOptionsINStart[0] == DHCP_OPTION_PAD) ? 1 : (DHCPOptionsINStart[1] + 2)); + } + + #endif +} diff --git a/Demos/RNDISEthernet/ProtocolDecoders.h b/Demos/RNDISEthernet/ProtocolDecoders.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..06e4c0ad46e --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/RNDISEthernet/ProtocolDecoders.h @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for ProtocolDecoders.c. + */ + +#ifndef _PROTOCOL_DECODERS_H_ +#define _PROTOCOL_DECODERS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + + #include + + #include "EthernetProtocols.h" + #include "Ethernet.h" + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void DecodeEthernetFrameHeader(void* InDataStart); + void DecodeARPHeader(void* InDataStart); + void DecodeIPHeader(void* InDataStart); + void DecodeICMPHeader(void* InDataStart); + void DecodeTCPHeader(void* InDataStart); + void DecodeUDPHeader(void* InDataStart); + void DecodeDHCPHeader(void* InDataStart); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/RNDISEthernet/RNDIS.c b/Demos/RNDISEthernet/RNDIS.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..ee0c8c34b8c --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/RNDISEthernet/RNDIS.c @@ -0,0 +1,386 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * RNDIS command handler functions. This handles RNDIS commands according to + * the Microsoft RNDIS specification, creating a USB Ethernet network adapter. + */ + +#define INCLUDE_FROM_RNDIS_C +#include "RNDIS.h" + +/* Global Variables: */ +/** Physical MAC address of the network adapter, which becomes the MAC address of the host for packets sent to the adapter. */ +static MAC_Address_t PROGMEM AdapterMACAddress = {ADAPTER_MAC_ADDRESS}; + +/** Vendor description of the adapter. This is overridden by the INF file required to install the appropriate RNDIS drivers for + * the device, but may still be used by the OS in some circumstances. + */ +static char PROGMEM AdapterVendorDescription[] = "LUFA RNDIS Adapter"; + +/** List of RNDIS OID commands supported by this adapter. */ +static const uint32_t PROGMEM AdapterSupportedOIDList[] = + { + OID_GEN_SUPPORTED_LIST, + OID_GEN_HARDWARE_STATUS, + OID_GEN_MEDIA_SUPPORTED, + OID_GEN_MEDIA_IN_USE, + OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_FRAME_SIZE, + OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_TOTAL_SIZE, + OID_GEN_LINK_SPEED, + OID_GEN_TRANSMIT_BLOCK_SIZE, + OID_GEN_RECEIVE_BLOCK_SIZE, + OID_GEN_VENDOR_ID, + OID_GEN_VENDOR_DESCRIPTION, + OID_GEN_CURRENT_PACKET_FILTER, + OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_TOTAL_SIZE, + OID_GEN_MEDIA_CONNECT_STATUS, + OID_GEN_XMIT_OK, + OID_GEN_RCV_OK, + OID_GEN_XMIT_ERROR, + OID_GEN_RCV_ERROR, + OID_GEN_RCV_NO_BUFFER, + OID_802_3_PERMANENT_ADDRESS, + OID_802_3_CURRENT_ADDRESS, + OID_802_3_MULTICAST_LIST, + OID_802_3_MAXIMUM_LIST_SIZE, + OID_802_3_RCV_ERROR_ALIGNMENT, + OID_802_3_XMIT_ONE_COLLISION, + OID_802_3_XMIT_MORE_COLLISIONS, + }; + +/** Buffer for RNDIS messages (as distinct from Ethernet frames sent through the adapter. This must be big enough to hold the entire + * Supported OID list, plus the response header. The buffer is half-duplex, and is written to as it is read to save on SRAM - for this + * reason, care must be taken when constructing RNDIS responses that unread data is not overwritten when writing in responses. + */ +uint8_t RNDISMessageBuffer[sizeof(AdapterSupportedOIDList) + sizeof(RNDIS_QUERY_CMPLT_t)]; + +/** Pointer to the RNDIS message header at the top of the RNDIS message buffer, for convenience. */ +RNDIS_Message_Header_t* MessageHeader = (RNDIS_Message_Header_t*)&RNDISMessageBuffer; + +/** Indicates if a RNDIS message response is ready to be sent back to the host. */ +bool ResponseReady = false; + +/** Current RNDIS adapter state, a value from the RNDIS_States_t enum. */ +uint8_t CurrRNDISState = RNDIS_Uninitialized; + +/** Current Ethernet packet filter mask. This is non-zero when the adapter is initialized, or zero when disabled. */ +uint32_t CurrPacketFilter = 0; + + +/** Processes the RNDIS message received by the host and stored in the RNDISMessageBuffer global buffer. If a response is + * created, the ResponseReady global is updated so that the response is written back to the host upon request. + */ +void ProcessRNDISControlMessage(void) +{ + /* Note: Only a single buffer is used for both the received message and its response to save SRAM. Because of + this, response bytes should be filled in order so that they do not clobber unread data in the buffer. */ + + switch (MessageHeader->MessageType) + { + case REMOTE_NDIS_INITIALIZE_MSG: + /* Initialize the adapter - return information about the supported RNDIS version and buffer sizes */ + + ResponseReady = true; + + RNDIS_INITIALIZE_MSG_t* INITIALIZE_Message = (RNDIS_INITIALIZE_MSG_t*)&RNDISMessageBuffer; + RNDIS_INITIALIZE_CMPLT_t* INITIALIZE_Response = (RNDIS_INITIALIZE_CMPLT_t*)&RNDISMessageBuffer; + + INITIALIZE_Response->MessageType = REMOTE_NDIS_INITIALIZE_CMPLT; + INITIALIZE_Response->MessageLength = sizeof(RNDIS_INITIALIZE_CMPLT_t); + INITIALIZE_Response->RequestId = INITIALIZE_Message->RequestId; + INITIALIZE_Response->Status = REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS; + + INITIALIZE_Response->MajorVersion = REMOTE_NDIS_VERSION_MAJOR; + INITIALIZE_Response->MinorVersion = REMOTE_NDIS_VERSION_MINOR; + INITIALIZE_Response->DeviceFlags = REMOTE_NDIS_DF_CONNECTIONLESS; + INITIALIZE_Response->Medium = REMOTE_NDIS_MEDIUM_802_3; + INITIALIZE_Response->MaxPacketsPerTransfer = 1; + INITIALIZE_Response->MaxTransferSize = (sizeof(RNDIS_PACKET_MSG_t) + ETHERNET_FRAME_SIZE_MAX); + INITIALIZE_Response->PacketAlignmentFactor = 0; + INITIALIZE_Response->AFListOffset = 0; + INITIALIZE_Response->AFListSize = 0; + + CurrRNDISState = RNDIS_Initialized; + + break; + case REMOTE_NDIS_HALT_MSG: + /* Halt the adapter, reset the adapter state - note that no response should be returned when completed */ + + ResponseReady = false; + MessageHeader->MessageLength = 0; + + CurrRNDISState = RNDIS_Uninitialized; + + break; + case REMOTE_NDIS_QUERY_MSG: + /* Request for information about a parameter about the adapter, specified as an OID token */ + + ResponseReady = true; + + RNDIS_QUERY_MSG_t* QUERY_Message = (RNDIS_QUERY_MSG_t*)&RNDISMessageBuffer; + RNDIS_QUERY_CMPLT_t* QUERY_Response = (RNDIS_QUERY_CMPLT_t*)&RNDISMessageBuffer; + uint32_t Query_Oid = QUERY_Message->Oid; + + void* QueryData = &RNDISMessageBuffer[sizeof(RNDIS_Message_Header_t) + + QUERY_Message->InformationBufferOffset]; + void* ResponseData = &RNDISMessageBuffer[sizeof(RNDIS_QUERY_CMPLT_t)]; + uint16_t ResponseSize; + + QUERY_Response->MessageType = REMOTE_NDIS_QUERY_CMPLT; + QUERY_Response->MessageLength = sizeof(RNDIS_QUERY_CMPLT_t); + + if (ProcessNDISQuery(Query_Oid, QueryData, QUERY_Message->InformationBufferLength, + ResponseData, &ResponseSize)) + { + QUERY_Response->Status = REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS; + QUERY_Response->MessageLength += ResponseSize; + + QUERY_Response->InformationBufferLength = ResponseSize; + QUERY_Response->InformationBufferOffset = (sizeof(RNDIS_QUERY_CMPLT_t) - sizeof(RNDIS_Message_Header_t)); + } + else + { + QUERY_Response->Status = REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_NOT_SUPPORTED; + + QUERY_Response->InformationBufferLength = 0; + QUERY_Response->InformationBufferOffset = 0; + } + + break; + case REMOTE_NDIS_SET_MSG: + /* Request to set a parameter of the adapter, specified as an OID token */ + + ResponseReady = true; + + RNDIS_SET_MSG_t* SET_Message = (RNDIS_SET_MSG_t*)&RNDISMessageBuffer; + RNDIS_SET_CMPLT_t* SET_Response = (RNDIS_SET_CMPLT_t*)&RNDISMessageBuffer; + uint32_t SET_Oid = SET_Message->Oid; + + SET_Response->MessageType = REMOTE_NDIS_SET_CMPLT; + SET_Response->MessageLength = sizeof(RNDIS_SET_CMPLT_t); + SET_Response->RequestId = SET_Message->RequestId; + + void* SetData = &RNDISMessageBuffer[sizeof(RNDIS_Message_Header_t) + + SET_Message->InformationBufferOffset]; + + if (ProcessNDISSet(SET_Oid, SetData, SET_Message->InformationBufferLength)) + SET_Response->Status = REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS; + else + SET_Response->Status = REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_NOT_SUPPORTED; + + break; + case REMOTE_NDIS_RESET_MSG: + /* Soft reset the adapter */ + + ResponseReady = true; + + RNDIS_RESET_CMPLT_t* RESET_Response = (RNDIS_RESET_CMPLT_t*)&RNDISMessageBuffer; + + RESET_Response->MessageType = REMOTE_NDIS_RESET_CMPLT; + RESET_Response->MessageLength = sizeof(RNDIS_RESET_CMPLT_t); + RESET_Response->Status = REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS; + RESET_Response->AddressingReset = 0; + + break; + case REMOTE_NDIS_KEEPALIVE_MSG: + /* Keep alive message sent to the adapter every 5 seconds when idle to ensure it is still responding */ + + ResponseReady = true; + + RNDIS_KEEPALIVE_MSG_t* KEEPALIVE_Message = (RNDIS_KEEPALIVE_MSG_t*)&RNDISMessageBuffer; + RNDIS_KEEPALIVE_CMPLT_t* KEEPALIVE_Response = (RNDIS_KEEPALIVE_CMPLT_t*)&RNDISMessageBuffer; + + KEEPALIVE_Response->MessageType = REMOTE_NDIS_KEEPALIVE_CMPLT; + KEEPALIVE_Response->MessageLength = sizeof(RNDIS_KEEPALIVE_CMPLT_t); + KEEPALIVE_Response->RequestId = KEEPALIVE_Message->RequestId; + KEEPALIVE_Response->Status = REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS; + + break; + } +} + +/** Processes RNDIS query commands, retrieving information from the adapter and reporting it back to the host. The requested + * parameter is given as an OID value. + * + * \param OId OId value of the parameter being queried + * \param QueryData Pointer to any extra query data being sent by the host to the device inside the RNDIS message buffer + * \param QuerySize Size in bytes of the extra query data being sent by the host + * \param ResponseData Pointer to the start of the query response inside the RNDIS message buffer + * \param ResponseSize Pointer to the size in bytes of the response data being sent to the host + * + * \return Boolean true if the query was handled, false otherwise + */ +static bool ProcessNDISQuery(uint32_t OId, void* QueryData, uint16_t QuerySize, + void* ResponseData, uint16_t* ResponseSize) +{ + /* Handler for REMOTE_NDIS_QUERY_MSG messages */ + + switch (OId) + { + case OID_GEN_SUPPORTED_LIST: + *ResponseSize = sizeof(AdapterSupportedOIDList); + + /* Copy the list of supported NDIS OID tokens to the response buffer */ + memcpy_P(ResponseData, AdapterSupportedOIDList, sizeof(AdapterSupportedOIDList)); + + return true; + case OID_GEN_HARDWARE_STATUS: + *ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t); + + /* Always indicate hardware ready */ + *((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = NdisHardwareStatusReady; + + return true; + case OID_GEN_MEDIA_SUPPORTED: + case OID_GEN_MEDIA_IN_USE: + *ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t); + + /* Indicate 802.3 (Ethernet) supported by the adapter */ + *((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = REMOTE_NDIS_MEDIUM_802_3; + + return true; + case OID_GEN_VENDOR_ID: + *ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t); + + /* Vendor ID 0x0xFFFFFF is reserved for vendors who have not purchased a NDIS VID */ + *((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = 0x00FFFFFF; + + return true; + case OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_FRAME_SIZE: + case OID_GEN_TRANSMIT_BLOCK_SIZE: + case OID_GEN_RECEIVE_BLOCK_SIZE: + *ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t); + + /* Indicate that the maximum frame size is the size of the ethernet frame buffer */ + *((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = ETHERNET_FRAME_SIZE_MAX; + + return true; + case OID_GEN_VENDOR_DESCRIPTION: + *ResponseSize = sizeof(AdapterVendorDescription); + + /* Copy vendor description string to the response buffer */ + memcpy_P(ResponseData, AdapterVendorDescription, sizeof(AdapterVendorDescription)); + + return true; + case OID_GEN_MEDIA_CONNECT_STATUS: + *ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t); + + /* Always indicate that the adapter is connected to a network */ + *((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = REMOTE_NDIS_MEDIA_STATE_CONNECTED; + + return true; + case OID_GEN_LINK_SPEED: + *ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t); + + /* Indicate 10Mb/s link speed */ + *((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = 100000; + + return true; + case OID_802_3_PERMANENT_ADDRESS: + case OID_802_3_CURRENT_ADDRESS: + *ResponseSize = sizeof(MAC_Address_t); + + /* Copy over the fixed adapter MAC to the response buffer */ + memcpy_P(ResponseData, &AdapterMACAddress, sizeof(MAC_Address_t)); + + return true; + case OID_802_3_MAXIMUM_LIST_SIZE: + *ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t); + + /* Indicate only one multicast address supported */ + *((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = 1; + + return true; + case OID_GEN_CURRENT_PACKET_FILTER: + *ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t); + + /* Indicate the current packet filter mask */ + *((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = CurrPacketFilter; + + return true; + case OID_GEN_XMIT_OK: + case OID_GEN_RCV_OK: + case OID_GEN_XMIT_ERROR: + case OID_GEN_RCV_ERROR: + case OID_GEN_RCV_NO_BUFFER: + case OID_802_3_RCV_ERROR_ALIGNMENT: + case OID_802_3_XMIT_ONE_COLLISION: + case OID_802_3_XMIT_MORE_COLLISIONS: + *ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t); + + /* Unused statistic OIDs - always return 0 for each */ + *((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = 0; + + return true; + case OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_TOTAL_SIZE: + *ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t); + + /* Indicate maximum overall buffer (Ethernet frame and RNDIS header) the adapter can handle */ + *((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = (sizeof(RNDISMessageBuffer) + ETHERNET_FRAME_SIZE_MAX); + + return true; + default: + return false; + } +} + +/** Processes RNDIS set commands, setting adapter parameters to values given by the host. The requested parameter is given + * as an OID value. + * + * \param OId OId value of the parameter being set + * \param SetData Pointer to the parameter value in the RNDIS message buffer + * \param SetSize Size in bytes of the parameter value being sent by the host + * + * \return Boolean true if the set was handled, false otherwise + */ +static bool ProcessNDISSet(uint32_t OId, void* SetData, uint16_t SetSize) +{ + /* Handler for REMOTE_NDIS_SET_MSG messages */ + + switch (OId) + { + case OID_GEN_CURRENT_PACKET_FILTER: + /* Save the packet filter mask in case the host queries it again later */ + CurrPacketFilter = *((uint32_t*)SetData); + + /* Set the RNDIS state to initialized if the packet filter is non-zero */ + CurrRNDISState = ((CurrPacketFilter) ? RNDIS_Data_Initialized : RNDIS_Data_Initialized); + + return true; + case OID_802_3_MULTICAST_LIST: + /* Do nothing - throw away the value from the host as it is unused */ + + return true; + default: + return false; + } +} diff --git a/Demos/RNDISEthernet/RNDIS.h b/Demos/RNDISEthernet/RNDIS.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..7c75875cffb --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/RNDISEthernet/RNDIS.h @@ -0,0 +1,226 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for RNDIS.c. + */ + +#ifndef _RNDIS_H_ +#define _RNDIS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + + #include "RNDISEthernet.h" + #include "RNDISConstants.h" + #include "Ethernet.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Physical MAC Address of the USB netowork adapter */ + #define ADAPTER_MAC_ADDRESS {0x02, 0x00, 0x02, 0x00, 0x02, 0x00} + + /** Implemented RNDIS Version Major */ + #define REMOTE_NDIS_VERSION_MAJOR 0x01 + + /** Implemented RNDIS Version Minor */ + #define REMOTE_NDIS_VERSION_MINOR 0x00 + + /** RNDIS request to issue a host-to-device NDIS command */ + #define SEND_ENCAPSULATED_COMMAND 0x00 + + /** RNDIS request to issue a device-to-host NDIS response */ + #define GET_ENCAPSULATED_RESPONSE 0x01 + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible NDIS adapter states. */ + enum RNDIS_States_t + { + RNDIS_Uninitialized = 0, /**< Adapter currently uninitialized */ + RNDIS_Initialized = 1, /**< Adapter currently initialized but not ready for data transfers */ + RNDIS_Data_Initialized = 2, /**< Adapter currently initialized and ready for data transfers */ + }; + + /** Enum for the NDIS hardware states */ + enum NDIS_Hardware_Status_t + { + NdisHardwareStatusReady, /**< Hardware Ready to accept commands from the host */ + NdisHardwareStatusInitializing, /**< Hardware busy initializing */ + NdisHardwareStatusReset, /**< Hardware reset */ + NdisHardwareStatusClosing, /**< Hardware currently closing */ + NdisHardwareStatusNotReady /**< Hardware not ready to accept commands from the host */ + }; + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for a RNDIS message header, sent before RNDIS messages */ + typedef struct + { + uint32_t MessageType; /**< RNDIS message type, a REMOTE_NDIS_*_MSG constant */ + uint32_t MessageLength; /**< Total length of the RNDIS message, in bytes */ + } RNDIS_Message_Header_t; + + /** Type define for a RNDIS packet message, used to encapsulate Ethernet packets sent to and from the adapter */ + typedef struct + { + uint32_t MessageType; + uint32_t MessageLength; + uint32_t DataOffset; + uint32_t DataLength; + uint32_t OOBDataOffset; + uint32_t OOBDataLength; + uint32_t NumOOBDataElements; + uint32_t PerPacketInfoOffset; + uint32_t PerPacketInfoLength; + uint32_t VcHandle; + uint32_t Reserved; + } RNDIS_PACKET_MSG_t; + + /** Type define for a RNDIS Initialize command message */ + typedef struct + { + uint32_t MessageType; + uint32_t MessageLength; + uint32_t RequestId; + + uint32_t MajorVersion; + uint32_t MinorVersion; + uint32_t MaxTransferSize; + } RNDIS_INITIALIZE_MSG_t; + + /** Type define for a RNDIS Initialize complete response message */ + typedef struct + { + uint32_t MessageType; + uint32_t MessageLength; + uint32_t RequestId; + uint32_t Status; + + uint32_t MajorVersion; + uint32_t MinorVersion; + uint32_t DeviceFlags; + uint32_t Medium; + uint32_t MaxPacketsPerTransfer; + uint32_t MaxTransferSize; + uint32_t PacketAlignmentFactor; + uint32_t AFListOffset; + uint32_t AFListSize; + } RNDIS_INITIALIZE_CMPLT_t; + + /** Type define for a RNDIS Keepalive command message */ + typedef struct + { + uint32_t MessageType; + uint32_t MessageLength; + uint32_t RequestId; + } RNDIS_KEEPALIVE_MSG_t; + + /** Type define for a RNDIS Keepalive complete message */ + typedef struct + { + uint32_t MessageType; + uint32_t MessageLength; + uint32_t RequestId; + uint32_t Status; + } RNDIS_KEEPALIVE_CMPLT_t; + + /** Type define for a RNDIS Reset complete message */ + typedef struct + { + uint32_t MessageType; + uint32_t MessageLength; + uint32_t Status; + + uint32_t AddressingReset; + } RNDIS_RESET_CMPLT_t; + + /** Type define for a RNDIS Set command message */ + typedef struct + { + uint32_t MessageType; + uint32_t MessageLength; + uint32_t RequestId; + + uint32_t Oid; + uint32_t InformationBufferLength; + uint32_t InformationBufferOffset; + uint32_t DeviceVcHandle; + } RNDIS_SET_MSG_t; + + /** Type define for a RNDIS Set complete response message */ + typedef struct + { + uint32_t MessageType; + uint32_t MessageLength; + uint32_t RequestId; + uint32_t Status; + } RNDIS_SET_CMPLT_t; + + /** Type define for a RNDIS Query command message */ + typedef struct + { + uint32_t MessageType; + uint32_t MessageLength; + uint32_t RequestId; + + uint32_t Oid; + uint32_t InformationBufferLength; + uint32_t InformationBufferOffset; + uint32_t DeviceVcHandle; + } RNDIS_QUERY_MSG_t; + + /** Type define for a RNDIS Query complete response message */ + typedef struct + { + uint32_t MessageType; + uint32_t MessageLength; + uint32_t RequestId; + uint32_t Status; + + uint32_t InformationBufferLength; + uint32_t InformationBufferOffset; + } RNDIS_QUERY_CMPLT_t; + + /* External Variables: */ + extern uint8_t RNDISMessageBuffer[]; + extern RNDIS_Message_Header_t* MessageHeader; + extern bool ResponseReady; + extern uint8_t CurrRNDISState; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void ProcessRNDISControlMessage(void); + + #if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_RNDIS_C) + static bool ProcessNDISQuery(uint32_t OId, void* QueryData, uint16_t QuerySize, + void* ResponseData, uint16_t* ResponseSize); + static bool ProcessNDISSet(uint32_t OId, void* SetData, uint16_t SetSize); + #endif + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/RNDISEthernet/RNDISConstants.h b/Demos/RNDISEthernet/RNDISConstants.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..91a7e898d67 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/RNDISEthernet/RNDISConstants.h @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * RNDIS specification related constants. For more information on these + * constants, please refer to the Microsoft RNDIS specification. + */ + +#ifndef _RNDIS_CONSTANTS_H_ +#define _RNDIS_CONSTANTS_H_ + + /* Macros: */ + #define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_MSG 0x00000001UL + #define REMOTE_NDIS_INITIALIZE_MSG 0x00000002UL + #define REMOTE_NDIS_HALT_MSG 0x00000003UL + #define REMOTE_NDIS_QUERY_MSG 0x00000004UL + #define REMOTE_NDIS_SET_MSG 0x00000005UL + #define REMOTE_NDIS_RESET_MSG 0x00000006UL + #define REMOTE_NDIS_INDICATE_STATUS_MSG 0x00000007UL + #define REMOTE_NDIS_KEEPALIVE_MSG 0x00000008UL + + #define REMOTE_NDIS_INITIALIZE_CMPLT 0x80000002UL + #define REMOTE_NDIS_QUERY_CMPLT 0x80000004UL + #define REMOTE_NDIS_SET_CMPLT 0x80000005UL + #define REMOTE_NDIS_RESET_CMPLT 0x80000006UL + #define REMOTE_NDIS_KEEPALIVE_CMPLT 0x80000008UL + + #define REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS 0x00000000UL + #define REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_FAILURE 0xC0000001UL + #define REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_INVALID_DATA 0xC0010015UL + #define REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_NOT_SUPPORTED 0xC00000BBUL + #define REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_MEDIA_CONNECT 0x4001000BUL + #define REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_MEDIA_DISCONNECT 0x4001000CUL + + #define REMOTE_NDIS_MEDIA_STATE_CONNECTED 0x00000000UL + #define REMOTE_NDIS_MEDIA_STATE_DISCONNECTED 0x00000001UL + + #define REMOTE_NDIS_MEDIUM_802_3 0x00000000UL + + #define REMOTE_NDIS_DF_CONNECTIONLESS 0x00000001UL + #define REMOTE_NDIS_DF_CONNECTION_ORIENTED 0x00000002UL + + #define OID_GEN_SUPPORTED_LIST 0x00010101UL + #define OID_GEN_HARDWARE_STATUS 0x00010102UL + #define OID_GEN_MEDIA_SUPPORTED 0x00010103UL + #define OID_GEN_MEDIA_IN_USE 0x00010104UL + #define OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_FRAME_SIZE 0x00010106UL + #define OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_TOTAL_SIZE 0x00010111UL + #define OID_GEN_LINK_SPEED 0x00010107UL + #define OID_GEN_TRANSMIT_BLOCK_SIZE 0x0001010AUL + #define OID_GEN_RECEIVE_BLOCK_SIZE 0x0001010BUL + #define OID_GEN_VENDOR_ID 0x0001010CUL + #define OID_GEN_VENDOR_DESCRIPTION 0x0001010DUL + #define OID_GEN_CURRENT_PACKET_FILTER 0x0001010EUL + #define OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_TOTAL_SIZE 0x00010111UL + #define OID_GEN_MEDIA_CONNECT_STATUS 0x00010114UL + #define OID_GEN_XMIT_OK 0x00020101UL + #define OID_GEN_RCV_OK 0x00020102UL + #define OID_GEN_XMIT_ERROR 0x00020103UL + #define OID_GEN_RCV_ERROR 0x00020104UL + #define OID_GEN_RCV_NO_BUFFER 0x00020105UL + #define OID_802_3_PERMANENT_ADDRESS 0x01010101UL + #define OID_802_3_CURRENT_ADDRESS 0x01010102UL + #define OID_802_3_MULTICAST_LIST 0x01010103UL + #define OID_802_3_MAXIMUM_LIST_SIZE 0x01010104UL + #define OID_802_3_RCV_ERROR_ALIGNMENT 0x01020101UL + #define OID_802_3_XMIT_ONE_COLLISION 0x01020102UL + #define OID_802_3_XMIT_MORE_COLLISIONS 0x01020103UL + +#endif \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Demos/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.aps b/Demos/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.aps new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..b5d21c1f958 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.aps @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +RNDISEthernet30-Sep-2008 14:17:0522-Jan-2009 17:52:35241030-Sep-2008 14:17:0544, 14, 0, 589AVR GCCC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\RNDISEthernet\JTAGICE mkIIAT90USB1287.xmlfalseR00R01R02R03R04R05R06R07R08R09R10R11R12R13R14R15R16R17R18R19R20R21R22R23R24R25R26R27R28R29R30R31Auto000ARP.cDescriptors.cEthernet.cICMP.cIP.cProtocolDecoders.cRNDIS.cRNDISEthernet.cTCP.cWebserver.cARP.hDescriptors.hEthernet.hEthernetProtocols.hICMP.hIP.hProtocolDecoders.hRNDIS.hRNDISEthernet.hTCP.hWebserver.hmakefiledefaultYESmakefileat90usb1287111RNDISEthernet.elfdefault\1-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enumsdefault1C:\WinAVR-20081205\bin\avr-gcc.exeC:\WinAVR-20081205\utils\bin\make.exeC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\RNDISEthernet\ARP.hC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\RNDISEthernet\Descriptors.hC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\RNDISEthernet\Ethernet.hC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\RNDISEthernet\EthernetProtocols.hC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\RNDISEthernet\ICMP.hC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\RNDISEthernet\IP.hC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\RNDISEthernet\ProtocolDecoders.hC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\RNDISEthernet\RNDIS.hC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\RNDISEthernet\RNDISEthernet.hC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\RNDISEthernet\TCP.hC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\RNDISEthernet\Telnet.hC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\RNDISEthernet\Webserver.hC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\RNDISEthernet\ARP.cC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\RNDISEthernet\Descriptors.cC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\RNDISEthernet\Ethernet.cC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\RNDISEthernet\ICMP.cC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\RNDISEthernet\IP.cC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\RNDISEthernet\ProtocolDecoders.cC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\RNDISEthernet\RNDIS.cC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\RNDISEthernet\RNDISEthernet.cC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\RNDISEthernet\TCP.cC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\RNDISEthernet\Telnet.cC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\RNDISEthernet\Webserver.c diff --git a/Demos/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.c b/Demos/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..255a53b3dd8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.c @@ -0,0 +1,357 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the RNDISEthernet demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and + * is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + +#include "RNDISEthernet.h" + +/* Project Tags, for reading out using the ButtLoad project */ +BUTTLOADTAG(ProjName, "LUFA RNDIS App"); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildTime, __TIME__); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildDate, __DATE__); +BUTTLOADTAG(LUFAVersion, "LUFA V" LUFA_VERSION_STRING); + +/* Scheduler Task List */ +TASK_LIST +{ + { Task: USB_USBTask , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, + { Task: Ethernet_Task , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, + { Task: TCP_Task , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, + { Task: RNDIS_Task , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, +}; + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then + * starts the scheduler to run the USB management task. + */ +int main(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable Clock Division */ + SetSystemClockPrescaler(0); + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + LEDs_Init(); + SerialStream_Init(9600, false); + + /* Webserver Initialization */ + TCP_Init(); + Webserver_Init(); + + printf_P(PSTR("\r\n\r\n****** RNDIS Demo running. ******\r\n")); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); + + /* Initialize Scheduler so that it can be used */ + Scheduler_Init(); + + /* Initialize USB Subsystem */ + USB_Init(); + + /* Scheduling - routine never returns, so put this last in the main function */ + Scheduler_Start(); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs and + * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Connect) +{ + /* Start USB management task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_RUN); + + /* Indicate USB enumerating */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBEnumerating); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via + * the status LEDs and stops all the relevent tasks. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Disconnect) +{ + /* Stop running TCP/IP and USB management tasks */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(RNDIS_Task, TASK_STOP); + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(Ethernet_Task, TASK_STOP); + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(TCP_Task, TASK_STOP); + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_STOP); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host sets the current configuration + * of the USB device after enumeration, and configures the RNDIS device endpoints and starts the relevent tasks. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_ConfigurationChanged) +{ + /* Setup CDC Notification, Rx and Tx Endpoints */ + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_TX_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK, + ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_RX_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK, + ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + /* Indicate USB connected and ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady); + + /* Start TCP/IP tasks */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(RNDIS_Task, TASK_RUN); + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(Ethernet_Task, TASK_RUN); + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(TCP_Task, TASK_RUN); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event. This is used to catch standard and class specific + * control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the RNDIS control commands, + * which set up the USB RNDIS network adapter), so that they can be handled appropriately for the application. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_UnhandledControlPacket) +{ + /* Discard the unused wValue parameter */ + Endpoint_Discard_Word(); + + /* Discard the unused wIndex parameter */ + Endpoint_Discard_Word(); + + /* Read in the wLength parameter */ + uint16_t wLength = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(); + + /* Process RNDIS class commands */ + switch (bRequest) + { + case SEND_ENCAPSULATED_COMMAND: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + /* Clear the SETUP packet, ready for data transfer */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Read in the RNDIS message into the message buffer */ + Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE(RNDISMessageBuffer, wLength); + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to clear the last packet from the host */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + + /* Process the RNDIS message */ + ProcessRNDISControlMessage(); + } + + break; + case GET_ENCAPSULATED_RESPONSE: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + /* Check if a response to the last message is ready */ + if (!(MessageHeader->MessageLength)) + { + /* Set the response to a single 0x00 byte to indicate that no response is ready */ + RNDISMessageBuffer[0] = 0; + MessageHeader->MessageLength = 1; + } + + /* Check if less than the requested number of bytes to transfer */ + if (MessageHeader->MessageLength < wLength) + wLength = MessageHeader->MessageLength; + + /* Clear the SETUP packet, ready for data transfer */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Write the message response data to the endpoint */ + Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(RNDISMessageBuffer, wLength); + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet or clear the host abort */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT(); + + /* Reset the message header once again after transmission */ + MessageHeader->MessageLength = 0; + } + + break; + } +} + +/** Function to manage status updates to the user. This is done via LEDs on the given board, if available, but may be changed to + * log to a serial port, or anything else that is suitable for status updates. + * + * \param CurrentStatus Current status of the system, from the RNDISEthernet_StatusCodes_t enum + */ +void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus) +{ + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS; + + /* Set the LED mask to the appropriate LED mask based on the given status code */ + switch (CurrentStatus) + { + case Status_USBNotReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1); + break; + case Status_USBEnumerating: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2); + break; + case Status_USBReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4); + break; + case Status_ProcessingEthernetFrame: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3); + break; + } + + /* Set the board LEDs to the new LED mask */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); +} + +/** Task to manage the sending and receiving of encapsulated RNDIS data and notifications. This removes the RNDIS + * wrapper from recieved Ethernet frames and places them in the FrameIN global buffer, or adds the RNDIS wrapper + * to a frame in the FrameOUT global before sending the buffer contents to the host. + */ +TASK(RNDIS_Task) +{ + /* Select the notification endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM); + + /* Check if a message response is ready for the host */ + if (Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed() && ResponseReady) + { + USB_Notification_t Notification = (USB_Notification_t) + { + bmRequestType: (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE), + bNotification: NOTIF_RESPONSE_AVAILABLE, + wValue: 0, + wIndex: 0, + wLength: 0, + }; + + /* Indicate that a message response is ready for the host */ + Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&Notification, sizeof(Notification)); + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + + /* Indicate a response is no longer ready */ + ResponseReady = false; + } + + /* Don't process the data endpoints until the system is in the data initialized state, and the buffer is free */ + if ((CurrRNDISState == RNDIS_Data_Initialized) && !(MessageHeader->MessageLength)) + { + /* Create a new packet header for reading/writing */ + RNDIS_PACKET_MSG_t RNDISPacketHeader; + + /* Select the data OUT endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_RX_EPNUM); + + /* Check if the data OUT endpoint contains data, and that the IN buffer is empty */ + if (Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed() && !(FrameIN.FrameInBuffer)) + { + /* Read in the packet message header */ + Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&RNDISPacketHeader, sizeof(RNDIS_PACKET_MSG_t)); + + /* Stall the request if the data is too large */ + if (RNDISPacketHeader.MessageLength > ETHERNET_FRAME_SIZE_MAX) + { + Endpoint_StallTransaction(); + return; + } + + /* Read in the Ethernet frame into the buffer */ + Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(FrameIN.FrameData, RNDISPacketHeader.DataLength); + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + + /* Store the size of the Ethernet frame */ + FrameIN.FrameLength = RNDISPacketHeader.DataLength; + + /* Indicate Ethernet IN buffer full */ + FrameIN.FrameInBuffer = true; + } + + /* Select the data IN endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_TX_EPNUM); + + /* Check if the data IN endpoint is ready for more data, and that the IN buffer is full */ + if (Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed() && FrameOUT.FrameInBuffer) + { + /* Clear the packet header with all 0s so that the relevant fields can be filled */ + memset(&RNDISPacketHeader, 0, sizeof(RNDIS_PACKET_MSG_t)); + + /* Construct the required packet header fields in the buffer */ + RNDISPacketHeader.MessageType = REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_MSG; + RNDISPacketHeader.MessageLength = (sizeof(RNDIS_PACKET_MSG_t) + FrameOUT.FrameLength); + RNDISPacketHeader.DataOffset = (sizeof(RNDIS_PACKET_MSG_t) - sizeof(RNDIS_Message_Header_t)); + RNDISPacketHeader.DataLength = FrameOUT.FrameLength; + + /* Send the packet header to the host */ + Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&RNDISPacketHeader, sizeof(RNDIS_PACKET_MSG_t)); + + /* Send the Ethernet frame data to the host */ + Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(FrameOUT.FrameData, RNDISPacketHeader.DataLength); + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + + /* Indicate Ethernet OUT buffer no longer full */ + FrameOUT.FrameInBuffer = false; + } + } +} + +/** Ethernet frame processing task. This task checks to see if a frame has been received, and if so hands off the processing + * of the frame to the Ethernet processing routines. + */ +TASK(Ethernet_Task) +{ + /* Task for Ethernet processing. Incoming ethernet frames are loaded into the FrameIN structure, and + outgoing frames should be loaded into the FrameOUT structure. Both structures can only hold a single + Ethernet frame at a time, so the FrameInBuffer bool is used to indicate when the buffers contain data. */ + + /* Check if a frame has been written to the IN frame buffer */ + if (FrameIN.FrameInBuffer) + { + /* Indicate packet processing started */ + UpdateStatus(Status_ProcessingEthernetFrame); + + /* Process the ethernet frame - replace this with your own Ethernet handler code as desired */ + Ethernet_ProcessPacket(); + + /* Indicate packet processing complete */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady); + } +} diff --git a/Demos/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.h b/Demos/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..4a0f3c18391 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.h @@ -0,0 +1,108 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for RNDISEthernet.c. + */ + +#ifndef _RNDISETHERNET_H_ +#define _RNDISETHERNET_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + #include + #include + + #include "Descriptors.h" + #include "RNDIS.h" + #include "Ethernet.h" + #include "TCP.h" + #include "ARP.h" + #include "Webserver.h" + + #include // Library Version Information + #include // PROGMEM tags readable by the ButtLoad project + #include // USB Functionality + #include // LEDs driver + #include // Simple scheduler for task management + + #include + + /* Macros: */ + /** Notification value to indicate that a frame is ready to be read by the host. */ + #define NOTIF_RESPONSE_AVAILABLE 0x01 + + /* Event Handlers: */ + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Connect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Connect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Disconnect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Disconnect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_ConfigurationChanged event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_ConfigurationChanged); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_UnhandledControlPacket); + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for a RNDIS notification message, for transmission to the RNDIS host via the notification + * Endpoint. + */ + typedef struct + { + uint8_t bmRequestType; /**< Notification type, a mask of values from SrdRequestType.h */ + uint8_t bNotification; /**< Notification index, indicating what the RNDIS notification relates to */ + uint16_t wValue; /**< Two byte notification value parameter */ + uint16_t wIndex; /**< Two byte notification index parameter */ + uint16_t wLength; /**< Size of data payload following the notification header */ + } USB_Notification_t; + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible status codes for passing to the UpdateStatus() function. */ + enum RNDISEthernet_StatusCodes_t + { + Status_USBNotReady = 0, /**< USB is not ready (disconnected from a USB host) */ + Status_USBEnumerating = 1, /**< USB interface is enumerating */ + Status_USBReady = 2, /**< USB interface is connected and ready */ + Status_ProcessingEthernetFrame = 3, /**< Currently processing an ethernet frame from the host */ + }; + + /* Tasks: */ + TASK(RNDIS_Task); + TASK(Ethernet_Task); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.txt b/Demos/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..bd4ff69e810 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.txt @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage RNDIS Class Ethernet Demo (with Webserver/Telnet) + * + * Remote Network Driver Interface demonstration application. + * This gives a simple reference application for implementing + * a CDC RNDIS device acting as a simple network interface for + * ethernet packet exchange. RNDIS is a proprietary Microsoft + * standard; this demo will only work on Windows 2000 (manually + * patched with the Microsoft RNDIS hotfix) and above (with no + * manual patches), or on the latest Linux kernels. + * + * Before running, you will need to install the INF file that + * is located in the RNDISEthernet project directory. This will + * enable Windows to use its inbuilt RNDIS drivers, negating the + * need for special Windows drivers for the device. To install, + * right-click the .INF file and choose the Install option. If + * Windows 2000 is used, the Microsoft INF file in the hotfix + * will need to be altered to use the VID/PID of the demo and + * then chosen instead of the LUFA RNDIS INF file when prompted. + * + * When enumerated, this demo will install as a new network + * adapter which ethernet packets can be sent to and received + * from. Running on top of the adapter is a very simple TCP/IP + * stack with a HTTP webserver and TELNET host which can be + * accessed through a web browser at IP address 10.0.0.2:80 or + * through a TELNET client at 10.0.0.2:25. This device also supports + * ping echos via the ICMP protocol. + * + * \note The TCP/IP stack in this demo has a number of limitations + * and should serve as an example only - it is not fully featured nor + * compliant to the TCP/IP specification. For complete projects, it is + * recommended that it be replaced with an external open source TCP/IP + * stack that is feature complete, such as the uIP stack. + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + *
USB Mode:Device
USB Class:Communications Device Class (CDC)
USB Subclass:Remote NDIS (Microsoft Proprietary CDC Class Networking Standard)
Relevant Standards:Microsoft RNDIS Specification
Usable Speeds:Full Speed Mode
+ */ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Demos/RNDISEthernet/TCP.c b/Demos/RNDISEthernet/TCP.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..b4a65344c8c --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/RNDISEthernet/TCP.c @@ -0,0 +1,614 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) packet handling routines. This protocol handles the reliable in-order transmission + * and reception of packets to and from devices on a network, to "ports" on the device. It is used in situations where data + * delivery must be reliable and correct, e.g. HTTP, TELNET and most other non-streaming protocols. + */ + +#define INCLUDE_FROM_TCP_C +#include "TCP.h" + +/* Global Variables: */ +/** Port state table array. This contains the current status of TCP ports in the device. To save on space, only open ports are + * stored - closed ports may be overwritten at any time, and the system will assume any ports not present in the array are closed. This + * allows for MAX_OPEN_TCP_PORTS to be less than the number of ports used by the application if desired. + */ +TCP_PortState_t PortStateTable[MAX_OPEN_TCP_PORTS]; + +/** Connection state table array. This contains the current status of TCP connections in the device. To save on space, only active + * (non-closed) connections are stored - closed connections may be overwritten at any time, and the system will assume any connections + * not present in the array are closed. + */ +TCP_ConnectionState_t ConnectionStateTable[MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS]; + + +/** Task to handle the calling of each registered application's callback function, to process and generate TCP packets at the application + * level. If an application produces a response, this task constructs the appropriate Ethernet frame and places it into the Ethernet OUT + * buffer for later transmission. + */ +TASK(TCP_Task) +{ + /* Task to hand off TCP packets to and from the listening applications. */ + + /* Run each application in sequence, to process incomming and generate outgoing packets */ + for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++) + { + /* Find the corresponding port entry in the port table */ + for (uint8_t PTableEntry = 0; PTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; PTableEntry++) + { + /* Run the application handler for the port */ + if ((PortStateTable[PTableEntry].Port == ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Port) && + (PortStateTable[PTableEntry].State == TCP_Port_Open)) + { + PortStateTable[PTableEntry].ApplicationHandler(&ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry], &ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.Buffer); + } + } + } + + /* Bail out early if there is already a frame waiting to be sent in the Ethernet OUT buffer */ + if (FrameOUT.FrameInBuffer) + return; + + /* Send response packets from each application as the TCP packet buffers are filled by the applications */ + for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++) + { + /* For each completely received packet, pass it along to the listening application */ + if ((ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.Buffer.Direction == TCP_PACKETDIR_OUT) && + (ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.Buffer.Ready)) + { + Ethernet_Frame_Header_t* FrameOUTHeader = (Ethernet_Frame_Header_t*)&FrameOUT.FrameData; + IP_Header_t* IPHeaderOUT = (IP_Header_t*)&FrameOUT.FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t)]; + TCP_Header_t* TCPHeaderOUT = (TCP_Header_t*)&FrameOUT.FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t) + + sizeof(IP_Header_t)]; + void* TCPDataOUT = &FrameOUT.FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t) + + sizeof(IP_Header_t) + + sizeof(TCP_Header_t)]; + + uint16_t PacketSize = ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.Buffer.Length; + + /* Fill out the TCP data */ + TCPHeaderOUT->SourcePort = ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Port; + TCPHeaderOUT->DestinationPort = ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemotePort; + TCPHeaderOUT->SequenceNumber = SwapEndian_32(ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.SequenceNumberOut); + TCPHeaderOUT->AcknowledgmentNumber = SwapEndian_32(ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.SequenceNumberIn); + TCPHeaderOUT->DataOffset = (sizeof(TCP_Header_t) / sizeof(uint32_t)); + TCPHeaderOUT->WindowSize = SwapEndian_16(TCP_WINDOW_SIZE); + + TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = TCP_FLAG_ACK; + TCPHeaderOUT->UrgentPointer = 0; + TCPHeaderOUT->Checksum = 0; + TCPHeaderOUT->Reserved = 0; + + memcpy(TCPDataOUT, ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.Buffer.Data, PacketSize); + + ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.SequenceNumberOut += PacketSize; + + TCPHeaderOUT->Checksum = TCP_Checksum16(TCPHeaderOUT, ServerIPAddress, + ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemoteAddress, + (sizeof(TCP_Header_t) + PacketSize)); + + PacketSize += sizeof(TCP_Header_t); + + /* Fill out the response IP header */ + IPHeaderOUT->TotalLength = SwapEndian_16(sizeof(IP_Header_t) + PacketSize); + IPHeaderOUT->TypeOfService = 0; + IPHeaderOUT->HeaderLength = (sizeof(IP_Header_t) / sizeof(uint32_t)); + IPHeaderOUT->Version = 4; + IPHeaderOUT->Flags = 0; + IPHeaderOUT->FragmentOffset = 0; + IPHeaderOUT->Identification = 0; + IPHeaderOUT->HeaderChecksum = 0; + IPHeaderOUT->Protocol = PROTOCOL_TCP; + IPHeaderOUT->TTL = DEFAULT_TTL; + IPHeaderOUT->SourceAddress = ServerIPAddress; + IPHeaderOUT->DestinationAddress = ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemoteAddress; + + IPHeaderOUT->HeaderChecksum = Ethernet_Checksum16(IPHeaderOUT, sizeof(IP_Header_t)); + + PacketSize += sizeof(IP_Header_t); + + /* Fill out the response Ethernet frame header */ + FrameOUTHeader->Source = ServerMACAddress; + FrameOUTHeader->Destination = (MAC_Address_t){{0x02, 0x00, 0x02, 0x00, 0x02, 0x00}}; + FrameOUTHeader->EtherType = SwapEndian_16(ETHERTYPE_IPV4); + + PacketSize += sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t); + + /* Set the response length in the buffer and indicate that a response is ready to be sent */ + FrameOUT.FrameLength = PacketSize; + FrameOUT.FrameInBuffer = true; + + ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.Buffer.Ready = false; + + break; + } + } +} + +/** Initializes the TCP protocol handler, clearing the port and connection state tables. This must be called before TCP packets are + * processed. + */ +void TCP_Init(void) +{ + /* Initialize the port state table with all CLOSED entries */ + for (uint8_t PTableEntry = 0; PTableEntry < MAX_OPEN_TCP_PORTS; PTableEntry++) + PortStateTable[PTableEntry].State = TCP_Port_Closed; + + /* Initialize the connection table with all CLOSED entries */ + for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++) + ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].State = TCP_Connection_Closed; +} + +/** Sets the state and callback handler of the given port, specified in big endian to the given state. + * + * \param Port Port whose state and callback function to set, specified in big endian + * \param State New state of the port, a value from the TCP_PortStates_t enum + * \param Handler Application callback handler for the port + * + * \return Boolean true if the port state was set, false otherwise (no more space in the port state table) + */ +bool TCP_SetPortState(uint16_t Port, uint8_t State, void (*Handler)(TCP_ConnectionState_t*, TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t*)) +{ + /* Note, Port number should be specified in BIG endian to simplfy network code */ + + /* Check to see if the port entry is already in the port state table */ + for (uint8_t PTableEntry = 0; PTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; PTableEntry++) + { + /* Find existing entry for the port in the table, update it if found */ + if (PortStateTable[PTableEntry].Port == Port) + { + PortStateTable[PTableEntry].State = State; + PortStateTable[PTableEntry].ApplicationHandler = Handler; + return true; + } + } + + /* Check if trying to open the port -- if so we need to find an unused (closed) entry and replace it */ + if (State == TCP_Port_Open) + { + for (uint8_t PTableEntry = 0; PTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; PTableEntry++) + { + /* Find a closed port entry in the table, change it to the given port and state */ + if (PortStateTable[PTableEntry].State == TCP_Port_Closed) + { + PortStateTable[PTableEntry].Port = Port; + PortStateTable[PTableEntry].State = State; + PortStateTable[PTableEntry].ApplicationHandler = Handler; + return true; + } + } + + /* Port not in table and no room to add it, return failure */ + return false; + } + else + { + /* Port not in table but trying to close it, so operation successful */ + return true; + } +} + +/** Retrieves the current state of a given TCP port, specified in big endian. + * + * \param Port TCP port whose state is to be retrieved, given in big-endian + * + * \return A value from the TCP_PortStates_t enum + */ +uint8_t TCP_GetPortState(uint16_t Port) +{ + /* Note, Port number should be specified in BIG endian to simplfy network code */ + + for (uint8_t PTableEntry = 0; PTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; PTableEntry++) + { + /* Find existing entry for the port in the table, return the port status if found */ + if (PortStateTable[PTableEntry].Port == Port) + return PortStateTable[PTableEntry].State; + } + + /* Port not in table, assume closed */ + return TCP_Port_Closed; +} + +/** Sets the connection state of the given port, remote address and remote port to the given TCP connection state. If the + * connection exists in the connection state table it is updated, otherwise it is created if possible. + * + * \param Port TCP port of the connection on the device, specified in big endian + * \param RemoteAddress Remote protocol IP address of the connected device + * \param RemotePort TCP port of the remote device in the connection, specified in big endian + * \param State TCP connection state, a value from the TCP_ConnectionStates_t enum + * + * \return Boolean true if the connection was updated or created, false otherwise (no more space in the connection state table) + */ +bool TCP_SetConnectionState(uint16_t Port, IP_Address_t RemoteAddress, uint16_t RemotePort, uint8_t State) +{ + /* Note, Port number should be specified in BIG endian to simplfy network code */ + + for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++) + { + /* Find port entry in the table */ + if ((ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Port == Port) && + IP_COMPARE(&ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemoteAddress, &RemoteAddress) && + ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemotePort == RemotePort) + { + ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].State = State; + return true; + } + } + + for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++) + { + /* Find empty entry in the table */ + if (ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].State == TCP_Connection_Closed) + { + ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Port = Port; + ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemoteAddress = RemoteAddress; + ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemotePort = RemotePort; + ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].State = State; + return true; + } + } + + return false; +} + +/** Retrieves the current state of a given TCP connection to a host. + * + * \param Port TCP port on the device in the connection, specified in big endian + * \param RemoteAddress Remote protocol IP address of the connected host + * \param RemotePort Remote TCP port of the connected host, specified in big endian + * + * \return A value from the TCP_ConnectionStates_t enum + */ +uint8_t TCP_GetConnectionState(uint16_t Port, IP_Address_t RemoteAddress, uint16_t RemotePort) +{ + /* Note, Port number should be specified in BIG endian to simplfy network code */ + + for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++) + { + /* Find port entry in the table */ + if ((ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Port == Port) && + IP_COMPARE(&ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemoteAddress, &RemoteAddress) && + ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemotePort == RemotePort) + + { + return ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].State; + } + } + + return TCP_Connection_Closed; +} + +/** Retrieves the connection info structure of a given connection to a host. + * + * \param Port TCP port on the device in the connection, specified in big endian + * \param RemoteAddress Remote protocol IP address of the connected host + * \param RemotePort Remote TCP port of the connected host, specified in big endian + * + * \return ConnectionInfo structure of the connection if found, NULL otherwise + */ +TCP_ConnectionInfo_t* TCP_GetConnectionInfo(uint16_t Port, IP_Address_t RemoteAddress, uint16_t RemotePort) +{ + /* Note, Port number should be specified in BIG endian to simplfy network code */ + + for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++) + { + /* Find port entry in the table */ + if ((ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Port == Port) && + IP_COMPARE(&ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemoteAddress, &RemoteAddress) && + ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemotePort == RemotePort) + { + return &ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info; + } + } + + return NULL; +} + +/** Processes a TCP packet inside an Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response + * to the output Ethernet frame if one is created by a application handler. + * + * \param IPHeaderInStart Pointer to the start of the incomming packet's IP header + * \param TCPHeaderInStart Pointer to the start of the incomming packet's TCP header + * \param TCPHeaderOutStart Pointer to the start of the outgoing packet's TCP header + * + * \return The number of bytes written to the out Ethernet frame if any, NO_RESPONSE if no + * response was generated, NO_PROCESS if the packet processing was deferred until the + * next Ethernet packet handler iteration + */ +int16_t TCP_ProcessTCPPacket(void* IPHeaderInStart, void* TCPHeaderInStart, void* TCPHeaderOutStart) +{ + IP_Header_t* IPHeaderIN = (IP_Header_t*)IPHeaderInStart; + TCP_Header_t* TCPHeaderIN = (TCP_Header_t*)TCPHeaderInStart; + TCP_Header_t* TCPHeaderOUT = (TCP_Header_t*)TCPHeaderOutStart; + + TCP_ConnectionInfo_t* ConnectionInfo; + + DecodeTCPHeader(TCPHeaderInStart); + + bool PacketResponse = false; + + /* Check if the destination port is open and allows incomming connections */ + if (TCP_GetPortState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort) == TCP_Port_Open) + { + /* Detect SYN from host to start a connection */ + if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags & TCP_FLAG_SYN) + TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_Listen); + + /* Detect RST from host to abort existing connection */ + if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags & TCP_FLAG_RST) + { + TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = (TCP_FLAG_RST | TCP_FLAG_ACK); + PacketResponse = true; + + TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, + TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_Closed); + } + else + { + /* Process the incomming TCP packet based on the current connection state for the sender and port */ + switch (TCP_GetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort)) + { + case TCP_Connection_Listen: + if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == TCP_FLAG_SYN) + { + /* SYN connection when closed starts a connection with a peer */ + + TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = (TCP_FLAG_SYN | TCP_FLAG_ACK); + PacketResponse = true; + + TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, + TCP_Connection_SYNReceived); + + ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort); + + ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberIn = (SwapEndian_32(TCPHeaderIN->SequenceNumber) + 1); + ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberOut = 0; + ConnectionInfo->Buffer.InUse = false; + } + + break; + case TCP_Connection_SYNReceived: + if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == TCP_FLAG_ACK) + { + /* ACK during the connection process completes the connection to a peer */ + + TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, + TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_Established); + + ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, + TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort); + + ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberOut++; + } + + break; + case TCP_Connection_Established: + if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == (TCP_FLAG_FIN | TCP_FLAG_ACK)) + { + /* FIN ACK when connected to a peer starts the finalization process */ + + TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = (TCP_FLAG_FIN | TCP_FLAG_ACK); + PacketResponse = true; + + TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, + TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_CloseWait); + + ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, + TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort); + + ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberIn++; + ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberOut++; + } + else if ((TCPHeaderIN->Flags == TCP_FLAG_ACK) || (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == (TCP_FLAG_ACK | TCP_FLAG_PSH))) + { + ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, + TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort); + + /* Check if the buffer is currently in use either by a buffered data to send, or receive */ + if ((ConnectionInfo->Buffer.InUse == false) && (ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Ready == false)) + { + ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Direction = TCP_PACKETDIR_IN; + ConnectionInfo->Buffer.InUse = true; + ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Length = 0; + } + + /* Check if the buffer has been claimed by us to read in data from the peer */ + if ((ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Direction == TCP_PACKETDIR_IN) && + (ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Length != TCP_WINDOW_SIZE)) + { + uint16_t IPOffset = (IPHeaderIN->HeaderLength * sizeof(uint32_t)); + uint16_t TCPOffset = (TCPHeaderIN->DataOffset * sizeof(uint32_t)); + uint16_t DataLength = (SwapEndian_16(IPHeaderIN->TotalLength) - IPOffset - TCPOffset); + + /* Copy the packet data into the buffer */ + memcpy(&ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Data[ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Length], + &((uint8_t*)TCPHeaderInStart)[TCPOffset], + DataLength); + + ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberIn += DataLength; + ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Length += DataLength; + + /* Check if the buffer is full or if the PSH flag is set, if so indicate buffer ready */ + if ((!(TCP_WINDOW_SIZE - ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Length)) || (TCPHeaderIN->Flags & TCP_FLAG_PSH)) + { + ConnectionInfo->Buffer.InUse = false; + ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Ready = true; + + TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = TCP_FLAG_ACK; + PacketResponse = true; + } + } + else + { + /* Buffer is currently in use by the application, defer processing of the incomming packet */ + return NO_PROCESS; + } + } + + break; + case TCP_Connection_Closing: + ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, + TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort); + + TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = (TCP_FLAG_ACK | TCP_FLAG_FIN); + PacketResponse = true; + + ConnectionInfo->Buffer.InUse = false; + + TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, + TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_FINWait1); + + break; + case TCP_Connection_FINWait1: + if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == (TCP_FLAG_FIN | TCP_FLAG_ACK)) + { + ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, + TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort); + + TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = TCP_FLAG_ACK; + PacketResponse = true; + + ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberIn++; + ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberOut++; + + TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, + TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_Closed); + } + else if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == TCP_FLAG_ACK) + { + TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, + TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_FINWait2); + } + + break; + case TCP_Connection_FINWait2: + if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == (TCP_FLAG_FIN | TCP_FLAG_ACK)) + { + ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, + TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort); + + TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = TCP_FLAG_ACK; + PacketResponse = true; + + ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberIn++; + ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberOut++; + + TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, + TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_Closed); + } + + break; + case TCP_Connection_CloseWait: + if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == TCP_FLAG_ACK) + { + TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, + TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_Closed); + } + + break; + } + } + } + else + { + /* Port is not open, indicate via a RST/ACK response to the sender */ + TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = (TCP_FLAG_RST | TCP_FLAG_ACK); + PacketResponse = true; + } + + /* Check if we need to respond to the sent packet */ + if (PacketResponse) + { + ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, + TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort); + + TCPHeaderOUT->SourcePort = TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort; + TCPHeaderOUT->DestinationPort = TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort; + TCPHeaderOUT->SequenceNumber = SwapEndian_32(ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberOut); + TCPHeaderOUT->AcknowledgmentNumber = SwapEndian_32(ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberIn); + TCPHeaderOUT->DataOffset = (sizeof(TCP_Header_t) / sizeof(uint32_t)); + + if (!(ConnectionInfo->Buffer.InUse)) + TCPHeaderOUT->WindowSize = SwapEndian_16(TCP_WINDOW_SIZE); + else + TCPHeaderOUT->WindowSize = SwapEndian_16(TCP_WINDOW_SIZE - ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Length); + + TCPHeaderOUT->UrgentPointer = 0; + TCPHeaderOUT->Checksum = 0; + TCPHeaderOUT->Reserved = 0; + + TCPHeaderOUT->Checksum = TCP_Checksum16(TCPHeaderOUT, IPHeaderIN->DestinationAddress, + IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, sizeof(TCP_Header_t)); + + return sizeof(TCP_Header_t); + } + + return NO_RESPONSE; +} + +/** Calculates the appropriate TCP checksum, consisting of the addition of the one's compliment of each word, + * complimented. + * + * \param TCPHeaderOutStart Pointer to the start of the packet's outgoing TCP header + * \param SourceAddress Source protocol IP address of the outgoing IP header + * \param SourceAddress DestinationAddress protocol IP address of the outgoing IP header + * \param TCPOutSize Size in bytes of the TCP data header and payload + * + * \return A 16-bit TCP checksum value + */ +static uint16_t TCP_Checksum16(void* TCPHeaderOutStart, IP_Address_t SourceAddress, + IP_Address_t DestinationAddress, uint16_t TCPOutSize) +{ + uint32_t Checksum = 0; + + /* TCP/IP checksums are the addition of the one's compliment of each word including the IP psudo-header, + complimented */ + + Checksum += ((uint16_t*)&SourceAddress)[0]; + Checksum += ((uint16_t*)&SourceAddress)[1]; + Checksum += ((uint16_t*)&DestinationAddress)[0]; + Checksum += ((uint16_t*)&DestinationAddress)[1]; + Checksum += SwapEndian_16(PROTOCOL_TCP); + Checksum += SwapEndian_16(TCPOutSize); + + for (uint8_t CurrWord = 0; CurrWord < (TCPOutSize >> 1); CurrWord++) + Checksum += ((uint16_t*)TCPHeaderOutStart)[CurrWord]; + + if (TCPOutSize & 0x01) + Checksum += (((uint16_t*)TCPHeaderOutStart)[TCPOutSize >> 1] & 0x00FF); + + while (Checksum & 0xFFFF0000) + Checksum = ((Checksum & 0xFFFF) + (Checksum >> 16)); + + return ~Checksum; +} diff --git a/Demos/RNDISEthernet/TCP.h b/Demos/RNDISEthernet/TCP.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..21254859ebe --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/RNDISEthernet/TCP.h @@ -0,0 +1,253 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for TCP.c. + */ + +#ifndef _TCP_H_ +#define _TCP_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + + #include + + #include "EthernetProtocols.h" + #include "Ethernet.h" + #include "ProtocolDecoders.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Maximum number of TCP ports which can be open at the one time */ + #define MAX_OPEN_TCP_PORTS 1 + + /** Maximum number of TCP connections which can be sustained at the one time */ + #define MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS 1 + + /** TCP window size, giving the maximum number of bytes which can be buffered at the one time */ + #define TCP_WINDOW_SIZE 1024 + + /** Port number for HTTP transmissions */ + #define TCP_PORT_HTTP SwapEndian_16(80) + + /** Data direction indicator for a TCP application buffer, indicating data from host-to-device */ + #define TCP_PACKETDIR_IN false + + /** Data direction indicator for a TCP application buffer, indicating data from device-to-host */ + #define TCP_PACKETDIR_OUT true + + /** Congestion Window Reduced TCP flag mask */ + #define TCP_FLAG_CWR (1 << 7) + + /** Explicit Congestion Notification TCP flag mask */ + #define TCP_FLAG_ECE (1 << 6) + + /** Urgent TCP flag mask */ + #define TCP_FLAG_URG (1 << 5) + + /** Data Acknowledge TCP flag mask */ + #define TCP_FLAG_ACK (1 << 4) + + /** Data Push TCP flag mask */ + #define TCP_FLAG_PSH (1 << 3) + + /** Reset TCP flag mask */ + #define TCP_FLAG_RST (1 << 2) + + /** Synchronize TCP flag mask */ + #define TCP_FLAG_SYN (1 << 1) + + /** Connection Finalize TCP flag mask */ + #define TCP_FLAG_FIN (1 << 0) + + /** Application macro: Determines if the given application buffer contains a packet received from the host + * + * \param Buffer Application buffer to check + * + * \return Boolean true if the buffer contains a packet from the host, false otherwise + */ + #define TCP_APP_HAS_RECEIVED_PACKET(Buffer) (Buffer->Ready && (Buffer->Direction == TCP_PACKETDIR_IN)) + + /** Application macro: Indicates if the application buffer is currently locked by the application for device-to-host transfers. + * + * \param Buffer Application buffer to check + * + * \return Boolean true if the buffer has been captured by the application for device-to-host transmissions, false otherwise + */ + #define TCP_APP_HAVE_CAPTURED_BUFFER(Buffer) (!(Buffer->Ready) && Buffer->InUse && \ + (Buffer->Direction == TCP_PACKETDIR_OUT)) + + /** Application macro: Indicates if the application can lock the buffer for multiple continued device-to-host transmissions. + * + * \param Buffer Application buffer to check + * + * \return Boolean true if the buffer may be captured by the application for device-to-host transmissions, false otherwise + */ + #define TCP_APP_CAN_CAPTURE_BUFFER(Buffer) Buffer->InUse + + /** Application macro: Captures the application buffer, locking it for device-to-host transmissions only. This should be + * performed when the application needs to transmit several packets worth of data in succession with no interruptions from the host. + * + * \note The application must check that the buffer can be locked first using TCP_APP_CAN_CAPTURE_BUFFER(). + * + * \param Buffer Application buffer to lock + */ + #define TCP_APP_CAPTURE_BUFFER(Buffer) MACROS{ Buffer->Direction = TCP_PACKETDIR_OUT; Buffer->InUse = true; }MACROE + + /** Application macro: Releases a captured application buffer, allowing for host-to-device packets to be received. + * + * \param Buffer Application buffer to release + */ + #define TCP_APP_RELEASE_BUFFER(Buffer) MACROS{ Buffer->InUse = false; }MACROE + + /** Application macro: Sends the contents of the given application buffer to the host. + * + * \param Buffer Application buffer to send + * \param Len Length of data contained in the buffer + */ + #define TCP_APP_SEND_BUFFER(Buffer, Len) MACROS{ Buffer->Direction = TCP_PACKETDIR_OUT; Buffer->Length = Len; Buffer->Ready = true; }MACROE + + /** Application macro: Clears the application buffer, ready for a packet to be written to it. + * + * \param Buffer Application buffer to clear + */ + #define TCP_APP_CLEAR_BUFFER(Buffer) MACROS{ Buffer->Ready = false; Buffer->Length = 0; }MACROE + + /** Application macro: Closes an open connection to a host. + * + * \param Connection Open TCP connection to close + */ + #define TCP_APP_CLOSECONNECTION(Connection) MACROS{ Connection->State = TCP_Connection_Closing; }MACROE + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for possible TCP port states */ + enum TCP_PortStates_t + { + TCP_Port_Closed = 0, /**< TCP port closed, no connections to a host may be made on this port. */ + TCP_Port_Open = 1, /**< TCP port open, connections to a host may be made on this port. */ + }; + + /** Enum for possible TCP connection states */ + enum TCP_ConnectionStates_t + { + TCP_Connection_Listen = 0, /**< Listening for a connection from a host */ + TCP_Connection_SYNSent = 1, /**< Unused */ + TCP_Connection_SYNReceived = 2, /**< SYN received, waiting for ACK */ + TCP_Connection_Established = 3, /**< Connection established in both directions */ + TCP_Connection_FINWait1 = 4, /**< Closing, waiting for ACK */ + TCP_Connection_FINWait2 = 5, /**< Closing, waiting for FIN ACK */ + TCP_Connection_CloseWait = 6, /**< Closing, waiting for ACK */ + TCP_Connection_Closing = 7, /**< Unused */ + TCP_Connection_LastACK = 8, /**< Unused */ + TCP_Connection_TimeWait = 9, /**< Unused */ + TCP_Connection_Closed = 10, /**< Connection closed in both directions */ + }; + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for a TCP connection buffer structure, including size, data and direction */ + typedef struct + { + uint16_t Length; /**< Length of data in the TCP application buffer */ + uint8_t Data[TCP_WINDOW_SIZE]; /**< TCP application data buffer */ + bool Direction; /**< Buffer transmission direction, either TCP_PACKETDIR_IN or TCP_PACKETDIR_OUT */ + bool Ready; /**< If data from host, indicates buffer ready to be read, otherwise indicates + * buffer ready to be sent to the host + */ + bool InUse; /** Indicates if the buffer is locked to to the current direction, and cannot be changed */ + } TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t; + + /** Type define for a TCP connection information structure */ + typedef struct + { + uint32_t SequenceNumberIn; /**< Current TCP sequence number for host-to-device */ + uint32_t SequenceNumberOut; /**< Current TCP sequence number for device-to-host */ + TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t Buffer; /**< Connection application data buffer */ + } TCP_ConnectionInfo_t; + + /** Type define for a complete TCP connection state */ + typedef struct + { + uint16_t Port; /**< Connection port number on the device */ + uint16_t RemotePort; /**< Connection port number on the host */ + IP_Address_t RemoteAddress; /**< Connection protocol IP address of the host */ + TCP_ConnectionInfo_t Info; /**< Connection information, including application buffer */ + uint8_t State; /**< Current connection state, a value from the TCP_ConnectionStates_t enum */ + } TCP_ConnectionState_t; + + /** Type define for a TCP port state */ + typedef struct + { + uint16_t Port; /**< TCP port number on the device */ + uint8_t State; /**< Current port state, a value from the TCP_PortStates_t enum */ + void (*ApplicationHandler) (TCP_ConnectionState_t* ConnectionState, + TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t* Buffer); /**< Port application handler */ + } TCP_PortState_t; + + /** Type define for a TCP packet header */ + typedef struct + { + uint16_t SourcePort; /**< Source port of the TCP packet */ + uint16_t DestinationPort; /**< Destination port of the TCP packet */ + + uint32_t SequenceNumber; /**< Data sequence number of the packet */ + uint32_t AcknowledgmentNumber; /**< Data acknowledgment number of the packet */ + + unsigned int Reserved : 4; /**< Reserved, must be all 0 */ + unsigned int DataOffset : 4; /**< Offset of the data from the start of the header, in 4 byte chunks */ + uint8_t Flags; /**< TCP packet flags */ + uint16_t WindowSize; /**< Current data window size (bytes remaning in reception buffer) */ + + uint16_t Checksum; /**< TCP checksum */ + uint16_t UrgentPointer; /**< Urgent data pointer */ + } TCP_Header_t; + + /* Tasks: */ + TASK(TCP_Task); + + /* External Variables: */ + TCP_PortState_t PortStateTable[MAX_OPEN_TCP_PORTS]; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void TCP_Init(void); + bool TCP_SetPortState(uint16_t Port, uint8_t State, void (*Handler)(TCP_ConnectionState_t*, TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t*)); + uint8_t TCP_GetPortState(uint16_t Port); + bool TCP_SetConnectionState(uint16_t Port, IP_Address_t RemoteAddress, uint16_t RemotePort, uint8_t State); + uint8_t TCP_GetConnectionState(uint16_t Port, IP_Address_t RemoteAddress, uint16_t RemotePort); + TCP_ConnectionInfo_t* TCP_GetConnectionInfo(uint16_t Port, IP_Address_t RemoteAddress, uint16_t RemotePort); + int16_t TCP_ProcessTCPPacket(void* IPHeaderInStart, void* TCPHeaderInStart, void* TCPHeaderOutStart); + + #if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_TCP_C) + static uint16_t TCP_Checksum16(void* TCPHeaderOutStart, IP_Address_t SourceAddress, + IP_Address_t DestinationAddress, uint16_t TCPOutSize); + #endif + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/RNDISEthernet/UDP.c b/Demos/RNDISEthernet/UDP.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..3e1f9395b33 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/RNDISEthernet/UDP.c @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * User Datagram Protocol (UDP) packet handling routines. This protocol handles high throughput, low + * reliability packets which are typically used to encapsulate streaming data. + */ + +#define INCLUDE_FROM_UDP_C +#include "UDP.h" + +/** Processes a UDP packet inside an Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response + * to the output Ethernet frame if a subprotocol handler has created a response packet. + * + * \param IPHeaderInStart Pointer to the start of the incomming packet's IP header + * \param UDPHeaderInStart Pointer to the start of the incomming packet's UDP header + * \param UDPHeaderOutStart Pointer to the start of the outgoing packet's UDP header + * + * \return The number of bytes written to the out Ethernet frame if any, NO_RESPONSE otherwise + */ +int16_t UDP_ProcessUDPPacket(void* IPHeaderInStart, void* UDPHeaderInStart, void* UDPHeaderOutStart) +{ + UDP_Header_t* UDPHeaderIN = (UDP_Header_t*)UDPHeaderInStart; + UDP_Header_t* UDPHeaderOUT = (UDP_Header_t*)UDPHeaderOutStart; + + int16_t RetSize = NO_RESPONSE; + + DecodeUDPHeader(UDPHeaderInStart); + + /* Check to see if the UDP packet is a DHCP packet */ + if (SwapEndian_16(UDPHeaderIN->DestinationPort) == UDP_PORT_DHCP_REQUEST) + { + RetSize = DHCP_ProcessDHCPPacket(IPHeaderInStart, + &((uint8_t*)UDPHeaderInStart)[sizeof(UDP_Header_t)], + &((uint8_t*)UDPHeaderOutStart)[sizeof(UDP_Header_t)]); + } + + /* Check to see if the protocol processing routine has filled out a response */ + if (RetSize > 0) + { + /* Fill out the response UDP packet header */ + UDPHeaderOUT->SourcePort = UDPHeaderIN->DestinationPort; + UDPHeaderOUT->DestinationPort = UDPHeaderIN->SourcePort; + UDPHeaderOUT->Checksum = 0; + UDPHeaderOUT->Length = SwapEndian_16(sizeof(UDP_Header_t) + RetSize); + + /* Return the size of the response so far */ + return (sizeof(UDP_Header_t) + RetSize); + } + + return NO_RESPONSE; +} diff --git a/Demos/RNDISEthernet/UDP.h b/Demos/RNDISEthernet/UDP.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..60bbe2185b8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/RNDISEthernet/UDP.h @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for IP.c. + */ + +#ifndef _UDP_H_ +#define _UDP_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + + #include "EthernetProtocols.h" + #include "Ethernet.h" + #include "ProtocolDecoders.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Source UDP port for a DHCP request */ + #define UDP_PORT_DHCP_REQUEST 67 + + /** Destination UDP port for a DHCP reply */ + #define UDP_PORT_DHCP_REPLY 68 + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for a UDP packet header */ + typedef struct + { + uint16_t SourcePort; /**< Packet source port */ + uint16_t DestinationPort; /**< Packet destination port */ + uint16_t Length; /**< Total packet length, in bytes */ + uint16_t Checksum; /**< Optional UDP packet checksum */ + } UDP_Header_t; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + int16_t UDP_ProcessUDPPacket(void* IPHeaderInStart, void* UDPHeaderInStart, void* UDPHeaderOutStart); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/RNDISEthernet/Webserver.c b/Demos/RNDISEthernet/Webserver.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..c07f2c8bd4f --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/RNDISEthernet/Webserver.c @@ -0,0 +1,162 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Simple webserver application for demonstrating the RNDIS demo and TCP/IP stack. This + * application will serve up a static HTTP webpage when requested by the host. + */ + +#include "Webserver.h" + +/** HTTP server response header, for transmission before the page contents. This indicates to the host that a page exists at the + * given location, and gives extra connection information. + */ +char PROGMEM HTTPHeader[] = "HTTP/1.1 200 OK\r\n" + "Server: LUFA RNDIS\r\n" + "Content-type: text/html\r\n" + "Connection: close\r\n\r\n"; + +/** HTTP page to serve to the host when a HTTP request is made. This page is too long for a single response, thus it is automatically + * broken up into smaller blocks and sent as a series of packets each time the webserver application callback is run. + */ +char PROGMEM HTTPPage[] = + "" + " " + " " + " LUFA Webserver Demo" + " " + " " + " " + "

Hello from your USB AVR!

" + "

" + " Hello! Welcome to the LUFA RNDIS Demo Webserver test page, running on your USB AVR via the LUFA library. This demonstrates the HTTP webserver, TCP/IP stack and RNDIS demo all running atop the LUFA USB stack." + "

" + " Project Information: http://www.fourwalledcubicle.com/LUFA.php." + "

" + " LUFA Version: " LUFA_VERSION_STRING + "

" + " " + ""; + + +/** Initializes the Webserver application, opening the appropriate HTTP port in the TCP handler and registering the application + * callback routine for packets sent to the HTTP protocol port. + */ +void Webserver_Init(void) +{ + /* Open the HTTP port in the TCP protocol so that HTTP connections to the device can be established */ + TCP_SetPortState(TCP_PORT_HTTP, TCP_Port_Open, Webserver_ApplicationCallback); +} + +/** Indicates if a given request equals the given HTTP command. + * + * \param RequestHeader HTTP request made by the host + * \param Command HTTP command to compare the request to + * + * \return Boolean true if the command matches the request, false otherwise + */ +static bool IsHTTPCommand(uint8_t* RequestHeader, char* Command) +{ + /* Returns true if the non null terminated string in RequestHeader matches the null terminated string Command */ + return (strncmp((char*)RequestHeader, Command, strlen(Command)) == 0); +} + +/** Application callback routine, executed each time the TCP processing task runs. This callback determines what request + * has been made (if any), and serves up appropriate responses. + * + * \param ConnectionState Pointer to a TCP Connection State structure giving connection information + * \param Buffer Pointer to the application's send/receive packet buffer + */ +void Webserver_ApplicationCallback(TCP_ConnectionState_t* ConnectionState, TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t* Buffer) +{ + char* BufferDataStr = (char*)Buffer->Data; + static uint8_t PageBlock = 0; + + /* Check to see if a packet has been received on the HTTP port from a remote host */ + if (TCP_APP_HAS_RECEIVED_PACKET(Buffer)) + { + if (IsHTTPCommand(Buffer->Data, "GET")) + { + PageBlock = 0; + + /* Copy the HTTP response header into the packet buffer */ + strcpy_P(BufferDataStr, HTTPHeader); + + /* Send the buffer contents to the host */ + TCP_APP_SEND_BUFFER(Buffer, strlen(BufferDataStr)); + + /* Lock the buffer to Device->Host transmissions only while we send the page contents */ + TCP_APP_CAPTURE_BUFFER(Buffer); + } + else if (IsHTTPCommand(Buffer->Data, "HEAD")) + { + /* Copy the HTTP response header into the packet buffer */ + strcpy_P(BufferDataStr, HTTPHeader); + + /* Send the buffer contents to the host */ + TCP_APP_SEND_BUFFER(Buffer, strlen(BufferDataStr)); + } + else if (IsHTTPCommand(Buffer->Data, "TRACE")) + { + /* Echo the host's query back to the host */ + TCP_APP_SEND_BUFFER(Buffer, Buffer->Length); + } + else + { + /* Unknown request, just clear the buffer (drop the packet) */ + TCP_APP_CLEAR_BUFFER(Buffer); + } + } + else if (TCP_APP_HAVE_CAPTURED_BUFFER(Buffer)) + { + uint16_t RemLength = strlen_P(&HTTPPage[PageBlock * HTTP_REPLY_BLOCK_SIZE]); + uint16_t Length; + + /* Determine the length of the loaded block */ + Length = ((RemLength > HTTP_REPLY_BLOCK_SIZE) ? HTTP_REPLY_BLOCK_SIZE : RemLength); + + /* Copy the next buffer sized block of the page to the packet buffer */ + strncpy_P(BufferDataStr, &HTTPPage[PageBlock * HTTP_REPLY_BLOCK_SIZE], Length); + + /* Send the buffer contents to the host */ + TCP_APP_SEND_BUFFER(Buffer, Length); + + /* Check to see if the entire page has been sent */ + if (PageBlock++ == (sizeof(HTTPPage) / HTTP_REPLY_BLOCK_SIZE)) + { + /* Unlock the buffer so that the host can fill it with future packets */ + TCP_APP_RELEASE_BUFFER(Buffer); + + /* Close the connection to the host */ + TCP_APP_CLOSECONNECTION(ConnectionState); + } + } +} diff --git a/Demos/RNDISEthernet/Webserver.h b/Demos/RNDISEthernet/Webserver.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..b2193ad1f7e --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/RNDISEthernet/Webserver.h @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Webserver.c. + */ + +#ifndef _WEBSERVER_H_ +#define _WEBSERVER_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + + #include + + #include "TCP.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Maximum size of a HTTP response per transmission */ + #define HTTP_REPLY_BLOCK_SIZE 128 + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void Webserver_Init(void); + void Webserver_ApplicationCallback(TCP_ConnectionState_t* ConnectionState, TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t* Buffer); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/RNDISEthernet/makefile b/Demos/RNDISEthernet/makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..840b9d8d5d4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/RNDISEthernet/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,715 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# Denver Gingerich +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb1287 + + +# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# Typical values are: +# F_CPU = 1000000 +# F_CPU = 1843200 +# F_CPU = 2000000 +# F_CPU = 3686400 +# F_CPU = 4000000 +# F_CPU = 7372800 +# F_CPU = 8000000 +# F_CPU = 11059200 +# F_CPU = 14745600 +# F_CPU = 16000000 +# F_CPU = 18432000 +# F_CPU = 20000000 +F_CPU = 8000000 + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = RNDISEthernet + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + Descriptors.c \ + RNDIS.c \ + Ethernet.c \ + ProtocolDecoders.c \ + ICMP.c \ + TCP.c \ + UDP.c \ + DHCP.c \ + ARP.c \ + IP.c \ + Webserver.c \ + ../../LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial_Stream.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial.c \ + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = ../../ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS +CDEFS += -DUSB_DEVICE_ONLY -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)" +CDEFS += -DNO_DECODE_ETHERNET -DNO_DECODE_ARP -DNO_DECODE_ICMP -DNO_DECODE_IP -DNO_DECODE_TCP -DNO_DECODE_UDP -DNO_DECODE_DHCP + + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20 +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd +# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500 +# +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf +MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) ) +FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr ) + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +checkhooks: build + @echo + @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events ------- + @$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \ + cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \ + echo "(None)" + @echo ----- End Unhooked LUFA Events ----- + +checklibmode: + @echo + @echo ----------- Library Mode ----------- + @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \ + | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \ + || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)." + @echo ------------------------------------ + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + copy $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom --debug 1 $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end + +clean_binary: + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + +clean_list: + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode begin \ +finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \ +clean clean_list clean_binary program debug \ +gdb-config doxygen dfu flip diff --git a/Demos/StillImageHost/ConfigDescriptor.c b/Demos/StillImageHost/ConfigDescriptor.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..a336c1f5e06 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/StillImageHost/ConfigDescriptor.c @@ -0,0 +1,191 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations + * needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special computer-readable structures + * which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "ConfigDescriptor.h" + +/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This + * routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate + * with compatible devices. + * + * This routine searches for a SI interface descriptor containing bulk IN and OUT data endpoints. + * + * \return An error code from the StillImageHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum. + */ +uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void) +{ + uint8_t* ConfigDescriptorData; + uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize; + uint8_t FoundEndpoints = 0; + + /* Get Configuration Descriptor size from the device */ + if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(&ConfigDescriptorSize, NULL) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + return ControlError; + + /* Ensure that the Configuration Descriptor isn't too large */ + if (ConfigDescriptorSize > MAX_CONFIG_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE) + return DescriptorTooLarge; + + /* Allocate enough memory for the entire config descriptor */ + ConfigDescriptorData = alloca(ConfigDescriptorSize); + + /* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */ + USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(&ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData); + + /* Validate returned data - ensure first entry is a configuration header descriptor */ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(ConfigDescriptorData) != DTYPE_Configuration) + return InvalidConfigDataReturned; + + /* Get the Still Image interface from the configuration descriptor */ + if (USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData, NextStillImageInterface)) + { + /* Descriptor not found, error out */ + return NoInterfaceFound; + } + + /* Get the IN and OUT data and event endpoints for the Still Image interface */ + while (FoundEndpoints != ((1 << SIMAGE_EVENTS_PIPE) | (1 << SIMAGE_DATA_IN_PIPE) | (1 << SIMAGE_DATA_OUT_PIPE))) + { + /* Fetch the next endpoint from the current Still Image interface */ + if (USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData, + NextSImageInterfaceDataEndpoint)) + { + /* Descriptor not found, error out */ + return NoEndpointFound; + } + + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t); + + /* Check if the found endpoint is a interrupt or bulk type descriptor */ + if ((EndpointData->Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK) == EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT) + { + /* If the endpoint is a IN type interrupt endpoint */ + if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN) + { + /* Configure the events pipe */ + Pipe_ConfigurePipe(SIMAGE_EVENTS_PIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, PIPE_TOKEN_IN, + EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, + PIPE_BANK_DOUBLE); + + Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests(); + Pipe_SetInterruptPeriod(EndpointData->PollingIntervalMS); + + /* Set the flag indicating that the events pipe has been found */ + FoundEndpoints |= (1 << SIMAGE_EVENTS_PIPE); + } + } + else + { + /* Check if the endpoint is a bulk IN or bulk OUT endpoint */ + if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN) + { + /* Configure the data IN pipe */ + Pipe_ConfigurePipe(SIMAGE_DATA_IN_PIPE, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_IN, + EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, + PIPE_BANK_DOUBLE); + + Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests(); + + /* Set the flag indicating that the data IN pipe has been found */ + FoundEndpoints |= (1 << SIMAGE_DATA_IN_PIPE); + } + else + { + /* Configure the data OUT pipe */ + Pipe_ConfigurePipe(SIMAGE_DATA_OUT_PIPE, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_OUT, + EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, + PIPE_BANK_DOUBLE); + + /* Set the flag indicating that the data OUT pipe has been found */ + FoundEndpoints |= (1 << SIMAGE_DATA_OUT_PIPE); + } + } + } + + /* Valid data found, return success */ + return SuccessfulConfigRead; +} + +/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's + * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration + * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found. + * + * This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct Still Image Class, Subclass and Protocol values. + * + * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextStillImageInterface) +{ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface) + { + /* Check the descriptor class and protocol, break out if correct class/protocol interface found */ + if ((DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Class == SIMAGE_CLASS) && + (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).SubClass == SIMAGE_SUBCLASS) && + (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Protocol == SIMAGE_PROTOCOL)) + { + return Descriptor_Search_Found; + } + } + + return Descriptor_Search_NotFound; +} + +/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's + * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration + * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found. + * + * This comparator searches for the next Interrupt or Bulk Endpoint descriptor of the current SI interface, aborting the + * search if another interface descriptor is found before the next endpoint. + * + * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextSImageInterfaceDataEndpoint) +{ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint) + { + uint8_t EndpointType = (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t).Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK); + + if ((EndpointType == EP_TYPE_BULK) || (EndpointType == EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT)) + return Descriptor_Search_Found; + } + else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface) + { + return Descriptor_Search_Fail; + } + + return Descriptor_Search_NotFound; +} diff --git a/Demos/StillImageHost/ConfigDescriptor.h b/Demos/StillImageHost/ConfigDescriptor.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..f791488b110 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/StillImageHost/ConfigDescriptor.h @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c. + */ + +#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_ +#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include // USB Functionality + #include // Configuration Descriptor Parser + + #include "StillImageHost.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Interface Class value for the Still Image Device class */ + #define SIMAGE_CLASS 0x06 + + /** Interface Class value for the Still Image Device subclass */ + #define SIMAGE_SUBCLASS 0x01 + + /** Interface Class value for the Still Image Device protocol */ + #define SIMAGE_PROTOCOL 0x01 + + /** Maximum size of a device configuration descriptor which can be processed by the host, in bytes */ + #define MAX_CONFIG_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE 512 + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible return codes of the ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */ + enum MassStorageHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t + { + SuccessfulConfigRead = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */ + ControlError = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */ + DescriptorTooLarge = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */ + InvalidConfigDataReturned = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */ + NoInterfaceFound = 4, /**< A compatible SI interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */ + NoEndpointFound = 5, /**< The correct SI endpoint descriptors were not found in the device's SI interface */ + }; + + /* Configuration Descriptor Comparison Functions: */ + DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextStillImageInterface); + DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextSImageInterfaceDataEndpoint); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/StillImageHost/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/StillImageHost/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..d3a494a5f09 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/StillImageHost/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Still Image Host Demo" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek, +# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish, +# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene, +# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command , where is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command , where +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Namespace. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file . + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are +# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values +# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list; +# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which +# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous +# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE +# respectively. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin" + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to the search engine +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be +# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO diff --git a/Demos/StillImageHost/PIMACodes.h b/Demos/StillImageHost/PIMACodes.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..38755aba8e7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/StillImageHost/PIMACodes.h @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header containing macros for possible PIMA commands. Refer to the PIMA standard + * documentation for more information on each PIMA command. + */ + +#ifndef _PIMA_CODES_H_ + + /* Macros: */ + #define PIMA_OPERATION_GETDEVICEINFO 0x1001 + #define PIMA_OPERATION_OPENSESSION 0x1002 + #define PIMA_OPERATION_CLOSESESSION 0x1003 + + #define PIMA_RESPONSE_OK 0x2001 + #define PIMA_RESPONSE_GENERALERROR 0x2002 + #define PIMA_RESPONSE_SESSIONNOTOPEN 0x2003 + #define PIMA_RESPONSE_INVALIDTRANSACTIONID 0x2004 + #define PIMA_RESPONSE_OPERATIONNOTSUPPORTED 0x2005 + #define PIMA_RESPONSE_PARAMETERNOTSUPPORTED 0x2006 + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/StillImageHost/StillImageCommands.c b/Demos/StillImageHost/StillImageCommands.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..969ff5af686 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/StillImageHost/StillImageCommands.c @@ -0,0 +1,273 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Still Image Device commands, to issue PIMA commands to the device for + * reading device status, capacity, and other characteristics as well as + * reading and writing of stored image data. + */ + +#include "StillImageCommands.h" + +/* Globals: */ +/** PIMA block container for the block to send to the device */ +PIMA_Container_t PIMA_SendBlock; + +/** PIMA block container for the last received block from the device */ +PIMA_Container_t PIMA_ReceivedBlock; + +/** PIMA block container for the last event block received from the device */ +PIMA_Container_t PIMA_EventBlock; + + +/** Function to send the PIMA command container to the attached still image device. */ +void SImage_SendBlockHeader(void) +{ + /* Unfreeze the data OUT pipe ready for data transmission */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(SIMAGE_DATA_OUT_PIPE); + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + /* Write the PIMA block to the data OUT pipe */ + Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(&PIMA_SendBlock, PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(0)); + + /* If the block type is a command, send its parameters (if any) */ + if (PIMA_SendBlock.Type == CType_CommandBlock) + { + /* Determine the size of the parameters in the block via the data length attribute */ + uint8_t ParamBytes = (PIMA_SendBlock.DataLength - PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(0)); + + /* Check if any parameters in the command block */ + if (ParamBytes) + { + /* Write the PIMA parameters to the data OUT pipe */ + Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(&PIMA_SendBlock.Params, ParamBytes); + } + + /* Send the PIMA command block to the attached device */ + Pipe_ClearCurrentBank(); + } + + /* Freeze pipe after use */ + Pipe_Freeze(); +} + +/** Function to receive a PIMA event container from the attached still image device. */ +void SImage_RecieveEventHeader(void) +{ + /* Unfreeze the events pipe */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(SIMAGE_EVENTS_PIPE); + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + /* Read in the event data into the global structure */ + Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&PIMA_EventBlock, sizeof(PIMA_EventBlock)); + + /* Clear the pipe after read complete to prepare for next event */ + Pipe_ClearCurrentBank(); + + /* Freeze the event pipe again after use */ + Pipe_Freeze(); +} + +/** Function to receive a PIMA response container from the attached still image device. */ +uint8_t SImage_RecieveBlockHeader(void) +{ + uint16_t TimeoutMSRem = COMMAND_DATA_TIMEOUT_MS; + + /* Unfreeze the data IN pipe */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(SIMAGE_DATA_IN_PIPE); + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + /* Wait until data received on the IN pipe */ + while (!(Pipe_ReadWriteAllowed())) + { + /* Check to see if a new frame has been issued (1ms elapsed) */ + if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_HSOFI)) + { + /* Clear the flag and decrement the timout period counter */ + USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_HSOFI); + TimeoutMSRem--; + + /* Check to see if the timeout period for the command has elapsed */ + if (!(TimeoutMSRem)) + { + /* Return error code */ + return PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_Timeout; + } + } + + Pipe_SelectPipe(SIMAGE_DATA_OUT_PIPE); + + /* Check if pipe stalled (command failed by device) */ + if (Pipe_IsStalled()) + { + /* Clear the stall condition on the OUT pipe */ + SImage_ClearPipeStall(SIMAGE_DATA_OUT_PIPE); + + /* Return error code and break out of the loop */ + return PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_PipeStalled; + } + + Pipe_SelectPipe(SIMAGE_DATA_IN_PIPE); + + /* Check if pipe stalled (command failed by device) */ + if (Pipe_IsStalled()) + { + /* Clear the stall condition on the IN pipe */ + SImage_ClearPipeStall(SIMAGE_DATA_IN_PIPE); + + /* Return error code */ + return PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_PipeStalled; + } + + /* Check to see if the device was disconnected, if so exit function */ + if (!(USB_IsConnected)) + { + /* Return error code */ + return PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_DeviceDisconnected; + } + }; + + /* Freeze OUT pipe after use */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(SIMAGE_DATA_OUT_PIPE); + Pipe_Freeze(); + + /* Select the IN data pipe for data reception */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(SIMAGE_DATA_IN_PIPE); + + /* Load in the response from the attached device */ + Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&PIMA_ReceivedBlock, PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(0)); + + /* Check if the returned block type is a response block */ + if (PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Type == CType_ResponseBlock) + { + /* Determine the size of the parameters in the block via the data length attribute */ + uint8_t ParamBytes = (PIMA_ReceivedBlock.DataLength - PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(0)); + + /* Check if the device has returned any parameters */ + if (ParamBytes) + { + /* Read the PIMA parameters from the data IN pipe */ + Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Params, ParamBytes); + } + + /* Clear pipe bank after use */ + Pipe_ClearCurrentBank(); + } + + /* Freeze the IN pipe after use */ + Pipe_Freeze(); + + return PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError; +} + +/** Function to send the given data to the device, after a command block has been issued. + * + * \param Buffer Source data buffer to send to the device + * \param Bytes Number of bytes to send + */ +void SImage_SendData(void* Buffer, uint16_t Bytes) +{ + /* Unfreeze the data OUT pipe */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(SIMAGE_DATA_OUT_PIPE); + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + /* Write the data contents to the pipe */ + Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(Buffer, Bytes); + + /* Freeze the pipe again after use */ + Pipe_Freeze(); +} + +/** Function to receive the given data to the device, after a response block has been received. + * + * \param Buffer Destination data buffer to put read bytes from the device + * \param Bytes Number of bytes to receive + * + * \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +uint8_t SImage_ReadData(void* Buffer, uint16_t Bytes) +{ + uint8_t ErrorCode; + + /* Unfreeze the data IN pipe */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(SIMAGE_DATA_IN_PIPE); + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + /* Read in the data into the buffer */ + ErrorCode = Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(Buffer, Bytes); + + /* Freeze the pipe again after use */ + Pipe_Freeze(); + + return ErrorCode; +} + +/** Function to test if a PIMA event block is waiting to be read in from the attached device. + * + * \return True if an event is waiting to be read in from the device, false otherwise + */ +bool SImage_IsEventReceived(void) +{ + bool IsEventReceived = false; + + /* Unfreeze the Event pipe */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(SIMAGE_EVENTS_PIPE); + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + /* If the pipe contains data, an event has been received */ + if (Pipe_BytesInPipe()) + IsEventReceived = true; + + /* Freeze the pipe after use */ + Pipe_Freeze(); + + return IsEventReceived; +} + +/** Clears the stall condition in the attached device on the nominated endpoint number. + * + * \param EndpointNum Endpoint number in the attached device whose stall condition is to be cleared + * + * \return A value from the USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum + */ +uint8_t SImage_ClearPipeStall(const uint8_t PipeEndpointNum) +{ + USB_HostRequest = (USB_Host_Request_Header_t) + { + bmRequestType: (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_ENDPOINT), + bRequest: REQ_ClearFeature, + wValue: FEATURE_ENDPOINT_HALT, + wIndex: PipeEndpointNum, + wLength: 0, + }; + + return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL); +} diff --git a/Demos/StillImageHost/StillImageCommands.h b/Demos/StillImageHost/StillImageCommands.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..5679deae29f --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/StillImageHost/StillImageCommands.h @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for StillImageCommands.c. + */ + +#ifndef _STILL_IMAGE_COMMANDS_H_ +#define _STILL_IMAGE_COMMANDS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include // USB Functionality + + #include "PIMACodes.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Pipe number of the Still Image data IN pipe */ + #define SIMAGE_DATA_IN_PIPE 0x01 + + /** Pipe number of the Still Image data OUT pipe */ + #define SIMAGE_DATA_OUT_PIPE 0x02 + + /** Pipe number of the Still Image events pipe */ + #define SIMAGE_EVENTS_PIPE 0x03 + + /** Timeout period between the issuing of a command to a device, and the reception of the first packet */ + #define COMMAND_DATA_TIMEOUT_MS 5000 + + /** Used in the DataLength field of a PIMA container, to give the total container size in bytes. + * + * \param params Number of parameters which are to be sent in the Param field of the container + */ + #define PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(params) ((sizeof(PIMA_SendBlock) - sizeof(PIMA_SendBlock.Params)) + \ + (params * sizeof(PIMA_SendBlock.Params[0]))) + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for a PIMA container, use to send commands and receieve responses to and from an + * attached Still Image device. + */ + typedef struct + { + uint32_t DataLength; /**< Length of the container and data, in bytes */ + uint16_t Type; /**< Container type, a value from the PIMA_Container_Types_t enum */ + uint16_t Code; /**< Command, event or response code of the container */ + uint32_t TransactionID; /**< Unique container ID to link blocks together */ + uint32_t Params[4]; /**< Block parameters to be issued along with the block code */ + } PIMA_Container_t; + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible PIMA contains types. */ + enum PIMA_Container_Types_t + { + CType_Undefined = 0, /**< Undefined container type */ + CType_CommandBlock = 1, /**< Command Block container type */ + CType_DataBlock = 2, /**< Data Block container type */ + CType_ResponseBlock = 3, /**< Response container type */ + CType_EventBlock = 4, /**< Event Block container type */ + }; + + /* External Variables: */ + extern PIMA_Container_t PIMA_SendBlock; + extern PIMA_Container_t PIMA_ReceivedBlock; + extern PIMA_Container_t PIMA_EventBlock; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void SImage_SendBlockHeader(void); + uint8_t SImage_RecieveBlockHeader(void); + void SImage_RecieveEventHeader(void); + void SImage_SendData(void* Buffer, uint16_t Bytes); + uint8_t SImage_ReadData(void* Buffer, uint16_t Bytes); + bool SImage_IsEventReceived(void); + uint8_t SImage_ClearPipeStall(const uint8_t PipeEndpointNum); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.aps b/Demos/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.aps new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..cf2f1d8ea40 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.aps @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +StillImageHost30-Sep-2008 14:17:4130-Sep-2008 14:17:55241030-Sep-2008 14:17:4144, 14, 0, 589AVR GCCC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\StillImageHost\falseR00R01R02R03R04R05R06R07R08R09R10R11R12R13R14R15R16R17R18R19R20R21R22R23R24R25R26R27R28R29R30R31Auto000ConfigDescriptor.cStillImageCommands.cStillImageHost.cConfigDescriptor.hPIMACodes.hStillImageCommands.hStillImageHost.hmakefiledefaultYESmakefileatmega128111StillImageHost.elfdefault\1-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enumsdefault1C:\WinAVR-20080512\bin\avr-gcc.exeC:\WinAVR-20080512\utils\bin\make.exe diff --git a/Demos/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.c b/Demos/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..50b2054dfa7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.c @@ -0,0 +1,436 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the StillImageHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of + * the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + +#include "StillImageHost.h" + +/* Project Tags, for reading out using the ButtLoad project */ +BUTTLOADTAG(ProjName, "LUFA SIMG Host App"); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildTime, __TIME__); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildDate, __DATE__); + +/* Scheduler Task List */ +TASK_LIST +{ + { Task: USB_USBTask , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, + { Task: USB_SImage_Host , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, +}; + + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then + * starts the scheduler to run the application tasks. + */ +int main(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable Clock Division */ + CLKPR = (1 << CLKPCE); + CLKPR = 0; + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + SerialStream_Init(9600, false); + LEDs_Init(); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); + + /* Initialize Scheduler so that it can be used */ + Scheduler_Init(); + + /* Initialize USB Subsystem */ + USB_Init(); + + /* Startup message */ + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_RESET ESC_BG_WHITE ESC_INVERSE_ON ESC_ERASE_DISPLAY + "Still Image Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_INVERSE_OFF)); + + /* Scheduling - routine never returns, so put this last in the main function */ + Scheduler_Start(); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and + * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceAttached) +{ + puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n")); + UpdateStatus(Status_USBEnumerating); + + /* Start USB management task to enumerate the device */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_RUN); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and + * stops the library USB task management process. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceUnattached) +{ + /* Stop USB management and Still Image tasks */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_STOP); + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_SImage_Host, TASK_STOP); + + puts_P(PSTR("\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n")); + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully + * enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete) +{ + /* Once device is fully enumerated, start the Still Image Host task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_SImage_Host, TASK_RUN); + + /* Indicate device enumeration complete */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_HostError) +{ + USB_ShutDown(); + + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + UpdateStatus(Status_HardwareError); + for(;;); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occured while + * enumerating an attached USB device. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed) +{ + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"), SubErrorCode); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- In State %d\r\n"), USB_HostState); + + UpdateStatus(Status_EnumerationError); +} + +/** Task to set the configuration of the attached device after it has been enumerated, and to print device information + * through the serial port. + */ +TASK(USB_SImage_Host) +{ + uint8_t ErrorCode; + + switch (USB_HostState) + { + case HOST_STATE_Addressed: + /* Standard request to set the device configuration to configuration 1 */ + USB_HostRequest = (USB_Host_Request_Header_t) + { + bmRequestType: (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE), + bRequest: REQ_SetConfiguration, + wValue: 1, + wIndex: 0, + wLength: 0, + }; + + /* Send the request, display error and wait for device detatch if request fails */ + if (USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + { + puts_P(PSTR("Control error.\r\n")); + + /* Indicate error via status LEDs */ + UpdateStatus(Status_EnumerationError); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + break; + } + + USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured; + break; + case HOST_STATE_Configured: + puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n")); + + /* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */ + if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead) + { + if (ErrorCode == ControlError) + puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n")); + else + puts_P(PSTR("Invalid Device.\r\n")); + + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error via status LEDs */ + UpdateStatus(Status_EnumerationError); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + break; + } + + puts_P(PSTR("Still Image Device Enumerated.\r\n")); + + USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Ready; + break; + case HOST_STATE_Ready: + /* Indicate device busy via the status LEDs */ + UpdateStatus(Status_Busy); + + puts_P(PSTR("Retrieving Device Info...\r\n")); + + PIMA_SendBlock = (PIMA_Container_t) + { + DataLength: PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(0), + Type: CType_CommandBlock, + Code: PIMA_OPERATION_GETDEVICEINFO, + TransactionID: 0x00000000, + Params: {}, + }; + + /* Send the GETDEVICEINFO block */ + SImage_SendBlockHeader(); + + /* Recieve the response data block */ + if ((ErrorCode = SImage_RecieveBlockHeader()) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError) + { + ShowCommandError(ErrorCode, false); + break; + } + + /* Calculate the size of the returned device info data structure */ + uint16_t DeviceInfoSize = (PIMA_ReceivedBlock.DataLength - PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(0)); + + /* Create a buffer large enough to hold the entire device info */ + uint8_t DeviceInfo[DeviceInfoSize]; + + /* Read in the data block data (containing device info) */ + SImage_ReadData(DeviceInfo, DeviceInfoSize); + + /* Once all the data has been read, the pipe must be cleared before the response can be sent */ + Pipe_ClearCurrentBank(); + + /* Create a pointer for walking through the info dataset */ + uint8_t* DeviceInfoPos = DeviceInfo; + + /* Skip over the data before the unicode device information strings */ + DeviceInfoPos += 8; // Skip to VendorExtensionDesc String + DeviceInfoPos += ((*DeviceInfoPos << 1) + 1); // Skip over VendorExtensionDesc String + DeviceInfoPos += 2; // Skip over FunctionalMode + DeviceInfoPos += (4 + (*(uint32_t*)DeviceInfoPos << 1)); // Skip over OperationCode Array + DeviceInfoPos += (4 + (*(uint32_t*)DeviceInfoPos << 1)); // Skip over EventCode Array + DeviceInfoPos += (4 + (*(uint32_t*)DeviceInfoPos << 1)); // Skip over DevicePropCode Array + DeviceInfoPos += (4 + (*(uint32_t*)DeviceInfoPos << 1)); // Skip over ObjectFormatCode Array + DeviceInfoPos += (4 + (*(uint32_t*)DeviceInfoPos << 1)); // Skip over ObjectFormatCode Array + + /* Extract and convert the Manufacturer Unicode string to ASCII and print it through the USART */ + char Manufacturer[*DeviceInfoPos]; + UnicodeToASCII(DeviceInfoPos, Manufacturer); + printf_P(PSTR(" Manufacturer: %s\r\n"), Manufacturer); + + DeviceInfoPos += ((*DeviceInfoPos << 1) + 1); // Skip over Manufacturer String + + /* Extract and convert the Model Unicode string to ASCII and print it through the USART */ + char Model[*DeviceInfoPos]; + UnicodeToASCII(DeviceInfoPos, Model); + printf_P(PSTR(" Model: %s\r\n"), Model); + + DeviceInfoPos += ((*DeviceInfoPos << 1) + 1); // Skip over Model String + + /* Extract and convert the Device Version Unicode string to ASCII and print it through the USART */ + char DeviceVersion[*DeviceInfoPos]; + UnicodeToASCII(DeviceInfoPos, DeviceVersion); + printf_P(PSTR(" Device Version: %s\r\n"), DeviceVersion); + + /* Recieve the final response block from the device */ + if ((ErrorCode = SImage_RecieveBlockHeader()) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError) + { + ShowCommandError(ErrorCode, false); + break; + } + + /* Verify that the command completed successfully */ + if ((PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Type != CType_ResponseBlock) || (PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Code != PIMA_RESPONSE_OK)) + { + ShowCommandError(PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Code, true); + break; + } + + puts_P(PSTR("Opening Session...\r\n")); + + PIMA_SendBlock = (PIMA_Container_t) + { + DataLength: PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(1), + Type: CType_CommandBlock, + Code: PIMA_OPERATION_OPENSESSION, + TransactionID: 0x00000000, + Params: {0x00000001}, + }; + + /* Send the OPENSESSION block, open a session with an ID of 0x0001 */ + SImage_SendBlockHeader(); + + /* Recieve the response block from the device */ + if ((ErrorCode = SImage_RecieveBlockHeader()) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError) + { + ShowCommandError(ErrorCode, false); + break; + } + + /* Verify that the command completed successfully */ + if ((PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Type != CType_ResponseBlock) || (PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Code != PIMA_RESPONSE_OK)) + { + ShowCommandError(PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Code, true); + break; + } + + puts_P(PSTR("Closing Session...\r\n")); + + PIMA_SendBlock = (PIMA_Container_t) + { + DataLength: PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(1), + Type: CType_CommandBlock, + Code: PIMA_OPERATION_CLOSESESSION, + TransactionID: 0x00000001, + Params: {0x00000001}, + }; + + /* Send the CLOSESESSION block, close the session with an ID of 0x0001 */ + SImage_SendBlockHeader(); + + /* Recieve the response block from the device */ + if ((ErrorCode = SImage_RecieveBlockHeader()) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError) + { + ShowCommandError(ErrorCode, false); + break; + } + + /* Verify that the command completed successfully */ + if ((PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Type != CType_ResponseBlock) || (PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Code != PIMA_RESPONSE_OK)) + { + ShowCommandError(PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Code, true); + break; + } + + puts_P(PSTR("Done.\r\n")); + + /* Indicate device no longer busy */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + + break; + } +} + +/** Function to convert a given Unicode encoded string to ASCII. This function will only work correctly on Unicode + * strings which contain ASCII printable characters only. + * + * \param UnicodeString Pointer to a Unicode encoded input string + * \param Buffer Pointer to a buffer where the converted ASCII string should be stored + */ +void UnicodeToASCII(uint8_t* UnicodeString, char* Buffer) +{ + /* Get the number of characters in the string, skip to the start of the string data */ + uint8_t CharactersRemaining = *(UnicodeString++); + + /* Loop through the entire unicode string */ + while (CharactersRemaining--) + { + /* Load in the next unicode character (only the lower byte, only Unicode coded ASCII supported) */ + *(Buffer++) = *UnicodeString; + + /* Jump to the next unicode character */ + UnicodeString += 2; + } + + /* Null terminate the string */ + *Buffer = 0; +} + +/** Function to manage status updates to the user. This is done via LEDs on the given board, if available, but may be changed to + * log to a serial port, or anything else that is suitable for status updates. + * + * \param CurrentStatus Current status of the system, from the StillImageHost_StatusCodes_t enum + */ +void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus) +{ + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS; + + /* Set the LED mask to the appropriate LED mask based on the given status code */ + switch (CurrentStatus) + { + case Status_USBNotReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1); + break; + case Status_USBEnumerating: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2); + break; + case Status_USBReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED2); + break; + case Status_EnumerationError: + case Status_HardwareError: + case Status_PIMACommandError: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3); + break; + case Status_Busy: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4); + break; + } + + /* Set the board LEDs to the new LED mask */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); +} + +/** Displays a PIMA command error via the device's serial port. + * + * \param ErrorCode Error code of the function which failed to complete successfully + * \param ResponseErrorCode Indicates if the error is due to a command failed indication from the device, or a communication failure + */ +void ShowCommandError(uint8_t ErrorCode, bool ResponseCodeError) +{ + char* FailureType = ((ResponseCodeError) ? PSTR("Response Code != OK") : PSTR("Transaction Fail")); + + printf_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Command Error (%S).\r\n"), FailureType); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error via status LEDs */ + UpdateStatus(Status_PIMACommandError); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); +} diff --git a/Demos/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.h b/Demos/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..5669c827c94 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.h @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for StillImageHost.c. + */ + +#ifndef _STILL_IMAGE_HOST_H_ +#define _STILL_IMAGE_HOST_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + + #include "ConfigDescriptor.h" + #include "PIMACodes.h" + #include "StillImageCommands.h" + + #include // PROGMEM tags readable by the ButtLoad project + #include // ANSI Terminal Escape Codes + #include // USB Functionality + #include // Serial stream driver + #include // LED driver + #include // Simple scheduler for task management + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible status codes for passing to the UpdateStatus() function. */ + enum StillImageHost_StatusCodes_t + { + Status_USBNotReady = 0, /**< USB is not ready (disconnected from a USB device) */ + Status_USBEnumerating = 1, /**< USB interface is enumerating */ + Status_USBReady = 2, /**< USB interface is connected and ready */ + Status_EnumerationError = 3, /**< Software error while enumerating the attached USB device */ + Status_HardwareError = 4, /**< Hardware error while enumerating the attached USB device */ + Status_Busy = 5, /**< Busy reading or writing to the attached Still Image device */ + Status_PIMACommandError = 6, /**< Error while sending or receiving a PIM command to the attached device */ + }; + + /* Task Definitions: */ + TASK(USB_SImage_Host); + + /* Event Handlers: */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceAttached); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceUnattached); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_HostError); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void UnicodeToASCII(uint8_t* restrict UnicodeString, char* restrict Buffer); + void ShowCommandError(uint8_t ErrorCode, bool ResponseCodeError); + void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.txt b/Demos/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..6e2657be69d --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.txt @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage Still Image Host Demo + * + * Still Image host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference + * application for implementing a Still Image host, for USB devices such as + * digital cameras. + * + * This demo will enumerate an attached USB Still Image device, print out its + * information structure, open a session with the device and finally close the + * session. + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + *
USB Mode:Host
USB Class:Still Image Device
USB Subclass:N/A
Relevant Standards:USBIF Still Image Class SpecificationPIMA 15740 Specification
Usable Speeds:Full Speed Mode
+ */ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Demos/StillImageHost/makefile b/Demos/StillImageHost/makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..f2aee82e22d --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/StillImageHost/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,705 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# Denver Gingerich +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb1287 + + +# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# Typical values are: +# F_CPU = 1000000 +# F_CPU = 1843200 +# F_CPU = 2000000 +# F_CPU = 3686400 +# F_CPU = 4000000 +# F_CPU = 7372800 +# F_CPU = 8000000 +# F_CPU = 11059200 +# F_CPU = 14745600 +# F_CPU = 16000000 +# F_CPU = 18432000 +# F_CPU = 20000000 +F_CPU = 8000000 + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = StillImageHost + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + ConfigDescriptor.c \ + StillImageCommands.c \ + ../../LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial_Stream.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/ConfigDescriptor.c \ + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = ../../ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS +CDEFS += -DUSB_HOST_ONLY -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)" + + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20 +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd +# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500 +# +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf +MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) ) +FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr ) + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +checkhooks: build + @echo + @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events ------- + @$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \ + cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \ + echo "(None)" + @echo ----- End Unhooked LUFA Events ----- + +checklibmode: + @echo + @echo ----------- Library Mode ----------- + @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \ + | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \ + || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)." + @echo ------------------------------------ + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion: + @$(CC) --version + + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + copy $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom --debug 1 $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +## Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end + +clean_binary: + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + +clean_list: + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode begin \ +finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \ +clean clean_list clean_binary program debug \ +gdb-config doxygen dfu flip diff --git a/Demos/TestApp/Descriptors.c b/Demos/TestApp/Descriptors.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..fc56660be99 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/TestApp/Descriptors.c @@ -0,0 +1,187 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special + * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine + * the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "Descriptors.h" + +/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall + * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the + * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration + * process begins. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor = +{ + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), Type: DTYPE_Device}, + + USBSpecification: VERSION_BCD(01.10), + Class: 0x00, + SubClass: 0x00, + Protocol: 0x00, + + Endpoint0Size: 8, + + VendorID: 0x03EB, + ProductID: 0x2040, + ReleaseNumber: 0x0000, + + ManufacturerStrIndex: 0x01, + ProductStrIndex: 0x02, + SerialNumStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + NumberOfConfigurations: 1 +}; + +/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage + * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces + * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting + * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor = +{ + Config: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), Type: DTYPE_Configuration}, + + TotalConfigurationSize: ( sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t) + + sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t) ), + + TotalInterfaces: 1, + + ConfigurationNumber: 1, + ConfigurationStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + ConfigAttributes: (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED), + + MaxPowerConsumption: USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100) + }, + + Interface: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface}, + + InterfaceNumber: 1, + AlternateSetting: 0, + + TotalEndpoints: 0, + + Class: 0xFF, + SubClass: 0x00, + Protocol: 0x00, + + InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, +}; + +/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests + * the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate + * via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(1), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG} +}; + +/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable + * form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(11), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"Dean Camera" +}; + +/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form, + * and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(9), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"LUFA Demo" +}; + +/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see StdDescriptors.h + * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given + * to the USB library. When the device recieves a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function + * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the + * USB host. + */ +uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) +{ + const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8); + const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF); + + void* Address = NULL; + uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR; + + switch (DescriptorType) + { + case DTYPE_Device: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(DeviceDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Configuration: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t); + break; + case DTYPE_String: + switch (DescriptorNumber) + { + case 0x00: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(LanguageString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x01: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ManufacturerString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x02: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ProductString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size); + break; + } + + break; + } + + *DescriptorAddress = Address; + return Size; +} diff --git a/Demos/TestApp/Descriptors.h b/Demos/TestApp/Descriptors.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..88c0a5e7e9d --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/TestApp/Descriptors.h @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Descriptors.c. + */ + +#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_ +#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + + #include + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the + * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which + * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config; /**< Configuration descriptor header structure */ + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t Interface; /**< Interface descriptor, required for the device to enumerate */ + } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) + ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/TestApp/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/TestApp/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..80e1b7e4a80 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/TestApp/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Test Application Demo" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek, +# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish, +# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene, +# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command , where is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command , where +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Namespace. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file . + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are +# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values +# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list; +# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which +# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous +# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE +# respectively. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin" + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to the search engine +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be +# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO diff --git a/Demos/TestApp/TestApp.aps b/Demos/TestApp/TestApp.aps new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..6939268c955 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/TestApp/TestApp.aps @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +TestApp30-Sep-2008 14:18:1130-Sep-2008 14:18:23241030-Sep-2008 14:18:1144, 14, 0, 589AVR GCCC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\TestApp\falseR00R01R02R03R04R05R06R07R08R09R10R11R12R13R14R15R16R17R18R19R20R21R22R23R24R25R26R27R28R29R30R31Auto000Descriptors.cTestApp.cTestEvents.cDescriptors.hTestApp.hTestEvents.hmakefiledefaultYESmakefileatmega128111TestApp.elfdefault\1-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enumsdefault1C:\WinAVR-20080512\bin\avr-gcc.exeC:\WinAVR-20080512\utils\bin\make.exe diff --git a/Demos/TestApp/TestApp.c b/Demos/TestApp/TestApp.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..e7ee526d7f2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/TestApp/TestApp.c @@ -0,0 +1,198 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the TestApp demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and + * is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + +#include "TestApp.h" + +/* Project Tags, for reading out using the ButtLoad project */ +BUTTLOADTAG(ProjName, "LUFA Test App"); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildTime, __TIME__); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildDate, __DATE__); +BUTTLOADTAG(LUFAVersion, "LUFA V" LUFA_VERSION_STRING); + +/* Scheduler Task List */ +TASK_LIST +{ + { Task: TestApp_CheckJoystick, TaskStatus: TASK_RUN }, + { Task: TestApp_CheckHWB , TaskStatus: TASK_RUN }, + { Task: TestApp_CheckTemp , TaskStatus: TASK_RUN }, + { Task: USB_USBTask , TaskStatus: TASK_RUN }, +}; + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then + * starts the scheduler to run the application tasks. + */ +int main(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable clock division */ + SetSystemClockPrescaler(0); + + /* Hardware initialization */ + SerialStream_Init(9600, false); + ADC_Init(ADC_SINGLE_CONVERSION | ADC_PRESCALE_64); + Temperature_Init(); + Joystick_Init(); + LEDs_Init(); + HWB_Init(); + + /* Millisecond timer initialization, with output compare interrupt enabled */ + OCR0A = 0x7D; + TCCR0A = (1 << WGM01); + TCCR0B = ((1 << CS01) | (1 << CS00)); + TIMSK0 = (1 << OCIE0A); + + /* Turn on interrupts */ + sei(); + + /* Startup message via USART */ + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_RESET ESC_BG_WHITE ESC_INVERSE_ON ESC_ERASE_DISPLAY + "LUFA Demo running.\r\n" ESC_INVERSE_OFF)); + + /* Scheduling - routine never returns, so put this last in the main function */ + Scheduler_Start(); +} + +/** ISR for the timer 0 compare vector. This ISR fires once each millisecond, and increments the + * scheduler tick counter. + */ +ISR(TIMER0_COMPA_vect, ISR_BLOCK) +{ + /* Scheduler test - increment scheduler tick counter once each millisecond */ + Scheduler_TickCounter++; +} + +/** Task responsible for checking the joystick position, and displaying the joystick position onto the + * board LEDs. + */ +TASK(TestApp_CheckJoystick) +{ + uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL = Joystick_GetStatus(); + uint8_t LEDMask = 0; + + /* Test of the Joystick - change a mask in response to joystick */ + if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP) + LEDMask |= LEDS_LED1; + + if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN) + LEDMask |= LEDS_LED2; + + if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT) + LEDMask |= LEDS_LED3; + + if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT) + LEDMask |= LEDS_LED4; + + if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS) + LEDMask = LEDS_ALL_LEDS; + + /* Test of LEDs - light up in response to joystick */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); +} + +/** Task responsible for checking the current temperature via the temperature sensor mounted on the + * board, and displaying it through the serial USART. + */ +TASK(TestApp_CheckTemp) +{ + static SchedulerDelayCounter_t DelayCounter = 10000; // Force immediate run on startup + + /* Task runs every 10000 ticks, 10 seconds for this demo */ + if (Scheduler_HasDelayElapsed(10000, &DelayCounter)) + { + printf_P(PSTR("Current temperature: %d Degrees Celcius\r\n\r\n"), + (int)Temperature_GetTemperature()); + + /* Reset the delay counter, ready to count another 10000 tick interval */ + Scheduler_ResetDelay(&DelayCounter); + } +} + +/** Task responsible for checking the HWB button position, and start-stopping other tasks and the USB + * interface in response to user joystick movements. + */ +TASK(TestApp_CheckHWB) +{ + static SchedulerDelayCounter_t DelayCounter = 0; + static bool IsPressed; + static bool BlockingJoystickTask; + + /* Check if HWB pressed (start USB) */ + if (HWB_GetStatus() == true) + { + /* Debounce - check 100 ticks later to see if button is still being pressed */ + if ((IsPressed == false) && (Scheduler_HasDelayElapsed(100, &DelayCounter))) + { + /* Set flag, indicating that current pressed state has been handled */ + IsPressed = true; + + /* First start of the USB interface permenantly blocks the joystick task */ + if (BlockingJoystickTask == false) + { + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(TestApp_CheckJoystick, TASK_STOP); + BlockingJoystickTask = true; + } + + /* Toggle USB interface */ + if (USB_IsInitialized == true) + { + USB_ShutDown(); + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_LED1); + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_WHITE "USB Power Off.\r\n")); + + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(TestApp_CheckTemp, TASK_RUN); + } + else + { + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(TestApp_CheckTemp, TASK_STOP); + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3); + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_YELLOW "USB Power On.\r\n")); + + USB_Init(USB_MODE_UID, USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL); + } + } + } + else + { + /* HWB not pressed - reset debounce interval counter and press handled flag */ + Scheduler_ResetDelay(&DelayCounter); + IsPressed = false; + } +} diff --git a/Demos/TestApp/TestApp.h b/Demos/TestApp/TestApp.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..4175fad120c --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/TestApp/TestApp.h @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for TestApp.c. + */ + +#ifndef _TESTAPP_H_ +#define _TESTAPP_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + + #include // Library Version Information + #include // USB Functionality + #include // Simple scheduler for task management + #include // Auto-defragmenting Dynamic Memory allocation + #include // PROGMEM tags readable by the ButtLoad project + #include // ANSI Terminal Escape Codes + #include // ADC driver + #include // USART Stream driver + #include // Joystick driver + #include // LED driver + #include // Hardware Button driver + #include // Temperature sensor driver + + /* Task Definitions: */ + TASK(TestApp_CheckJoystick); + TASK(TestApp_CheckHWB); + TASK(TestApp_CheckTemp); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/TestApp/TestApp.txt b/Demos/TestApp/TestApp.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..e5b268aa549 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/TestApp/TestApp.txt @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage Test Application for the LUFA library + * + * Test application. Demonstrates several aspects of the LUFA + * Library. On startup the current temperature will be printed + * through the USART every 10 seconds, and the current joystick + * position will be indicated via the LEDs on the selected board. + * Pressing the HWB will initiate the USB subsystem, enumerating + * the device (which has no actual functionality beyond + * enumeration as a device or as a host in this demo, and serves + * only to demonstrate the USB portion of the library). It will + * also suspend the joystick and temperature monitoring tasks. + * + * Pressing the HWB a second time will turn off the USB system + * and resume the temperature printing task (but not the joystick + * monitoring task). + * + * When activated, the USB events will be printed through the + * serial USART. + * + * When the USB subsystem is activated, the board LEDs will show + * the current USB status. + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + *
USB Mode:Host/Device (Dual Role)
USB Class:N/A
USB Subclass:N/A
Relevant Standards:N/A
Usable Speeds:Low Speed Mode, Full Speed Mode
+ */ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Demos/TestApp/TestEvents.c b/Demos/TestApp/TestEvents.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..8f05b820866 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/TestApp/TestEvents.c @@ -0,0 +1,226 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * This file contains dummy handlers for all the possible USB events passed to the + * application by the library (see Events.h documentation for more details on USB events). + * + * Each event is caught and printed to the USART so that they may be monitored. + */ + +#define INCLUDE_FROM_TESTEVENTS_C +#include "TestEvents.h" + +/** Simple routine which aborts the program execution when a fatal error occurs, and is passed to the + * application via an event. When run, this function shuts down the USB interface, indicates an error + * via the board LEDs, prints an error message to the USART and then enters an infinite loop, preventing + * any more application code (other than interrupts) from executing. + */ +static void Abort_Program(void) +{ + USB_ShutDown(); + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3); + + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_INVERSE_ON "\r\n**PROGRAM ABORT**")); + for (;;); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_VBUSChange event. When fired, the event is logged to the USART. */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_VBUSChange) +{ + puts_P(PSTR(EVENT_PREFIX "VBUS Change\r\n")); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_VBUSConnect event. When fired, the event is logged to the USART. */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_VBUSConnect) +{ + puts_P(PSTR(EVENT_PREFIX "VBUS +\r\n")); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_VBUSDisconnect event. When fired, the event is logged to the USART. */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_VBUSDisconnect) +{ + puts_P(PSTR(EVENT_PREFIX "VBUS -\r\n")); +} + +/** + * Event handler for the USB_Connect event. When fired, the event is logged to the USART and the + * USB task started. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Connect) +{ + puts_P(PSTR(EVENT_PREFIX "USB +\r\n")); + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4); + + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_RUN); +} + +/** + * Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. When fired, the event is logged to the USART and the + * USB task stopped. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Disconnect) +{ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_STOP); + + puts_P(PSTR(EVENT_PREFIX "USB -\r\n")); + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED3); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Suspend event. When fired, the event is logged to the USART. */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Suspend) +{ + puts_P(PSTR(EVENT_PREFIX ESC_BG_YELLOW "USB Sleep\r\n")); + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_ALL_LEDS); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_WakeUp event. When fired, the event is logged to the USART. */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_WakeUp) +{ + puts_P(PSTR(EVENT_PREFIX ESC_BG_GREEN "USB Wakeup\r\n")); + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Reset event. When fired, the event is logged to the USART. */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Reset) +{ + puts_P(PSTR(EVENT_PREFIX "USB Reset\r\n")); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_UIDChange event. When fired, the event is logged to the USART. */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_UIDChange) +{ + char* ModeStrPtr; + + puts_P(PSTR(EVENT_PREFIX "UID Change\r\n")); + + if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_DEVICE) + ModeStrPtr = PSTR("HOST"); + else if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_HOST) + ModeStrPtr = PSTR("DEVICE"); + else + ModeStrPtr = PSTR("N/A"); + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3); + + printf_P(PSTR(" -- New Mode %S\r\n"), ModeStrPtr); +} + +/** + * Event handler for the USB_PowerOnFail event. When fired, the event is logged to the USART and the program + * execution aborted. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_PowerOnFail) +{ + char* ModeStrPtr; + + puts_P(PSTR(EVENT_PREFIX ESC_BG_RED "Power On Fail\r\n")); + + if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_DEVICE) + ModeStrPtr = PSTR("DEVICE"); + else if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_HOST) + ModeStrPtr = PSTR("HOST"); + else + ModeStrPtr = PSTR("N/A"); + + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Mode %S\r\n"), ModeStrPtr); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + Abort_Program(); +} + +/** + * Event handler for the USB_HostError event. When fired, the event is logged to the USART and the program + * execution aborted. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_HostError) +{ + puts_P(PSTR(EVENT_PREFIX ESC_BG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + Abort_Program(); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. When fired, the event is logged to the USART. */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed) +{ + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); +} + +/** + * Event handler for the USB_DeviceError event. When fired, the event is logged to the USART and the program + * execution aborted. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceError) +{ + puts_P(PSTR(EVENT_PREFIX ESC_BG_RED "Device Mode Error\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + Abort_Program(); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event. When fired, the event is logged to the USART. */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_UnhandledControlPacket) +{ + puts_P(PSTR(EVENT_PREFIX "Ctrl Request\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Req Data %d\r\n"), bRequest); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Req Type %d\r\n"), bmRequestType); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. When fired, the event is logged to the USART. */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_ConfigurationChanged) +{ + puts_P(PSTR(EVENT_PREFIX "Configuration Number Changed\r\n")); + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. When fired, the event is logged to the USART. */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceAttached) +{ + puts_P(PSTR(EVENT_PREFIX ESC_BG_GREEN "Device +\r\n")); + + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_RUN); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. When fired, the event is logged to the USART. */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceUnattached) +{ + puts_P(PSTR(EVENT_PREFIX ESC_BG_YELLOW "Device -\r\n")); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. When fired, the event is logged to the USART. */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete) +{ + puts_P(PSTR(EVENT_PREFIX "Device Enumeration Complete\r\n")); +} diff --git a/Demos/TestApp/TestEvents.h b/Demos/TestApp/TestEvents.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..6ba06aed84e --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/TestApp/TestEvents.h @@ -0,0 +1,110 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for TestEvents.c. + */ + +#ifndef _TESTEVENTS_H_ +#define _TESTEVENTS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + + #include // Commonly used macros + #include // USB Functionality + #include // LED driver + #include // USART Stream driver + #include // ANSI Terminal Escape Codes + #include // Simple scheduler for task management + + /* Event Catch List: */ + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_VBUSChange event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_VBUSChange); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_VBUSConnect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_VBUSConnect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_VBUSDisconnect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_VBUSDisconnect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Connect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Connect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Disconnect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Disconnect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Suspend event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Suspend); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_WakeUp event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_WakeUp); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Reset event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Reset); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_UIDChange event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_UIDChange); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_PowerOnFail event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_PowerOnFail); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_HostError event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_HostError); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_DeviceError event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceError); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_UnhandledControlPacket); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_ConfigurationChanged event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_ConfigurationChanged); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_DeviceAttached event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceAttached); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_DeviceUnattached event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceUnattached); + + /* Macros: */ + /** Prefix sent through the USART when an even fires before the actual event message. */ + #define EVENT_PREFIX ESC_INVERSE_ON "EVENT:" ESC_INVERSE_OFF " " + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + #if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_TESTEVENTS_C) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + static void Abort_Program(void) ATTR_NO_RETURN; + #endif + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/TestApp/makefile b/Demos/TestApp/makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..9d9b5fd6ae9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/TestApp/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,710 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# Denver Gingerich +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb1287 + + +# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# Typical values are: +# F_CPU = 1000000 +# F_CPU = 1843200 +# F_CPU = 2000000 +# F_CPU = 3686400 +# F_CPU = 4000000 +# F_CPU = 7372800 +# F_CPU = 8000000 +# F_CPU = 11059200 +# F_CPU = 14745600 +# F_CPU = 16000000 +# F_CPU = 18432000 +# F_CPU = 20000000 +F_CPU = 8000000 + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = TestApp + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + TestEvents.c \ + Descriptors.c \ + ../../LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c \ + ../../LUFA/MemoryAllocator/DynAlloc.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/Board/Temperature.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial_Stream.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.c \ + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = ../../ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES +CDEFS += -DNUM_BLOCKS=100 -DBLOCK_SIZE=8 -DNUM_HANDLES=20 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CFLAGS += -mshort-calls +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +#PRINTF_LIB = +PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd +# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500 +# +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf +MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) ) +FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr ) + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +checkhooks: build + @echo + @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events ------- + @$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \ + cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \ + echo "(None)" + @echo ----- End Unhooked LUFA Events ----- + +checklibmode: + @echo + @echo ----------- Library Mode ----------- + @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \ + | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \ + || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)." + @echo ------------------------------------ + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + copy $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom --debug 1 $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end + +clean_binary: + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + +clean_list: + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode begin \ +finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \ +clean clean_list clean_binary program debug \ +gdb-config doxygen dfu flip diff --git a/Demos/USBtoSerial/Descriptors.c b/Demos/USBtoSerial/Descriptors.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..03d4ed9e455 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/USBtoSerial/Descriptors.c @@ -0,0 +1,263 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special + * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine + * the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "Descriptors.h" + +/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall + * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the + * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration + * process begins. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor = +{ + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), Type: DTYPE_Device}, + + USBSpecification: VERSION_BCD(01.10), + Class: 0x02, + SubClass: 0x00, + Protocol: 0x00, + + Endpoint0Size: 8, + + VendorID: 0x03EB, + ProductID: 0x2044, + ReleaseNumber: 0x0000, + + ManufacturerStrIndex: 0x01, + ProductStrIndex: 0x02, + SerialNumStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + NumberOfConfigurations: 1 +}; + +/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage + * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces + * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting + * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor = +{ + Config: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), Type: DTYPE_Configuration}, + + TotalConfigurationSize: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t), + TotalInterfaces: 2, + + ConfigurationNumber: 1, + ConfigurationStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + ConfigAttributes: (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED), + + MaxPowerConsumption: USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100) + }, + + CCI_Interface: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface}, + + InterfaceNumber: 0, + AlternateSetting: 0, + + TotalEndpoints: 1, + + Class: 0x02, + SubClass: 0x02, + Protocol: 0x01, + + InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + CDC_Functional_IntHeader: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), Type: 0x24}, + SubType: 0x00, + + Data: {0x01, 0x10} + }, + + CDC_Functional_CallManagement: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), Type: 0x24}, + SubType: 0x01, + + Data: {0x03, 0x01} + }, + + CDC_Functional_AbstractControlManagement: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)), Type: 0x24}, + SubType: 0x02, + + Data: {0x06} + }, + + CDC_Functional_Union: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), Type: 0x24}, + SubType: 0x06, + + Data: {0x00, 0x01} + }, + + ManagementEndpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM), + Attributes: EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + EndpointSize: CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0xFF + }, + + DCI_Interface: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface}, + + InterfaceNumber: 1, + AlternateSetting: 0, + + TotalEndpoints: 2, + + Class: 0x0A, + SubClass: 0x00, + Protocol: 0x00, + + InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + DataOutEndpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | CDC_RX_EPNUM), + Attributes: EP_TYPE_BULK, + EndpointSize: CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0x00 + }, + + DataInEndpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_TX_EPNUM), + Attributes: EP_TYPE_BULK, + EndpointSize: CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0x00 + } +}; + +/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests + * the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate + * via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(1), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG} +}; + +/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable + * form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(11), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"Dean Camera" +}; + +/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form, + * and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(19), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"LUFA USB-RS232 Demo" +}; + +/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see StdDescriptors.h + * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given + * to the USB library. When the device recieves a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function + * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the + * USB host. + */ +uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) +{ + const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8); + const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF); + + void* Address = NULL; + uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR; + + switch (DescriptorType) + { + case DTYPE_Device: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(DeviceDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Configuration: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t); + break; + case DTYPE_String: + switch (DescriptorNumber) + { + case 0x00: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(LanguageString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x01: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ManufacturerString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x02: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ProductString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size); + break; + } + + break; + } + + *DescriptorAddress = Address; + return Size; +} diff --git a/Demos/USBtoSerial/Descriptors.h b/Demos/USBtoSerial/Descriptors.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..bec5e40d4af --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/USBtoSerial/Descriptors.h @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Descriptors.c. + */ + +#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_ +#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + + #include + + /* Macros: */ + /** Macro to define a CDC class-specific functional descriptor. CDC functional descriptors have a + * uniform structure but variable sized data payloads, thus cannot be represented accurately by + * a single typedef struct. A macro is used instead so that functional descriptors can be created + * easily by specifying the size of the payload. This allows sizeof() to work correctly. + * + * \param DataSize Size in bytes of the CDC functional descriptor's data payload + */ + #define CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(DataSize) \ + struct \ + { \ + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; \ + uint8_t SubType; \ + uint8_t Data[DataSize]; \ + } + + /** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */ + #define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM 2 + + /** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host data IN endpoint. */ + #define CDC_TX_EPNUM 3 + + /** Endpoint number of the CDC host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */ + #define CDC_RX_EPNUM 4 + + /** Size in bytes of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */ + #define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE 8 + + /** Size in bytes of the CDC data IN and OUT endpoints. */ + #define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE 16 + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the + * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which + * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config; + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t CCI_Interface; + CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2) CDC_Functional_IntHeader; + CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2) CDC_Functional_CallManagement; + CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1) CDC_Functional_AbstractControlManagement; + CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2) CDC_Functional_Union; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t ManagementEndpoint; + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t DCI_Interface; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t DataOutEndpoint; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t DataInEndpoint; + } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) + ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/USBtoSerial/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/USBtoSerial/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..1eb8c5432ed --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/USBtoSerial/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - USB to Serial Device Demo" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek, +# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish, +# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene, +# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command , where is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command , where +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Namespace. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file . + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are +# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values +# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list; +# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which +# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous +# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE +# respectively. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin" + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to the search engine +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be +# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO diff --git a/Demos/USBtoSerial/LUFA USBtoSerial.inf b/Demos/USBtoSerial/LUFA USBtoSerial.inf new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..bd9c8bf1423 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/USBtoSerial/LUFA USBtoSerial.inf @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ +; Windows LUFA USB to Serial Setup File +; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation + +[Version] +Signature="$Windows NT$" +Class=Ports +ClassGuid={4D36E978-E325-11CE-BFC1-08002BE10318} +Provider=%COMPANY% +LayoutFile=layout.inf +DriverVer=06/06/2006,1.0.0.0 + +[Manufacturer] +%MFGNAME% = ManufName + +[DestinationDirs] +DefaultDestDir=12 + +[ManufName] +%Modem3% = Modem3, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204B + +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +; Windows 2000/XP Sections +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + +[Modem3.nt] +CopyFiles=USBModemCopyFileSection +AddReg=Modem3.nt.AddReg + +[USBModemCopyFileSection] +usbser.sys,,,0x20 + +[Modem3.nt.AddReg] +HKR,,DevLoader,,*ntkern +HKR,,NTMPDriver,,usbser.sys +HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"MsPorts.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider" + +[Modem3.nt.Services] +AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, DriverService + +[DriverService] +DisplayName=%SERVICE% +ServiceType=1 +StartType=3 +ErrorControl=1 +ServiceBinary=%12%\usbser.sys + +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +; String Definitions +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + +[Strings] +COMPANY="LUFA Library" +MFGNAME="Dean Camera" +Modem3="USB Virtual Serial Port" +SERVICE="USB Virtual Serial Port CDC Driver" \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Demos/USBtoSerial/RingBuff.c b/Demos/USBtoSerial/RingBuff.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..1f477f17ab4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/USBtoSerial/RingBuff.c @@ -0,0 +1,120 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#include "RingBuff.h" + +void Buffer_Initialize(RingBuff_t* Buffer) +{ + BUFF_ATOMIC_BLOCK + { + Buffer->InPtr = (RingBuff_Data_t*)&Buffer->Buffer; + Buffer->OutPtr = (RingBuff_Data_t*)&Buffer->Buffer; + Buffer->Elements = 0; + } +} + +void Buffer_StoreElement(RingBuff_t* Buffer, RingBuff_Data_t Data) +{ + BUFF_ATOMIC_BLOCK + { + #if defined(BUFF_DROPOLD) + if (Buffer->Elements == BUFF_LENGTH) + { + Buffer->OutPtr++; + + if (Buffer->OutPtr == &Buffer->Buffer[BUFF_LENGTH]) + Buffer->OutPtr = (RingBuff_Data_t*)&Buffer->Buffer; + } + else + { + Buffer->Elements++; + } + #elif defined(BUFF_DROPNEW) + if (Buffer->Elements == BUFF_LENGTH) + return; + + Buffer->Elements++; + #elif defined(BUFF_NODROPCHECK) + Buffer->Elements++; + #endif + + *(Buffer->InPtr) = Data; + Buffer->InPtr++; + + if (Buffer->InPtr == &Buffer->Buffer[BUFF_LENGTH]) + Buffer->InPtr = (RingBuff_Data_t*)&Buffer->Buffer; + } +} + +RingBuff_Data_t Buffer_GetElement(RingBuff_t* Buffer) +{ + RingBuff_Data_t BuffData; + + BUFF_ATOMIC_BLOCK + { +#if defined(BUFF_EMPTYRETURNSZERO) + if (!(Buffer->Elements)) + return 0; +#elif !defined(BUFF_NOEMPTYCHECK) + #error No empty buffer check behaviour specified. +#endif + + BuffData = *(Buffer->OutPtr); + + Buffer->OutPtr++; + Buffer->Elements--; + + if (Buffer->OutPtr == &Buffer->Buffer[BUFF_LENGTH]) + Buffer->OutPtr = (RingBuff_Data_t*)&Buffer->Buffer; + } + + return BuffData; +} + +#if defined(BUFF_USEPEEK) +RingBuff_Data_t Buffer_PeekElement(const RingBuff_t* Buffer) +{ + RingBuff_Data_t BuffData; + + BUFF_ATOMIC_BLOCK + { +#if defined(BUFF_EMPTYRETURNSZERO) + if (!(Buffer->Elements)) + return 0; +#elif !defined(BUFF_NOEMPTYCHECK) + #error No empty buffer check behaviour specified. +#endif + + BuffData = *(Buffer->OutPtr); + } + + return BuffData; +} +#endif diff --git a/Demos/USBtoSerial/RingBuff.h b/Demos/USBtoSerial/RingBuff.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..4b6bfde66aa --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/USBtoSerial/RingBuff.h @@ -0,0 +1,116 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/* Buffer Configuration: */ + /* Buffer length - select static size of created ringbuffers: */ + #define BUFF_STATICSIZE 128 // Set to the static ringbuffer size for all ringbuffers (place size after define) + + /* Volatile mode - uncomment to make buffers volatile, for use in ISRs, etc: */ + #define BUFF_VOLATILE // Uncomment to cause all ring buffers to become volatile (and atomic if multi-byte) in access + + /* Drop mode - select behaviour when Buffer_StoreElement called on a full buffer: */ + #define BUFF_DROPOLD // Uncomment to cause full ring buffers to drop the oldest character to make space when full + // #define BUFF_DROPNEW // Uncomment to cause full ring buffers to drop the new character when full + // #define BUFF_NODROPCHECK // Uncomment to ignore full ring buffer checks - checking left to user! + + /* Underflow behaviour - select behaviour when Buffer_GetElement is called with an empty ringbuffer: */ + //#define BUFF_EMPTYRETURNSZERO // Uncomment to return 0 when an empty ringbuffer is read + #define BUFF_NOEMPTYCHECK // Uncomment to disable checking of empty ringbuffers - checking left to user! + + /* Buffer storage type - set the datatype for the stored data */ + #define BUFF_DATATYPE uint8_t // Change to the data type that is going to be stored into the buffer + + /* Peek routine - uncomment to include the peek routine (fetches next byte without removing it from the buffer */ + //#define BUFF_USEPEEK + +#ifndef _RINGBUFF_H_ +#define _RINGBUFF_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + #include + + #include + + /* Defines and checks: */ + #if defined(BUFF_STATICSIZE) + #define BUFF_LENGTH BUFF_STATICSIZE + #else + #error No buffer length specified! + #endif + + #if !(defined(BUFF_DROPOLD) || defined(BUFF_DROPNEW) || defined(BUFF_NODROPCHECK)) + #error No buffer drop mode specified. + #endif + + #if !defined(BUFF_DATATYPE) + #error Ringbuffer storage data type not specified. + #endif + + #if defined(BUFF_VOLATILE) + #define BUFF_MODE volatile + #define BUFF_ATOMIC_BLOCK ATOMIC_BLOCK(ATOMIC_RESTORESTATE) + #else + #define BUFF_MODE + #define BUFF_ATOMIC_BLOCK + #endif + + #if (BUFF_STATICSIZE > LONG_MAX) + #define RingBuff_Elements_t uint64_t + #elif (BUFF_STATICSIZE > INT_MAX) + #define RingBuff_Elements_t uint32_t + #elif (BUFF_STATICSIZE > CHAR_MAX) + #define RingBuff_Elements_t uint16_t + #else + #define RingBuff_Elements_t uint8_t + #endif + + /* Type Defines: */ + typedef BUFF_DATATYPE RingBuff_Data_t; + + typedef BUFF_MODE struct + { + RingBuff_Data_t Buffer[BUFF_LENGTH]; + RingBuff_Data_t* InPtr; + RingBuff_Data_t* OutPtr; + RingBuff_Elements_t Elements; + } RingBuff_t; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void Buffer_Initialize(RingBuff_t* Buff); + void Buffer_StoreElement(RingBuff_t* Buffer, RingBuff_Data_t Data); + RingBuff_Data_t Buffer_GetElement(RingBuff_t* Buffer); + #if defined(BUFF_USEPEEK) + RingBuff_Data_t Buffer_PeekElement(const RingBuff_t* Buffer); + #endif + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.aps b/Demos/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.aps new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..2db4f97be65 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.aps @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +USBtoSerial30-Sep-2008 14:18:3930-Sep-2008 14:18:52241030-Sep-2008 14:18:3944, 14, 0, 589AVR GCCC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\USBtoSerial\falseR00R01R02R03R04R05R06R07R08R09R10R11R12R13R14R15R16R17R18R19R20R21R22R23R24R25R26R27R28R29R30R31Auto000Descriptors.cRingBuff.cUSBtoSerial.cDescriptors.hRingBuff.hUSBtoSerial.hmakefiledefaultYESmakefileatmega128111USBtoSerial.elfdefault\1-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enumsdefault1C:\WinAVR-20080512\bin\avr-gcc.exeC:\WinAVR-20080512\utils\bin\make.exe diff --git a/Demos/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.c b/Demos/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..7c06007a31a --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.c @@ -0,0 +1,390 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#include "USBtoSerial.h" + +/* Project Tags, for reading out using the ButtLoad project */ +BUTTLOADTAG(ProjName, "LUFA USB RS232 App"); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildTime, __TIME__); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildDate, __DATE__); +BUTTLOADTAG(LUFAVersion, "LUFA V" LUFA_VERSION_STRING); + +/* Scheduler Task List */ +TASK_LIST +{ + { Task: USB_USBTask , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, + { Task: CDC_Task , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, +}; + +/* Globals: */ +/** Contains the current baud rate and other settings of the virtual serial port. + * + * These values are set by the host via a class-specific request, and the physical USART should be reconfigured to match the + * new settings each time they are changed by the host. + */ +CDC_Line_Coding_t LineCoding = { BaudRateBPS: 9600, + CharFormat: OneStopBit, + ParityType: Parity_None, + DataBits: 8 }; + +/** Ring (circular) buffer to hold the RX data - data from the host to the attached device on the serial port. */ +RingBuff_t Rx_Buffer; + +/** Ring (circular) buffer to hold the TX data - data from the attached device on the serial port to the host. */ +RingBuff_t Tx_Buffer; + +/** Flag to indicate if the USART is currently transmitting data from the Rx_Buffer circular buffer. */ +volatile bool Transmitting = false; + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then + * starts the scheduler to run the application tasks. + */ +int main(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable Clock Division */ + SetSystemClockPrescaler(0); + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + LEDs_Init(); + ReconfigureUSART(); + + /* Ringbuffer Initialization */ + Buffer_Initialize(&Rx_Buffer); + Buffer_Initialize(&Tx_Buffer); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); + + /* Initialize Scheduler so that it can be used */ + Scheduler_Init(); + + /* Initialize USB Subsystem */ + USB_Init(); + + /* Scheduling - routine never returns, so put this last in the main function */ + Scheduler_Start(); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs and + * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Connect) +{ + /* Start USB management task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_RUN); + + /* Indicate USB enumerating */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBEnumerating); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via + * the status LEDs and stops the USB management and CDC management tasks. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Disconnect) +{ + /* Stop running CDC and USB management tasks */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(CDC_Task, TASK_STOP); + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_STOP); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host set the current configuration + * of the USB device after enumeration - the device endpoints are configured and the CDC management task started. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_ConfigurationChanged) +{ + /* Setup CDC Notification, Rx and Tx Endpoints */ + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_TX_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK, + ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_RX_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK, + ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + /* Indicate USB connected and ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady); + + /* Start CDC task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(CDC_Task, TASK_RUN); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event. This is used to catch standard and class specific + * control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the CDC control commands, + * which are all issued via the control endpoint), so that they can be handled appropriately for the application. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_UnhandledControlPacket) +{ + uint8_t* LineCodingData = (uint8_t*)&LineCoding; + + /* Process CDC specific control requests */ + switch (bRequest) + { + case REQ_GetLineEncoding: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + /* Acknowedge the SETUP packet, ready for data transfer */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Write the line coding data to the control endpoint */ + Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(LineCodingData, sizeof(LineCoding)); + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet or clear the host abort */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT(); + } + + break; + case REQ_SetLineEncoding: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + /* Acknowedge the SETUP packet, ready for data transfer */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Read the line coding data in from the host into the global struct */ + Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE(LineCodingData, sizeof(LineCoding)); + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to clear the last packet from the host */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + + /* Reconfigure the USART with the new settings */ + ReconfigureUSART(); + } + + break; + case REQ_SetControlLineState: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { +#if 0 + /* NOTE: Here you can read in the line state mask from the host, to get the current state of the output handshake + lines. The mask is read in from the wValue parameter, and can be masked against the CONTROL_LINE_OUT_* masks + to determine the RTS and DTR line states using the following code: + */ + + uint16_t wIndex = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(); + + // Do something with the given line states in wIndex +#endif + + /* Acknowedge the SETUP packet, ready for data transfer */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Send an empty packet to acknowedge the command */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + } +} + +/** Task to manage CDC data transmission and reception to and from the host, from and to the physical USART. */ +TASK(CDC_Task) +{ + if (USB_IsConnected) + { +#if 0 + /* NOTE: Here you can use the notification endpoint to send back line state changes to the host, for the special RS-232 + handshake signal lines (and some error states), via the CONTROL_LINE_IN_* masks and the following code: + */ + + USB_Notification_Header_t Notification = (USB_Notification_Header_t) + { + NotificationType: (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE), + Notification: NOTIF_SerialState, + wValue: 0, + wIndex: 0, + wLength: sizeof(uint16_t), + }; + + uint16_t LineStateMask; + + // Set LineStateMask here to a mask of CONTROL_LINE_IN_* masks to set the input handshake line states to send to the host + + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM); + Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&Notification, sizeof(Notification)); + Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&LineStateMask, sizeof(LineStateMask)); + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); +#endif + + /* Select the Serial Rx Endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_RX_EPNUM); + + if (Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed()) + { + /* Read the received data endpoint into the transmission buffer */ + while (Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint()) + { + /* Wait until the buffer has space for a new character */ + while (!((BUFF_STATICSIZE - Rx_Buffer.Elements))); + + /* Store each character from the endpoint */ + Buffer_StoreElement(&Rx_Buffer, Endpoint_Read_Byte()); + } + + /* Clear the endpoint buffer */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + } + + /* Check if Rx buffer contains data */ + if (Rx_Buffer.Elements) + { + /* Initiate the transmission of the buffer contents if USART idle */ + if (!(Transmitting)) + { + Transmitting = true; + Serial_TxByte(Buffer_GetElement(&Rx_Buffer)); + } + } + + /* Select the Serial Tx Endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_TX_EPNUM); + + /* Check if the Tx buffer contains anything to be sent to the host */ + if (Tx_Buffer.Elements) + { + /* Wait until Serial Tx Endpoint Ready for Read/Write */ + while (!(Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed())); + + /* Check before sending the data if the endpoint is completely full */ + bool IsFull = (Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint() == CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE); + + /* Write the transmission buffer contents to the received data endpoint */ + while (Tx_Buffer.Elements && (Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint() < CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE)) + Endpoint_Write_Byte(Buffer_GetElement(&Tx_Buffer)); + + /* Send the data */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + + /* If a full endpoint was sent, we need to send an empty packet afterwards to terminate the transfer */ + if (IsFull) + { + /* Wait until Serial Tx Endpoint Ready for Read/Write */ + while (!(Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed())); + + /* Send an empty packet to terminate the transfer */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + } + } + } +} + +/** ISR to handle the USART transmit complete interrupt, fired each time the USART has sent a character. This reloads the USART + * data register with the next byte from the Rx_Buffer circular buffer if a character is available, or stops the transmission if + * the buffer is currently empty. + */ +ISR(USART1_TX_vect, ISR_BLOCK) +{ + /* Send next character if available */ + if (Rx_Buffer.Elements) + UDR1 = Buffer_GetElement(&Rx_Buffer); + else + Transmitting = false; +} + +/** ISR to handle the USART receive complete interrupt, fired each time the USART has received a character. This stores the received + * character into the Tx_Buffer circular buffer for later transmission to the host. + */ +ISR(USART1_RX_vect, ISR_BLOCK) +{ + /* Character received, store it into the buffer */ + Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, UDR1); +} + +/** Function to manage status updates to the user. This is done via LEDs on the given board, if available, but may be changed to + * log to a serial port, or anything else that is suitable for status updates. + * + * \param CurrentStatus Current status of the system, from the USBtoSerial_StatusCodes_t enum + */ +void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus) +{ + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS; + + /* Set the LED mask to the appropriate LED mask based on the given status code */ + switch (CurrentStatus) + { + case Status_USBNotReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1); + break; + case Status_USBEnumerating: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2); + break; + case Status_USBReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4); + break; + } + + /* Set the board LEDs to the new LED mask */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); +} + +/** Reconfigures the USART to match the current serial port settings issued by the host as closely as possible. */ +void ReconfigureUSART(void) +{ + uint8_t ConfigMask = 0; + + /* Determine parity - non odd/even parity mode defaults to no parity */ + if (LineCoding.ParityType == Parity_Odd) + ConfigMask = ((1 << UPM11) | (1 << UPM10)); + else if (LineCoding.ParityType == Parity_Even) + ConfigMask = (1 << UPM11); + + /* Determine stop bits - 1.5 stop bits is set as 1 stop bit due to hardware limitations */ + if (LineCoding.CharFormat == TwoStopBits) + ConfigMask |= (1 << USBS1); + + /* Determine data size - 5, 6, 7, or 8 bits are supported */ + if (LineCoding.DataBits == 6) + ConfigMask |= (1 << UCSZ10); + else if (LineCoding.DataBits == 7) + ConfigMask |= (1 << UCSZ11); + else if (LineCoding.DataBits == 8) + ConfigMask |= ((1 << UCSZ11) | (1 << UCSZ10)); + + /* Enable double speed, gives better error percentages at 8MHz */ + UCSR1A = (1 << U2X1); + + /* Enable transmit and receive modules and interrupts */ + UCSR1B = ((1 << TXCIE1) | (1 << RXCIE1) | (1 << TXEN1) | (1 << RXEN1)); + + /* Set the USART mode to the mask generated by the Line Coding options */ + UCSR1C = ConfigMask; + + /* Set the USART baud rate register to the desired baud rate value */ + UBRR1 = SERIAL_2X_UBBRVAL((uint16_t)LineCoding.BaudRateBPS); +} diff --git a/Demos/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.h b/Demos/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..f363fa93f4f --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.h @@ -0,0 +1,192 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for USBtoSerial.c. + */ + +#ifndef _USB_SERIAL_H_ +#define _USB_SERIAL_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + + #include "Descriptors.h" + #include "RingBuff.h" + + #include // Library Version Information + #include // PROGMEM tags readable by the ButtLoad project + #include // USB Functionality + #include // USART driver + #include // LEDs driver + #include // Simple scheduler for task management + + /* Macros: */ + /** CDC Class specific request to get the current virtual serial port configuration settings. */ + #define REQ_GetLineEncoding 0x21 + + /** CDC Class specific request to set the current virtual serial port configuration settings. */ + #define REQ_SetLineEncoding 0x20 + + /** CDC Class specific request to set the current virtual serial port handshake line states. */ + #define REQ_SetControlLineState 0x22 + + /** Notification type constant for a change in the virtual serial port handshake line states, for + * use with a USB_Notification_Header_t notification structure when sent to the host via the CDC + * notification endpoint. + */ + #define NOTIF_SerialState 0x20 + + /** Mask for the DTR handshake line for use with the REQ_SetControlLineState class specific request + * from the host, to indicate that the DTR line state should be high. + */ + #define CONTROL_LINE_OUT_DTR (1 << 0) + + /** Mask for the RTS handshake line for use with the REQ_SetControlLineState class specific request + * from the host, to indicate that theRTS line state should be high. + */ + #define CONTROL_LINE_OUT_RTS (1 << 1) + + /** Mask for the DCD handshake line for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification + * from the device to the host, to indicate that the DCD line state is currently high. + */ + #define CONTROL_LINE_IN_DCD (1 << 0) + + /** Mask for the DSR handshake line for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification + * from the device to the host, to indicate that the DSR line state is currently high. + */ + #define CONTROL_LINE_IN_DSR (1 << 1) + + /** Mask for the BREAK handshake line for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification + * from the device to the host, to indicate that the BREAK line state is currently high. + */ + #define CONTROL_LINE_IN_BREAK (1 << 2) + + /** Mask for the RING handshake line for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification + * from the device to the host, to indicate that the RING line state is currently high. + */ + #define CONTROL_LINE_IN_RING (1 << 3) + + /** Mask for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification from the device to the host, + * to indicate that a framing error has ocurred on the virtual serial port. + */ + #define CONTROL_LINE_IN_FRAMEERROR (1 << 4) + + /** Mask for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification from the device to the host, + * to indicate that a parity error has ocurred on the virtual serial port. + */ + #define CONTROL_LINE_IN_PARITYERROR (1 << 5) + + /** Mask for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification from the device to the host, + * to indicate that a data overrun error has ocurred on the virtual serial port. + */ + #define CONTROL_LINE_IN_OVERRUNERROR (1 << 6) + + /* Event Handlers: */ + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Connect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Connect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Disconnect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Disconnect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_ConfigurationChanged event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_ConfigurationChanged); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_UnhandledControlPacket); + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the virtual serial port line encoding settings, for storing the current USART configuration + * as set by the host via a class specific request. + */ + typedef struct + { + uint32_t BaudRateBPS; /**< Baud rate of the virtual serial port, in bits per second */ + uint8_t CharFormat; /**< Character format of the virtual serial port, a value from the + * CDCDevice_CDC_LineCodingFormats_t enum + */ + uint8_t ParityType; /**< Parity setting of the virtual serial port, a value from the + * CDCDevice_LineCodingParity_t enum + */ + uint8_t DataBits; /**< Bits of data per charater of the virtual serial port */ + } CDC_Line_Coding_t; + + /** Type define for a CDC notification, sent to the host via the CDC notification endpoint to indicate a + * change in the device state asynchronously. + */ + typedef struct + { + uint8_t NotificationType; /**< Notification type, a mask of REQDIR_*, REQTYPE_* and REQREC_* constants + * from the library StdRequestType.h header + */ + uint8_t Notification; /**< Notification value, a NOTIF_* constant */ + uint16_t wValue; /**< Notification wValue, notification-specific */ + uint16_t wIndex; /**< Notification wIndex, notification-specific */ + uint16_t wLength; /**< Notification wLength, notification-specific */ + } USB_Notification_Header_t; + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible line encoding formats of a virtual serial port. */ + enum CDCDevice_CDC_LineCodingFormats_t + { + OneStopBit = 0, /**< Each frame contains one stop bit */ + OneAndAHalfStopBits = 1, /**< Each frame contains one and a half stop bits */ + TwoStopBits = 2, /**< Each frame contains two stop bits */ + }; + + /** Enum for the possible line encoding parity settings of a virtual serial port. */ + enum CDCDevice_LineCodingParity_t + { + Parity_None = 0, /**< No parity bit mode on each frame */ + Parity_Odd = 1, /**< Odd parity bit mode on each frame */ + Parity_Even = 2, /**< Even parity bit mode on each frame */ + Parity_Mark = 3, /**< Mark parity bit mode on each frame */ + Parity_Space = 4, /**< Space parity bit mode on each frame */ + }; + + /** Enum for the possible status codes for passing to the UpdateStatus() function. */ + enum USBtoSerial_StatusCodes_t + { + Status_USBNotReady = 0, /**< USB is not ready (disconnected from a USB host) */ + Status_USBEnumerating = 1, /**< USB interface is enumerating */ + Status_USBReady = 2, /**< USB interface is connected and ready */ + }; + + /* Tasks: */ + TASK(CDC_Task); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void ReconfigureUSART(void); + void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.txt b/Demos/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..992f00f472e --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.txt @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage USB to Serial Converter Demo (via CDC-ACM class) + * + * Communications Device Class demonstration application. + * This gives a simple reference application for implementing + * a USB to Serial converter using the CDC class. Sent and + * received data on the serial port is communicated to the USB + * host. + * + * After running this demo for the first time on a new computer, + * you will need to supply the .INF file located in this demo + * project's directory as the device's driver when running under + * Windows. This will enable Windows to use its inbuilt CDC drivers, + * negating the need for custom drivers for the device. Other + * Operating Systems should automatically use their own inbuilt + * CDC-ACM drivers. + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + *
USB Mode:Device
USB Class:Communications Device Class (CDC)
USB Subclass:Abstract Control Model (ACM)
Relevant Standards:USBIF CDC Class Standard
Usable Speeds:Full Speed Mode
+ */ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Demos/USBtoSerial/makefile b/Demos/USBtoSerial/makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..58c12b9ef0b --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/USBtoSerial/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,704 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# Denver Gingerich +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb1287 + + +# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# Typical values are: +# F_CPU = 1000000 +# F_CPU = 1843200 +# F_CPU = 2000000 +# F_CPU = 3686400 +# F_CPU = 4000000 +# F_CPU = 7372800 +# F_CPU = 8000000 +# F_CPU = 11059200 +# F_CPU = 14745600 +# F_CPU = 16000000 +# F_CPU = 18432000 +# F_CPU = 20000000 +F_CPU = 8000000 + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = USBtoSerial + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + Descriptors.c \ + RingBuff.c \ + ../../LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.c \ + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = ../../ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS +CDEFS += -DUSB_DEVICE_ONLY -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)" + + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20 +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd +# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500 +# +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf +MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) ) +FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr ) + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +checkhooks: build + @echo + @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events ------- + @$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \ + cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \ + echo "(None)" + @echo ----- End Unhooked LUFA Events ----- + +checklibmode: + @echo + @echo ----------- Library Mode ----------- + @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \ + | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \ + || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)." + @echo ------------------------------------ + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + copy $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom --debug 1 $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end + +clean_binary: + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + +clean_list: + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode begin \ +finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \ +clean clean_list clean_binary program debug \ +gdb-config doxygen dfu flip diff --git a/Demos/makefile b/Demos/makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..333519f2b4b --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,125 @@ +# +# LUFA Library +# Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. +# +# dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com +# www.fourwalledcubicle.com +# + +# Makefile to build all the LUFA Demos. Call with "make all" to +# rebuild all demos. + +# Projects are pre-cleaned before each one is built, to ensure any +# custom LUFA library build options are reflected in the compiled +# code. + +all: + make -C AudioInput clean + make -C AudioInput all + + make -C AudioOutput clean + make -C AudioOutput all + + make -C BluetoothHost clean + make -C BluetoothHost all + + make -C CDC clean + make -C CDC all + + make -C CDCHost clean + make -C CDCHost all + + make -C DualCDC clean + make -C DualCDC all + + make -C Joystick clean + make -C Joystick all + + make -C KeyboardMouse clean + make -C KeyboardMouse all + + make -C Keyboard clean + make -C Keyboard all + + make -C KeyboardFullInt clean + make -C KeyboardFullInt all + + make -C KeyboardViaInt clean + make -C KeyboardViaInt all + + make -C KeyboardHost clean + make -C KeyboardHost all + + make -C KeyboardHostWithParser clean + make -C KeyboardHostWithParser all + + make -C KeyboardHostViaInt clean + make -C KeyboardHostViaInt all + + make -C MassStorage clean + make -C MassStorage all + + make -C MassStorageHost clean + make -C MassStorageHost all + + make -C MIDI clean + make -C MIDI all + + make -C Mouse clean + make -C Mouse all + + make -C MouseFullInt clean + make -C MouseFullInt all + + make -C MouseViaInt clean + make -C MouseViaInt all + + make -C MouseHost clean + make -C MouseHost all + + make -C MouseHostWithParser clean + make -C MouseHostWithParser all + + make -C MouseHostViaInt clean + make -C MouseHostViaInt all + + make -C RNDISEthernet clean + make -C RNDISEthernet all + + make -C StillImageHost clean + make -C StillImageHost all + + make -C TestApp clean + make -C TestApp all + + make -C USBtoSerial clean + make -C USBtoSerial all + +%: + make -C AudioInput $@ + make -C AudioOutput $@ + make -C BluetoothHost $@ + make -C CDC $@ + make -C CDCHost $@ + make -C DualCDC $@ + make -C Joystick $@ + make -C KeyboardMouse $@ + make -C Keyboard $@ + make -C KeyboardFullInt $@ + make -C KeyboardViaInt $@ + make -C KeyboardHost $@ + make -C KeyboardHostWithParser $@ + make -C KeyboardHostViaInt $@ + make -C MassStorage $@ + make -C MassStorageHost $@ + make -C MIDI $@ + make -C Mouse $@ + make -C MouseFullInt $@ + make -C MouseViaInt $@ + make -C MouseHost $@ + make -C MouseHostWithParser $@ + make -C MouseHostViaInt $@ + make -C RNDISEthernet $@ + make -C StillImageHost $@ + make -C TestApp $@ + make -C USBtoSerial $@ \ No newline at end of file